472223 A7 __ B7___ 五、發明說明（I ) 本發明根據於日本提出申請之發明專利申請案2000-96620 號、2000-96614 號、2000-98095 號、2000-96542 號、 2000-96545號伋2000-96546 ’茲提及其內容謹供參考。 發明背景 本發明係有關顯示影像之顯示面板(disPl〇y Panel)之製 造方法及裝置。本發明復與可適用於顯示面板之製造及其 他方面之黏著片(adhesive sheet)貼合方法以及板(plates)貼合 方法有關。 背景技術說明 影像顯示面板（image display panel)有液晶顯示面板 (liquid crystal display panel)、電致發光顯示面板 (electroluminescence display panel)、將其組合之顯示面板等 種種面板。 此影像顯示面板固然有一層面板元件(panel element)構 成者，惟亦有積層複數層元件者。 例如，顯示彩色影像(color image)之顯示面板積層進行 不同顏色之影像顯示之面板元件予以構成。 進行全色影像顯示之液晶顯示面板有積層例如進行藍 色(blue)顯示之面板元件、進行綠色(green)顯示之面板元件 以及紅色(red)顯示之面板元件，形成可進行全色影像顯示 之顯示面板者。 無論如何，在如此積層複數面板元件，形成影像顯示 面板情形下，爲了進行企望之影像顯示，要求各毗鄰面板 元件互相貼合。亦即，爲了進行企望影像顯示，要求例如 4 本紙張尺度適用中國固家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） . ------------- --------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7___ 五、發明說明（Y ) 使各毗鄰面板元件彼此位置一致，予以貼合、密接貼合、 貼合而使其不致於發生皴摺等中至少一種。 又，一般說來，以使用黏著片貼合二片板者居多。在 積層複數片面板元件製造顯示面板方面，亦有經由黏著片 貼合紙鄰面板元件者。 在如此經由黏著片貼合面板元件及其他板情形下，係 〆-.......... 一卜......... * 使用、厘厘:§有分隔件(s逆arator)之黏著片，首先，對配置於 平板上第1板，貼附附去單面之分隔件之黏著片。此後， 除去剩下之單面之分隔件，貼附第2板於其上。 惟，在貼附黏著片於配置在平板上之第1板之際，氣 泡容易進入旦氣泡進入，即難以去取。爲了防止氣泡 滲入，固然考虞於撼壓之室(chamber)內進行貼附步驟，惟 、.…一— ................... ' J , ; ............ .· ，這Η#蔞座座本增高。 發明槪要 本發明係製造顯示影像之顯示面板之方法及裝置，其 目的在於提供可在要求緊鄰面板元件之狀態下貼合，獲得 僅進行良好影像顯示之顯示面板之製造方法及裝置。 尤詳而言之，本發明係積層用來形成顯示影像之顯示 面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板之方法及裝置，在緊鄰之 面板元件之位置g稱度對準狀態下鞋合，獲得僅進行良好 影像顯示之顯示面板之製造方法及裝置。 又，本發明係積層用以形成顯示影像之顯示面板之面 板元件，製造顯示面板之方法及裝置，其目的在於提控可 自緊鄰之面板元件間脫瑪，使二者密接，在無皺紋等狀態 ------ … .........................'、....乂：^·〆， ____:-':.-.'.二.·'， 5 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . ------------i -----1 I I 訂·------I , (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _ B7__ 五、發明說明（勺） 下貼合獲得僅進行良好影像顯示之顯示面板之顯示面板製 造方法及裝置。 又，本發明係積層用以形成顯示影像之顯示面板之面 板元件，製造顯示面板之方法及裝置，其目的在於提供可 強固貼合緊鄰之面板元件，長期穩定地進行良好影像顯示 之顯示面板製造方法及裝置。 又，本發明係可適用於顯示面板製造及其他之黏著片 貼合方法及板貼合方法，其目的亦在於提供可|P制氣泡.滲 Λ，將黏著片貼合於板之方法，以及可抑制氣泡摻入，經 由黏著片將板等貼合之方法。 本發明碁本上提供如次自第1至第4類型之顯示面板 製造方法，並進一步提供顯示面板之製造裝置。亦就顯示 面板製造裝置提供後文說明之裝置。本發明復提供如次第 1至第3類型之黏著片貼合方法及第1至第3類型之板貼 合方法。 (1)顯示面板之製造方法 (1-1)第1類型之顯示面板製造方法 一種顯示面板製造方法，其係製造顯示影像之顯示面 板之方法，包括以下步驟： 面板相步驟，其使分別包含至少一顯示層之第1面板 元件及第2面板元件對準而相對向；以及 面板貼合步驟，其經由黏接材料，自起點部位依序貼 合對準之前述第1面板元件及前述第2面板元件。 (1-2)第2類型之顯示面板之製造方法 6 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 丨---I----訂---------線 472223 A7 五、發明說明（ —麵示砸之製造方法，其觸造輯影像之顯示 面板之方法，包括以下步驟； 使面板相同向步驟，其使分別包含至少〜顯示層之第 1面板元件及第2面板元件相對向； 面板貼合步驟，其經由未硬化之黏接材料貼合前述第 1面板元件及前述第2面板元件： 面板對準步驟，其相對移動貼合之前述第1及第2面 板元件，使二面板元件對準；以及 黏接材料硬化步驟，其在前述面板對準步驟之後，使 前述黏接材料硬化。 ^ (1-3)第類型之顯示面板製造方法 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係製造顯示影像之顯示 面板之方法，包括以下步驟： 黏接材料設置步驟，其將黏接材料設於第1及第2面 板元件中至少一面板元件上； 相對向步驟，其使前述第1及第2面板元件彼此位置 一致而相對向； 第1壓接步驟，其在彼此位置一致之前述第1與第2 面板元件之間介有前述黏接材料狀態下，在第1條件下互 相壓接；以及 第2壓接步驟，其於前述第1壓接步驟後，在異於前 述第1條件之第2條件下，使前述第1與第2面板元件互 相壓接。 (1-4)第4類型之顯示面板之製造方法 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝--------訂---------線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 _______B7________ 五、發明說明（< ) 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係製造顯示影像之方法 包含以下步驟： (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 第1面板元件保持步驟，其保持第1面板元件於第1 平台； 第2面板元件保持步驟，其保持第2面板元件於第2 平台； 相對向步驟，其使保持於前述第1及第2平台之前述 第1及第2面板元件相對向； 位置一致步驟，其使前述第1與第2面板元件彼此位 置一致； 黏接材設置步驟，其將黏接材料設置於前述第1及 第2面板元件中至少一面板元件上； 第1壓接步驟，其在彼此位置一致，保持於前述第i 及第2平台之前述第1及第2面板元件介有前述黏接材料 狀態下，並且，在第1條件下，夾在前述第1與第2平台 間，互相壓接；以及 第2壓接步驟，其在前述第1壓接步驟後，前述第1 與第2面板元件間介有前述黏接材料狀態下，並且，在異 於即述第1條件之第2條件下，夾在前述第1與第2平台 間，互相壓接。 (2)顯示面板之製造裝置 一種顯示面板之製造裝置，其係製造顯示影像之顯示 面板之裝置，具備： 第1平台，其用來保持一面板元件； 8 本紙張尺度適用中關家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297 ---- ~ 472223 A7 _B7___ 五、發明說明（b ) 第2平台，其用來保持另一面板元件；以及 平台驅動裝置，其用來使前述第1及第2平台之此等 面板元件保持面相對向，相對接近分離； 前述第1及第2平台中至少一平台具備設有面板元件 保持面之彈性墊，同時，該面板元件保持面爲成凸曲面狀 之面； 前述平台驅動裝置在使前述第1與第2平台相對接近 時，在第1加壓力下，將保持於前述第1平台之前述面板 元件與保持於前述第2平台上之前述面板元件互相壓接， 進一步在較該第1加力大之第2—定加壓力下壓接。 (3)黏著片之貼合方法 (3-1)第1類型之黏著片貼合方法 一種黏著片之板貼合方法，包括以下步驟： 板配置步驟，其將板配置於既定位置； 定位步驟，其使既定方向之前述面板之一端與具有貫 通孔之黏著片之一端互相定住；以及 貼合步驟’其一面保持前述預定之前述黏著片之另一 端遠離前述板’一面使前述黏著片自此前述一端，朝向前 述另一端，貼合於前述板。 (3-2)第2類型之黏著片貼合方法 一種黏著片貼合方法，包括以下步驟： 板配置步驟，其將板配置於既定位置； 定位步驟’其使既定方向之前述板之一端以及具有貫 通孔，捲成圓筒狀之黏著片之一端互相定位；以及 9 尺度適用中國國家標準（CNSXA4規格（21〇 X 297公髮)- -----------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7 _ 五、發明說明（1 ) 貼合步驟，其自前述既定方向之前述板之前述一端朝 向另一端，使捲成前述圓筒狀之黏著片滾動於該板上，藉 此，將該黏著片貼合於該板上； (3-3)第3類型之黏著片貼合方法，包含以下步驟： 黏著片準備步驟，其準備黏著片，此黏著片於一面上 具有槽，此槽之至少一端形成呈黏著片之一邊； 黏著片貼附步驟’其在形成前述槽之前述面對向板狀 態下，將前述黏著片貼附於該板；以及 壓力施加步驟，其在前述黏著片貼附於前述板狀態下 ，施加壓力於該黏著片。 ⑷板貼合方法 (4-1)第1類型之板貼合方法 一種經由黏著片將第1板與第2板貼合之方法，包括 以下步驟： 第1板配置步驟，其將第1板配置於既定位置； 定位步驟’其使既定方向之前述第1板之一端與具有 貫通孔之黏著片之一端互相定位； 黏著片貼附步驟’其一面保持前述預先方向之前述黏 著片另一端遠離前述第1板，一面自前述一端向前述另一 端，將該黏著片貼附於前述第1板；以及 第2板貼附步驟’其將第2板貼附於前述黏著片上。 (4-2)第2類型之板貼合方法 一種經由黏著片將第1板與第2板貼合之方法，包括 以下步驟： 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公爱） - ----- ----I Ϊ ---I I I I I --------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 --—_ _____B7__ 五、發明說明（χ ) 第1板配置步驟，其將第1板配置於既定位置； 定位步驟，其將既定方向之前述第1板之一端與具有 貫通孔，捲成圓筒狀之黏著片〜端定位； 黏著片貼合步驟’其自前述既定方向之前述第1板之 前述一端朝向另一端，使捲成前述圓筒狀之黏著片滾動於 該第1板上，藉此，將前述黏著片貼合於前述第丨板上； 以及 第2板貼附步驟’其將第2板貼附於前述黏著片上。 (4-3)第3類型之板貼合方法 一種經由黏著片將第1板與第2板貼合方法，包括以 下步驟： ·/ 黏著片準備步驟’其準備黏著片，此黏著片於一面上 具有槽，此槽之至少一端形成至黏著片之一邊； 黏著片貼附步驟，其在形成前述槽之前述面對面板狀 態下，將黏著片貼附於第1板上； 第2板貼附步驟，其將第2板貼附於前述黏著片上； 以及 加壓步驟，其在至少前述黏著片貼附於前述第1板狀 態下，施加壓力於該黏著片。 由以下參照附圖所作本發明詳細說明，本發明之上述 及其他目的、特點、態樣和優點將更加瞭然。 圖式之簡蚩說明 第1圖係待製造液晶顯示面板之一例子之槪略側視圖 11 ----------------------訂---------線— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 _B7_^ 五、發明說明（1 ) 第2圖係顯示用本製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之一 製造裝置例之槪略構造之圖式。 第3圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之另 一製造裝置例之槪略構造之圖式。 第4圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之再 另一製造裝置例之槪略之構造圖。 第5圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之再 另一製造裝置例之槪略構造之圖式。 第6圖係自上方俯視第2圖所示製造裝置中保持於第 1、第2平台之吸附台之第1、第2面板元件之圖式。 第7 _係自上方俯視各面板元件互相對準位置之狀態 之圖式。 第8圖係用來說明第2圖所示面板製造裝置之一液晶 顯示面板製程例之部分(1)至(4)之圖式。 第9圖係用來說明第8所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至(8)之 圖示。 第10圖係用來說明藉第3圖所示面板製造裝置製造液 晶顯示面板之一製程例（1)至(7)之圖式。 第11圖係用來說明藉第4圖所示面板製造裝置製造液 晶顯示面板之一製程例(1)至(7)之圖式。 第12圖係用來說明藉著第5圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(5)之圖式。 第13圖用來說明第12圖所示步驟之後續步驟(6)至(7) 之圖式。 12 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） _ ----------------------1^ --------· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明（β ) 第14(A)圖係顯示於第2圖所示顯示面板製造裝置，第 14(B)圖係顯示於第3圖所示顯示面板製造裝置，第14(C) 圖係顯示於第4圖所示顯示面板製造裝置，第14(D)圖係顯 示於第5圖所示顯示面板製造裝置，設置減壓室及對該室 內部排氣減壓之顯示面板裝置槪略構造之圖式。 第15圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之再 另一製造裝置例之槪略配置之圖式。 第16圖係用來說明藉第15圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式。 第17圖係用來說明第16圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至 (7)之圖式。/ 第18圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之再 另一製造裝置例之圖式。 第19圖係用來說明藉第18圖所示面板製造裝置製程 液晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式。 第20圖係用來說明第19圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至 (9)之圖式。 第21圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之再 另一製造裝置例之槪略構造之圖式。 第22圖係自上方俯視吸附保持另一面板元件狀態之第 2平台之圖式。 第23圖係用來說明藉第21圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式。 第24圖係顯示用來製造第23圖所示步驟之後續步驟 13 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . ------------i ---1 I---^ . I------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明（1丨） (5)至(8)之圖式。 第25圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之再 另一製造裝置例之槪略構造之圖式。 第26圖係用來說明藉第25圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式。 第27圖係用來說明第26圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至 (8)之圖式。 第28圖係用來說明第27圖所示步驟之後續步驟(9)至 (11)之圖式。 第29圖係顯示於第25圖示顯示面板製造裝置設置減 壓室以及將該室內部排氣減壓之排氣裝置之顯示面板製造 裝置之槪略構造之圖式。 第30圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之再 一另一製造裝置例之槪略構造之圖式。 第31圖係用來說明藉第30圖所示面板製造裝置製液 晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式。 第32圖係用來說明第31圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至 (8)之圖式。 第33圖係顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之再 另一製造裝置例之圖式。 第34圖係用來說明藉第33圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式。 第35類係用來明第34圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至(7) 之圖式。 14 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)aI^ (210 X 297公釐) " ~ ---------------------訂---------線； (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7_ 五、發明說明（β) 第36圖係另一液晶顯示元件之另一例子之槪略剖視圖 〇 第37圖係用來將第36圖之液晶顯示元件之液晶單元 與偏光板貼合之設有貫通孔之黏著片之立體圖。 第38圖係用來貼附第37圖之黏著片於液晶單元 _____........、 (liqcid crystal cell)之裝置之剖視圖。 第39圖係顯示於黏著片未設有貫通孔情形下，使用第 ..... ............................. 38圖之貼附裝置貼附黏著片於液晶單元之際產生氣泡情形 之剖視圖。 第40圖係將圓筒狀黏著片貼合於液晶單元情形之立體 圖。 .1 第41(a)圖係沿既定方向設置槽之黏著片之立體圖，第 41(b)圖係將槽設成格子狀之黏著片之立體圖，第41(c)圖係 槽之放大剖視圖。 第42圖係顯示形成槽於黏著片之一裝置例之立體圖。 第43圖係暫時將第41(a)圖之黏著片貼附於液晶單元 之裝置之剖視圖。 第44圖係經由設置槽之黏著片貼合液晶單元與偏光板 之製程圖。 較佳窨施例之說明 本發明較佳實施形態中一顯示面板之製造方法包括以 下步驟： 相面對步驟，其使分別包含至少一顯示層之第1面板 元件與第2面板元件彼此對準、相對向；以及 15 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)Ai^格（210 X 297公釐） '— ---------------------訂---------纔 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7_ 五、發明說明（4) 面板貼合步驟，其經由黏著材料，自起點部位，依序 貼合對準之前述第1面板元件與前述第2面板元件。 前述面板相面對步驟可包含： 保持前述第1面板元件對準第1平台之步驟，以及 保持前述第2面板元件對準第2平台之步驟。 又，前述面板相面對步驟可進一步包括在保持於前述 第1平台上之前述第1面板元件和保持於前述第2平台上 之前述第2面板元件中至少一方上設前述黏著材料之步驟 〇 於此情形下，前述面板相面對步驟亦可進一步包括移 動前述第1平台和前述第2平台中至少其一方，經由黏著 7 材料，使前述第1面板元件與前述第2面板元件相對向之 步驟。 前述面板貼合步驟之前述第1及第2面板元件之貼合 可例如經由前述第1及第2面板元件，於前述起點部位， 將壓緊構件壓在前述第1平台上，並且，相對於前述第1 平台，移動該壓緊構件，藉此來進行。 於此情形下，在前述第1面板元件與第2面板元件貼 合中，相對於前述第1平台移動前述壓緊構件之際，亦可 使前述第.2面板元件與前述第2平台分離。 又，前述面板貼合步驟亦可包括： 面板分離步驟，使對準而重疊之第1面板元件和第2 面板元件至少局部分離； 設置前述黏著材料於分離之前述第1與第2面板元件 16 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I 1 -----訂•丨 ---- 472223 A7 _ B7___ 五、發明說明（沖） 間之步驟；以及 分離面板貼合步驟，其經由前述黏著材料，自前述起 點部位，依序將分離之前述第1與第2面板元件貼合。 於此情形下，在前述面板分離步驟中，較佳地，可再 現前述第1及第2面板元件對準重疊之狀態，使該第1與 第2面板元件至少局部分離。 又，於前述面板分離步驟中，可例如於前述起點部位 近傍保持前述第1與第2面板元件處於重疊狀態而使第1 與第2面板元件分離。 於此情形下，前述第1與第2面板元件重疊狀弋2保 持可使用例如分別形成於該第1及第2面板元件之貫通孔 ·/ 來進行。 前述面板分離步驟中前述第1與第2面板元件之至少 局部分離例如在前述第2面板元件保持於具有凸曲面狀面 板保持面之保持構件之狀態下進行，前述分離面板貼合步 驟中前述第1與第2面板元件之貼合可例如藉前述保持構 件將保持於前述保持構件之前述第2面板元件壓緊於前述 第1面板元件來進行。 總之，前述面板貼合步驟中前述第1與第2面板元件 之貼合可例示於前述起點部位，使該第1及第2面板元件 中一面板元件符合一面板元件壓緊來開始，並且藉由自前 述起點部位逐漸擴大壓緊區域來進行之情形。 於此情形下，可使用具有凸曲面狀壓緊面之彈性墊， 使前述一面板元件壓緊前述另一面板元件。 17 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） · --------------I --------訂---------線' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____B7 _ 五、發明說明（β ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 於此情形下，較佳地，前述彈性墊由彈性常數爲6〇Kg f/cm2〜200Kg f/cm2之彈性體構成。又’較佳地，前述彈 性墊之前述壓緊面具有2000mm〜5000mm之曲率半徑。 不管如何，前述起點部位可舉前述第1面板元件及前 述第2面板元件之端部或前述第1面板元件及前述第2面 板元件之中央部作爲代表例。 又，不管如何，較佳地，前述面板貼合步驟中前述第 1與第2面板元件之貼合於減壓環境氣氛中進行。 可例示13pa〜14pa作爲減壓環境氣氛壓力。 本發明較佳實施態樣中另一顯示面板之製造方法包括 以下步驟：., 面板相面對步驟，其使分別包含至少一顯示層之第1 面板元件與第2面皮元件相面對； 面板貼合步驟，其經由未硬化之黏著材料將前述第1 面板元件與前述第2面板元件貼合； 對準步驟，其使貼合之前述第1與第2面板元件相對 移動，對準二面之位置；以及 黏著材料硬化步驟，其在前述面板對準步驟後，使前 述黏著材料硬化。 於前述面板貼合步驟中，可以經由前述黏著材料，自 起點部位依序貼合前述第1面板元件和前述第2面板元件 作爲代表。 於此情形下，較佳地，在前述第1面板元件與前述第 2面板元件貼合之際，擴張前述黏著材料。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 ____B7___ 五、發明說明（力） 復可舉前述第1面板元件及前述第2面板元件之端部 作爲前述起點部位之代表例。 前述面板貼合步驟中前述第1與第2面板元件之貼合 可藉由將前述第2面板元件保持於具有凸曲面狀之面板保 持面之保持構件，藉前述保持構件將保持於前述保持構件 之前述第2面板元件壓緊於第1面板元件來進行。 無論如何，前述面板相面對步驟可包括以下步驟： 使前述第1面板元件對準，保持於第1平台之步驟； 使前述第2面板元件對準，保持於第2平台之步驟； 以及 移動前p第1平台和前述第2平台中至少一方，使前 述第1面板元件與前述第2面板元件相面對之步驟。 復可於前述面板貼合步驟中前述第1與第2面板元件 貼合之際，使前述第2面板元件與前述第2平台分離。 無論如何，可採用例如光硬化性之黏著材料作爲前述 黏著材料，於此情形下，可在前述黏著材料硬化步驟中， 將光照射於該黏著材料。 無論如何，較佳地，前述面板貼合步驟於減壓氣氛中 進行。 以下參照圖式，依序就以上說明之實施態樣和本發明 其他實施態樣等加以說明。 且，於以下說明和圖式中，固然儘可能使用相同參考 符號於實質上相同之構件、部分等，惟亦有相同符號標示 不同構件、部分之情形。因此，以下說明擬由與圖式有關 19 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . — — illlllllll — - I I I I I I I --------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _ ————_B7______ 五、發明說明（q) 之說明部分實質理解。 〔A〕與第1至第丨4(D)圖有關之顯示面板之製造方法 及裝置 與第1至第14(D)有關而加以說明之顯示面板之製造方 法及裝置係根據如次(A-1)類型〜（A-4)類型之顯示面板製造 方法及裝置之1或2以上而提供者。 〔A-1〕 (A-1)類型之顯示面板製造方法 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影 像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，包括以下步 驟： .； 使第1面板元件對準，保持於第1平台之步驟； 使第2面板元件對準，保持於第2平台之步驟； 設置黏著材料於第1及第2面板元件之可互相貼合面 之至少一面之步驟；以及 移動保持第1面板元件之第1平台和保持第2平台之 第2平台中至少一方，使二面板元件相面對，同時，重疊 該二面板元件之預定端部，保持於該重疊狀態之步驟；以 及 依序自保持前述重疊狀態之端部，以前述黏著材料’ 全面貼合二面板元件之步驟。 於此顯示裝置製造方法之二面板元件貼合步驟中’可 例如使用將二面板元件壓緊於第1平台之壓緊構件’藉由 一面維持以該壓緊構件壓緊二面板元件之狀態’一面相對 20 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I I I I------- . — I I---—訂. — — — — — I I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____ B7 _ 五、發明說明（β ) 於該壓緊構件移動第1平台來進行。 於此情形下，該壓緊構件可兼作壓緊保持例如重疊之 二面板元件之端部於第1平台之裝置。當然，用於保持步 驟之端部保持裝置可設置成有別於該壓緊構件。 無論如何，此壓緊構件採用具有由凸曲面構成之面板 元件壓緊面者，於前述貼合步驟中，可相對於面板元件轉 動面板元件。藉此可平穩進行貼合步驟。 具有由凸曲面構成之面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件代表 例固然係截面圓形之壓輥，惟亦可利用具有自側面觀察呈 扇形之面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件等。在使用截面圖形之 壓輥情形下/爲了防止因該壓輥壓緊而於面板元件發生皺 紋，亦可使用中央部較二端部直徑小之所謂倒冠型壓輥。 可例如揭示如次方法作爲使用壓緊構件之顯示面板之 製造方法。 亦即，於移動保持第1面板元件之第1平台和保持第 2面板元件之第2平台中至少一方，使二面板元件相面對 ，同時重疊該二面板元件之預定端，保持其處於該重疊狀 態之保持步驟中，藉壓緊構件壓緊第1平台，將該二面板 元件之重疊保持於該重疊狀態。 並且，於藉前述黏著材料，自保持二面板元件處於該 重疊狀態之端部，依序將其全面貼合之貼合步驟中，一面 維持藉該壓緊構件壓緊二面板元件端部之第1平台於藉該 壓緊構件壓緊面板元件之狀態，一面使該壓緊構件與第2 平台相對移動，自第2平台拉出第2面板元件，藉前述黏 21 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇χ 297公髮） ' I-------1 I I I I ------I 1 ^ ------- ---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____B7___ __ 五、發明說明) 著材料，依序於第1平台上全面貼合二面板元件。 於此方法中，在採用具有由凸曲面之兩板元件壓緊面 者作爲壓緊構件時，可於貼合步驟中，使該兩板元件壓緊 面相對於面板元件轉動。藉此，可平穩貼合二面板元件。 無論如何，在保持第2面板元件於第2平台之步驟中 ，爲求易於進行此後步驟之保持第1與第2面板元件之經 重疊預定端部於該重疊狀態之步驟’可在二面板元件之預 定端部重疊而保持於該重疊狀態時第2面板元件端部露出 第6平台狀態下，保持於該第2平台。 於前述任一種顯示面板製造方法中’利用第1及第2 平台對第1 .及第2面板元件所作之保持固然不限於此’惟 可舉經由設於平台之吸氣孔吸引保持面板元之情形作爲代 表例。 又，於前述任一製造方法中，藉由第1與第2面板元 件之互相對準位置之種種方法來進行。例如使用本身周知 之基板、面板對準方法來進行。 例如揭示如次方法作爲對準方法° 首先，預先分別於第1、第2平台設置定位對準標記 ，俾在第1、第2面板元件高精度對準狀態下’進行稍後 二面板元件重疊端部之保持步驟和貼合步驟。復預先於第 1面板元件設置可與第1平台之對準標記一致之對準標記 ，於第2面板元件設置可與第2平台之對準標記一致之對 準標記。 並且， 22 * 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 / ---I I — — — — —---· I I I ---—訂 -------1 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____B7____ 五、發明說明（/) (al)於各平台上配置對應之面板元件，一面目視觀察或 以攝影機觀察該平台與面板元件之對準標記，一面藉由手操 作移動，對準該面板元件之位置。 或者， (M)於各平台上或其上方配置對應之面板元件,一面以 攝影機觀察該平台與面板元件之對準標記，一面藉Χ-Υ-Θ 驅動裝置驅動面板元件，將其對準。可在將面板元件配置 於平台上方，對準位置時，於對準後，載置該面板元件於 平台上。 或者可例示如次方法。亦即，於平台上設置可進行X- Y-0驅動之面板元件保持部，保持預先設置對準標記之面 ·/ 板元件於該保持部，一面以攝影機觀察該面板元件之對準 標記，一面藉X-Υ-β驅動裝置移動該保持部，藉此進行面 板元件之對準。於此情形下，進行面板元件之對準，俾在 第1、第2面板元件高精度位置狀態下，實施稍後二面板 元件重疊之端部之保持步驟及貼合步驟。 無論如何，利用Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置所作之對準固然可手 動操作Χ-Υ-0驅動置來進行，惟亦可根據攝影機檢測出之 標記資訊（例如其位置資訊等），控制Χ-Υ-Θ驅動置動作 ，俾面板元件之對準來進行。於後者情形下，可利用基板 、面板等之對準用影像處理法。 且，無庸贅言，X-Υ-θ驅動裝置係可使物體沿方向X ，沿與其垂直之方法Y移動，同時繞垂直於X-Y平面之軸 轉動之裝置。 23 III-----III---------訂---------' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） 472223 A7 ___B7______ 五、發明說明（4) 前述對準標記就液晶標記（liquid crystal mark)、電 致發光標記（electroluminescence mark)而言，係藉由通電 發光者。 又，就在第1與第2面板元件之可互相貼合之面中至 少一面設置黏著材料之歩驟而言，例如有預先黏著於面板 元件面，並且自表面尙以保護片覆蓋之雙面黏著片乃至黏 著片（此片可爲膠帶狀）除去該保護片，露出黏著面之步 驟，或藉由手操作或藉黏著材塗覆裝置塗覆黏著材料於面 板顯示元件面之步驟。黏著材之設置面爲不發生障礙之任 意面。在藉由塗覆設置情形下，固然可全面或塗覆於二面 板元件中一面板元件，惟配置於至少一面板元件之貼合開 */ 始部或其他適當部分，進行其貼合，同時擴張於二面板元 件之間。 設置黏著材料之步驟於重疊二面板元件之預定端部之 前實施。只要於此端部重疊前無障礙，即可在任一階段實 施。 且在待積層之面板元件爲3個以上時，可就第3個以 後之各面板元件，將可藉由前述貼合步驟貼合之面板元件 視爲前述第1面板元件，同時將次一待貼合之面板元件視 爲前述第2面板元件，實質上反覆進行前述各步驟，於業 已貼合之面板元件上一片片貼合次一面板元件。 (A-1)類型之顯示面板之製造裝置 可舉如次裝置作爲以上所說明(A-1)類型之可實施顯示 面板之製造方法之裝置代表例。 24 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______B7____ —____ 五、發明說明（〆） 亦即，一種顯示面板之製造裝置’其係積層用來形成 顯示影像之顯示面板之面板元件之製造方法，具備： 第一平台，其用來保持第1面板元件； 用來使第1面板元件對準於第1平台上之裝置； 第2平台，其用來相對於第1平台配置成既定位置關 係，保持第2面板元件； 用來將第2面板元件之對準於第2平台上之裝置； 第1驅動裝置，其使分別對準位置、保持於第1及第 2平台上之第1與第2面板元件相面對，同時，相對移動 第1及第2平台，俾該二面板元件之預定端部重疊； 壓緊構|牛，其將分別保持於第1及第2平台上’前述 預端部重疊之二面板元件之該端部壓緊保持於第1平台； 以及 第2驅動裝置，其一面維持以前述壓緊構件壓緊二面 板元件端部之第1平台處於利用該壓緊構件壓緊面板元件 之狀態，並且，一面自第2平台拉出第2面板元件，相對 移動壓緊構件及第2平台，俾在前述壓緊構件壓緊下，依 序於第1平台上貼合二面板元件。 於此裝置中，壓緊構件亦係具有由凸曲面構成之面板 元件壓緊面者，於利用該壓緊構件依序在第1平台上貼合 二面板元件中’採用該面板元件壓緊面可相對於面板元件 轉動者。 具有电S座面構處之稱盤忠件喔麗頭之麗緊構件代.奏 例固然係截面圓形之壓輥，惟亦可利用具有側視呈扇形之 25 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇χ297公釐） · — —— — — — — — — —------I I I I I ^ ·111!1111 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _________ 五、發明說明（A) 面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件等。在使用截面圓形之壓輥情 形下’爲了防止因該壓輥壓緊而於面板元件發生皴紋，亦 可使用中央部直徑較二端部直徑小之所謂倒冠型壓輥。 根據此製造裝置，藉對準裝置對準位置，保持第1面 板元件於第1平台上，保持第2面板元件於第2平台上。 復於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面之至少一面 上設有黏接材料。 此後，藉第1驅動裝置相對移動第1與第2平台，使 二面板元件相面對，同時重疊二面板元件之預定端部。 以壓緊構件保持此重疊端部於第1平台上。 此後，p由以第2驅動裝置使第1平台、第2平台與 壓緊構件相對移動，一面維持利用該壓緊構件壓緊面板元 件狀態，並一面自第2平台拉出第2面板元件，一面在壓 緊構件壓緊下，藉前述黏著材料，於第1平台上依序貼合 二面板元件。 第1第2平台包含用來保持面板元件之裝置。此保持 裝置固然不限於此，惟，舉例來說，可例如爲設於平台， 連接於排氣裝置之面板元件吸附用吸氣孔。 黏著材料之設置可如同顯示面板製造方法中所說明設 置。此顯示面板製造裝置亦可包含黏著材料塗覆裝置。 將各面板元件之對準對應平台之裝置可例如如次所示 〇 (an 爲了在第1、第2面板元件高精度對準位置狀態下進 26 I--------------I----—訂 — 丨 - - ---- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ' 472223 A7 _ B7 ____ 五、發明說明（对） 行爾後二面板元件重疊端部之保持和二面板元件之貼合’ 於第1、第2各個平台上設置供定位之對準標記。 利用此對準標記，可如前述顯示面板製造方法之對準方 法例(a)所述，使面板元件對準各平台。 (M’)係對準裝置,其包括(al’)所述各平台上之對準標記， 以及如前述顯示面板製造方法之對準方法例(b)所述，用來於 平台上或其上方，將待保持於該平台之面板元件之對準之 對準標記檢測攝影機以及X-Υ-θ驅動裝置，或根據來自攝 影機之對準標記資訊（例如其位置資訊），控制Χ-Υ-0驅 動裝置之動作，俾對準面板元件位置之控制部。 又，亦可例示如次對準裝置。亦即，其係一種對準裝 置，包括設於平台之面板元件保持部、驅動該保持部之X-Y-0驅動裝置、檢測保持於保持部之面板元件之對準標記 攝影機，以及根據來自該攝影機之對準標記資訊，控制χ_ Y-0驅動裝置之動作，俾對準面板元件之位置之控制部。 前述第1驅動裝置與第2驅動裝置可配置成一部分共 通。復且，其中一方可爲另一方之一部分。 且’待貼合之面板元件有3個以上時，可使用前述貼 合所得之貼合面板元件作爲待互相貼合之二面板元件中的 一個。 〔A-2〕 (A-2)類型之顯示面板之製造方法 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影 像之顯示面板之顯示元件，製造顯示面板者，包括以下歩 27 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -----------1- 1 --------奸--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 __ B7___ 五、發明說明（/) 驟 保持第1面板元件於第1平台之步驟； 將第2面板元件重疊配置在保持於第1平台之第1面 板元件上之步驟； 使第2面板元件對準第1面板元件之步驟；將對準， 重疊配置於第1平台上之第1面板元件之第2面板元件保 持於第2平台之預定曲率之凸曲面構成之面板元件保持面 之步驟； 設置黏著材料於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合兩 之一面之步驟；以及 在保持P 2面板元件之第2平台之面板元件保持面介 於第1與第2面板元件間狀態下，藉由相對於第1平台壓 接轉動，以前述黏著材料，自該第2面板元件一端至另一 端，全面將其貼合於第1面板元件之步驟。 於此顯示面板之製造方法中，利用第2平台對面板元 件所作之保持固然不限於此，惟可舉經由設於平台之吸氣 孔吸引保持面板元件之情形作爲代表例。 又，第1與第2面板元件之互相對準位置藉由各種方 法進行。例如，使用本身業已周知之基板、面板之對準方 法來進行。 就對準方法而言，可例示如次方法。 (a2)設置預先對準標記於各面板元件，保持第1面板元 件於第1平台之既定位置，爾後，重疊配置第2面板元件 於此面板元件上，一面目視觀察或以攝影機觀察二面板元 28 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ' - -----I — ----- I I I I I I I 訂 ------- - - - (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _ B7 —____ 五、發明說明（>) 件之對準標記，一面藉由手操作移動第2面板元件，使二 面板元件之對準標記一致。 (b2)設置預先對準標記於各面板元件’保持第1面板 元件於第1平台之既定位置，將第2面板元件配置於此面 板元件上或其上方，一面以攝影機觀察二面板元件之對準 標記，一面藉Χ-Υ-Θ驅動裝置移第2面板元件’使二面板 元件之對準標記一致。在對準第2面板元件位置於第1面 板元件上方時，可在對準後，重疊配置第2面板元件於第 1面板元件上。 在採用(b2)之方法情形下，採用保持第2面板元件之 第3平台，.只真空吸附等方法保持第2面板元件於該第3 平台方面，可一面以攝影機觀察二面板元件之對準標記’ 一面藉Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置移動第3平台’使二面板元件之對 準標記一致。在第2面板元件之對準後，可自第3平台放 下該面板元件，將其重疊配置於第1面板元件上。第3平 台可爲設置於Χ-Υ-6»驅動裝置之面板元件夾頭構件。 利用Χ-Υ-Θ驅動裝置所作對準可藉由利用就有關第1 類型顯示面板製造方法所說明三影像處理技術等之自動控 制方法來進行。 又，在採用供對準位置之第2面板元件保持用第3平 台情形下，如同就有關第1型顯示面板製造方法所述’可 於第1平台上對準第1面板元件之位置，同時，於第3平 台上對準第2面板元件之位置，此後，使得保持第1面板 元件對準狀態之第1平台與保持第2面板元件對準狀態之 29 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ’ ----II —---j I--^--- 訂· —--— II-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 !--B7______ 五、發明說明（J) 平台相對移動’藉此，在互相對準位置狀態下，使第1與 第2面板元件相面對，放下第2面板元件，重疊配置於第 1面板元件上。 如此’將對準’重疊配置於第1平台上之二面板元件 中之第2面板元件保持於第2平台之由預定曲率之凸曲面 構成之面板元件保持面上。此保持容易藉由例使第2平台 之面板元件保持面相對於對準位置，重疊配置於第1平台 上之第1面板元件之第2面板元件接觸轉動來進行。 復於第1和第2面板元件之待互相貼合面中至少一面 設置黏著材料。黏著材料可如同第1型之顯示面板製造方 法所說明設眞。 設置黏著材料之步驟於二面板元件之前述貼合步驟前 實施。只要於貼合步驟前無障礙，即可於任一階段設置黏 著材料。 因此，在二面板元件夾於其間狀態下，使保持第2面 板元件之第2平台相對於第1平台壓接轉動，藉前述黏著 材料自該第2面板元件一端朝另一端，依序將其全面貼合 於第1面板元件。 此第2平台之預定曲率構成之凸曲面可爲圓柱形外周 面’可爲側視呈扇形之曲面等。 且，待積層之面板元件爲3個以上時，可就第3個以 後之各面板元件，將前述貼合步驟所得之貼合面板元件視 爲前述第1面板元件，同時將接著待貼合之一個面板元件 視爲前述第2面板元件，實質反覆進行前述各步驟，藉此 30 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ' --------------------—訂.- - - - - ---1 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____Β7___ 五、發明說明（β) ，將一片次次一面板元件點合於業已貼合之面板元件上。 (A-2)型之顯示面板之製造裝置 可舉如次裝置作爲可實施以上所說明(A-2)型之顯示面 板之製造方法之裝置代表例。 亦即，一種顯示面板之製造裝置，其係積層用來形成 顯示影像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板之裝置， 具備： 第1平台，其用來保持第1面板元件； 對準裝置，其使第二面板元件之對準該第1面板元件 ，重疊配置在保持於第1平台第1面板元件上； 第2平；·台，其具有預定曲率之凸曲面構成之面板元件 保持表面，此面板元件保持表面保持在第1平台上對準位 置，重疊配置於第1面板元件上之第2面板元件；以及 平台驅動裝置，其使第2平台位面板元件保持面相對 於第1平台上對準位置，重疊配置於第1面板元件上之第 2面板元件接觸轉動，暫時保持第2面板元件於該面板元 件保持面上，此後，在第1及第2面板元件夾於其間狀態 下，使保持第2面板元件之第2平台與保持第1面板元件 之第1平台相對壓接轉動。 於此裝置中，第2平台之由凸曲面構成之面板元件保 持面可爲圓筒形成圓柱形外周面，亦可爲側視呈扇形之曲 面等。 根據此種製造裝置，將第1面板元件保持於第1平台 ，藉對準裝置，對準第2面板元件之位置，將其重疊配置 31 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） · ---------------------訂--------- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 __ B7_ 五、發明說明（>1) 於第2面板元件上。 其次，藉平台驅動裝置，暫時保持該第2面板元件於 第2平台。此第2平台的對面板元件之保持可藉由使第2 平台之面板元件保持而接觸第2面板元件，相對轉動，平 穩進行。 復於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面中至少一面 設置黏著材料。 此後，藉前述平台驅動裝置，使保持第2面板元件之 第2平台壓接、轉動第1平台上之第1面板元件，以黏著 材料依序自第2面板元件一端向另一端，將其貼合於第1 面板元件。， 第1及第2平台包含用來保持面板元件之裝置。此保 持元件固然不限於此，惟舉例來說，可例如爲設於平台， 連接於排氣裝置之用以吸附面板元件之吸氣孔。 黏著材料之設置方式可如同前述(A-1)型之顯示面板製 造方法中所說明設置。此顯示面板製造裝置可包含黏著材 料塗覆裝置。 對準裝置可採用能實施例如前述(A-2)型之顯示面板製 造方法中所說明之對準方法，包括對準標記觀察攝影機，或 者對準標記攝影機以及X-Υ-β驅動裝置，或者進一步包括 根據來自攝影機之對準標記資訊（例如標記資訊）控制可 使二面板元件對準位置之X-Y-(9驅動裝置動作之控制部等 之對準裝置。 且，待貼合面板元件在3個以上時，可採甩前述最後 32 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公釐） ， ---— — I — I 1 丨 — ! I I I 丨 I I 丨 --------* 、 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ________B7_____ 五、發明說明（P ) 貼合所得之貼合面板元件作爲待互相貼合之二面板之元件 中的一個。 [A-3] IA-3]型之顯示面板製造方法 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影 像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，包括以下步 驟·· 保持第1面板元件於平台之步驟； 將第2面板元件重疊配置保持在該平台之第1面板元 件上之步驟； 使第2 p板元件對準第1面板元件之步驟； 將重疊、對準之第1與第2面板元件之一端部維持於 重疊狀態之步驟； 於第1與第2面板元件間留有保持於前述重疊狀態之 端部以形成間隙之步驟； 於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面中至少一面設 置黏著材料之步驟；以及 自藉該黏著材料保持之前述端部側依序全面貼合第1 與第2面板元件之步驟； 以顯示面板製造方法之較具體者可例示如次方法。 亦即，一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成 顯示影像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，包括 以下步驟： 保持第1面板元件於平台之步驟； 33 ---I I i I I ---------- — — II ^ > I ----II I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） ' 472223 A7 _B7___ 五、發明說明（j) 將第2面板元件重疊配置在保持於該平台之第1面板 元件上之步驟； 使第2面板元件對準第1面板元件之步驟； 保持重疊、對準之第1及第2面板元件之一端部於重 疊於前述平台之狀態之步驟； 於第1與第2面板元件間留有前述保持重疊狀態之端 部以形成間隙之步驟； 於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面中至少一面板 置黏著材料之步驟： 以及藉該黏著材料，自前述保持端部側，以相對於前 述平台移動之壓緊構件，依序全面貼合第1與第2面板元 件之步驟。 此壓緊構件採用具有由凸曲面構成之面板元件壓緊面 者，於貼合步驟中，可使該面板元件壓緊面相於面板元件 轉動。 具有由凸曲面構成之面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件代表 例固然然截面圓形之壓輥，惟，亦可利用具有側視呈扇形 之面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件等。在使用截面圖形之壓輥 情形下，爲了防止因該壓輥壓緊而於面板元件發生皴紋， 可使用中突部直徑較二端部直徑大之所謂倒冠型壓輥，\。 在等於此(A-3)型之顯示面板製造方法中，利用平方對 第1面板元件所作之保持固然不限於此，惟可舉經由設於 平台之吸氣孔吸引保持面板元件之情形作爲代表例。 又，第1與第2面板元件之互相對準位置可採用（A-2) 34 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------裝--------訂·--------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明（π) 型顯示面板製造方法所說明之對準方法。 重疊、對準之第1第2面板元件固然保持於其一端部 重疊之狀態，惟亦可如前述，保持於前述平台。於此情形 下，例如使用設於平台等之保持裝置(例如保持夾）來進行 〇 在此二面板元件端部保持後，固然於第1與第2面板 元件間留有保持於重疊狀態之端部以形成間隙，惟該間隙 之形成容易藉由抓位，舉起保持於平台之端部之反射端部 來進行。 在如此形成間隙，於二面板元件間之後設置黏著材料 0 / 黏著材料之設置方式可如(Α-1)型顯示面板製造方法所 說明設置。 於設置黏著材料後，進行前述貼合步驟。 且，在待積層之面板元件爲3個以上時，可藉由就第 3個以後之各面板元件，將前述貼合步驟所得貼合面板牛 視爲前述第1面板元件，同時，將次一待貼合之面板元件 視爲前述第2面板元件，實質上反覆進行前述各步驟，將 一個個次一面板元件貼合於已貼合之面板元件上。 (Α-3)型之顯示面板製造裝置 可舉如次裝置作爲可實施以上所說明(Α-3)型顯示面板 製造方法之裝置代表例。 亦即，一種顯示面板之製造裝置，其係積層用來形成 顯示影像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，具備 35 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 χ 297公釐） ------------—-------^--訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___ B7 _ 五、發明說明（4 ) 對準裝置，其使第2面板元件對準第1面板元件，重 疊配置在保持於平台之第1面板元件上； 保持裝置，其保持重疊、對準之第1與第2面板元件 之一端部於重疊在平台上之狀態； 間隙形成裝置，其留有藉前述保持裝置保持於重疊狀 態之端部，在第1與第2面板元件間形成間隙；以及 壓緊構件，其可相對於平台移動，用來自前述保持裝 置保持之端部側依序全面貼合藉間隙形成裝置形成間隙之 第1與第2面板元件。 爲了平穩進行貼合可採用具有凸曲面所構成之面板元 件壓緊面’於利用該壓緊構件依序貼合二面板元件中，該 面板元件壓緊面可相對於面板元件轉動者。具有由凸曲面 構成之面板元件壓面之壓緊構件代表例固然係截面圓形之 壓輥，惟亦可利用具有側視呈扇形之面板元件壓緊面之壓 緊構件等。 在使用截面圖形之壓輥情形下，爲了避免因該壓輥壓 緊而於面板元件發生皺紋，亦可使用中央部直徑較二端部 直徑小之所謂倒冠型壓輥。 根據此製造裝置，保持第1面板元件於平台，藉對準 裝置，使第2面板元件對準位置，重疊配置於該第1面板 元件上。 該平台包含用來保持面板元件之裝置。此保持裝置固 然不限於此，惟可舉例如設在平台，連接於排氣裝置，用 36 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公愛） ---- I I I----- · I I I--I I 訂------I-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____B7____ 五、發明說明（V>) 來吸附面板元件之吸氣孔作爲實例。 對準裝置可實施例如前述(A-2)型顯示面板製造方所說 明之對準方法。可採用包括對準標記觀察攝影機，或者對 準標記攝影機以及Χ-Υ-6»驅動裝置。或者進一步包括根據 來自攝影機之對準資訊(例如標記位置資訊），控制可使二 面板元件對準之Χ-Υ-6»驅動裝置動作之控制部等。 其次.，藉端部保持裝置將重疊、對準之二面板元件之 一端部保持於重疊於平台之狀態。 進一步留有保持裝置所保持之端部，藉間隙形成裝置 ，於第1與第2面板元件間形成間隙。 此間隙形成裝置可舉例如抓位、舉起第2面板元件保 持於平台之端部之反對側端部，隨著壓緊構件將二面板元 件貼合，使抓住之第2面板元件端部接近第1面板元件者 爲例。 於二面板元件間形成間隙後，於二面板元件之待互相 貼合面中至少一面設置黏著材料。 此黏著材料可如同前述(A-1)型顯示面板製造方法所說 明放置。此顯示面板製造裝置可包含黏著材料塗覆裝置。 黏著材料設置後，藉壓緊構件，自前述端部保持裝置 保持之端部側依序全面貼合第1與第2面板元件。 且，待貼合之面板元件爲3個以上時，可使用前述最 後貼合所得之貼合面板元件作爲待互相貼合之二面板元件 中的一個.。 [A-4] 37 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I 1 I I I I 1--— · I I I---—訂.--I--— II (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 I_____ B7 _ 五、發明說明（厶） [A-4]型之顯示面板之製造方法 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影 像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，特徵在於具 備以下步驟： 保持步驟，其保持第1面板元件於平台之步驟： 面板元件重疊配置步驟，其將第2面板元件重疊配置 在保持於平台之第1面板元件上； 對準步驟，其使第2面板元件之對準第1面板元件； 暫時固定步驟，其可保持重疊、對準之第1與第2面 板元件之互相位置關係，暫時固定此等面板元件於平台上 t 鑽孔步驟，其在暫時固定之第1及第2面板元件設有 決定此等面板元件之互相位置關係之定位孔；以及 貼合步驟，其於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面 中至少一面設置黏著材料；一面使用前述定位孔，使第1 與第2面板元件互相定位，藉前述黏著材料，使二面板元 件互相貼合。 於屬於此(A-4)型之顯示面板製造方法中，利用平台對 第1面板元件所作之保持固然不於限於此，惟可舉經由設 平台之吸氣孔吸引保持面板元件之情形作爲代表例J。 又，第1與第2面板元件之互相對準可採用前述(A_2) 型之顯示面板製造方法所說明之對準方法。 重疊、對準位置之第1與第2面板元件可保持互相位 置關係，暫時固定於平台。此暫時固定藉由使用例如設於 38 P氏張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） '" -- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --------訂--------線 472223 A7 ___B7____ 五、發明說明（於） 平台等之夾等暫時固定裝置時將二面板元件之至少一端部 保持於平台來進行。 於此二面板元件暫時固定後，於第1及第2面板元件 設置決定此等面板元件之互相位置關係之定位孔。 此後，於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面中至少 一面設置黏著材料，使用前述定位孔，一面使第1與第2 面板元件互相定位，一面藉該黏著材料，使二面板元件互 相貼合。 例如，利用該定位孔，實施前述(A-3)類型顯示面板製 造方法中「保持重疊、對準位置之第1與第2面板元件之 一端部於重疊於平台之狀態之步驟」，其次，實施留有如 此保持於重疊狀態以形成間隙於第1與第2面板元件間之 步驟，於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面之至少一面 設置黏著材料之步驟以及藉相對於前述平台移之壓緊構件 ，以該黏著材料，自前述保持之端部側，依序全面貼合第 1與第2面板元件之貼合步驟，可獲得面板元件貼I之顯 示面板。 且，待積層之面板元件爲3以上時，就第3個以後之 各面板元件，將藉由前述暫時固定步驟暫時固定在重疊、 對準前述平台之狀態之面板元件視爲前述第1面板元件， 同時將次一面板元件視爲前述第2面板元件，實質上反覆 進行前述面板元件重疊配置步驟'對準步驟以及暫時固定 步驟，藉此，可實施將一個個次一面板元件重疊於先前重 疊、對準之面板元件上，同時，對準位置，暫時固定於前 39 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（2K) X 297公釐） I------1 — 1! ----- 1 — I 訂- -- - ----- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____ R7_________ 五、發明說明（V]) .述平台，在全部面板元件之暫時固定結束後，可實施前述 鑽孔步驟，以及藉黏著材料將前述相鄰面板元件貼合之步 驟。 [A_4]型之顯示面板製造裝置 可舉如次裝置作爲可實施以上所說明(A-4)型顯示面板 製造方法與裝置代表例。 亦即，一種顯示面板之製造裝置，其係積層用來形成 顯示影像之顯示面板之顯示元件，製造顯示面板者，具備 平台’其用來保持第1面板元件； 對準裝置，其使第2面板元件對準第1面板元件，重 疊配置在保持於該平台之第1面板元件上； 暫時固定裝置，其可保持重疊、位對準之第1與第2 面板元件之互相位置關係，將此等面板元件暫時固定平台 上；以及 鑽孔裝置，其於暫時固定於前述平台上之第1及第2 面板元件開設決定此等面板元件之相位置關係之定位孔。 於此製造裝置中，保持第1面板元件於平台上，藉對 準裝置，對準第2面板元件之位置，將其重疊、配置於第 1面板元件上。 該平台包含用保持面板元件之裝置。此保持裝置固然 限於，惟可舉例如設於平台，連接於排氣裝置，用來吸附 面板元件之吸氣孔爲例。 對準裝置採用可實施前述(A-2)型顯示面板製造方法所 40 ------------ --------訂---------, (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ------ B7 ___ 五、發明說明（#) •說0月對準方法，包括對準標記觀察攝影機，或者對準標記 攝影機以及Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置，或者進一步包括根據來自攝 影機之對準檩記資訊(例如標記位置資訊），控制可使二面 板元件對準之Χ_γ_θ驅動裝置動作之控制部等之對準裝置 0 暫時固定重疊、對準之二面板元件於平台之暫時固定 裝置可採用例如設於平台等，用來將二面板元件之至少一 方之端部暫時固定於平台之夾等裝置。 此顯示面板製造裝置可進一步具備一面使用前述定位 孔’使第1與第2面板元件互相定位，一面藉黏著材料使 二面板元件互相貼合之貼合裝置。 此貼合裝置具備利用前述定位孔將面板元件端部保持 於平台之端部保持裝置，以其作爲前述(Α-3)型顯示面板製 造裝置所採用之面板元件端部保持裝置，同時，可如例示 ，爲進一步包括留下藉該端部保持裝置保持重疊狀態之端 部以形成間隙於第1與第2面板元件間之間隙形成裝置， 以及可相對於平台移動，用來從前述保持裝置保持之端部 側全面貼合藉間隙形成裝置形成間隙之第1與第2面板元 件之壓緊構件之裝置。亦可進一步包含黏著材料塗覆裝置 〇 爲了平穩進行貼合，此壓緊構件亦可採用具有由凸曲 面構成之面板元件壓緊面，於藉該壓緊構件依序貼合二面 板元件中，該面板元件壓緊面可相對於面板元件轉者。具 有由凸曲面構成之面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件之代表例固 41 1 '' ' -- - 丨丨· " 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 χ 297公爱） 1-----I I I I i I ---------訂-— — — II — — · (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 __B7 _ 五、發明說明（4 ) .然係截面圓形之壓輥，惟亦可利用具有側視呈扇形之面板 元件壓緊面之壓緊構件等。在使用截面圓形之壓輥情形下 ，爲了防止因該壓輥壓緊而於面板元件發生皺紋，亦可使 用中央部直徑輪二端部直徑小之所謂倒王冠(crown)型壓輥 〇 於此述說明之本發明任一顯示面板製造方法及裝置中 ，相鄰面板元件在高精度對準狀態下貼合，獲得僅進行良 好影像顯示之顯示面板。 復由於(A-l)、（A-2)及(A-3)之各型顯示面板製造方法及 裝置中相鄰之面板元件依序自端部貼合，故自此等面板元 件間脫氣，使二者密接，可在無皺紋狀態下貼合，獲得僅 進行良好影像顯示之顯示面板。 於(A-4)型顯示面板製造方法及裝置中，可自面板元件 端依序全面進行相鄰面板元件之貼合，藉此，可自此等元 件間脫氣，將二者密接，在與皴紋狀態下貼合。 由於在以上說明之(A-1)〜(A-2)型之任一顯示面板製造 方法中，更確實自相鄰面板元件間脫氣，故可於預定減壓 環境氣氛中至少實施前述貼合步驟。 又，因此，顯示面板製造裝置可具備減壓室，其在相 鄰面板元件貼合中，用來使該二面板元件之周圍大氣成爲 預定減壓環境氣氛之減壓室。 以上說明之(A-1)〜(A-4)型方法及裝置固然可適用於各 種顯示面板之製造，惟，以下參照第1至第14(D)圖就液晶 顯示面板之製造方法及製造裝置具體例加以說明。 42 ------------ *-------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 ΚΙ ----- - 五、發明說明（f。） 第1圖保持製造之一反射型液晶顯示面板例之槪略側 視圖。 此液晶顯示面板係積層進行藍色(blue)顯示之面板元件 (下稱「B面板元件」）b、進行綠色(green)顯示之面板元件 (下稱「G面板元件」）g以及進行紅色(Red)顯示之面板 (下稱「R面板元件」）R，可進行全彩色影像顯示之面板 ’係各個相鄰之B面板元件與〇面板元件、G面板元件與 R面板元件分別黏著材料N互相貼合者，於R面板元件外 面設有黑色之光吸收層。狀態，並且，一面自第2平台 200拉出第2面板元件C2，使壓緊構件G10與第2平台200 相對移動’俾在第1平台丨⑻上，在壓緊構件610依序壓 緊下’將二面板元件cl、C2貼合。且，第2驅動裝置310 係第1驅動裝置300(由31〇和320構成)之一部分。 第3圖之面板製造裝置具備： 第1平台100，其用來保持第1面板元件cl ; 對準裝置400’ ’其使第2面板元件c2相對於第1面板 元件cl對準位置，將其重疊、配置在保持於第1平台7〇〇 之第1面板元件cl上； 第2平台200’ ’其具有由預定曲率之凸曲面構成之面 板元件保持表面2000’，暫時保持、舉起對準第1面板元件 而重疊配置於其上之第2面板元件C2於第1平台1〇〇上； 以及 平台驅動裝置，其於第1平台100上，使第2平台 200’之面板元件保持面200a’相對於對準，重疊配置於第i 43 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公楚） ------------ . I I I--I I 訂-— — |1|||_ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7____ 五、發明說明（斗丨） 面板元件cl上之第2面板元件c2接觸、轉動，暫時保持 第2面板元件c2於面板元件保持面200a’上，此後’在第1 及第2面板元件G、G相夾狀態下，相對壓接轉動保持第 2面板元件C2之第2平台200,與保持第1面板元件cl之第 2平台200’，俾第2面板元件cl自其一端朝向另一端’依 序貼合於第1面板元件cl。 第4圖之面板製造裝置具備： 平台100，其用來保持第1面板元件cl ; 對準裝置400’，其使第2面板元件c2相對於第1面板 元件cl對準位置，重疊配置在保持平台100之第1面板元 件cl上； 暫時固定裝置1000，其可保持重疊、對準位置之第1 與第2面板元件cl、C2互相位置關係，暫時將此等面板元 件固定於平台100上；以及 鑽孔裝置1100，其於暫時固定在平台100上第1與第 2面板元件cl、c2上開設決定此等面板元件Cl、c2之互相 位置關係之定位孔。 以下固然就第2至第5圖所示各面板製造裝置，自第 2圖之裝置起依序說明，惟就各構件於後續說明之面板製 造裝置中具有相同構造、作用之構件，省略其於後續R、G 、：B面板之元件分別係將以一定顏色進行影像顯示之管液 晶層LC夾裝於對向之一對透明基板si、s2間者。於各基 板si、s2，在對向管液晶層LC之面上形成分別省略圖示 之電極。 44 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) i 裝--------訂---------線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ------— _B7____- - 五、發明說明（γ) 第2.至5圖係分別來製造此液晶顯示面板之製造裝置 例之槪略構成圖。 第2圖之面板製造裝置具備： 第1平台100，其用來保持第1面板元件cl ; 對準裝置400，其用來對準第1面板元件cl之位置於 第1平台100 ; 第2平台200，其用來相對於第1平台100，或既定位 置關係配置，保持第2面板元件c2 ; 對準.裝置500，其用來對準第2面板元件c2之位置於 V»-.,......... 第2平台200上； 第1驅動裝置.3卯，相對移動第1及第2平台(1〇〇、 200) ’俾分別對準位置，保持於第1及第2平台1〇〇、200 上之第1及第2面板元件cl、C2相對向，同二面板元件cl 、c2之預定端部重疊，平台1〇〇之驅動裝置和平台200之 驅動裝置300之組合； 壓緊構件610，其用來將分別保持於第丨及第2平台 100，200上’前述預定端部重疊之二面板元件cl、c2之該 端部壓緊保持於第1平台100 ;以及 第2驅動裝置310，其一面維持壓緊構件610壓緊二 面板元件端剖之第1平台於利用壓緊端件610壓緊面板元 件之面板製造裝置之說明。並以相同參考符號標示此等構 件。 如前述，第2圖所示面板製造裝置具備第1平台1〇〇 ，對準裝置400 ’第2平台200，對準裝置500，平台驅動 45 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐^ -- ------------ --------^--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 κι ____Β7 ____ 五、發明說明（ή ) '裝置320和平台驅動裝置310構成之第1驅動裝置300以 及壓緊構件610。 笋1平台100係與第3圖所示面板製造裝置之第1平 台100、第4及5所示面板製造裝置之平台100—樣之平台 〇 此第1平台100包含第1吸附台101、用來保持面板 元件之面板元件保持裝置110。 第1吸附台101於保持面板元件cl之區域，隔預定間 距，設有複數個用來吸附面板元件之吸附孔101a。 面板元件保持裝置110除此吸氣孔101a外，包含位於 平台100之排氣室111、撓性管112、排氣裝置113、排氣 裝置113連接於管112之一端部，排氣室111連接於管112 之另一端部，排氣管111與吸附台101之吸氣孔101a連通 。因此，藉由排氣裝置113之運轉，空氣自吸氣孔l〇la通 過排氣室111、管112排出。 第2平台200包含第2吸附台201，用來保持面板元 件之面板元件保持裝置210。 第2吸附台201於保持面板元件c2之區域，隔預定間 距，設有複數個用來吸附面板元件之吸氣孔201a。 .........—...................... *··-........ ........ _ 面板元件保持裝置210除此吸氣孔201外，包含位於 平台200之排氣室211、撓性管212、排氣裝置213，排氣 置213連接於管212之一端部，氣室211連接於212之另 —端部，排氣管211與吸附台201之吸氣孔201a連通。因 此，藉由排氣裝置213之運轉，空氣自吸氣孔201a，通過 46 f ^----I---^--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 B7 五、發明說明（β ) 排氣室211 '管212排出。 平η 100之驅動裝置310設於第3至5圖所示之面板 製造裝置’其固然不限於此’惟設於第1平台1〇〇之小齒 輪313與沿導軌311設置之齒條311a嚙合，藉裝載第丄平 台100之馬達3,12往復旋轉此小齒輪313。第丨平台1〇〇藉 驅動裝置310沿導軌311移動，配置於面板元件對準位置 Q1或面板元件貼合開始位置Q2。於具移動時，設於第1 平台100之滑件102沿導軌311滑動。 平台200之驅動裝置300包括第2平台支持臂321以 及將其驅動之旋轉驅動部322。 第2平台支持臂321之一端部支持於旋轉驅動部322 之軸322a，另一端部與第2平台200連結。旋轉驅動部22 配置於固定位置，可使軸322a於預定時刻沿既定方向（圖: 式中A方向)或與該既定方向相反之方向（圖式中B方向)轉 動。因此，藉由旋轉驅動部322之驅動造成軸322a之轉動 ，支持臂321及第2平台200於預定時刻沿A方向或B方 向旋轉。 壓緊構件610可藉圖示省略之昇降驅動裝置昇降，因 此，壓緊構件610藉該昇降驅動裝置配置在預定時刻使位 於面板元件貼合開始位置Q2之第1及第2面板元件cl、 c2朝第1平台100壓緊之壓緊位置p，或自位置P1向上退 避之退避位置p2。 於此，壓緊構件610係截面圖形之壓輥，具有面板元 件壓緊圖面610a。 47 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--------訂---------線 472223 A7 ____B7 ___ 五、發明說明（β) 對準裝置娘0、500分別具有2部攝影機410、510(於 此CCD(電荷耦合裝置)攝影機’ X-Y-0驅動裝置m、D2、 控制部430、530 ° 第6圖顯示自上方俯視保持於第1、第2平台100、 200之吸附台101、201之第1面板元件cl、C2之圖式。且 ，對準裝置400、500等省略其圖示。 分別於第1、第2平台100、200之平台120、200上設 置Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置以、D2 ’前述排氣室111、211，復設 置吸附台101、201。 第1、第2面板元件cl、c2上，在面板元件之顯示區 域外分別形成預先對準位置之標記ml、m2。且，對準標 記固然呈十字形圖形形成於面板元件之對角線方向兩端區 域，惟不限於此，只要能使各面板元件互相對準位置，可 爲任意圖形，又，若在顯示區域外，可形成於任一位置。 又，此對準標記可藉由印刷等形成，亦可於形成面板元件 之電極之際，設置標記用電極於顯示區域外，藉由對該標 記用雷極施加電壓點燈。此時，分別印刷對準標記1、m2 面板元件cl、c2，上。 第2圖所示CCD攝影機410連接控制部430，可觀察 保持於吸附台101之之面板元件C1之預形成之對準標記 ml，將此標記資訊送至控制部430。又，CCD攝影機510 連接於控制部530.，可觀察保持於吸附台201之面板元件 c2之預形成標記m2，分別將此標記資訊送至控制部530。 X-Y-Θ驅動裝置D1-D2分別連接於控制部430、530。 48 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ----- ------— -------I -1^ — — — — — —--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 __B7______ 五、發明說明（“） 控制部430、530根據來自攝影機之標記資訊，控制驅動裝 置Dl、D2之動作，俾使面板元件cl、c2分別對準位置於 既定位置’藉X-Y- <9驅動裝置D1、D，沿X-Y- 0驅動吸附 台101、201。此控制部430、530分別包含利用基板、面板 等對準用影像處理法之裝置。 進行吸附保持於吸附台101、201之第1、第2面板元 件cl、c2之對準’俾在高精度對準狀態下，達到爾二面板 元件重疊端部之保持，以及二面板元件cl、C2之貼合。 且’對準裝置500支持於圖示省略之昇降驅動裝置， 藉此昇降驅動裝置，於未進行對準時，退避至上方位置， 亦即縱使第2平台200旋轉亦不會撞擊之位置。 如前述，第3圖所示面板製造裝具備第1平台1〇〇、 對準裝置400’、第2平台200,、平台驅動裝置300,。 對準裝置400’與第4及5圖所示面板製造裝置之對準 裝置相同。 此對準裝置400’配置於面板元件對準位置Q1之上方 ’具備2台攝影機410(於此爲CCD攝影機）、X-Y-0驅動 裝置400、控制部430,以及昇降驅動裝置440。 第7圖顯示自上方俯視各面板元件C1、C2互相對準位 置於第1平台100上之狀態之圖式。且，第1平台1〇〇、對 準裝置400’等省略圖示。 如前面說明，於各面板元件cl、c2，在面板元件之顯 示區域外，分別形成用來預先對準位置之標記ml、m2。 Μ ^所示CCD攝影機410連接於控制部430，可觀 49 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------— — — — — · I I--- — I 訂·--- - ---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7_ 五、發明說明（Μ ) .察各面板元件cl、c2之預形成對準標記ml、m2，將此標 記資訊送至控制部430。 X-Υ-θ驅動裝置420包含面板元件保持臂421、X-Y-0驅動部422以及面板元件保持裝置423。面板元件保持 臂421之一端部連接於驅動部之Χ-Υ-0方向可動部，另一 端部支持面板元件保持裝置423之吸附台424等。 面板元件保持裝置_423包含吸附台424、排氣室425、 撓性管426、排氣裝置427，可藉吸附台424吸附保持面板 元件c2 ^ 吸附台424於保持面板元件c2之區域設備複數個用來 吸附面板元件之吸氣孔424。 錢鼻裝置_連接於置/426之二端部，管426之另一 端部連接於排氣室425，排氣室425與吸附台424之吸氣孔 ..............................................................................…........... ...... ............- 424a _屬。因此，藉由排氣裝置427之連轉，空氣自吸氣 孔424a通過排氣室425、管426排出。 . ................... ... Χ-Υ-0驅動部422連接於控制部430’，可沿先吸附保 持於第1平台100之面板元件cl表面，循既定方向(圖式 中X方向）、與其垂直之方向(圖式中Y方向），移動吸附台 424及其保持之面板元件c2，使其繞垂直於X-Y平面之軸( 圖式中0方向轉動。藉此，可根據控制部430’之指示，移 動面板元件c2於保持在第1平台100之面板元件cl上方 〇 控制部430’如前述，連接CCD攝影機410、Χ-Υ- Θ驅 動裝置420，以來自攝影機410之對準標記ml、m2之標記 50 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4说格（210 X 297公釐） — — — — — — — — — — — - I I I I I I I 1!1!1111 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____B7__ 五、發明說明un .資訊作爲位資訊，加以處理，根據此位置資訊，控制X-Y-0驅動裝置420之動作，俾移動吸附台424及面板元件c2 ，使二面板元件cl、c2對準位置，前述對準標記ml、m2 一致。且，控制部430’包含利用基板、面板等之對準用影 像處理之對準法之裝置。又，排氣室425及吸附台424具 有用來檢測面板元件之對準標記ml、m2之圖示省略之通 孔或窗。_ 昇降驅動裝置440配設台X-Υ-θ驅動裝置420之上方 ，可於預時刻昇降驅動裝置420。因此，可藉昇降驅動置 440，使Χ-Υ- β驅動裝置420以及與其連設之吸附台424移 動至下方。並且，可使吸附台424接近預先載置於保持在 位於面板元件對準位置Q1之第1平台之面板元件cl上之 面板元件c2，吸附保持該面板元件c2。於此狀態下，可對 準面板元件cl、c2之位置，沿X-Y-6·驅動面板元件c2。 對準後，可在對準位置狀態下，將面板元件c2重疊配置於 面板元件cl上。 於此，第2平台係具有側視呈大致4分之1圓弧之扇 形之面板元件保持面200a’之平台。又，第2平台200’包含 面板元件保持裝置210’。 面板元件保持裝置210’除平台200’之吸附台201及排 氣室21Γ外，包含撓性管212’、排氣裝置213，可藉吸附 台201吸附保持面板元件C2。 吸附台、201於保持面板元件c2之區域，隔預定間距， 設有複數個用來吸面板元件之吸氣孔210a’。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____ B7___ 五、發明說明（Μ ) 排氣裝置213’連接於管2丨2’之一端部，管212’之另一 端部連接於排氣室211’，排氣室211’與吸附台20Γ之吸氣 孔201a’連通。因此，藉由排氣裝置213’之運轉，空氣自吸 氣孔201a’通過排氣室211’、管212’排出。 此第2平台支持於平台驅動裝置300’之一構成元件之 平台支持軸310’。 平台驅動裝置300之一部分包含平台100之驅動裝置 310，復包含驅動平台支持軸310’旋轉驅動部320’。 旋轉驅動部320’可於預定時刻，使平台支持軸310’沿 既定方向(圖式中A方向)或與該既定方向相反之方向(圖式 中B方向)轉動。因此，第2平台200’於預定時刻沿A方 向或B方向旋轉。 且，第2平台200’、平台支持軸310’及旋轉驅動部 300可藉圖示省略之昇降驅動裝置昇降，第2平台200’藉 該昇降驅動裝置配置在預定時刻之預定降下位置，或自位 置P3退避至上方之退避位置P4。 如前述，第4圖所示面板製造裝置具備平台1〇〇、對 準裝置400’、平台100上之保持夾800、間隙形成裝置900 、壓輥600’。 壓輥600’配設於固定位置。於此，壓輥600’係具有彈 性表層之截面圓形之壓輥，其有面板元件緊周面600a’。 保持夾800設於第1平台100之一端部，可保持重疊 ，對準位置於第1平台100上之第1及第2面板元件cl、 c2之一端部保持於重疊在第1平台100上之狀態。 52 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） Μ--------訂--------—線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7 _____ 五、發明說明) 間..隙移成裝置900包含可脫離連結於第2面板元件2 之另一端部之面板元件支持部910、攫住支持構件910之 夾920、位於固定位置之金屬線導引滑車930，可捲取、鬆 放金屬線之絞盤940以及一端部連接於夾920而另一端部 連接於絞盤940之金屬線950。 此間隙形成裝置900自絞盤940放出金屬線950 ’以 夾920攫住支持面板元件c2之支持構件910 ’此後’捲繞__ 金屬線950，藉此，可於平台100上之夾800所保持之面板 元件cl、c2間形成間隙。又，隨著藉壓輥600’進行第1與 第2面板元件cl、c2之貼合，可自絞盤940逐漸放出金屬 線950，使升起之面板元件c2之端部下降。 如前述，第5圖所示面板元件製造裝置具備平台100 、對準裝置4〇〇’、暫時固定裝置1000、鑽孔裝置11〇〇。 於此，暫時固定裝置1000係包含設於第1平έ 100之 二端部之二個夾1010之裝置，如前述，可保持重疊、對準 位置於第1平台100上之第1及第2面板元件cl、C2之互 相位置關係，暫時固定此等面板元件cl、c2於第1平台 100 上。 鑽孔裝置1100於此包含二台衝孔機1110，如前述， 可開設定位孔於暫時固定在平台100上之第1及第2面板 元件cl、c2以決定此等面板元件cl、c2之互相位置關係 〇 其次，面參考照第8圖至第13圖所示製程，一面依序 就第2圖至第5圖所示各顯示板製造裝置之1圖所示類型 53 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --— Ill----11. ----— 一 1 I 訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______B7_____ 五、發明說明（4〉 .之反射型液晶顯示面板製造例加以說明。 且，於製造第1至5圖之各顯示面板製造裝置之第1 圖所示液晶顯示面板A時，分別一次一個面板元件，製造 進行紅色顯示、綠色顯示、藍色顯示之R、G、B面板元件 〇 以R、G、B面板元件中任一個(於此爲R面板元件)作 爲第1面板元件cl.使用貼合於此面板元件之面板元件(於__ 此爲G面板元件)作爲第2面板元件c2，藉由以下所說明 各面板裝置之製程，將二面板元件貼合。 首先，說明第2圖所示顯示面板製造裝置之一液晶顯 示面板製造例。 第8圖顯示用來說明第2圖之面板製造裝置之一液晶 顯示面板製造例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式，第9圖顯示用來 說明第8 +圖所示步驟之後驟(50至(8)之圖式。且，第8及9 圖爲求簡化，省略一部分件之圖布。 (1)於第1與第2面板元件cl、c2之待互相貼合面之至 少一面，於此，係於第1面板元件cl(於此爲R面板元件） 設有前述光吸收層BK之一面之反對面上，預先貼上單面 當以可撕除保護片NN1覆蓋之雙面黏膠（double-sided ^ ______________________· - ···.-' 、 adhesice tape)NN。且，可使用單面尙以可撕除保護片覆蓋 之黏著片(sdhesive sheet)來代替雙面黏膠。 使待貼合面朝上，將第1面板元件cl定位於第1平台 加上，藉面板元件保持裝置110，將面板元件cl吸附於平 台100之吸附台101使用對準裝置400，一面藉CCD攝影 54 ------------裝---I----訂---------線- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ___ B7___________ 五、發明說明（β) .機410觀察第1面板元件cl之對準標記ml，一面藉Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置驅動吸附台，使面板元件cl之對準既定位置。 同樣地，爲了使第2面板元件c2(於此爲G面板元件) 之待貼合面朝上，復在第2面板元件端部出現於第2平台 200狀態下，將其定位於第2平台200，吸附於吸附台201 。使用對準裝置500，一面以CCD攝影機510觀察第2面 板元件c2之對置對準標記m2，一面以Χ-Υ-Θ驅動裝置驅 動吸台201，對準面板元件C2於既定位置。 (2) 在第1及第2面板元件cl、C2之對準結束後，藉平 台驅動裝置310使吸附第1面板元件cl之第1平台1〇〇移 動至面板元件cl之一預定端部來到壓緊構件610下之位置 ，亦即面板元件貼合位置Q2。 (3) 自貼在第1平台100之第1面板元件cl之雙面黏膠 NN除去保護脫模片NN1，露出黏著材料N。 (4) 藉平台驅動裝置320之驅動部322使吸附第2面板 元件c2之第2平台200沿A方向旋轉，移動至二面板元件 cl、c2之端部來到壓緊構件610下方之位置，藉此，使二 面板元件cl、c2相面對，同時，重疊二面板元件cl、c2 之預定端部。此時，對準裝置500藉圖示省略之昇降驅動 裝置退避至上方。 (5) 藉圖示省略之昇降驅動裝置將壓緊構件610下降至 壓緊位置P1，藉壓緊構件610之面板元件壓緊面610a之一 部分，將二面板元件cl、c2之重疊端部壓緊保持於第1平 台 100。 55 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------- --------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _ B7__ 五、發明說明（A ) ⑹此後，以平台驅動裝置310使第1平台1〇〇相對於 第2平台200及壓緊構件610移動，藉此，一面維持面板 元件爲壓緊構件610壓緊狀態，並且，一面自第2平台2〇〇 拉出第2面板元件c2，在壓緊構件610壓緊下，藉黏著材 料N，依序將二面板元件cl、c2貼合於第1平台1〇〇上。 (7) 在相對移動壓緊構件610至二面板元件cl、C2之終 端後，藉圖示省略之昇降驅動裝置，使壓緊構件610上昇 至退避位置P2。 (8) 如此，一且二面板元件cl、c2之貼合結束，即解除 藉面板元件保持裝置210吸附第2平台200之動作，藉平 台驅動裝置320，使平台200沿B方向旋轉，使平台200 回到原來位置。 並且，二面板元件之貼合一結束，第1平台即保持貼 合之面板元件回到最初位置Q1。 其次，將R面板元件與G面板元件貼合之面板元件視 爲1面板元件cl，同時將吹一待貼合之一個面板元件視爲 第2面板元件c2，反覆進行相同步驟，將次一 B面板元件 貼合於業已貼合之面板元件。因此，獲得R面板元件、G 面板元件及B面板元件積層之顯示面板A。 其次，說明第3圖所示藉顯示面板製造裝置製造液晶 顯示面板之一例子。 第10圖顯示第3圖所示藉面板製造裝置製造液晶顯示 面板之一製程例(1)至(.7)之圖式。且’第1〇圖爲求簡化’ 省略一部分構件之圖7K。 56 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I 裝------—訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7____ 五、發明說明（舛） (1) 於第1與第2面板元件cl、c2之待相至貼合面之至 少一面，於此，係於第1面板元件Cl(於此爲R面板元件) 設有前述光吸收層BK之一面之反對面’預先貼上於一表 面尙以可撕除保護片NN1覆蓋之雙面黏膠(亦可爲黏著片) 〇 將第1面板元件Cl定位於第1平台100上，使其待貼 合面朝上，吸附於吸附台101。 載置第2面板元件c2(於此爲G面板元件)於第1面板 元件cl上，其次，進行二面板元件cl、c2之互相對準位 置。 此對準如次進行。亦即，將載置於面板元件cl上之面 板元件c2吸附保持於暫時對準裝置400’之面板元件保持裝 置423之吸附台424，於此狀態下，一面以CCD攝影機 410觀察二面板元件cl、c2之對準標記ml、m2，一面以 Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置420移動保持第2面板元件c2之吸附台 424，使二面板元件cl、c2之對準標記ml、m2 —致。此 對準動作根據攝影機410檢測之標記資訊，按照控制部 430’之指示進行。對準處理一結束，即面度於對準狀態下 ，將面板元件c2載置於面板元件cl上。 (2) 藉平台驅動裝置310，使保持如此對準位置、重疊 配置之面板元件cl、c2之第1平台100移動至第2平台 200’下方。此時，將第2平台200’配置預定下降位置P3， 使第2平台200’與第1平台100之間隙大致與二面板元件 份之厚度同距離。 57 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --I I I I I I----· I — — I 1 I 1 訂— — — — — —— I- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7_____ 五、發明說明（< ) (3) 進一步繼續移動第1平台100，同時’藉第2平台 用旋轉驅動部320’，使第2平台200’與第1平台100同步 ，與第2面板元件c2接觸而轉動。如此，藉面板元件保持 裝置210’，吸附保持第2面板元件c2於第2平台200’。第 2平台200’對面板元件之保持可藉由第2平台200’之面板 元件保持200s’相對於第2面板元件c2接觸轉動，平穩達 成。 (4) 藉圖示省略之昇降驅動裝置，使吸附保持第2面板 元件c2之第2平台200’上昇至退避位置P4，自貼在第1 平台100之第1面板元件cl之雙面黏膠NN除去可撕除保 護片NN1，露出黏著材料N。 (5) 將吸附保持第2面板元件c2之第2平台200’2降至 位置P3，使第二面板元件c2之一端部壓緊於第1面板元 件cl之一端部。 (6) 移動第1平台100，使其返回位置Q1，同時，與其 同步，在保持第2面板元件c2之第2平台200’前倒轉，經 由面板元件c2，壓接轉動第1平台100上之第1面板元件 cl，藉此，藉黏著材料N，自一端至另一端，依序貼合第2 面板元件c2於第1面板元件cl。 (7) 解除面板元件保持裝置210’對第2平台320’之吸附 動作，使第2平台200’上昇。 並且，二面板元件貼合一結束，第1平台100即維持 其對貼合面板元件之保持，返回最初位置Q1。 其次，將R面板元件與G面板元件貼合之面板元件視 58 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------ --------訂---------線. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7_____ 五、發明說明（4) .爲第2面板元件c2,反覆進行相同步驟，將次一 B面板元 件貼合於業已貼之面板元件上。因此，獲得積層R面板元 件、G面板元件和B面板元件之顯示面板A。 其次，說明藉第4圖所示面板製造裝置製造液晶顯示 面板之一例子。 第11圖顯示用來說明藉第4圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一製程例(丨)至⑺之圖式。且，第11圖爲 求簡化，省略一部分構件之圖示。 (1) 於第1及第2面板元件cl、c2之待相至貼合面之至 少一面，於此，係於第1面板元件cl(於此爲R面板元件) 設有前述光吸收層BK之面之反對面，預先貼上於一表面 尙以可撕除保護片NN1覆蓋之雙面黏膠(亦可爲黏著片)NN 〇 將第1面板元件cl且略定位於第1平台100上，俾其 待貼合面朝上，以面板元件保持裝置110將面板元件Cl吸 附於平台100之吸附台101上。將第2面板元件c2(於此爲 G面板元件)粗略定位、重疊置於第1面板元件cl上。 (2) 藉平台驅動裝置310，將載置第1及第2面板元件 cl、c2之第1平台100移動至對準裝置400’之下方’亦即 面板元件對準位置Q1。於此，使用裝置400’，使面板元件 c2之對準面板元件cl。此對準與第10圖之步驟(1)相同’ 於此省略其說明。在二面板元件cl、c2之對準結束後’藉 保持夾800將對準位置之第1與第2面板元件cl、c2之一 端部(於此爲圖式中面板元件右側之邊部分保持於重疊在平 59 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 1 --------訂·--------*5^ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 p~__—_2Z---- 五、發明說明（) 台100上之狀態。 (3) 藉平驅動裝置310將載置二面板元件cl、c2之第1 平台100移動至面板元件貼合開姶位置Q2。將第2面板元 件c2之另一端部(圖式中左側之邊部分)保持於面板元件支 持構件910，以夾920挾持住此構件910。 (4) 留下藉夾800保持之面板元件cl、c2之一端部’藉 間隙形成裝置900，於第1與第2面板元件cl、c2間形成 間隙。亦即，藉由以盤940捲繞金屬線950，以保持夾800 所保持二面板元件cl、c2之端部爲中心，轉動、舉起經由 支持構件910，爲夾920支持之第2面板元件c2之端部。 並且，自貼在第1平台100之第1面板元件cl之雙面 黏膠NN除去可撕除保護片NN1，露出黏著材料N。 (5) —面藉金屬線950拉夾920，使第2面板元件c2不 致於撓曲，將其下降至既定位置。 (6) 復且，一面放出金屬線950，一面藉平台驅動裝置 310進一步移動第1平台1〇〇，於藉保持夾800保持之二面 板元件cl、c2之一端部到達壓輥600下方處，開始自第2 面板元件c2上方開始壓緊輥600’。壓輥600’可一面藉其表 層之彈性變形，一面越溫夾800。 (7) 隨著藉壓輥600’所進行第1與第2面板元件cl ' c2 之貼合，一面逐漸下降夾920，一面藉壓輥600’，自端部 保持夾800所保持端部側，依序全面貼合第1與第2面板 元件cl、c2。 其次’將R面板元件與G面板元件貼合之面板元件視 60 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公釐） 1 —III-----! · I------訂--------- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ________B7_____ 五、發明說明（β ) 爲第1面板元件，同時將次一待貼合B面板元件視爲第2 面板元件C2，反覆進行相同步驟，將次一 B面板元件貼合 於業已貼合之面板元件。因此，獲得積層R面板元件、G 面板元件及B面板元件之顯示面板A。 其次，說明藉第5圖所示顯示面板製造裝置製造液晶 顯示面板之一例子。 第12圖顯示用來說明藉第5圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯不板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(5)之圖式，第13圖 顥示用來說明第12圖所示步驟之後續步驟(6)及(7)之圖式 。且第12及13圖爲求簡化，省略一部分構件之圖示。 (1) 將第1面板元件cl(於此爲R板元件)相略定位於第 1平台100上，俾其待貼合面朝上，藉面板元件保持裝置 110吸附面板元件cl於平台100之吸附台1〇1。將第2面 板元件c2(於此爲G面板元件)粗略定位，重疊置於第1面 板元件cl上。 (2) 藉平台驅動裝置310將載置第1及第2面板元件cl 、c2之第1平台1〇〇移動至對準裝置4〇〇,之下方，亦即面 板元件對準位置Q1。於此，使用對準裝置400, ’對準面板 元件C2之位置，將其重疊配置於面板元件cl上。此對準 與第10圖之步驟⑴相同，於此，省略其說明。二面板元 件cl、C2之對準結束後，藉暫時固定裝置1〇〇〇之—夾 1010，將對準之第1及第2面板元件C1、c2之一端部(圖式 中右側之邊部分暫時固定於平台1〇〇。 (3) 〜（4)藉平台驅動裝置31〇,將暫時固定之面板元件 61 本紙張尺度^^中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（2i_x 297公釐) --- I I--III I ---111 1 1 --------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______Β7_______ 五、發明說明（ή ) 與第1平台100 —起移動至原來位置。其次，將暫時固定 R面板元件和G面板元件之面板元件視爲第1面板元件cl ，同時，將次一 B面板元件視爲第2面板元件C2，反覆進 行前述(1)〜（2)之步驟，在一面板元件cl、C2之對準結束 後，藉暫時固定裝置1000之另一夾1010，將對準之第1及 第2面板元件cl、c2之另一端部(圖式中左側之邊部分)暫 時固定於平台100。亦即，藉暫時固定裝置1000之另一夾 1010，將次一B面板元件暫時固定於業已暫時固定之R、G 面板元件上。 (5) 藉平台驅動裝置310將暫時固定之面板元件與第1 平台100 —起移動至原來位置，卸下暫時固定及面板元件 及G面板元件之一夾1010。如此，在對準狀態下，將R、 G、B面板元件重疊、配置成3段。 (6) 將載置暫時藉暫時固定裝置之另一夾1〇1〇固定之R 、G、B面板元件之第1平台1〇〇移動至鑽孔裝置11〇〇之 衝孔機1110下方。藉衝孔機1110同時於R、G、B之三面 板元件開設定位孔。 (7) 其次，例如取代第u圖所示步驟中之步驟(2)，使 用即述定位孔’除保持R、G面板元件之一端部於平台100 外’執行大致如第11圖所示各步驟，將R、G面板元件貼 合’其次’反覆進行相同步驟，進一步將B面板元件貼合 於業已貼合之R、G面板元件，獲得標的顯示面板A。 於藉以上所說明，自第2至5圖所示顯示面板製造裝 置製造之任一顯示面板製造例中，在相鄰面板元件高精變 62 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公愛） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本買) --------訂--------- 472223 A7 _____B7__ 五、發明說明（Μ) .對準位置狀態下貼合，獲得只進行良好影像顯示之顯示面 板。 復由於在藉第2至4圖所示顯示面板裝置製造各顯示 面板之製造例中，相鄰面板元件依序自端部貼合，故可自 此等面板元件間脫氣，使二者密接，於無皺紋狀態下貼合 ，從而獲得進行良好影像顯示之顯示面板。 於藉第5圖所示顯示面板製造裝置製造顯示面板之製 造例中，可面板元件端部依全面進行相鄰面板元件之貼合 ，因此，可自此等面板元件間脫氣，使二者密接，在無皴 紋等狀態下貼合。 又，亦可於第2至5圖所示任一顯示面板製造裝置中 具備減壓室，其用來於相鄰面板元件之貼合中，使二面板 元件之周圍大氣成爲預定減壓環境氣氛。 第14(A)〜14(D)圖顯示於前述第2至5圖所示各顯示 面板製造裝置中分別設置減壓室1200以及與其連接之排氣 室1300之顯示面板製造裝置之槪略構造。 減至室1200具有氣密接性，可包圍平台1〇〇、200、 2〇〇〇’等。且，前述排氣裝置113、213、213’、427等設於 減壓室1200之外側。排氣裝置1300於此係包含回轉泵土 裝置，可將減壓室1200內部排氣減壓。減壓室1200具有 供面板元件出入，省略圖示之氣密門。 在採用此種減壓室1200情形下，於第2至5圖之任一 面板製造裝置中，至少於貼合面板元件時，將減至室1200 內部減降爲預定壓力。此時減壓室1200內之壓力固然不限 63 尺度適ϋ國國家標準(CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） " " (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --------訂---------線 A7 五、發明說明（μ ) 於此，惟’例如達到13pa〜40pa(大約O.lTorr〜〇.3Torr)之 程度。 [B]與第15至20圖有關之顯示面板製造方法及裝置 就有關第15至20圖所說明之顯示面板製造方法及裝 釐根據如次顯示面板製造方法及裝置。 (顯示面板製造方法） 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影- 像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，包括以下步 驟： 於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合之至少一面設置 黏著材料之步驟； 使第1與第2面板元件互相對準位置，將待互相貼合 面配置成相面對之步驟； 在夾有前述黏著材料狀態下，使互相對準位置之第1 與第2面板元件互相至壓接之壓接步驟； 前述壓接步驟中第1與第2面板元件之互相壓接藉由 最初，使該二面板元件部分互相壓接，自該最初互相壓接 部分逐漸擴大互相壓接部分，全面互相壓接來進行。 可舉如次製造方法作爲此顯示面板之製造方法代表例 。亦即， 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影 像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板之方法，包括以 下步驟： 保持第1面板元件於第1平台之步驟； 64 中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------ ------- —訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 __________B7 __ 五、發明說明（β ) 保持第2面板元件於第2平台之步驟； 配置保持於第1及第2平台之第1及第2面板元件， 俾待互相貼合面相面對之步驟； 使第1與第2面板元件互相對準之步驟； 於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面至少一面設置 黏著材料之步驟；以及 在夾有前述黏著材料狀態下，將互相對準位置，保持 於第1及第2平台之第1及第2面板元件夾在第1與第2 平台之間，互相壓接之接步驟； 第1及第2平台中至少一平台係具備設有面板元件保 持面之彈性同時’該面板元件保持面爲預定曲率之凸 曲面之平台。 前述壓接步驟中第1與第2面板元件之互相壓接藉由 使第1與第2平台相對接近，藉此，最初，以前述彈性墊 之凸曲面使該二面板元件部分互相壓接，接著，使二平台 接近，藉此，一面使前述彈性墊彈性變形，一面自該最初 互相壓接部分’逐漸擴大互相壓接部分，全面互相壓接來 進行。 於任一製造方法中，在第1與第2面板元件之待互相 貼合面之至少一面設置黏著材料之步驟可例示有自預先黏 著於面板元件’表面尙以保護片覆蓋之雙面黏膠或黏著片( 此片可爲膠帶狀)除去該保護片，使黏著面露出之步驟，藉 由手操作或以黏著材料或以黏著材料塗覆裝置塗覆黏著材 料面板元件面之步驟。黏著材料之設置方式爲無障礙之任 65 太紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公釐） ， i τ (請先閱讀背面之注意事碩再筇寫本s〉 472223 A7 _________ B7 _ 五、發明說明（q) 意方式。 黏箸材料設置步驟於壓接步驟前實施。只要壓接步驟 前無障礙’即可於任一階段實施。 壓接步驟在設置黏著材料，二面板元件互相對準位置 ，相對向’俾待互相貼合面對之後實施。 又，於任一製造方法中，第1與第2面板元件之互相 對準位®以各種方法進行。例如使用本身業已周知之基板 、面板之對準方法來進行。 可例示如次方作爲對準方法。 (1) 一種對準方法，預先對準標記設置於各面板元件， 固定第1及.第2面板元件中一面板元件於既定位置，重疊 配置另一面板元件於其上，一面目視觀察或以攝影機觀察 二面板元件之對準標記’一面藉由手操作移動該另一面板 元件，使二面板元件之對準標記一致。 於採用此對準方法情形下採用分別保持面板元件於前 述第1及第2平台時，可例如保持一面板元件於任一平台 ，重疊配置另—面板元件於此面板元件上’―面目視觀察 或以攝機觀察二面板元件之對準標記，一面藉由手操作移 動該另一面板元件’使二面板元件之對準標記一致’此後 ，將該另一面板元件保持於另一平台上。 (2) —種對準方法，設置預先對準標記於各面板元件’ 將第1及第2面板元件中一面板元件固定於既定位置’於 其上或上方配置另一面板元件；一面以攝影機觀察二面板 元件之對準標記’ 一面藉X-Υ-β驅動裝置移動該另一面板 66 ^ 紙 準（CNS)A4 規格（210 ~ --— — — — — — —---- — 丨一i I I I 訂·---I---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ---------- B7___ 五、發明說明（0) 元件，使二面板元件之對準標記一致。 於採用此對準方法情形下採用分別保持面板元件於前 述第1及第2平台之方法時，例如，可保持一面板元件於 任—平台，於此面板元件上方配置另一面板元件，一面以 攝影機觀察二面板元件之對準標記，一面以Χ-Υ-0驅動裝 置移動該另一面板元件，使二面板元件之對準標記一致。 用來保持該另一面板元件之平台亦可包含Χ-Υ-0驅動 裝置。於此時保持該另一面板元件於此平台，故可對準該 面板元件之位置，沿X-Υ-θ將其驅動。用來保持該另一面 板元件之平台不包含Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置時，可將對準位置之 該另一面板元件載置於前述一面板元件上，並且將此載置 之另一面板元件保持於此元件用平台。 利用Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置所作之對準固然可手動操作X-Y-Θ驅動裝置來進行，惟亦可藉由根據攝影機所檢測之標記 資訊(例如其位置資訊等），自動控制X-Υ-θ驅動裝置來進 行。於後者情形下。可利用用來來使基板、面板等之對準 之影像處理法。 且，無庸贅言，Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置係可沿方向X、與其 垂直之方向Y移動物體，同時繞垂直於X-Y平面之軸轉動 之裝置。 前述對準標記可爲液晶標記、電場發光標記等藉由通 電來發光之元件。 於前述任一顯示面板製造方法中，藉由壓接步驟，獲 得在夾有前述黏著材料狀態下，互相壓接、積層第1與第 67 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 x 297公爱） — 111丨丨丨------丨丨I I I I I訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 ΚΙ ___ Β7 _ 五、發明說明（b<) 2面板元件之顯示面板。 保持第1及第2面板元件於第1及第2平台，貼合二 面板元件時，藉此二平台夾住二面板元件，使其互相壓接 〇 且，待貼之面板元件爲3個以上時，將藉由壓接步驟 所得之貼合之面板元件視爲前述第1面板元件，同時，將 次一待貼合面板元件視爲前第2面板元件，實質上反覆進 行前述各步驟，將每一個次一面板元件貼合於業已貼合之 面板元件上。 在保持第1及第2面板元件於第1及第2平台情形下 ，該平台對面板元件之保持固然不限於此，惟可舉經由設 平台之吸氣孔吸保持面板元件之情形作爲代表例。於具備 前述彈性墊之平台情形下，此吸氣孔至少設於該彈性墊。 此彈性墊可例示具有用來藉由真空吸引保持面板元件 於前述凸曲面之吸氣用細孔，該細孔藉由該彈性墊於前述 壓接步驟中彈性變形閉合者。此彈性墊可將壓接步驟中二 面板元件互相壓接時保持於彈性墊之面板元件對另一面板 元件壓接之部分解放，藉此，可平穩貼合二面板元件。 前述壓接步驟中第1與第2面板元件之互相壓接可藉 由最初使該二面板元件部分互相壓接，自該最初互相壓接 部分逐漸擴大互相壓接部分，全面互相壓接來進行。藉此 壓接順序，抑制二面板元件位置偏移，開始貼合，同時， 一面自二面板元件間脫氣，一面抑制鮍紋，予以貼合。 壓接步驟中第1與第2面板元件之互相壓接例如藉由 68 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ’ I------· I 丨 I I I I I 訂 — — — — — — — — -^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____ ___B7 --一 - " 、發明說明（0 ) 最初於其中央部使二面板元件互相壓接，自該最初互相壓 接部分逐漸(例如朝同圖或朝面板元件二端部）全面擴大互 相壓接部分來進行。或者，例如藉由最初於其任一端部使 二面板元件互相壓接，自該最初互相壓接部分(例朝向反對 側之端部)逐漸全面擴大互相壓接部分來進行。 保持至少其一具備前述彈性墊之面板元件於第1及第 2平台，將二面板元件貼合時，藉由於壓接步驟第1與第2 平台相對接近，以前述彈性墊之凸曲面，在最初，使該二 面板元件部分互相壓接，接著，藉由使二平台接近，一面 使前述彈性墊彈性變形，一面自該最初互相壓接部分，逐 漸擴大互相學接部分，全面互相壓接。 茲舉此情形之具體例，將彈性墊之凸曲面作成中央部 昇高之凸曲面，例如球面、大致球面、半截圓筒之外周面 狀之曲面，壓接步驟中第1與第2面板元件之互相壓接藉 由二面板元件最初於其中央部互相壓接，自該最初互相壓 接部分逐漸(例如朝同圖或朝面板元件二端部）全面擴大互 相壓接部分來進行。 或者，例如將彈性墊之凸曲面作成一端部高，自該端 部朝另一端部逐漸降低之凸曲面，藉由最初於其一端部使 二面板元件互相壓接，自該最初互相壓接部分朝另一端部 逐漸全面擴大互相壓接部分來進行。 爲了不致於損傷面板元件，使二面板元件不致於進一 步位置偏移，一面自二面板元間平穩脫氣’ 一面充份抑制 面板元件之皺紋等，將第1及第2面板元件貼合’茲推薦 69 ---1 丨丨丨 — — — I* --------訂- -----I--ί (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 ’ 472223 A7 _____Β7-------- 五、發明說明（β ) 前述彈性墊由彈性常數60kgf/cm 2〜200kgf/〇n 2之彈性體構 成者，在凸曲面作成球面、半截圓筒之外周面狀曲面’如 同一端部高，自該部高，自該端部朝另一端部逐漸降低之 凸曲面，作成平滑曲面時，可推薦其凸曲面之曲率半徑爲 2000 mm 〜5000 mm程度。 前述壓接步驟爲了更確實自二面板元件間脫氣’可將 二面板元件周圍氣體壓力設定爲較大氣壓力低之預定減壓 氣體壓力來實施。 於此情形下，可例示該減壓氣體壓力爲13pa〜 40pa(0.1T.on 〜0.3Τοπ)程度。 在保持面板元件於第1及第2平台，貼合二面板元件 情形下，藉由於壓接步驟，藉氣密密封用之可彈性變形之 環構件圍繞第1及第2面板元件，同時將該環構件夾在第 1與第2平台間，於該二面板元件周圍形成氣密室，藉由 自該氣密室排氣，獲得前述減壓氣體壓力。 (顯示面板製造裝置） 一種顯示面板之製造裝置，其係積層用來形成顯示影 像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者’具備： 第1平台，其用來保持一面板元件； 第2平台，其用來保持另一面板元件；以及 平台驅動裝置，其用來使第1與第2平台對向此面板 元件保持面，相對接近背離； 第1及第2平台中至少一平台具備設有面板元件保持 面之彈性墊，同時，該面板元件保持面係預定曲率之凸曲 70 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------Ill---- i I I I I I 1 訂-------I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _________ML__ 五、發明說明（Μ ) 面。 第1及第2平台包含用來保持面板元件之裝置。此保 持裝置固然不限於此，惟，舉例來說，例如有設於平台， 連接於排氣裝置，用來吸附面板元件之吸氣孔。於具備彈 | 性墊之平台情形下，此吸氣孔至少設於該彈性墊。 π 如彈性墊可例示具有用來藉由真空吸引保持面板元件 I ； 於前述凸曲面之吸氣用細孔，該細孔藉由彈性墊於面板元 1 件壓接步驟中彈性變形來閉合者。此彈性墊於壓接步驟中 二面板兀件互相壓接時，可將保持於彈性墊之面板元件對 另一面板元件壓接之部分解放，藉此，可平穩貼合二面板 元件。 ； 若是此種顯示面板製造裝置，即可將待互相貼合面板 元件中一面板元件保持於第1平台，將另一面板元件保持 於第2平台。 ! 惟，此後藉平台驅動裝置使第1及第2平台對向此面 j 板元件保持面，換言之，對向保於此等平台之面板元件之 待互相貼合面，相對接近，藉二平台夾住，貼合二面板元 件。 此面板元件貼合使用黏著材料來進行。如顯示面板製 造方法所說明，該黏著材料在貼合之前設於二面板元件之 待互相貼合面之至少一面上。製造裝置亦可具備黏著材料 塗覆裝置。 I 復在二面板元件貼合之前，使二面板元件互相對準位 置。此對準可如同前述顯示面板製造方法所述進行。 ! 71 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 _____B7_ 五、發明說明（叫） 製造裝置亦可具備面板元件之互相對準裝置，例如使 待互相貼合之二面板元件互相對準位置於第1或第2平台 上之對準裝置。可例示如次裝置。 ⑴一種對準裝置，包括攝影機，其觀察預先形成於各 面板元件之對準標記，以及Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置，其爲了使二 面板元件之對標記一致，對準位置，在保持於第1及第2 平台中任一平台之一面板元件上成型上方驅動另一面板元 件。 ⑵一種對準裝置，具備攝影機，觀察預先形成於各面 板元件之對準標記，Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置，其在保持於第1及 第2平台中/任一平台之一面板元件之成型上方驅動另一面 板元件；以及控制部，其根據來自該攝影機之對準標記資 訊(例如其位置資訊等），控制X-Υ-θ驅動裝置之動作，驅 動該另一面板元件，俾對準標記一致，二面板元件對準位 置。此控制部可例示利用來使基板、面板等對準位置之影 像處理之對準法者。 以上說明之製造裝置如次進行面板元件之貼合。亦即 ，利用前述彈性墊之凸曲面，最初，使二面板元件部分互 相壓接，接著，自該最初互相壓接部分，全面擴大互相壓 接部分。如此，擴大互相壓接部分，將二面板元件貼合， 俾一面防止二面板元件之位置偏移。並一面自二面板元件 間脫氣，復使面板元件不致於發生皴紋。 且，待貼合面板元件爲3個以上時，使用前述最後貼 合所得之貼合面板元件作爲待互相貼合之二面板元件中的 72 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） ’ ----------1 ' I *1111111 ^ --------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _________ 五、發明說明（) 一個。 設於第1及第2平台之一的前述彈性墊之凸曲面可例 示中央部高起之凸曲面，例如球面、大致球面、半截圓筒 之外周面之曲面。在將用上凸曲面情形下，二面板元件之 壓接係於最初一二面板元件於其中央部互相壓接，自該最 初互相壓接部分逐漸(例如朝周圍或面板元件二端部）擴大 互相壓接部分。 或者，例如將前述彈性墊之凸曲面作成一端部高，自 該端部朝另一端部逐漸降低之凸曲面。於此情形下，二面 板元件之互相壓接係最初。二面板元件以其一端部互相壓 接，自該最初互相壓接部分朝另一端部逐漸擴大互相壓接 部分。 爲了不損傷面板元件，使二面板元件互相壓接而不致 於進一步位置偏移，自二面元件平穩脫，抑制面板元件之 皺紋等，可推薦由彈性常數60kgf/cm 2〜200 kgf/cm 2之彈性 俾構成之彈性墊。在彈性墊之凸曲面作成球面、半截圓筒 之外周面狀曲面’如一端部爲，自該端部朝另一端部逐漸 降低之凸曲面平滑之曲面時，可推薦2000〜5000 mm之程度 〇 爲了於二面板元件貼合時，更確實自二面板元件間脫 氣，可設置自第1與第2平台間排氣減壓之排氣裝置。 可例示一種排氣裝置，其係以排氣裝置之簡便裝置， 含有氣密密封用之可彈性變形之環構件，此環構件藉由第 1與第2平台之互相接近，夾在二平台間，與該二平台一 73 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------- — I---- I ----丨 111 訂---------後 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___ B7___ 五、發明說明（？l ) 起圍繞二平台間之面板元件，形成用來進行前述排氣減壓 之氣密室。 以上說明之[B]型方法及裝置固然可適用於各種顯示面 板之製造，惟以下參照第15至20圖，就液晶顯示面板之 製造方法及製造裝置之具體加以說明。 第15圖係用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板A之製 造裝置例之槪略構造圖。 此面板製造裝置具備用來保持一面板元件cl之第1平 台100、用來保持另一面板元件c2之第2平台200以及使 第1及第2平台100、200將其兩面板元件保持面相面對而 相對接近背P之平台驅動裝置300。 於此面板製造裝置中，第2平台200具備設有面板元 件保持面200a之彈性墊220，同時，面板元件保持面220a 爲預定曲承之凸曲面。參照第16、17圖，如後文所述，平 台驅動裝置300藉由第1與第2平台100、200相面對並且 相對接近，最初，藉彈性墊220凸曲面220a使二面板元件 cl、c2部分互相壓接，接著使二平台1〇〇、200接近從而， 一面使彈性墊220彈性壓縮變形，一面自該最初互相壓接 部分逐漸擴大互相壓接部分，全面互相壓接，藉此，積層 面板元件cl、C2，製造顯示面板。 第1及第2平台100 ' 200分別含有第1及第2吸附台 1〇1、201 ’用來保持面板元件之面板元件保持裝置丨10、 210。 第1及第2吸附台101、201分別由具有剛性之材料構 74 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） _ ------------' -------- I 訂---------1 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___ B7____ 五、發明說明（P) 成，於保持面板元件cl、c2之區域，隔預定間距，分別設 置複數用來吸附面板元件之吸氣101a、201a。 面板元件保持裝置110、210除此吸氣孔101a、201a 外，包含吸附台之排氣111、211、撓性管112、212、排氣 裝置113、213，分別地，排氣裝213連接於管112、212之 —端部、管112、212之另一端部連接於排氣111、211，排 氣室111、211分別與吸附台1〇1、201之吸氣孔101a、 201a連通。因此，藉由排氣裝置113、213之運轉，空氣分 別自吸氣孔101a、201a通過排氣室111、211、管112、212 排出。 如前述.，第2平台200具備設有面板元件保持面220a Ί 之彈性墊220。彈性墊220配置在設有第2吸附台201之排 氣室211 —側之反對側。 於此，彈性墊220由連續氣泡性之彈性橡膠發泡體構 成，具有用來藉由抽真空將面板元件C2保持於凸曲面220a 之吸氣用細孔220b。此細孔220b藉由彈性墊220之彈性壓 縮變形閉塞。且，固然於此，彈性墊220內連續發泡性之 彈性橡膠發泡體構成，惟，亦可爲於實心彈性體穿設多數 吸氣孔者。 面板元件保持面220a係一端部220c高起，自該端部 22〇c朝另一端部220d逐漸降低之預定曲率之凸曲面(於此 係曲率半徑爲4000画〜5000腿程度之凸曲面）’可沿此曲 面保持面板元件c2。藉由採用此種凸曲面’二面板元件cl 、c2之互相壓接如以下進行，即二面板元件cl、於最初 75 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） ------I -----. I 1-----訂·11111 — 1 *^ * (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______ . 五、發明說明（Ί)) 將其一端部互相壓接，自該最初互相壓接部分朝另一端部 逐漸擴大互相壓接部分。 此彈性墊220於壓接步驟中二面板元件cl、C2互相壓 接時，藉由該墊之壓縮，閉塞吸氣用細孔，藉此，可解除 保持於彈性墊200之面板元件C2壓接於另一面板元件cl 之部分，從而，可平穩貼合二面板元件cl、c2。 且’爲了使面板元件不致於進一步受損。使二面板元 件cl、c2不致於位置偏移而互相壓接，自二面板元件cl、 c2間平穩脫氣，抑制面板元件之皺紋等，於此，彈性墊 220由彈性常數爲70kgf/cm 2〜120kgf/cm 2〜之彈性體構成。 平台驅動裝置300包含爲驅動第1平台100、第2平 台200而設置之驅動第1平台1〇〇之第1平台驅動部310， 以及驅動第2平台200之第2平台驅動部320。 第1平台驅動部310固然不限於此，惟係設於第1平 台100之小齒輪313與沿導軌311設置之齒條311a嚙合， 藉裝載於第1平台100之馬達312往復旋轉此小齒輪313 者。第1平台100藉第1平台驅動部310沿導軌311移動 ’配置於面板元件保持位置Q1或面板元件貼合位置Q2。 發生此移動時，設於第1平台100之滑件102沿導軌311 滑動。 第2平台驅動部320固然不限於此，惟由活塞汽缸裝 置321及將其驅動之空氣迴路322構成。活塞汽缸裝置321 係複動型，其缸筒部321A配置於固定位置。活塞桿321B 與第二平台200連結。空氣迴路302可將預定壓力之壓縮 76 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公Θ 一一 I 1 — 丨 — I! — II I ---I I 1 I I 訂· - -------邊 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _______B7 ____ 五、發明說明（？+ ) 空氣供至活塞汽缸裝置321。 圖示之狀態顯示其爲壓縮空氣自空氣迴路322供至活 基汽缸裝置321之活塞桿側，活塞桿321B後退至缸筒部 321a內部，第2平台200上昇之狀態。 壓縮空一供自活塞汽缸裝置321之汽缸頭側’活塞桿 321b即突出，第2平台200下降。此後，壓縮空氣一供至 活塞汽缸裝置321之活塞桿蓋側，活塞桿321b及第2平台 200即角度上昇，恢復圖示狀態。 第15圖所示面板製造裝置具備面板元件之互相對準裝 置400，其在二面板元件cl、c2貼合之前，使二面板元件 cl、c2互相對準位置。 對準裝置400具備二台攝影機(於此爲CCD攝影機）、 X-Y- 0驅動裝置420、控制部430。 圖上方俯視各面板元件cl、c2互相對準位置之狀態與 第7圖相同，且，此處之第1平台100、對準裝置400等於 第7圖中省略圖示。 如第7圖所示，於各面板元件cl、c2，在面板元件之 顯示區域，外，分別形成用來預先對準位置之標記ml、m2 。且對準標記固然於此在兩面板元件之對角線兩端區域形 成十字形圖形，惟不限於此，可爲各面板元件能互相對準 之任意圖形，復且，若在顯示區域外，即可形成於任一位 置。又，此對準標記可藉由印刷等形成，於面板元件之電 極形之際’在顯示區域外設置標記用電極’藉由對該標記 用電極施加電壓點燈。於此’在面板元件cl、c2分別印刷 77 -----— — — — — — 'i ·丨 I I 丨 I I l· 訂------I I 1竣' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) t紙張尺度適用_中國國’家標準^NS)A4規格（210 X 297公发") ~ 472223 A7 __B7__ 五、發明說明（〆） 對準標記ml、m2。 第15圖所示CCD攝影410連接於控制部430，可觀察 反板元件cl、c2之預先形成之對準標記ml、m2，將且標 記資訊送至控制部430。 Χ-Υ- β驅動裝置420包括面板元件保持421及X-Y- 0 驅動部422。面板元件保持臂421連接於驅動部422之X-Y-θ方向可動部，可藉其前端部421Α收附保持面板元件 c2。Χ-Υ- 0驅動部422連接於控制部430，可使面板元件保 持臂421及保持於其上之面板元件c2順著預先吸附保持於 第1平台100之面板元件cl表面，沿既定方向（圖式中X 方向），與其垂直之方向(圖式中y方向)移動，同時繞垂直 於x-y平面之軸(圖式中6»方向)轉動。藉此，可根據控制部 430之指示，移動面板元件C2於保持在第1平台1〇〇之面 板元件d上。 如前述，控制部430連接於CCD攝影機410，Χ-Υ-Θ 驅動部420，以來自攝影機410之對準標ml、m2之標記資 訊作爲位置資訊加以處理，根據此位置資訊，控制X-Y_ 6» 驅動部420之動作，俾二面件cl、c2之對準標記ml、m2 一致而準位置。且，控制部430包含利用供基板、面板等 對準位置之影像處理之對準法之裝置。 又，此面板製造，裝置固然可具備設有第15圖中二點 鏈線所示氣密性之氣密室600，氣密氣600可圍繞第1 '第 2平台100、200及各裝置，惟，此處之面板製造裝置並不 具備氣密室600。此氣密室600容後說明。 78 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇χ 297公釐） ’ ---- 1 I--- I 1' ---11 — 1 I-*·-1τ-Ι — — — I III (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7 _— --- 五、發明說明（讣） 其次一面參照第16及17圖，一面就藉此裝置製造第 1圖所示類型之反射型液晶顯示面板例子加以說明。 第16圖係用本說明藉第15圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分⑴至⑷之圖式，第17圖 係爲求簡化，第16及17圖省略一部分構伊之圖示。 於製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板A時，分別就進行紅 色顯示、綠色顯示、藍色2示之R、G、B面板元件各製造 一面板元件。 首先，使用R、G、B面板元件中任一個(於此爲R面 板元件)作爲一面板元件(下稱第1面板元件)cl，使用貼合 於此面板元f之面板元件(於此爲G面板元件)作爲另一面 板元件(下稱第2面板元件)c2，藉由第16圖所示步驟⑴〜 ⑷及第17圖所示步驟⑸〜⑺貼合二面板元件。 亦即_， ⑴在第1與第2面板元件cl、C2之待互相貼合面中至 少一面上，於此係在第1面板元件cl、（R面板元件)設有 前述先吸數層Bk之面之反對面上，預先黏接一表面尙以 可撕除保護片覆蓋之雙面黏膠NN。且，藉此固然使用雙面 黏膠’惟不限於此，亦可爲黏著片。無論如何，可藉由手 操作塗覆黏著材料於面板元件面，或藉黏著材料塗覆裝置 塗覆。黏著材料爲不發生障礙之任意方式。又，設置此黏 著材料之步驟於二面板元件互相壓接步]駿前實施。若在壓 接步驟前，即可在不發生障礙之任一階段實施。 將設有此雙面黏膠NN之第1面板元件cl定位於第1 79 度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公ϋ — --------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明（rn 平台100;使光吸收層bk朝下，藉面板元件保持裝置110 吸附面板元件cl於平台100之吸附台101上。 ⑵載置第2面板元件c2(G面板元件)於第1面板元件 cl上，進行二面板元件cl、c2之互相對準位置。 此對準如次進行。亦即，將載置於面板元件cl上之面 板元件c2保持在暫時對準裝置400之前端部421a，於此狀 態下，一面以CCD攝影410觀察二面板元件cl、c2之對 準標記ml、m2，一面藉Χ-Υ-0驅動裝420移動第2面板 元件c2，使二面板元件cl、c2之對準標記ml、m2 —致。 此置對準步驟藉由以攝影機410檢測出之標記資訊作爲位 資訊，加以擊像處理，根據此位置資訊，自動控制Χ-Υ-Θ 驅動裝置420來進行。對準處理一結束，即角度將面板元 件c2載置於面板元件cl上。 X-Y- 0驅動裝置420之位對準可手動操作-γ_ 0驅動裝 置420來進行。又，用來保持第2面板c2之第2平台200 可包含Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置。此時，由於保持面板元件C2於 此平台200上’故沿X-Y- 0驅動，俾使面板元件c2對準位 置’又，亦可不使用Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置，而且視觀察或以攝 影機觀察二面板元件cl、c2之對準標記ml、m2，一面手 操作移動第2面板元件c2，使二面板元件cl、c2之對準標 記 ml ' m2 — 致。 ⑶第一與第2面板元件cl、c2之對準一結束，即如前 述，自保持第2面板元件c2之X-Y- 0驅動裝置420之面板 元件保持臂421放下面板元件c2，載置於面板元件cl上， 80 本紙度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4 ^各(210 X 297公釐1 一 ^ ---11111----* · I — 111 11 — — — — — —--- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____ B7__ 五、發明說明（吖） 惟，此後藉平台驅動裝置300之第1平台驅動部310將第1 平台100移動至第2平台200下方(第15圖中Q2之位置）， 使第1及第2平台之面板元件cl、c2保持面相面對。 其次，藉平台驅動裝置300之第2平方驅動部320降 下第2平台200，在平台200之彈性墊220接觸第2面板元 件c2處，藉由面板元件保持裝置210之真空抽取，吸引保 持第2面板元件c2於彈性墊220之凸曲面220a，進一步藉 第2平台驅動部310使吸附第2面板元件C2之第2平台 200上昇，待機。 ⑷自貼在第1平台100之第1面板元件cl上之雙面黏 膠NN除去可撕除保護片NN，露出黏著材料N。 ⑸藉平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320降下第 2平台200，使第1與第2平台100、200將其面板元件cl 、c2保持面相面對，換言之，使保持於平台100、200之面 板元件cl、c2之待互相貼合面相面對而相對接近。 ⑹在平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320所施預 定加壓力下，利用彈性墊220之凸曲面220a，在最初，使 二面板元件cl、c2開始部分(於本例係其端部)互相壓接， 接著，一面使具有凸曲面之彈性墊220彈性壓縮變形，一 面自該最初互相壓接部分朝另一端部脫氣，藉彈性墊220 與第1平台100之剛體部101夾住二面板元件cl、c2，逐 漸擴大互相壓接部分。此其間，墊220之彈性變形部分之 吸氣用細孔閉塞，第2面板元件c2逐漸自第2平台之墊 220釋放。藉此，二面板元件cl、c2平穩貼合。 81 ---1--------i -----111 訂·-------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 __B7__ 五、發明說明（ ⑺如此，爲了防止二面板元件cl、c2之位置偏移，且 一面自二面板元件cl、c2間脫氣’復避免於面板元件發生 波紋成皺紋’擴大相壓接部分’緊密貼合二面板元件cl、 C2。因此，R面板與G面板元件貼合。 並且，二面板元件之貼合一結束，面板元件保持裝置 210之抽真空即停止，第2平台200上昇復至最初位置，第 2平台100維持將貼合之面板元件保持，返回最初位置Q1 。其次，將如此獲得之R面板元件與G面板元件貼合之面 板元件視爲第1面板元件cl，同時，將次一待貼合B面板 元件視爲第2面板c2，反覆進行前述各步驟⑴至⑺，將次 一 B面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元件上。無庸贅言， 藉由將保持如前述貼合之面板元件之第1平台1〇〇配置成 返回位置Q1，亦可實行步驟⑴之一部分。從而，獲得積層 R面板元件，G面板元件及B面板元件之顯示面板A。 第18圖顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板A之 另一製造裝置例。 第18圖所示面板製造裝置於第15圖所示面板製造裝 置中，對第1平台100放置排氣裝置500，放置第2平台 200’以替代第2平台200。其他點與第15圖之裝置相同’ 以相同參考符號標示具有相構造。作用之構件。 以下就第18圖所示面板製造裝置，以異於第15之裝 置之要點爲中心加以說明。 第18圖之面板製造裝置具備用來保持一面板元件cl 之第1平台100、用來保持另一面板元件c2之第2平台 82 L . 1 11 1"" 1 丨丨丨_ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） - -- - --------'裝 ----—II ^ > — —— — — 11— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 !__ _B7_ 五、發明說明（,?° ) 200’ ’用來係第1與第2平台1〇〇、200’將其面板元件保持 面相面對而相對接近背離之平台驅動裝置300。 於此面板製造裝置中，第2平台200,具備設有面板元 件保持面200a’之彈性墊，同時，面板元件保持面200a爲 預定曲承之凸曲面，參照第19、20圖，如後文所述，平台 驅動裝置300使第1與第2平台100、200,相面對並且相對 接近’藉此，於最初，以彈性墊200,之凸曲面200a’使二面 板元件cl、c2部分互相壓接，接著，使二平台100、200’ 接近’藉此，一面使彈性墊200’彈性壓縮變形，一面自最 初互相壓接部分逐漸擴大互相壓接部分而全面互相壓接， 從而積層面板元件cl、c2，製造顯示面板。 第2平台200’包含第2吸附台201’，用來保持面板元 件之面板元件保持裝置,210’。 第2吸附台20Γ由具有剛性之材料構成，台保持面板 元件c2之區域，隔預定間距，設有複數個用來吸附面板牛 之吸氣孔201a’。 面板元件保持裝置210’除此吸氣孔201a’外，包含排氣 室211、撓性管212、排氣裝置213，分別地，排氣裝置 213連接於管212之一端部，管212之另一端部連接於排氣 室211’，排氣室21Γ與吸附台20Γ之吸氣孔201a’連通。因 此，藉由排氣裝置213之運轉，空氣自吸氣孔201a’通過排 氣室211’、管212排出。 如前述，第2平台200’具備設有面板元件保持面220a’ 彈性墊200’。彈性墊220’配置在吸附台20Γ設置排氣室 _83 __ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7_____ 五、發明說明（？丨） 211’一側之對對側。 彈性墊220’此由與第15之製造裝置之彈性墊220相同 之材料，亦即由連續氣泡性之彈性橡膠發泡體構成，具有 用來藉由抽真空保持面板元件C2於凸曲面200a’吸氣用細 孔220b’。此細孔220b’藉由彈性壓縮變形閉塞。 面板元件保持面220a’待中央高起之預定曲率之凸曲面 (於此爲曲率半徑達4000 mm〜5000 nun程度之凸曲面），可沿 此曲面保持面板元件c2。可採用例如球面，不致球面，半 截圓筒之外周面狀曲面來作爲凸曲面200a’，於此，其爲球 面。藉由採用此凸曲面，二面板元件cl、c2之互相壓接變 成在最初，使二面板元件cl、c2以其中央部互相壓接，自 該最初互相壓接部分的周圍擴大互相壓接部分。 . 此彈性墊200’藉由於壓接步驟中二面板元件cl、c2互 相壓接時在該墊壓縮下閉塞吸氣用細孔，解除保持於彈性 墊220之面板元件C2對另一面板元件cl壓接之部分。從 而可平穩貼合二面板元件cl、c2。 且，爲了使面板元件不致於損傷，使二面元件cl、c2 不致於位置偏移而互相壓接，平穩地自二面板元件cl、c2 間脫氣，抑制面板元件之皺紋等。於此，彈性墊220、由 彈性常數爲70kgf/cm 2〜120 kgf/cm 2之彈性體構成。 設置排氣裝置500，俾在二面板元件cl、c2貼合時， 更確實地自二面板元件cl、c2間脫氣，其包含環構件510 ，空氣入用管520、撓性管530，真空泵540。 環構件510係藉由第1與第2平台100、200’互相接近 84 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 111 — I - - ------·丨 I I 丨丨 I 1 訂 — — — — — — — II (靖先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7 _ 五、發明說明（β) ，夾在二平台間，與該二平台一起圍繞二平台間之面板元 件cl、c2，形成用來排氣減壓之氣密室之氣密密封用之可 彈性變形環構件。於此，此環構件由橡膠製成，設於第一 平台100之吸附台101。 空氣吸入用管520與設在第1平台環構件51〇與 面板元件cl保持區域間之買通孔嵌合，連接於撓性管530 之另一端部。藉此，可將第1、第2平台1〇〇、200’及環構 件510形成之氣密室內部排氣減壓。 又’此面板製造裝置固然與第15圖之製造裝置相同， 可具備第15圖中二點鏈線所示氣密室600，惟，於此並不 具備此氣密室。 其次，一面參照第19及20圖，一面就藉此裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一例示加以說明。 第19圖係用來說明藉第18圖所示面板製造裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分⑴至⑷之圖式，第20圖 係用來說明第19圖所示步驟之後續步驟⑸至⑻之圖式。且 ，第19及20圖爲了簡化，省略一部分構件之圖示。 於製造第1圖所示反射型液晶顯示面板A時，分別就 進行紅色顯色、綠色顯示、藍色顯示之R、G、B面板元件 各製作一個面板元件。 首先，使用R、G、B面板元件中任一面板元件作一面 板元件(下稱第1面板元件)cl，使用貼合於此面板元件之面 板元件(於此爲G面板元件)爲另一面板元件(下稱第2面板 元件)c2，藉由第19圖所示步驟⑴〜⑷以及第20圖所示步 85 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 IIIIIIIIIII' I I i I ! I I I ----- —---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7__ 五、發明說明（0 ) 驟⑸〜⑻，將二面板元件貼合。 ⑴於第1與第2面板元件cl、c2之待互相貼合全面中 至少一面，於此係在第1面板元件cl。（R面板元件)之未 設有光吸收層BK側之一面上，預先黏著於一表面尙以保 護脫模片NN，覆蓋之雙面黏膠(亦可爲黏著片)NN。 將設有此雙面黏膠NN之第1面板元件cl定位，使光 吸收層BK向下，藉面板元件保持裝置11〇將面板元件cl 吸附於平台100之吸附台101上。 ⑵載置第2面板元件c2(G面板元件)於第1面板元件 cl，進行二面板元件cl、c2之互相對準位置。此對準與藉 第15之裝置所進行之第16圖之步驟⑵相同，台此省略其 說明。 ⑶第1與第2面板元件cl、c2對準一結束，即自保持 第2面板牛c2之Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置420之面板元件保持臂 421放下面板元件c2，再載置於面板元件cl上，惟此後藉 平台驅動裝置300之第1平台驅部310，將第1平台100移 動至第2平台200’下方(圖式中Q2’)之位置，使第1及第2 平台之面板元件cl、c2保持面相面對。 其次，藉平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320降 下第2平台200’，於平台200’之墊220’接觸第2面板元件 c2處，藉由利用面板元件保持裝置210’所作真空吸引，吸 引保持第2面板元件c2於彈性墊220’之凸曲面220a’上， 進一步藉第2平台之驅動部320使吸附第2面板元件C2之 第2平台200’上昇而待機。 86 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(0Ss)A4^格（210 X 297公" ·· t --------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____B7 _ 五、發明說明（W ) ⑷自貼在第1平台100之第1面板元件cl上之雙面黏 膠NN除去可撕除保持片NN，露出黏著材料N。 ⑸藉平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320降下第 2平台20.0’，係第1與第2平台1〇〇、200,之面板元件cl、 c2保持面相面對，換言之，係保持於平台1〇0、200面板元 件cl、c2之待互相貼合面相面對而相對接近。 ⑹在平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320所施預 定壓力下’利用彈性墊220’之凸曲面220a’，最初，使二面 板元件cl、c2開始部分(於本例係其中央部)互相壓接。於 此壓接步驟中’在第2平台接觸橡膠製環構件510處，形 成用來排氣減壓之氣密室P。此時，藉真空泵540吸出氣 密室P之空氣’使氣密室p成爲低於大氣壓力之預定壓力( 於此爲20pa〜30pa)。 ⑺亦在開始步驟⑹之動作後，接著降下第2平台200’ ，一面將具有球面之彈性墊220’彈性壓縮變形，自前述最 初互相壓接部分脫氣，一面以彈性墊210’與第1平台100 之剛體部101夾住二面板元件cl、c2，逐漸擴大互相壓接 部分。於此期間，閉塞墊220’之彈性形部分之吸氣用細孔 ，面板牛c2逐漸自第2平台之墊200’釋放。藉此，平穩貼 合二面板，元件cl、c2。 ⑻如此，擴大互相壓接部分，夾住、貼合二面板元件 ，俾一面防止二面板元件cl、c2之位置偏移，並一面自二 面板元件cl、c2間脫氣，復使面板元件不致於發生波紋或 皺紋。從而，貼合及面板元件與G面板元件。 87 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） · -------- I I I I 11 J - I I I I I I I ^ --------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____Β7_ 五、發明說明（β) 並且，二面板元件之貼合一結束，利用面板元件保持 裝置210’所作真空保持即停止，第2平台上昇回復至最初 位置，第1平台1〇〇維持對貼合面板元件之保持，回復至 最初位置Q1， 其次，將如此獲得之R面板元件與G面板元件貼合之 面板元件裡爲第1面板元件cl，同時將次一待貼合B面板 元件視爲第2面板元件c2，實質上反覆進行前述各步驟⑴ 至⑻，將次一 B面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元件上。 從而獲得積層R面板元件、G面板元件及B面板元件之顯 示面板A。 且，第U5及18圖所示面板製造裝置固然採用空氣壓 力驅動作爲第2平台驅動部520之平台驅動方式，惟，亦 可採用油壓驅動及其他驅動機構。復可採用偏心凸輪機構 及其他機構作爲第2平台驅動部。 又，於第15圖所示面板製造裝置中，爲了於二面板元 件cl、c2貼合時，更確實自二面板元件cl、C2間脫氣， 可使用第18圖所示面板製造裝置之排氣裝置500形成氣密 室，將該氣密室內部排氣減壓。於第15及18圖所示任一 面板製造裝置中，可取代排氣裝置500，或倂設將前述氣 密室600(參照第15圖)及該室內部排氣減壓之排氣裝置， 藉該排氣裝置將該室內部排氣減壓。 且，於第15及18圖所示的面板製造裝置中設置氣密 室600時’固然第15圖顯不於氣密室內設有排氣裝置113 、213及空氣迴洛322，惟若設置於氣密室內不適者，與設 88 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 " ' ' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I ---- 訂---------線 472223 A7 ___ B7 __ 五、發明說明（侈） 置於氣密室外，又，在使用排氣裝置500情形下，真空泵 540亦設置於氣密室外， [c]與第21至24圖有關之顯示面板之製造方法及裝置 就有關第21至24圖所說明之顯示面板製造方法及裝 置係根據如次顯示面板製造方法及裝置者。 (顯示面板製造方法） 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影 像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，包括以下步 驟： 保持第1面板元件於第1平台之步驟； 保持第.;2面板元件於第2平台之步驟； 將保持於第1及第2平台之第1及第2面板元件配置 或待互相貼合面相面對之步驟； 使第1與第2面板元件互相對準位置之步驟； 將黏著材料設在第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面 之至少一面之步驟；以及 藉前述黏著材料將配置成互相對準位置，保持第1及 第2平台，待互相貼合面相面對之第1與第2面板元件互 相貼合之貼合步驟； 第2平台作成具有吸附面板元件中央區域之中央吸氣 孔及吸附面板元件之前述中央區域之外側區域之外側吸氣 孔’藉由自此等吸氣孔吸氣，吸附保持面板元件之平台； 前述貼合步驟包括以下步驟； 接近步驟，其使配置成互相對準位置，保持於第1及 89 "張尺;關家辟（CNS)A4祕（2K) X 297公爱) Γ清先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --------訂---------線. 472223 A7 ____ 五、發明說明（β) 第2平台，待互相貼合面相面對之第1與第2面板元件相 對接近二平台，藉此，互相接近至隔預定距離； 中央接觸步驟，其在接近步驟後，將第2平台與保持 於其上之面板元件之中央區域間之氣壓設定成相對於第1 與第2面板元件間之氣壓爲高壓，根據第2平台上之面板 元件中央區域兩者間之氣壓差，在夾有黏著材料狀態下， 使第2平台上面板元件之中央區域接觸保持於第1平台之 面板元件；以及 壓接步驟，其在中央接觸步驟後，藉由進一步使二平 台相對接近，在夾有黏著材料狀態下，使二面板元件相全 面貼合。/ 此顯示面板製造方法中設置黏著材料於第1與第2面 板元件之待互相貼合面之至少一面之步驟如例示可爲自預 黏著於面板元件面，且表面尙以保護片覆蓋之雙面黏著片 或黏著片(此片亦可爲帶狀)除去該保護片’露出黏著材料 之步驟，或藉由手操作或以黏著材料塗覆裝置將黏著材料 塗覆於面板元件面之步驟。黏著材料之設置爲無障礙之任 意方式。 設置黏著材料之步驟在貼合步驟前實施。只要貼合步 驟前無障礙，即可於任一階段實施。 貼合步驟在二面板元件互相對準位置’相對向，俾待 互相貼合面相面對之後實施。 又，第1與第2面板元件之互相對準位置藉由各種方 法進行。例如使用本身業已周知之基板、面板之對準方法 90 ------------------------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ^__B7__ 五、發明說明（# ) 來進行。 對準方法可例示如次方法。 (1) 於各面板元件設置預先對準標記，保持一面板元件 任一平台上，重疊配置另一面板元件於此面板元件上，一 面目視觀察或以攝影機觀察二面板元件之對準標記，一面 藉由手操作移動該另一面板元件，使二面板元件之對準標 記一致，此後，將該另一面板元件保持於另一平台上。 (2) 於各面板元件設置預先對準標記，保持一面板元件 於任一平台上，配置另一面板元件於此面板元件上或上方 ，一面以攝影機觀察二面板元件之對準標記，一面藉X-Y-(9驅動裝置移動該另一面板元件，使二面板元件之對準標 記一致。 於此情形，用來保持該另一面板元件之平台可包含X-Υ-Θ驅動裝置。由於此時該另一面板元件保持於此平台上 ，故可沿X-Υ-θ驅動該面板元件，使其對準位置。於用來 保持該另一面板元件之平台不包含x-γ-θ驅動裝置時，可 在將對準位置之該另一面板元件載於前述一面板元件上時 ，保持此載置之面板元件於對應之平台上。 且，對準標記可爲液晶標記、電場發光標記等藉由通 電來發光之標記。 X-Y-<9驅動裝置之對準固然可手動操作Χ-Υ-Θ驅動裝 置來進行，惟亦可藉由根據攝影機偵測之標記資訊（例如 位置資訊等），自動控制Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置來進行。於後者 情形下，可利用供基板、面板等對準位置之影像處理法。 91 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I1IIIIIIIIIJ — * I I I I I I 1 ^ ---------吟 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 --—______ B7 _ 五、發明說明（β ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 且，無庸贅言，Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置係可沿方向X，與其 垂直之方向X移動物體，同時繞垂直於X-Y平面之軸轉動 之裝置。 第1平台對面板元件之保持固然不限於此，惟可舉藉 由自該設於第1平台之吸氣孔吸氣吸附保持面板元件之情 形作爲代表例。 第2平台對面板元件之保持藉由分別自設於第2平台 之前述中央吸氣孔及外側吸氣孔吸氣，吸附保持面板元件 0 前述貼合步驟首先實施二面板元件之接近步驟，藉由 使第1與第；2面板元件相對接近二平台，互相接近至隔預 定距離。 其次實施中央接觸步驟。於此步驟，將第2平台與保 持於其上之第2面板元件之中央區域間之氣壓設定成相對 地較第1、第2面板元件間氣壓高之高壓，於第2面板元 件中央區域兩間產生氣壓差。此氣壓差可藉由種種方法來 產生。 例如，將二面板元件間之氣壓設定爲較大氣壓力低之 預定氣壓，同時，切斷自第2平台之中央吸氣孔吸氣，將 外氣導入該中央吸氣孔，將第2平台與保持於其上之中央 區域間之氣壓設定成相對地較二面板元件間氣壓高之高壓 。藉此，於第2平台上之面板元件中央區域兩面間產生氣 壓差。 無論如何，根據面板元件中央區域兩面間之此氣壓差 92 本紙張^適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297 ^爱) "~' 一 472223 A7 !____B7___ 五、發明說明（？。） ，彎曲第2平台上面板元件之中央區域，在夾有黏著材料 狀態下，接觸保持於第1平台之面板元件。此中央區域之 彎曲亦可借助於面板元件本身之重量。亦即，可藉由氣壓 差和面板元件含有中央區域之部分之本身重量彎曲。 其次實施全面貼合二面板元件之壓接步驟。 ‘於貼合步驟中，在全面貼合二面板元件之前，如此使 二面板元件之中央區域互相接觸。藉此，使二面板元件不 會受到一舉施行貼合衝擊，可平穩達到最初貼合開始狀態 ，抑制二面板元件之位置偏移。 其次，二面板元件全面壓接貼合。此時，中央區域業 已接觸之二.P板元件自該中央區域朝周圍逐漸擴大接觸區 域而貼合，藉此，自二面板元件間脫氣，在二面板元件密 接狀態下，在抑制皺紋等狀態下，在精度對準位置狀態下 貼合。 且，符貼合面板元件爲3個以上時，將藉壓接步驟所 得貼合之面板元件視爲前述第1面板元件，同時，將次一 待貼合面板元件視爲前述第2面板元件，實質反覆進行前 述各步驟，將每一次一面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元 件上。 於前述貼合步驟之二面板元件之中央接觸步驟後之壓 接步驟中，可在平穩全面壓接貼合二面板元件後，停止藉 由自第2平台之外側吸氣孔吸氣吸附’同時’亦將外氣導 入該外側吸氣孔，解除第2平台對面板元件之保持。於此 情形下，固然可在壓接步驟最初階段之後，切斷自第2平 93 -- .-. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） · ---------------------訂---------^ ί (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 __B7__ 五、發明說明（叫） 台之外側吸氣孔吸氣，同時，亦將外氣導入該外側吸氣孔 ，惟，爲了更確實自二面板元件間脫氣，亦可在二面板元 件互相全面壓接貼合，同時二面板元件經由黏著材料全面 成大致全面接觸後，停止第2平台之外側吸氣孔之吸附， 同時，亦將外氣導入該外側吸氣孔。 又，於中央接觸步驟後之壓接步驟中，固然可在最初 階段之後，使元件周圍之氣體壓力恢復爲周圍之外氣壓， 惟爲了更確實自二面板元件間脫氣，可在二面板元件經由 黏著材料全面或大致全面接觸後，恢復外氣壓。當然，在 壓接步驟結束前之期間內，可維持二面板元件周圍之氣體 壓力於前述預定低壓。 無論如何，於前述二面板元件之中央接觸步驟中，在 二面板元件間之氣壓設定爲低於大氣壓力低之預定氣壓情 形下，固然可將包含保持第1及第2面板元件之第1及第 2平台等之區域之全部氣體減壓或低於大氣壓力之低壓， 惟，就簡易方法而言，可藉由以氣密密封用之可彈性變形 環構件圍繞第1及第2面板元件，同時將該環構件夾裝在 第1與第2平台間，於該二面板元件周圍形成氣密室，藉 由自該氣密室排氣，減低前述二面板元件間之氣壓。 前述二面板元件之接近步驟中二面板元件之互相接近 距離以及前述面板元件中央區域兩面間之氣壓差程度（例 如供產生此氣壓差之二面板元件中央接觸步驟中二面板元 件間之減壓程度及導入第2平台之中央吸氣孔之外氣量（ 退出量）程度）亦考慮保持非第2平台之面板元件之大小 94 (請先闓讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -— -------I ^ till — — — — 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 _____B7_ 五、發明說明（f) 、彈性等，可設定成，中央接觸步驟中，平穩達到前述二 面板元件之中央接觸狀態。 κ 固然不限於此，惟可例示前述接近步驟中互相接近距 離大槪爲1腿〜2腿程度，第2平台上面板兀件兩側之氣 壓差爲lOPa〜30Pa (大致0.08Torr〜0.23Torr)程度。472223 A7 __ B7___ V. Description of the invention (I) The present invention is based on invention patent applications 2000-96620, 2000-96614, 2000-98095, 2000-96542, 2000-96545, and 2000-96545 filed in Japan. 96546 'The contents are mentioned for your reference. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for manufacturing a display panel (disPloy Panel) for displaying images. The present invention relates to an adhesive sheet bonding method and a plate bonding method applicable to the manufacture of display panels and other aspects. 2. Description of the Related Art Image display panels include liquid crystal display panels, electroluminescence display panels, and display panels combined with each other. This image display panel has one panel element (panel element), but it also has multiple layers. For example, a display panel that displays a color image is constructed by stacking panel elements that display images of different colors. A liquid crystal display panel for displaying a full-color image includes layers such as a panel element for displaying in blue, a panel element for displaying in green, and a panel element for displaying in red, forming a panel capable of displaying a full-color image. Panelist. In any case, in the case where a plurality of panel elements are laminated in this way to form an image display panel, in order to perform desired image display, adjacent panel elements are required to be attached to each other. That is, in order to display the desired image, for example, 4 paper sizes are required to apply the Chinese Goods Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm). ------------- ---- ---- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _B7___ V. Description of the invention (Y) Make the adjacent panel components in the same position and stick to each other At least one of close contact bonding, close bonding, and bonding so as not to cause collapse. Also, in general, most people use adhesive sheets for bonding two boards. In manufacturing a display panel by laminating a plurality of panel elements, there are also those who adhere paper adjacent panel elements through an adhesive sheet. In the case where the panel components and other boards are bonded through the adhesive sheet, it is 〆 -............. One piece of ............ * Use, centimeter: § There are separators ( s inverse arator), first, the first sheet arranged on the flat plate, and attached the adhesive sheet without the one-sided separator. Thereafter, the remaining one-sided separator was removed, and the second plate was attached thereto. However, when the adhesive sheet is attached to the first plate disposed on the flat plate, the air bubbles are easy to enter, and the air bubbles are difficult to remove. In order to prevent air bubbles from infiltrating, it is advisable to carry out the attaching step in the chamber under pressure, but, ... one-......... 'J, ; .............., This Η # 蒌 座座 本 was increased. Summary of the Invention The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for manufacturing a display panel for displaying an image, and the object of the present invention is to provide a method and an apparatus for manufacturing a display panel that can be laminated in a state where it is required to be adjacent to a panel component to obtain only a good image display. In particular, the present invention is a method and device for laminating panel elements used to form a display panel for displaying an image. The method and device for manufacturing a display panel are shoe-closed in a state where the position of the panel element next to the scale g is aligned. Manufacturing method and device of display panel with good image display. In addition, the present invention is a method and a device for manufacturing a panel element for forming a display panel for displaying an image by laminating layers, the purpose of which is to control and control the demagnetization between adjacent panel elements so that the two are tightly connected, and there is no wrinkle, etc. Status ------ .................. ', ...... 乂: ^ · 〆, ____:-': .-. '. 二. ·', 5 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). ------------ i ----- 1 Order II ------ I, (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _ B7__ V. Description of the invention (spoon) The display panel that is bonded together to obtain a display panel that only performs a good image display Manufacturing method and device. In addition, the present invention is a method and an apparatus for manufacturing a display panel by laminating panel elements for forming a display panel for displaying an image, and the purpose thereof is to provide a display panel manufacturing that can firmly adhere to adjacent panel elements and perform good image display stably for a long time. Method and device. In addition, the present invention is applicable to display panel manufacturing and other bonding sheet bonding methods and board bonding methods, and the object of the present invention is also to provide a method of making P bubbles and infiltrations, and bonding a bonding sheet to a board, and The method of suppressing the incorporation of air bubbles and bonding the board and the like through an adhesive sheet. The present invention provides the manufacturing methods of display panels of the first to fourth types, and further provides a manufacturing apparatus of the display panel. A device to be described later is also provided for the display panel manufacturing device. The present invention further provides the first to third types of adhesive sheet bonding methods and the first to third types of sheet bonding methods. (1) Manufacturing method of display panel (1-1) Manufacturing method of display panel of type 1 A manufacturing method of display panel, which is a method of manufacturing display panel for displaying image, includes the following steps: The first panel element and the second panel element of at least one display layer are aligned to face each other; and a panel bonding step, which sequentially bonds the first panel element and the first panel element aligned from the starting point through an adhesive material. 2 panel components. (1-2) Manufacturing method of the second type of display panel 6 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 丨- -I ---- Order --------- line 472223 A7 V. Description of the invention (—The manufacturing method of the surface display method, which touches the display panel of the compilation image, includes the following steps; Make the panels the same A step of facing the first panel element and the second panel element each including at least a display layer; the panel bonding step of bonding the first panel element and the second panel element through an unhardened adhesive material : A panel alignment step that relatively moves the first and second panel components that are bonded together to align the two panel components; and an adhesive material hardening step that hardens the adhesive material after the panel alignment step ^ (1-3) Type of display panel manufacturing method A method of manufacturing a display panel is a method of manufacturing a display panel for displaying an image, including the following steps: an adhesive material setting step, which sets the adhesive material at the first 1 and 2 panel components On at least one panel element; an opposite step, which makes the first and second panel elements in the same position and opposite to each other; a first crimping step, which interposes between the first and second panel elements in the same position as each other In the state of the aforementioned bonding material, they are crimped to each other under the first condition; and a second crimping step, which is performed after the first crimping step and under a second condition different from the first condition. 1 and 2 panel components are crimped to each other. (1-4) Manufacturing method of type 4 display panel (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -Installation -------- Order-- ------- The paper size of the paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 _______B7________ V. Description of the invention ( <) A method for manufacturing a display panel, the method for manufacturing a display image, includes the following steps: (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The first panel component holding step, which holds the first panel component on the first Platform; a second panel element holding step, which holds the second panel element on the second platform; a facing step, which causes the first and second panel elements held on the first and second platforms to face each other; a position matching step , Which makes the first and second panel elements in the same position with each other; an adhesive material setting step, which sets the adhesive material on at least one of the first and second panel elements; a first crimping step, which The first and second panel elements held on the i and second platforms are aligned with each other in a state where the aforementioned bonding material is interposed, and, under the first condition, sandwiched between the first and second platforms And a second crimping step; and a second crimping step, after the first crimping step, the first and second panel elements are in a state where the aforementioned bonding material is interposed, and the first condition is different from the first condition Under condition 2 Interposed between the first and the second platform, each crimp. (2) Display panel manufacturing device A display panel manufacturing device is a device for manufacturing a display panel for displaying an image, and includes: a first platform, which is used to hold a panel component; 8 This paper size applies the Zhongguanjia standard ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 ---- ~ 472223 A7 _B7___ V. Description of the invention (b) The second platform is used to hold another panel element; and the platform driving device is used to make the first and These panel element holding surfaces of the 2 platforms are opposite to each other and relatively close to separation; at least one of the aforementioned first and second platforms is provided with an elastic pad provided with a panel element holding surface, and the panel element holding surface is convexly curved. When the aforementioned platform driving device makes the first and second platforms relatively close, under the first pressure, the aforementioned panel element held on the aforementioned first platform and the aforementioned panel element held on the aforementioned second platform It is crimped to each other, and further crimped under a second fixed pressure which is larger than the first applied force. (3) Adhesive sheet bonding method (3-1) Adhesive sheet bonding method of the first type An adhesive sheet Board bonding method The method includes the following steps: a plate disposition step, which disposes the plate at a predetermined position; a positioning step, which fixes one end of the aforementioned panel in a predetermined direction and one end of an adhesive sheet having a through hole; and a laminating step, which maintains the aforementioned reservation on one side The other end of the aforementioned adhesive sheet is far from the side of the board, so that the aforementioned adhesive sheet is adhered to the board from the aforementioned one end toward the other end. (3-2) Method for bonding type 2 adhesive sheet The method includes the following steps: a plate arranging step, which arranges the plate at a predetermined position; a positioning step, which positions one end of the aforementioned plate in a predetermined direction and one end of the adhesive sheet rolled into a cylindrical shape with a through hole; and 9 standards are applicable to Chinese national standards (CNSXA4 specifications (21〇X 297)) ------------------------ Order -------- -(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___B7 _ 5. Description of the invention (1) The bonding step is to roll from the aforementioned end of the aforementioned board in the predetermined direction to the other end, so that it is rolled into the aforementioned cylinder Rolls of adhesive on the board Thereby, the adhesive sheet is bonded to the board; (3-3) The third type of adhesive sheet bonding method includes the following steps: The adhesive sheet preparation step prepares an adhesive sheet, and the adhesive sheet has A groove, at least one end of which is formed as an edge of an adhesive sheet; the adhesive sheet attaching step 'attaches the adhesive sheet to the board in the state of the aforementioned facing plate forming the aforementioned groove; and a pressure applying step which In the state where the aforementioned adhesive sheet is attached to the aforementioned board, pressure is applied to the adhesive sheet. ⑷Board bonding method (4-1) The first type of board bonding method is a method in which the first board and the second board are bonded via the adhesive sheet. The combined method includes the following steps: a first plate arranging step, which arranges the first plate at a predetermined position; a positioning step, which positions one end of the aforementioned first plate in a predetermined direction and one end of the adhesive sheet having a through-hole with each other; Adhesive sheet attaching step 'One side keeps the other end of the aforementioned adhesive sheet in the previous direction away from the first board, and one side from the one end to the other end, attaches the adhesive sheet to the first board; and the second board paste Attached steps' It attaches a 2nd board to the said adhesive sheet. (4-2) The second type of board bonding method A method for bonding the first board and the second board via an adhesive sheet, including the following steps: This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X) 297 public love)------ ---- I Ϊ --- IIIII --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ---_ _____B7__ 5 2. Description of the invention (χ) The first plate arranging step is to arrange the first plate at a predetermined position; the positioning step is to roll one end of the first plate in a predetermined direction with a through hole and roll it into a cylindrical adhesive sheet ~ The end is positioned; the step of attaching the adhesive sheet is from the one end of the first plate to the other end in the predetermined direction, so that the cylindrical adhesive sheet rolled in the cylindrical shape is rolled on the first plate, thereby adhering the adhesive The sheet is attached to the aforementioned first sheet; and the second sheet attaching step 'attaches the second sheet to the aforementioned adhesive sheet. (4-3) Type 3 plate bonding method A method for bonding the first plate and the second plate through an adhesive sheet, including the following steps: • / Adhesive sheet preparation step 'It prepares an adhesive sheet, and this adhesive sheet is on one side. A groove is formed on at least one end of the groove to one side of the adhesive sheet; the adhesive sheet attaching step attaches the adhesive sheet to the first board under the state of the aforementioned facing panel forming the aforementioned groove; and the second board is attached A step of attaching the second plate to the adhesive sheet; and a pressing step of applying pressure to the adhesive sheet in a state where at least the adhesive sheet is attached to the first plate. The above and other objects, features, aspects, and advantages of the present invention will be more apparent from the following detailed description of the present invention with reference to the accompanying drawings. Brief description of the drawings Figure 1 is a schematic side view of an example of an LCD panel to be manufactured 11 ---------------------- Order --- ------ Line— (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 _B7_ ^ V. Description of the invention (1 (2) FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a schematic structure of an example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in FIG. 1 by the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a schematic structure of another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in FIG. 1. FIG. Fig. 4 is a schematic configuration diagram showing another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 1. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a schematic structure of another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in FIG. 1. FIG. Fig. 6 is a plan view of the first and second panel elements of the adsorption table held on the first and second platforms in the manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 2 viewed from above. The 7th _ is a diagram of the state where the panel elements are aligned with each other as viewed from above. Fig. 8 is a diagram for explaining parts (1) to (4) of an example of a liquid crystal display panel manufacturing process of a panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 2; Fig. 9 is a diagram for explaining steps (5) to (8) subsequent to the step shown in Fig. 8. Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining one of the process examples (1) to (7) for manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 11 is a diagram for explaining one of the process examples (1) to (7) for manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 4; Fig. 12 is a diagram for explaining a part (1) to (5) of a process example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 5; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating steps (6) to (7) subsequent to the step shown in FIG. 12. 12 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) _ ---------------------- 1 ^ ----- --- · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the Invention (β) Figure 14 (A) is shown in the display panel manufacturing device shown in Figure 2, and Figure 14 (B ) Is shown in the display panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 14 (C) is shown in the display panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 4, and 14 (D) is shown in the display panel shown in FIG. 5 The manufacturing device is provided with a schematic diagram of a decompression chamber and a schematic structure of a display panel device that decompresses exhaust gas in the interior of the chamber. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 1; FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a part (1) to (4) of a process example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 15. FIG. Fig. 17 is a diagram for explaining steps (5) to (7) subsequent to the steps shown in Fig. 16. / Fig. 18 is a view showing another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 1. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining parts (1) to (4) of a manufacturing process example of a liquid crystal display panel by using the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 18. Fig. 20 is a diagram for explaining steps (5) to (9) subsequent to the step shown in Fig. 19. Fig. 21 is a diagram showing a schematic structure of another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 1; Fig. 22 is a plan view of the second platform that holds and maintains the state of another panel element in a plan view from above. Fig. 23 is a diagram for explaining a part (1) to (4) of a process example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 21; Figure 24 shows the subsequent steps used to manufacture the steps shown in Figure 23. 13 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). ------------ i --- 1 I --- ^. I ------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (1 丨) (5) to (8). Fig. 25 is a diagram showing a schematic structure of another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 1; Fig. 26 is a diagram for explaining parts (1) to (4) of a process example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 25; Fig. 27 is a diagram for explaining steps (5) to (8) subsequent to the step shown in Fig. 26. Fig. 28 is a diagram for explaining steps (9) to (11) subsequent to the step shown in Fig. 27. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing a schematic structure of a display panel manufacturing apparatus provided with a pressure reducing chamber in the display panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Figure 25 and an exhaust device for decompressing exhaust gas from the interior of the display panel. Fig. 30 is a diagram showing a schematic structure of another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 1; Fig. 31 is a diagram for explaining a part (1) to (4) of a process example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 30; Fig. 32 is a diagram for explaining steps (5) to (8) subsequent to the steps shown in Fig. 31. Fig. 33 is a view showing still another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in Fig. 1; Fig. 34 is a diagram for explaining a part (1) to (4) of a process example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 33. Type 35 is a diagram for explaining the subsequent steps (5) to (7) of the steps shown in FIG. 34. 14 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) aI ^ (210 X 297 mm) " ~ --------------------- Order ----- ---- Line; (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____B7_ V. Description of Invention (β) Figure 36 is a schematic cross-sectional view of another example of another liquid crystal display element. Figure 37 It is a perspective view of an adhesive sheet provided with through holes for bonding the liquid crystal cell of the liquid crystal display element of FIG. 36 and a polarizing plate. Figure 38 is used to attach the adhesive sheet of Figure 37 to the liquid crystal cell _____. . . . . . . . (Liqcid crystal cell) A sectional view of the device. Figure 39 shows the case where the adhesive sheet is not provided with a through hole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the case where bubbles are generated when the adhesive sheet is attached to the liquid crystal cell by the attaching device. Fig. 40 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cylindrical adhesive sheet is bonded to a liquid crystal cell. . 1 Figure 41 (a) is a perspective view of the adhesive sheet with the grooves arranged along the predetermined direction, Figure 41 (b) is a perspective view of the adhesive sheet with the grooves arranged in a grid, and Figure 41 (c) is an enlarged sectional view of the grooves. Fig. 42 is a perspective view showing an example of a device for forming a groove in an adhesive sheet. Fig. 43 is a sectional view of a device for temporarily attaching the adhesive sheet of Fig. 41 (a) to a liquid crystal cell. Fig. 44 is a process diagram of bonding a liquid crystal cell and a polarizing plate through an adhesive sheet provided with a groove. Description of Preferred Embodiments A method for manufacturing a display panel in a preferred embodiment of the present invention includes the following steps: facing steps that align a first panel element and a second panel element each including at least one display layer with each other , Relative; and 15 paper sizes are applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) Ai ^ grid (210 X 297 mm) '---------------------- Order --------- Only (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____B7_ V. Description of the invention (4) Panel bonding steps, which are pasted from the starting point through the adhesive material. The first panel element and the second panel element are aligned. The steps of facing the panel may include: a step of keeping the first panel element aligned with the first platform, and a step of keeping the second panel element aligned with the second platform. The step of facing the panel may further include a step of providing the adhesive material on at least one of the first panel element held on the first platform and the second panel element held on the second platform. In this case, the step of facing the panel may further include moving at least one of the first platform and the second platform, and adhering the 7 material to make the first panel element and the second panel element face each other. step. The bonding of the first and second panel elements in the panel bonding step may be, for example, pressing the pressing member on the first platform at the starting point via the first and second panel elements, and The aforementioned first stage is performed by moving the pressing member. In this case, when the first panel element and the second panel element are bonded, when the pressing member is moved relative to the first platform, the aforementioned first. The two panel elements are separated from the aforementioned second stage. In addition, the aforementioned panel bonding step may also include: a panel separating step of at least partially separating the first panel element and the second panel element that are aligned and overlapping, and providing the aforementioned adhesive material to the separated first and second panel elements 16 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) I 1 ----- Order • 丨 ---- 472223 A7 _ B7___ V. The steps between the description of the invention (punch); The separated first and second panel elements are sequentially bonded from the starting point via the adhesive material. In this case, in the aforementioned panel separating step, preferably, the state where the first and second panel elements are aligned and overlapped can be reproduced so that the first and second panel elements are at least partially separated. In the panel separation step, the first and second panel elements may be separated from each other, for example, by keeping the first and second panel elements in an overlapping state near the starting point. In this case, the above-mentioned first and second panel elements are overlapped, and the holding can be performed using, for example, through holes formed in the first and second panel elements, respectively. At least a partial separation of the first and second panel elements in the panel separation step is performed, for example, in a state where the second panel element is held by a holding member having a convexly curved panel holding surface. The bonding of 1 to the second panel element can be performed, for example, by pressing the second panel element held by the holding member against the first panel element by the holding member. In short, the bonding of the first and second panel elements in the aforementioned panel bonding step may be exemplified at the aforementioned starting point, so that a panel element of the first and second panel elements conforms to a panel element compression, and starts by This is performed by gradually expanding the compression area from the aforementioned starting point. In this case, an elastic pad having a convexly curved pressing surface can be used to press the one panel element to the other panel element. 17 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) · -------------- I -------- Order ----- ---- Line '(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _____B7 _ V. Description of the invention (β) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) In this case, it is better The elastic pad is composed of an elastic body having an elastic constant of 60 kgf / cm2 to 200 kg f / cm2. Also, preferably, the pressing surface of the elastic pad has a curvature radius of 2000 mm to 5000 mm. In any case, as the representative starting point, the end portions of the first panel element and the second panel element, or the central portions of the first panel element and the second panel element may be taken as representative examples. In any case, it is preferable that the bonding of the first and second panel elements in the panel bonding step is performed in a reduced pressure atmosphere. As an example, 13pa to 14pa can be exemplified as the pressure of the reduced-pressure atmosphere. The manufacturing method of another display panel in a preferred embodiment of the present invention includes the following steps: The panel facing step faces the first panel element and the second skin element respectively including at least one display layer. The panel bonding step involves the aforementioned first panel element and the aforementioned first surface through an unhardened adhesive material. 2 panel elements are bonded; an alignment step that moves the first and second panel elements that are bonded relative to each other and aligns the positions of the two sides; and an adhesive material hardening step that makes the aforementioned adhesion after the panel alignment step The material is hardened. In the panel bonding step, the first panel element and the second panel element may be sequentially bonded as a representative from the starting point through the adhesive material. In this case, it is preferable that the adhesive material is expanded when the first panel element and the second panel element are bonded together. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 ____B7___ V. Description of the invention (force) It is possible to use the ends of the first panel element and the second panel element as the starting point. Representative example. The bonding of the first and second panel elements in the panel bonding step may be performed by holding the second panel element on a holding member having a convexly curved panel holding surface. The holding member is used to hold the holding member on the holding member. The aforementioned second panel element is pressed against the first panel element. In any case, the step of facing the panel may include the following steps: a step of aligning the first panel element and holding it on the first platform; a step of aligning the second panel element and holding it on the second platform; and moving A step in which at least one of the first p stage and the second stage causes the first panel element to face the second panel element. When the first and second panel elements are bonded in the panel bonding step, the second panel element is separated from the second stage. In any case, for example, a photo-curable adhesive material may be used as the aforementioned adhesive material. In this case, light may be irradiated to the adhesive material in the aforementioned adhesive material hardening step. In any case, it is preferable that the aforementioned panel bonding step is performed in a reduced pressure atmosphere. Hereinafter, the embodiments described above and other embodiments of the present invention will be described in order with reference to the drawings. Moreover, in the following description and drawings, although the same reference symbols are used as much as possible for substantially the same components, parts, etc., the same symbols are used to indicate different components and parts. Therefore, the following description is intended to be related to the drawings. 19 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). — — Illlllllll —-I I I I I I I --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 _ ————_ B7______ 5. The description of the description of the invention (q) is substantive. [A] The manufacturing method and device of the display panel related to Figures 1 to 4 (D) and the manufacturing method and device of the display panel described in connection with Figures 1 to 14 (D) are based on Ruci (A -1) Type ~ (A-4) Type 1 or 2 or more of a method and device for manufacturing a display panel. [A-1] (A-1) type display panel manufacturing method A manufacturing method of a display panel, which is a layered panel element used to form a display panel for displaying an image, and the manufacturing of a display panel includes the following steps:. Step of aligning the first panel element and keeping it on the first platform Step of aligning the second panel element and keeping it on the second platform; Setting an adhesive material on the mutually attachable surfaces of the first and second panel elements Step of at least one side; and moving at least one of the first stage holding the first panel element and the second stage holding the second panel so that the two panel elements face each other, and at the same time, overlapping the predetermined ends of the two panel elements, A step of maintaining the overlapped state; and a step of fully bonding the two panel elements with the aforementioned adhesive material from the ends of the overlapped state sequentially. In the second panel component bonding step of the manufacturing method of the display device, for example, a “pressing member that presses the second panel element against the first platform” can be used to “maintain the state of pressing the two panel element with the pressing member” on one side. One side is relative to 20 paper sizes. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) III I -------. — I I ---- Subscribe. — — — — — I I I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ____ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (β) Move the first platform to the pressing member. In this case, the pressing member can double as a device for pressing and holding, for example, the ends of the two overlapping panel elements on the first platform. Of course, the end holding means for the holding step may be provided differently from the pressing member. In any case, the pressing member uses a pressing face of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface, and the panel element can be rotated relative to the panel element in the aforementioned bonding step. Thereby, the bonding step can be performed smoothly. A representative example of a pressing member having a pressing surface of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface is a pressure roller having a circular cross section, but a pressing member having a pressing surface of a panel element having a fan shape when viewed from the side may be used. In the case of using a pressure roller with a cross-sectional pattern / in order to prevent wrinkles on the panel element due to the pressure of the pressure roller, a so-called inverted crown pressure roller having a smaller central diameter than the two end portions can also be used. The following method can be disclosed, for example, as a manufacturing method of a display panel using a pressing member. That is, at least one of the first stage holding the first panel element and the second stage holding the second panel element is moved so that the two panel elements face each other while overlapping the predetermined ends of the two panel elements to keep them at the In the step of maintaining the overlapped state, the first platform is pressed by the pressing member, and the overlap of the two panel elements is maintained in the overlapped state. In addition, in the step of laminating the two panel elements in the overlapped state by using the aforementioned adhesive material to sequentially and fully affix them, one side of the two panel elements by the pressing member is maintained to compress the end of the two panel elements. 1Platform is in a state where the panel member is pressed by the pressing member, while the pressing member is relatively moved with the second platform, and the second panel member is pulled out from the second platform. (CNS) A4 specification (21〇χ 297) '' I ------- 1 IIII ------ I 1 ^ ------- ---- (Please read the first Please fill in this page again for attention) 472223 A7 _____B7___ __ V. Description of the invention) Materials, in order to fully adhere the two panel components on the first platform. In this method, when a two-plate element pressing surface with a convex curved surface is used as the pressing member, the two-plate element pressing surface can be rotated relative to the panel element in the bonding step. Thereby, two-panel components can be smoothly adhered. In any case, in the step of maintaining the second panel element on the second platform, in order to facilitate the subsequent steps, the step of maintaining the overlapped predetermined ends of the first and second panel elements in the overlapping state can be performed on the second panel element. When the predetermined end portion overlaps and is held in the overlapped state, the second panel element is held on the second stage in a state where the end portion of the second panel element is exposed to the sixth stage. In any of the foregoing display panel manufacturing methods, the first and second platforms are used to pair the first. And the holding of the second panel element is not limited to this, but the case where the holding panel element is attracted through the suction hole provided on the platform is taken as an example. In addition, in any of the aforementioned manufacturing methods, it is performed by various methods in which the first and second panel elements are aligned with each other. For example, it is performed using a substrate and panel alignment method known per se. For example, the following method is used as an alignment method. First, positioning alignment marks are set on the first and second stages respectively, and 重叠 the two panel elements are overlapped in the high-precision alignment state of the first and second panel elements. End holding step and bonding step. An alignment mark that is consistent with the alignment mark of the first stage is set in advance on the first panel element, and an alignment mark that is consistent with the alignment mark of the second stage is set in the second panel element. And, 22 * This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) / --- II — — — — — — — — III ----- order ------- 1 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 472223 A7 _____B7____ 5. Description of the invention (/) (al) Arrange corresponding panel components on each platform, and observe the platform or panel components visually or visually The alignment mark is aligned with the position of the panel element while being moved by hand. (M) The corresponding panel element is arranged on or above each platform, and the alignment mark of the platform and the panel element is observed by a camera. On the one hand, the panel element is driven by the X-Υ-Θ driving device to align it. The panel element can be arranged above the platform, and the panel element can be placed on the platform after the alignment. This method is exemplified as follows. That is, a panel element holding portion capable of X-Y-0 driving is provided on the platform, and a face with an alignment mark set in advance is held. // The plate element is held in the holding portion, and the panel element is viewed by a camera Alignment mark, one side The X-Υ-β driving device moves the holding part to perform the alignment of the panel element. In this case, the alignment of the panel element is performed. 俾 Under the high-precision position of the first and second panel elements, the implementation is slightly The steps of holding and attaching the overlapping ends of the two rear panel components. In any case, the alignment using the X-Υ-0 driving device can be performed manually by using the X-Υ-0 driving device, but it can also be performed according to the camera. The detected mark information (such as its position information, etc.) is controlled by the X- 驱动 -Θ driving operation and the alignment of the panel components. In the latter case, an image processing method for the alignment of the substrate and the panel can be used. Moreover, it goes without saying that the X-Υ-θ driving device is a device that can move an object in the direction X, in a method Y perpendicular to it, and at the same time rotate around an axis perpendicular to the XY plane. 23 III ----- III-- ------- Order --------- '(Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 472223 A7 ___B7______ V. Description of the invention (4) The aforementioned alignment marks are liquid crystal marks (li In terms of quid crystal mark and electroluminescence mark, it is a person who emits light by being energized. In addition, the step of providing an adhesive material on at least one of the mutually attachable faces of the first and second panel elements. In terms of, for example, a double-sided adhesive sheet or a sticky sheet (the sheet may be in the shape of a tape) that is pre-adhered to the panel element surface and covered with a protective sheet from the surface, or the step of removing the protective sheet, or by A step of manually operating or applying an adhesive material to the panel display element surface by an adhesive material coating device. The installation surface of the adhesive material is any surface where no obstacle occurs. In the case of setting by coating, although it can be fully or coated on one panel element of the two panel elements, but it is arranged on the lamination opening of the at least one panel element * / the beginning or other appropriate part to perform the lamination at the same time. Expanded between the two panel elements. The step of disposing the adhesive material is performed before the predetermined end portions of the two panel elements are overlapped. As long as there is no obstacle before this end overlaps, it can be implemented at any stage. And when there are 3 or more panel components to be laminated, the panel components that can be pasted through the above-mentioned bonding steps can be regarded as the first panel components for each of the third and subsequent panel components, and the next one The bonded panel component is regarded as the aforementioned second panel component, and the foregoing steps are substantially repeated, and one panel component is bonded one by one on the already bonded panel component. The manufacturing device of (A-1) type display panel can be taken as a representative example of the device of the manufacturing method of display panel of type (A-1) described above. 24 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- installation -------- order ------ --- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 472223 A7 ______B7____ —____ V. Description of the Invention (亦) That is, a manufacturing device of a display panel, whose integrated layer is used to form a display panel for displaying images A method for manufacturing a panel element includes: a first platform for holding a first panel element; a device for aligning the first panel element on the first platform; a second platform for relative to the first platform The platform is arranged in a predetermined positional relationship to maintain the second panel element; a device for aligning the second panel element on the second platform; a first driving device for respectively aligning the position and maintaining the first and second positions The first and second panel elements on the platform face each other, and at the same time, the first and second platforms are moved relative to each other, and the predetermined ends of the two panel elements overlap; the compression structure | ox, which will remain at the first and second, respectively. On the second platform, the ends of the two panel elements with the aforementioned pre-ends overlapping are held tightly on the first platform; and the second drive The device maintains a state where the first platform for pressing the end of the two panel elements with the aforementioned pressing member is in a state of pressing the panel element with the pressing member, and pulls the second panel element from the second platform for relative movement. The pressing member and the second platform are sequentially laminated on the first platform with the two panel elements under the pressing of the pressing member. In this device, the pressing member also has a pressing face of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface. When the pressing member is used to sequentially attach two panel elements on the first platform, the pressing face of the panel element is used. Can be rotated relative to the panel element. The compact member with the electric S-seat structure is called the plate compact piece. Although the example is a pressure roller with a circular cross-section, it is also possible to use 25 paper sizes with a fan-shaped side view that conforms to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm). — — — — — — — — — — —------ IIIII ^ · 111! 1111 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 _________ 5. Description of the invention (A) The pressing members on the pressing side of the panel components. In the case of using a pressure roller having a circular cross-section ', in order to prevent embossing of a panel element due to the pressing of the pressure roller, a so-called inverted crown pressure roller having a smaller central diameter than a diameter at both ends may also be used. According to this manufacturing apparatus, the first panel element is held on the first stage and the second panel element is held on the second stage by the alignment position of the alignment device. Adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other. Thereafter, the first and second platforms are relatively moved by the first driving device so that the two panel elements face each other, and at the same time, predetermined ends of the two panel elements are overlapped. The overlapping end is held on the first platform by a pressing member. Thereafter, p moves the first platform, the second platform, and the pressing member relatively with the second driving device, while maintaining the state of pressing the panel element with the pressing member, and pulling the second panel element from the second platform, On one side, the two panel elements are sequentially laminated on the first platform by the aforesaid adhesive material under the pressing of the pressing member. The first and second platforms include devices for holding the panel elements. Of course, the holding device is not limited to this, but, for example, it may be provided on a platform and connected to a suction hole for a panel element adsorption of an exhaust device. The setting of the adhesive material can be set as described in the manufacturing method of the display panel. The display panel manufacturing device may further include an adhesive material coating device. The device for aligning each panel element with the corresponding platform can be shown as follows, for example: (an in order to perform 26 I ----------- in the state of the high-precision alignment position of the first and second panel elements. --- I ----— Order— 丨------ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) '472223 A7 _ B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (pair) After that, the overlapping ends of the two panel components are held and the two panel components are bonded.' Alignment marks are provided on the first and second platforms for positioning. Use this The alignment mark can be used to align the panel element with each stage as described in the aforementioned alignment method example (a) of the display panel manufacturing method. (M ') is an alignment device including (al') on each stage. Alignment mark detection camera, and alignment mark detection camera for aligning panel components to be held on the platform on or above the platform as described in the aforementioned alignment method example (b) of the display panel manufacturing method And X-Υ-θ drive, or control based on the alignment mark information (such as its position information) from the camera -Υ-0 drive device action, 俾 control unit for aligning the position of the panel element. It can also be exemplified as a secondary alignment device. That is, it is an alignment device, which includes a panel element holding section provided on a platform, Drives the XY-0 driving device of the holding portion, detects the alignment mark camera of the panel element held in the holding portion, and controls the operation of the χ_Y-0 driving device based on the alignment mark information from the camera to align the panel Control section for the position of the components. The aforementioned first drive device and the second drive device may be arranged in common with one part. Furthermore, one of them may be part of the other. And when there are 3 or more panel components to be bonded, the [A-2] Manufacturing method of (A-2) type display panel A manufacturing method of a display panel, which is a build-up layer, using the bonded panel element obtained by the foregoing bonding as one of the two panel elements to be bonded to each other. The display elements used to form the display panel of the display image, and those who manufacture the display panel include the following: 尺度 27 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----- ------ 1- 1 -------- traitor --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 __ B7___ V. Description of the invention (/ ) The step of holding the first panel element on the first platform step; the step of overlapping the second panel element on the first panel element held on the first platform; the step of aligning the second panel element with the first panel element; Steps of aligning and overlapping the second panel element of the first panel element arranged on the first platform and holding the panel element holding surface of the convex surface with a predetermined curvature of the second platform; setting the adhesive material on the first and second surfaces Steps of panel components to be bonded to each other; and in a state where the panel component holding surface of the second platform holding the P 2 panel component is between the first and second panel components, the pressure is relative to the first platform. Then, the step of fully bonding the second panel element to the first panel element with the aforementioned adhesive material from one end to the other end of the second panel element. In the manufacturing method of the display panel, the holding of the panel element by the second stage is not limited to this, but a case where the panel element is attracted and held through the suction hole provided in the stage is taken as a representative example. The mutual alignment of the first and second panel elements is performed by various methods. For example, it is performed using a substrate and panel alignment method known per se. As for the alignment method, the following method can be exemplified. (a2) Set a pre-alignment mark on each panel element, keep the first panel element at a predetermined position on the first platform, and then overlay the second panel element on this panel element, visually observe or observe the two panel elements with one side 28 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) '------ I — ----- IIIIIII Order ----------(Please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again) 472223 A7 _ B7 —____ V. Alignment mark of the invention (>) Move the second panel element by hand to make the alignment mark of the two panel elements consistent. (b2) Set a pre-alignment mark on each panel element. 'Keep the first panel element at a predetermined position on the first platform, arrange the second panel element on or above this panel element, and observe the alignment of the two panel elements with a camera. The quasi-marking, while using the X -'- Θ driving device to move the second panel element ', makes the alignment marks of the two panel elements consistent. When the position of the second panel element is aligned above the first panel element, the second panel element may be superposed on the first panel element after the alignment. In the case of adopting the method of (b2), the third platform holding the second panel element is adopted. The second panel element is held on the third platform only by vacuum suction and other methods. The alignment mark of the second panel element can be observed with a camera while the third platform is moved by the X-Υ-0 driving device to make the two panel elements align. The quasi-markers are consistent. After the alignment of the second panel element, the panel element can be lowered from the third platform and placed on the first panel element in an overlapping manner. The third platform may be a panel element chuck member provided on the X-Υ-6 »drive device. The alignment using the X-Υ-Θ driving device can be performed by using an automatic control method such as the three image processing technology described with respect to the manufacturing method of the first type display panel. Further, in the case of using the third stage for holding the second panel element for the alignment position, as described in the manufacturing method of the first type display panel, the position of the first panel element can be aligned on the first stage, and Align the position of the second panel element on the third platform, and thereafter, make the first platform that maintains the alignment state of the first panel element and the second panel element maintain the state of 29. This paper standard applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS ) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) '---- II ----- j I-^ --- order · ----- II-- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 472223 A7!-B7______ V. Description of the invention (J) Relative movement of the platform 'In this way, in a state of mutual alignment, the first and second panel elements face each other, the second panel element is lowered, and the second panel element is overlapped and disposed 1 on the panel element. In this way, the second panel element of the two panel elements that are "aligned" superposed on the first stage is held on the panel element holding surface of the second stage, which is formed by a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature. This holding is easily performed by, for example, making the panel element holding surface of the second stage contact with the alignment position, and the second panel element of the first panel element superposed on the first stage is brought into contact with and rotated. An adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other. The adhesive material can be set as described in the manufacturing method of the display panel of the first type. The step of setting the adhesive material is performed before the above-mentioned bonding step of the two panel components. As long as there is no obstacle before the bonding step, the adhesive material can be set at any stage. Therefore, when the two panel elements are sandwiched between them, the second platform holding the second panel element is crimped and rotated relative to the first platform, and the second panel element is sequentially moved from one end to the other end of the second panel element by the aforementioned adhesive material. Fully adhered to the first panel element. The convex curved surface formed by the predetermined curvature of the second platform may be a cylindrical outer peripheral surface, and may be a curved surface having a fan shape in a side view. In addition, when there are three or more panel components to be laminated, the third and subsequent panel components may be regarded as the first panel component and the next panel component may be regarded as the first panel component. One panel element is regarded as the aforementioned second panel element, and the foregoing steps are substantially repeated, whereby the 30 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) '--------- ------------ Order. -------- 1 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 _____ Β7 ___ V. Description of the Invention (β), click one panel element on the panel element that has been pasted one by one. . The manufacturing device of (A-2) type display panel can be taken as a representative example of a device that can implement the manufacturing method of (A-2) type display panel described above. That is, a manufacturing device for a display panel is a device for manufacturing a display panel that is laminated to form a display panel for displaying an image. The device includes: a first platform for holding the first panel component; an alignment device, It aligns the alignment of the second panel element with the first panel element, and superimposes it on the first panel element held on the first platform; the second flat; a stage having a panel element holding surface composed of a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature, The panel element holding surface is maintained at an alignment position on the first platform, and the second panel element is arranged on the first panel element in an overlapping manner; and a platform driving device which makes the second platform bit panel element holding surface oppose the first platform. In the normal position, the second panel element superposed on the first panel element is brought into contact with the first panel element, and the second panel element is temporarily held on the panel element holding surface. Thereafter, the first and second panel elements are sandwiched therebetween, so that The second stage holding the second panel element and the first stage holding the first panel element are relatively pressure-contacted and rotated. In this device, the holding surface of the panel element of the second platform composed of a convex curved surface may be a cylinder forming a cylindrical outer peripheral surface, or a curved surface having a fan shape in a side view. According to this manufacturing apparatus, the first panel element is held on the first platform, and the second panel element is aligned by the alignment device, and it is arranged in an overlapping arrangement. 31 This paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) · --------------------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 __ B7_ V. Description of the invention (& 1) on the second panel element. Next, the second panel element is temporarily held on the second platform by the platform driving device. The holding of the panel element by the second platform can be performed by holding the panel element of the second platform in contact with the second panel element and relatively rotating it. An adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other. Thereafter, by using the aforementioned platform driving device, the second platform holding the second panel component is crimped, the first panel component on the first platform is rotated, and an adhesive material is sequentially passed from one end of the second panel component to the other end and pasted thereon. Fits the first panel component. The first and second platforms include devices for holding the panel components. The holding element is not limited to this, but for example, it may be provided on a platform and connected to an air suction hole of an exhaust device for sucking a panel element. The setting method of the adhesive material can be set as described in the manufacturing method of the (A-1) type display panel. The display panel manufacturing apparatus may include an adhesive material coating apparatus. The alignment device may adopt the alignment method described in the manufacturing method of the display panel of the type (A-2) described above, including an alignment mark observation camera, an alignment mark camera, and an X-Υ-β driving device, or It further includes an alignment device that controls the XY- (9 driving device control unit, etc.) that enables the alignment position of the two panel components according to the alignment mark information (for example, the mark information) from the camera. Moreover, the panel components to be attached are positioned at 3 For more than one, you can use the last 32 paper sizes mentioned above to apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × X 297 mm), ------I-I 1 丨-! III 丨 II 丨 --- ----- * 、 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ________B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (P) The bonded panel components obtained by bonding are used as the components of the two panels to be bonded to each other. A. [A-3] IA-3] type display panel manufacturing method A method of manufacturing a display panel, which is a layered panel element used to form a display panel for displaying an image, and the manufacture of a display panel includes the following steps: The step of holding the first panel element on the platform; the step of overlapping the second panel element on the first panel element of the platform; the step of aligning the second p-plate element with the first panel element; the overlap and alignment A step of maintaining one end portion of the first and second panel elements in an overlapped state; a step of maintaining an end portion in the aforementioned overlapped state between the first and second panel elements to form a gap; and a step in the first and second panels A step of providing an adhesive material on at least one side of the components to be bonded to each other; and a step of sequentially and fully bonding the first and second panel components from the aforementioned end side held by the adhesive material; comparing the manufacturing method of the display panel The specific method can be exemplified as follows. That is, a manufacturing method of a display panel, which is a method of laminating a panel element for forming a display panel for displaying an image, and manufacturing a display panel includes the following steps: Holding the first panel element on the platform Steps; 33 --- II i II ---------- — — II ^ > I ---- II I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Grid (210 x 297 mm) '472223 A7 _B7___ V. Description of the invention (j) The step of overlapping the second panel element on the first panel element held on the platform; aligning the second panel element with the first panel Steps of components; Steps of maintaining overlapping and aligned ends of one of the first and second panel components in a state of overlapping on the aforementioned platform; leaving the ends of the overlapping state between the first and second panel components to form A step of gap; a step of placing an adhesive material on at least one of the panels to be bonded to each other on the first and second panel elements: and pressing the adhesive material from the holding end side to press with respect to the platform Component, the steps of fully laminating the first and second panel components in order. This pressing member adopts a panel element pressing surface composed of a convex curved surface, and during the bonding step, the panel element pressing surface can be rotated relative to the panel element. A representative example of a pressing member having a pressing face of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface. Of course, although a pressing roller having a circular cross-section is used, a pressing member having a pressing face of a panel element having a fan shape in a side view may be used. In the case of using a pressure roller with a cross-sectional pattern, in order to prevent the occurrence of embossing on the panel element due to the pressure of the pressure roller, a so-called inverted crown pressure roller having a larger middle diameter than a diameter of the two ends can be used. In the manufacturing method of the display panel equal to this (A-3) type, the holding of the first panel element by the square is not limited to this, but a case where the panel element is attracted and held through the suction hole provided on the platform is taken as a representative example. In addition, the first and second panel components can be aligned with each other using (A-2) 34. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------- ----- Installation -------- Order · -------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 Α7 Β7 V. Description of invention (π) type display Alignment method described in panel manufacturing method. The overlapped and aligned first and second panel elements are maintained in a state where their one end portions are overlapped, but they can also be held on the aforementioned platform as described above. In this case, for example, a holding device (such as a holding clip) provided on a platform or the like is used to perform the 〇. After the end of the two panel elements is held, it is necessary to leave the end of the overlapped state between the first and second panel elements. To form a gap, but the formation of the gap can be easily carried out by grasping the position and lifting the reflective end held at the end of the platform. After the gap is formed in this way, the adhesive material 0 is set after the two panel elements. The adhesive material can be set as described in the (A-1) type display panel manufacturing method. After the adhesive material is set, the aforementioned bonding step is performed. In addition, when there are three or more panel elements to be laminated, the third and subsequent panel elements can be regarded as the first panel element and the second panel element can be regarded as the first panel element. The panel element to be bonded is regarded as the aforementioned second panel element, and the foregoing steps are substantially repeated, and one panel element is bonded to the already bonded panel element one by one. (A-3) type display panel manufacturing device The following example can be cited as a device capable of implementing the (A-3) type display panel manufacturing method described above. That is, a manufacturing device for a display panel, which is a layered panel component used to form a display panel for displaying an image. The manufacturer of the display panel has 35 paper standards that are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇χ 297). (Li) --------------------- ^-Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___ B7 _ 5. Description of the invention (4) Alignment device, which aligns the second panel element with the first panel element, and is superimposed and arranged on the first panel element held on the platform; holding device, which keeps overlapping and aligned One end portion of the first and second panel elements is overlapped on the platform; a gap forming device is provided with an end portion held in the overlapped state by the aforementioned holding device to form a gap between the first and second panel elements; and The pressing member can be moved relative to the platform, and the first and second panel elements forming the gap by the gap forming device are fully and sequentially adhered to the end side held by the aforementioned holding device in order. In order to perform smooth bonding, a panel element pressing surface having a convex curved surface can be used to sequentially bond two panel elements using the pressing member, and the pressing surface of the panel element can be rotated relative to the panel element. A representative example of a pressing member having a pressing face of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface is a pressing roller having a circular cross section, but a pressing member having a pressing face of a panel element having a side view in a fan shape can also be used. In the case of using a pressure roller with a cross-sectional pattern, in order to avoid the occurrence of wrinkles on the panel element due to the pressing of the pressure roller, a so-called inverted crown pressure roller having a smaller diameter at the central portion than at the two end portions may be used. According to this manufacturing apparatus, the first panel element is held on the platform, and the second panel element is aligned with the alignment device, and the second panel element is superimposed on the first panel element. The platform contains means for holding the panel elements. Of course, this holding device is not limited to this, but it can be provided on a platform, connected to an exhaust device, for example. 36 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X 297 public love) ---- II I ----- · II I--II Order ------ I-- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _____B7____ V. Description of the invention (V >) The suction hole is taken as an example. The alignment device may implement, for example, the alignment method described by the manufacturer of the aforementioned (A-2) type display panel. You can use the camera including the alignment mark observation camera, or the alignment mark camera and the X-Υ-6 »drive. Or it further includes a control unit that controls the operation of the X-Υ-6 »driving device that can align the two panel components based on the alignment information from the camera (for example, mark position information). Secondly. By the end holding device, one end portion of the two panel elements which are overlapped and aligned is kept in a state of overlapping on the platform. Further, an end portion held by the holding device is left, and a gap is formed between the first and second panel elements by a gap forming device. This gap forming device can, for example, hold the position, lift the second panel element and hold it on the opposite side of the end of the platform, and attach the two panel elements with the pressing member, so as to grasp the end of the second panel element. Take the example of approaching the first panel element. After a gap is formed between the two panel elements, an adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the two panel elements to be bonded to each other. This adhesive material can be placed as described in the aforementioned (A-1) type display panel manufacturing method. The display panel manufacturing apparatus may include an adhesive material coating apparatus. After the adhesive material is set, the first and second panel elements are sequentially and fully adhered from the end side held by the aforementioned end holding device by the pressing member. And, when there are 3 or more panel elements to be bonded, the aforementioned bonded panel element obtained by the last bonding can be used as one of the two panel elements to be bonded to each other. . [A-4] 37 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I 1 I I I I 1 --- · · I I I ---- order. --I --- II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 I_____ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (厶) [A-4] manufacturing method of display panel A manufacturing method of display panel It is a layer element used to form a panel element of a display panel that displays an image. A person who manufactures a display panel is characterized by having the following steps: a holding step that maintains the first panel element on the platform: an overlapping arrangement step of the panel element that replaces the first 2 panel elements are arranged on the first panel element held on the platform in an overlapping manner; an alignment step that aligns the second panel element with the first panel element; a temporary fixing step that can maintain the first and second elements that are overlapped and aligned 2 the positional relationship of the panel elements, temporarily fixing the panel elements on the platform, the drilling step, which is provided with positioning holes for determining the mutual positional relationship of the panel elements in the temporarily fixed first and second panel elements; and In the bonding step, an adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other; one side uses the aforementioned positioning hole to make the first and second panel elements mutually Position, by means of the adhesive material, so that two panel elements bonded to each other. In the manufacturing method of the display panel belonging to this type (A-4), the holding of the first panel element by the platform is not limited to this, but the case of holding the panel element through the suction hole provided on the platform as a representative Example J. In addition, the first and second panel elements can be aligned with each other by using the alignment method described in the aforementioned (A_2) type display panel manufacturing method. The first and second panel elements in the overlapped and aligned position can maintain a mutual positional relationship and be temporarily fixed to the platform. This temporarily fixed by using, for example, set at 38 P scale, applicable Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 x 297 mm) '"-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)- ------ Order -------- line 472223 A7 ___B7____ 5. Description of the invention (on) At least one end of the two panel elements is held on the platform when the temporary fixing device such as a platform is clamped. After the two panel elements are temporarily fixed, positioning holes for determining the mutual positional relationship of the panel elements are provided in the first and second panel elements. After that, an adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other. Using the aforementioned positioning hole, the first and second panel elements are positioned to each other, and the two panel elements are made of the adhesive material by using the adhesive material. Fit each other. For example, using this positioning hole, the "step of maintaining one end of the first and second panel elements in the overlapped and aligned position in the state of overlapping on the platform" in the manufacturing method of the aforementioned (A-3) type display panel, and secondly, The steps of keeping the overlapped state so as to form a gap between the first and second panel elements are implemented, and the step of setting an adhesive material on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other, and with respect to the foregoing The pressing member moved by the platform uses the adhesive material to sequentially and fully adhere the first and second panel components from the holding end side in the above-mentioned order, so as to obtain the display panel with panel component I. In addition, when the number of panel elements to be laminated is 3 or more, the panel elements that are temporarily fixed in the state of being overlapped and aligned with the platform by the aforementioned temporary fixing step are regarded as the aforementioned first panel elements for each of the third and subsequent panel elements. At the same time, the next panel element is regarded as the aforementioned second panel element, and the aforementioned panel element overlapping arrangement step 'alignment step and temporary fixing step are essentially repeated, whereby the next one panel element can be overlapped with the previous overlap. On the aligned panel components, at the same time, the alignment position is temporarily fixed to the first 39 paper sizes. This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (2K) X 297 mm. I ------ 1 — 1! ----- 1 — I order-------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _____ R7_________ V. Description of the invention (V)). After the temporary fixing of all the panel components is completed, the platform can perform the aforementioned drilling steps and the steps of bonding the adjacent panel components by an adhesive material. [A_4] type display panel manufacturing device The following example can be used as a representative example of the method and device for manufacturing the (A-4) type display panel described above. That is, a manufacturing device for a display panel, which is a layered display element for forming a display panel for displaying an image, and a person who manufactures a display panel is provided with a platform that holds the first panel element; an alignment device that makes the second panel The panel element is aligned with the first panel element, and is superimposed on the first panel element held on the platform; the temporary fixing device can maintain the positional relationship of the first and second panel elements that are overlapped and aligned, and The panel elements are temporarily fixed on the platform; and the drilling device is provided with positioning holes for the first and second panel elements temporarily fixed on the platform to determine the phase position relationship of the panel elements. In this manufacturing apparatus, the first panel element is held on the platform, and the second panel element is aligned at the position of the second panel element by the alignment device, and it is overlapped and disposed on the first panel element. The platform includes a device for holding a panel element. This holding device is of course limited, but for example, it can be provided on a platform, connected to an exhaust device, and used to suck the suction hole of a panel element as an example. The alignment device adopts the method of manufacturing the aforementioned (A-2) type display panel. 40 ------------ -------- Order ---------, (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 ------ B7 ___ V. Description of the invention (#) • Talking about the 0-month alignment method, including the alignment mark observation camera, or the alignment mark camera and the X-Υ-0 drive, or further including the control of Alignment devices such as the control unit that drives the two-panel components to align with the X_γ_θ drive device. Temporarily fix the overlapping and aligned two-panel components on the platform. The temporary fixation device for the two-panel components can be set on the platform, for example, to align two-panel components At least one of the ends is temporarily fixed to a device such as a clamp of the platform. This display panel manufacturing apparatus may further include a bonding device that uses the aforementioned positioning holes' to position the first and second panel elements to each other and adheres the two panel elements to each other by an adhesive material. This bonding device is provided with an end holding device for holding the end of the panel element on the platform by using the positioning hole, and is used as the end holding device of the panel element used in the aforementioned (A-3) type display panel manufacturing device. As illustrated, to further include a gap forming device that leaves an end portion held in an overlapped state by the end holding device to form a gap between the first and second panel elements, and is movable relative to the platform for removing the holding device from the aforementioned holding device. The holding end side is in full contact with the pressing means of the first and second panel elements forming the gap by the gap forming device. It may further include an adhesive material coating device. In order to perform smooth bonding, the pressing member may also have a pressing surface of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface, and the two panel elements are sequentially laminated by the pressing member. The panel element pressing surface can be turned relative to the panel element. A representative example of a compression member having a pressing surface of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface 41 1 '' '--丨 丨 " 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297) Love) 1 ----- IIII i I --------- Order --- — — II — — · (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 __B7 _ V. Description of the invention (4). Although the pressing roller is a circular cross-section, a pressing member having a pressing surface of a panel element having a fan shape in a side view may be used. In the case of using a pressure roller with a circular cross-section, in order to prevent wrinkles on the panel element due to the pressure of the pressure roller, a so-called crown-type pressure roller with a small diameter at both ends of the central diameter wheel can also be used. In any of the display panel manufacturing methods and devices of the present invention described herein, adjacent panel elements are bonded in a high-precision alignment state to obtain a display panel that performs only good image display. Since the adjacent panel elements in the (Al), (A-2), and (A-3) types of display panel manufacturing methods and devices are sequentially bonded from the ends, outgassing between these panel elements, The two are tightly connected and can be bonded in a wrinkle-free state to obtain a display panel that displays only good images. In the manufacturing method and device of the (A-4) type display panel, the lamination of adjacent panel components can be sequentially and comprehensively performed from the panel component end, thereby degassing from these components, and tightly bonding the two. Fits in a striated state. In any of the (A-1) to (A-2) types of display panel manufacturing methods described above, the gas is more surely degassed between adjacent panel elements, so that at least the aforementioned paste can be implemented in a predetermined decompressed ambient atmosphere.合 步骤。 With steps. Therefore, the display panel manufacturing apparatus may be provided with a decompression chamber for decompressing adjacent panel elements so that the atmosphere around the two panel elements becomes a predetermined decompression chamber atmosphere. The methods and devices (A-1) to (A-4) described above can be applied to the manufacture of various display panels, but the method and manufacturing of the liquid crystal display panel are described below with reference to FIGS. 1 to 14 (D). A specific example of the device will be described. 42 ------------ * ------- Order --------- Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 KI ------V. Description of Invention (f.) Figure 1 shows a schematic side view of an example of a reflective LCD panel manufactured. This liquid crystal display panel is a layered panel element for blue display (hereinafter referred to as "B panel element") b, a panel element for green display (hereinafter referred to as "G panel element") g, and red ( Red) display panel (hereinafter referred to as "R panel element") R, a panel capable of full-color image display, is each adjacent B panel element, 0 panel element, G panel element, and R panel element, and the bonding materials N are each other. For bonding, a black light absorbing layer is provided on the outside of the R panel element. State, and while pulling out the second panel element C2 from the second platform 200, the pressing member G10 and the second platform 200 are relatively moved '俾 on the first platform 丨 ⑻, and sequentially pressed down by the pressing member 610 'Put the two panel elements cl and C2 together. The second driving device 310 is a part of the first driving device 300 (consisting of 31 and 320). The panel manufacturing apparatus of FIG. 3 includes: a first stage 100 for holding the first panel element cl; and an alignment device 400 ′ ′ that aligns the second panel element c2 with respect to the first panel element cl and positions it Overlapping and arranging on the first panel element cl held on the first stage 700; the second stage 200 '' has a panel element holding surface 2000 'composed of a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature, and temporarily holds and lifts the alignment The first panel element is a second panel element C2 superimposed and disposed on the first platform 100; and a platform driving device, on the first platform 100, makes the panel element holding surface 200a of the second platform 200 ' 'Relative to alignment, it is arranged on the 43rd paper. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). ------------. II I--II Order --- — | 1 ||| _ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ___B7____ 5. Description of the invention (bucket 丨) The second panel element c2 on the panel element cl 2. Rotate and temporarily hold the second panel element c2 on the panel element holding surface 200a ', and thereafter, in the sandwiched state of the first and second panel elements G and G, relatively press-rotate to hold the second panel element C2 second. The stage 200 and the second stage 200 'holding the first panel element cl. The second panel element cl is sequentially attached to the first panel element cl from one end toward the other end'. The panel manufacturing apparatus of FIG. 4 includes: a platform 100 for holding the first panel element cl; and an alignment device 400 'for aligning the second panel element c2 with respect to the first panel element cl in an overlapping position in the holding The first panel element cl of the platform 100; The temporary fixing device 1000 can maintain the positional relationship of the first and second panel elements cl, C2 overlapping and aligned with each other, and temporarily fix these panel elements on the platform 100; And a drilling device 1100 is provided with positioning holes for temporarily positioning the first and second panel elements cl and c2 on the platform 100 to determine the positional relationship between the panel elements Cl and c2. Of course, the panel manufacturing devices shown in FIGS. 2 to 5 are sequentially explained from the device in FIG. 2, but the components having the same structure and function in the panel manufacturing device described later will be omitted. Subsequent components of the R, G, and B panels are those in which a tube liquid crystal layer LC for displaying images in a certain color is sandwiched between a pair of opposing transparent substrates si and s2. Electrodes (not shown) are formed on the substrates si and s2 on the surface of the liquid crystal layer LC of the counter tube. 44 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) i Packing -------- Order --------- The size of the thread paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 -------- _B7 ____--V. Description of the invention (γ) Article 2. Figures 5 to 5 are schematic configuration diagrams of an example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing this liquid crystal display panel. The panel manufacturing apparatus of FIG. 2 includes: a first platform 100 for holding the first panel element cl; an alignment device 400 for aligning the position of the first panel element cl on the first platform 100; a second platform 200, which is used relative to the first platform 100, or a predetermined positional relationship configuration, to maintain the second panel element c2; alignment. Device 500 for aligning the position of the second panel element c2 at V »-. ,. . . . . . . . . On the second platform 200; the first drive. 3 卯, the relative movement of the first and second platforms (100, 200) '俾 respectively align the positions, and hold the first and second panel elements cl, C2 on the first and second platforms 100, 200 The opposite ends overlap the predetermined ends of the two panel elements cl and c2, a combination of the driving device of the platform 100 and the driving device 300 of the platform 200; and a pressing member 610, which is used to hold the first and second components respectively. On the platforms 100 and 200, the ends of the two panel elements cl, c2 with the aforementioned predetermined end portions being pressed and held on the first platform 100; and the second driving device 310, which maintains the pressing member 610 on one side to press the two panel elements The first platform of the end section is described in the panel manufacturing device for pressing the panel element by the pressing end piece 610. These components are marked with the same reference symbols. As mentioned above, the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a first platform 100, an alignment device 400 ′, a second platform 200, an alignment device 500, and a platform drive 45. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm ^------------- -------- ^ --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page ) 472223 κι ____ Β7 ____ 5. Description of the invention (the first drive device 300 and the pressing member 610 constituted by the device 320 and the platform drive device 310. The first platform 100 is the first of the panel manufacturing device shown in FIG. 3 The platform 100, the platform 100 of the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Nos. 4 and 5 are the same platform. This first platform 100 includes a first suction stage 101 and a panel element holding device 110 for holding panel elements. The first suction stage 101 is at The area holding the panel element cl is provided at a predetermined interval with a plurality of suction holes 101a for sucking the panel element. In addition to the suction hole 101a, the panel element holding device 110 includes an exhaust chamber 111 located on the platform 100 and flexibility The pipe 112, the exhaust device 113, and the exhaust device 113 are connected to one end of the pipe 112, and the exhaust chamber 111 is connected to the pipe 112 At the other end, the exhaust pipe 111 communicates with the suction hole 101a of the adsorption table 101. Therefore, by the operation of the exhaust device 113, air is exhausted from the suction hole 101a through the exhaust chamber 111 and the pipe 112. Second The platform 200 includes a second suction stage 201, and a panel element holding device 210 for holding panel elements. The second suction stage 201 is provided at a predetermined interval in a region holding the panel element c2, and is provided with a plurality of suctions for suctioning the panel elements. Hole 201a ... . . . . . . . . —. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * ·-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ In addition to the suction hole 201, the panel element holding device 210 includes an exhaust chamber 211, a flexible pipe 212, and an exhaust device 213 located on the platform 200. The exhaust unit 213 is connected to one end of the pipe 212 and the air chamber 211 is connected At the other end of 212, the exhaust pipe 211 communicates with the suction hole 201a of the adsorption table 201. Therefore, through the operation of the exhaust device 213, the air passes through the suction hole 201a through 46 f ^ ---- I --- ^ --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β) Exhaust chamber 211 'pipe 212 is discharged. The driving device 310 of the flat η 100 is provided in the panel manufacturing device shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 'It is not limited to this', but the pinion 313 provided on the first platform 100 is engaged with the rack 311 a provided along the guide rail 311 The pinion 313 is reciprocated by the motors 3 and 12 carrying the first platform 100. The first platform 100 moves along the guide rail 311 by the driving device 310 and is arranged at the panel element alignment position Q1 or the panel element bonding start position Q2. When the tool moves, the sliding member 102 provided on the first platform 100 slides along the guide rail 311. The driving device 300 of the platform 200 includes a second platform support arm 321 and a rotation driving unit 322 for driving the same. One end portion of the second platform support arm 321 is supported by the shaft 322 a of the rotation driving portion 322, and the other end portion is connected to the second platform 200. The rotation driving unit 22 is arranged at a fixed position, and can rotate the shaft 322a in a predetermined direction (a direction in the figure in the formula) or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (the direction in the figure B) at a predetermined time. Therefore, the rotation of the shaft 322a is caused by the driving of the rotation driving part 322, and the support arm 321 and the second platform 200 rotate in the A direction or the B direction at a predetermined timing. The pressing member 610 can be raised and lowered by a lifting driving device (not shown). Therefore, the pressing member 610 is arranged by the lifting driving device at a predetermined time so that the first and second panel elements cl, c2 located at the panel element bonding start position Q2. The pressing position p, which is pressed toward the first platform 100, or the withdrawal position p2, which is retracted upward from the position P1. Here, the pressing member 610 is a pressing roller having a cross-sectional pattern, and has a panel element pressing surface 610a. 47 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). -------- Order ------- --Line 472223 A7 ____B7 ___ 5. Description of the invention (β) Alignment device 0, 500 has 2 cameras 410, 510 (here CCD (charge coupled device) camera 'XY-0 drive device m, D2, control Part 430, 530 °. Fig. 6 shows the top panel elements cl, C2 of the adsorption tables 101, 201 held on the first and second platforms 100 and 200, viewed from above, and the alignment devices 400, 500, etc. The illustrations are omitted. X-Υ-0 drive devices, D2 ', the aforementioned exhaust chambers 111, and 211 are provided on the platforms 120, 200 of the first and second platforms 100, 200, respectively, and adsorption platforms 101, 201 are provided. On the first and second panel elements cl and c2, marks ml and m2 of pre-aligned positions are formed outside the display area of the panel element, and the alignment marks are formed in a diagonal pattern in the diagonal direction of the panel element. The two end regions are not limited to this, as long as the panel components can be aligned with each other, they can be any pattern. The alignment mark can be formed at any position outside the area. The alignment mark can be formed by printing or the like. When forming the electrode of the panel element, a mark electrode can be provided outside the display area. Apply voltage to the electrode to light. At this time, the alignment mark 1, m2 panel elements cl, c2, are printed on top. The CCD camera 410 shown in Figure 2 is connected to the control unit 430, and the panel element C1 held on the adsorption table 101 can be observed. The pre-formed alignment mark ml sends this mark information to the control section 430. Also, the CCD camera 510 is connected to the control section 530. The pre-formed mark m2 of the panel element c2 held on the adsorption table 201 can be observed, and this mark information is sent to the control section 530, respectively. The X-Y-Θ driving devices D1-D2 are connected to the control units 430 and 530, respectively. 48 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----- -------- ------- I -1 ^ — — — — — — — -(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 472223 A7 __B7______ 5. Description of the invention (") The control units 430 and 530 control the actions of the driving devices D1 and D2 according to the mark information from the camera, so that the panel components cl, c2 are respectively aligned at the predetermined positions. 'By XY- < 9 The driving devices D1 and D drive the adsorption tables 101 and 201 along X-Y-0. The control units 430 and 530 each include an apparatus using an image processing method for alignment such as a substrate and a panel. Alignment of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 sucked and held on the adsorption tables 101, 201 is performed. 俾 In the high-precision alignment state, the overlapping ends of the second panel elements are held, and the two panel elements cl, C2 fit. In addition, the 'aligning device 500 is supported by a lifting driving device (not shown), whereby the lifting driving device retreats to an upper position when the alignment is not performed, that is, a position where the second platform 200 does not collide even when it is rotated. As described above, the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 3 includes the first stage 100, the alignment device 400 ', the second stage 200', and the stage driving device 300 '. The alignment device 400 'is the same as the alignment device of the panel manufacturing device shown in Figs. This alignment device 400 'is disposed above the panel element alignment position Q1' and includes two cameras 410 (here, CCD cameras), an X-Y-0 drive device 400, a control unit 430, and a lift drive device 440. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a state where the panel elements C1 and C2 are aligned with each other and placed on the first stage 100 when viewed from above. The first platform 100, the alignment device 400 ', and the like are not shown. As described above, marks m1 and m2 are formed on the panel elements cl and c2 outside the display area of the panel element for pre-alignment. The CCD camera 410 shown in M ^ is connected to the control unit 430, and the size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). --------— — — — — I I --- — I order · -------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (M). Check the pre-formed pairs of each panel element cl, c2 The quasi marks ml and m2 are sent to the control unit 430. The X-Υ-θ driving device 420 includes a panel element holding arm 421, an X-Y-0 driving portion 422, and a panel element holding device 423. One end portion of the panel element holding arm 421 is connected to the X-Υ-0-direction movable portion of the driving portion, and the other end portion supports the suction stage 424 of the panel element holding device 423 and the like. The panel element holding device _423 includes an adsorption table 424, an exhaust chamber 425, a flexible tube 426, and an exhaust device 427. The adsorption table 424 can be used to adsorb and hold the panel element c2. A suction hole 424 for sucking the panel element. Money nose device _ connected to the two end of the / 426, the other end of the tube 426 is connected to the exhaust chamber 425, the exhaust chamber 425 and the suction hole of the suction table 424 ... ........................................ ......................... ............- 424a _ Genus. Therefore, through the continuous rotation of the exhaust device 427, air is exhausted from the suction hole 424a through the exhaust chamber 425 and the pipe 426. ... ....... Χ-Υ-0 drive unit 422 is connected to the control unit 430 ', and can be held on the panel of the first platform 100 along the first suction. The surface of the component cl follows the predetermined direction (the X direction in the drawing) and the direction perpendicular to the component cl (the Y direction in the drawing), and moves the adsorption stage 424 and the panel component c2 held by it so as to make it about the axis perpendicular to the XY plane (FIG. In the formula, it rotates in the direction of 0. According to the instruction of the control unit 430 ', the panel element c2 can be moved above the panel element cl held on the first platform 100. The control unit 430' is connected to the CCD camera 410, X-Υ -Θ drive device 420, with alignment marks ml, m2 from camera 410, 50 paper sizes Applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 format (210 X 297 mm) — — — — — — — — — — —-IIIIIII 1! 1! 1111 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _____B7__ 5. Description of the invention un. Information is treated as bit information, and based on this position information, XY-0 drive device 420 is controlled In this operation, the adsorption platform 424 and the panel element c2 are moved, so that the two panel elements cl and c2 are aligned. The aforementioned alignment marks ml and m2 are the same. The control unit 430 'includes a device that uses an alignment method for image processing for alignment of a substrate, a panel, and the like. The exhaust chamber 425 and the adsorption stage 424 have panel components for detecting panel elements. The alignment marks ml and m2 are omitted through holes or windows. _ The lifting drive device 440 is provided above the X-Υ-θ drive device 420, which can lift the drive device 420 in advance. Therefore, you can borrow the lift The driving device 440 moves the X-Υ-β driving device 420 and the suction stage 424 connected to the lower side. Further, the suction stage 424 can be placed close to the first stage held in advance at the panel element alignment position Q1. The panel element c2 on the panel element cl attracts and holds the panel element c2. In this state, the position of the panel element cl, c2 can be aligned, and the panel element c2 can be driven along XY-6. After alignment, the alignment In the quasi-position state, the panel element c2 is superimposed and arranged on the panel element cl. Here, the second platform is a platform having a panel element holding surface 200a 'having a sector shape of approximately a quarter of an arc in side view. 2 platform 200 'contains panel elements The holding device 210 '. In addition to the suction table 201 and the exhaust chamber 21Γ of the platform 200', the panel component holding device 210 'includes a flexible tube 212' and an exhaust device 213, and can hold and hold the panel component C2 through the suction table 201. The table and 201 are provided with a plurality of suction holes 210a 'for sucking the panel element at a predetermined interval in the area where the panel element c2 is held. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____ B7___ V. Description of the Invention (M) The exhaust device 213 'is connected to one end of the tube 2 丨 2', the other end of the tube 212 'is connected to the exhaust chamber 211', the exhaust chamber 211 'and the suction hole 201a of the adsorption table 20Γ 'Connected. Therefore, by the operation of the exhaust device 213 ', the air is exhausted from the suction hole 201a' through the exhaust chamber 211 'and the tube 212'. This second platform is supported on a platform support shaft 310 'which is one of the components of the platform driving device 300'. A part of the platform driving device 300 includes the driving device 310 of the platform 100, and further includes a rotation driving section 320 'for driving the platform supporting shaft 310'. The rotation driving unit 320 'can rotate the platform supporting shaft 310' in a predetermined direction (direction A in the drawing) or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (direction B in the drawing) at a predetermined time. Therefore, the second stage 200 'rotates in the A direction or the B direction at a predetermined timing. In addition, the second platform 200 ', the platform supporting shaft 310', and the rotation driving unit 300 can be raised and lowered by a lifting driving device (not shown), and the second platform 200 'can be arranged at a predetermined lowering position at a predetermined time by the lifting driving device, or Position P3 retreats to the upper retreat position P4. As described above, the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 4 includes the platform 100, the alignment device 400 ', the holding clip 800 on the platform 100, the gap forming device 900, and the pressure roller 600'. The pressure roller 600 'is disposed at a fixed position. Here, the pressure roller 600 'is a pressure roller having a circular cross section having an elastic surface layer, and has a tight peripheral surface 600a' of a panel element. The holding clip 800 is provided on one end of the first platform 100 and can be kept overlapping. One end of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 aligned on the first platform 100 is held on the one overlapped on the first platform 100. status. 52 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Μ -------- Order ---------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) 472223 A7 _B7 _____ V. Description of the invention: The gap shifting device 900 includes a panel element support portion 910 that can be detachably connected to the other end portion of the second panel element 2, a clip 920 holding the support member 910, The wire guide pulley 930 at a fixed position can wind and loosen the wire winch 940 and the metal wire 950 with one end connected to the clamp 920 and the other end connected to the winch 940. This gap forming device 900 releases the metal wire 950 from the winch 940 'holds the support member 910 supporting the panel element c2 with the clip 920' after 'and winds the __ metal wire 950, thereby being held by the clip 800 on the platform 100 A gap is formed between the panel elements cl and c2. Further, as the first and second panel elements cl, c2 are bonded by the pressure roller 600 ', the wire 950 can be gradually released from the winch 940, and the end of the raised panel element c2 can be lowered. As described above, the panel element manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 5 includes the platform 100, the alignment device 400 ', the temporary fixing device 1000, and the drilling device 1100. Here, the temporary fixing device 1000 is a device including two clips 1010 provided on the two ends of the first flat 100. As mentioned above, the first and second positions can be kept overlapping and aligned on the first platform 100. The positional relationship between the panel elements cl and C2 is temporarily fixed to the panel elements cl and c2 on the first platform 100. The drilling device 1100 here includes two punching machines 1110. As mentioned above, positioning holes can be set on the first and second panel elements cl, c2 temporarily fixed on the platform 100 to determine the mutualness of these panel elements cl, c2. Positional relationship. Secondly, referring to the manufacturing process shown in Figures 8 to 13, one by one, the type shown in Figure 1 of each of the display panel manufacturing equipment shown in Figures 2 to 5 in order. 53 This paper size is applicable to China. Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --- Ill ---- 11. ------ 1 I order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) 472223 A7 ______B7_____ V. Description of the Invention (4>. An example of the manufacture of a reflective liquid crystal display panel will be described. Also, the liquid crystal display panel shown in FIG. 1 of each display panel manufacturing device shown in FIGS. 1 to 5 is manufactured At A, one panel element is manufactured at a time, and R, G, and B panel elements for red display, green display, and blue display are manufactured. One of the R, G, and B panel elements (here, the R panel element) is used as the first. 1 panel element cl. Use the panel element (here __ this is a G panel element) attached to this panel element For the second panel element c2, the two panel elements are bonded together by the manufacturing process of each panel device as described below. First, an example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel as a display panel manufacturing device shown in FIG. 2 will be described. Let's explain a part (1) to (4) of a liquid crystal display panel manufacturing example which is one of the panel manufacturing devices in FIG. 2. FIG. 9 shows the steps (50 to (8) to explain the steps shown in FIG. 8 + FIG. ). And, for the sake of simplicity, Figures 8 and 9 are omitted. (1) At least one side of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 to be bonded to each other. Here, It is attached to the first panel element cl (here, the R panel element). The double-sided adhesive (double) covered with one side and covered with the removable protective sheet NN1 in advance is provided on the opposite side of one side of the aforementioned light absorbing layer BK. -sided ^ ______________________ ·-··· .- ', adhesice tape) NN. Moreover, a single-sided adhesive sheet with a removable protective sheet (sdhesive sheet) can be used instead of the double-sided adhesive. Face up, position the first panel element cl on the first platform plus, and by the panel element holding device 110, The panel element cl is adsorbed on the adsorption table 101 of the platform 100, and the alignment device 400 is used, while the CCD is used to photograph 54. ------------ Installation --- I ---- Order ------ --- Line- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 ___ B7___________ 5. Description of Invention (β). 410 Observe the alignment mark ml of the first panel element cl, while driving the suction table by the X-Υ-0 driving device, align the panel element cl with the predetermined position. Similarly, in order for the second panel element c2 (here, the G panel element) to face up, the end of the second panel element appears on the second platform 200, and it is positioned on the second platform. 200, adsorbed on the adsorption table 201. Using the alignment device 500, the CCD camera 510 is used to observe the opposite alignment mark m2 of the second panel element c2, and the suction table 201 is driven by the X-Υ-Θ driving device to align the panel element C2 at a predetermined position. (2) After the alignment of the first and second panel elements cl, C2 is completed, the first platform 100 that attracts the first panel element cl is moved to a predetermined end of the panel element cl by the platform driving device 310. To the position under the pressing member 610, that is, the panel element bonding position Q2. (3) Remove the protective release sheet NN1 from the double-sided adhesive NN attached to the first panel element cl of the first platform 100 to expose the adhesive material N. (4) The driving unit 322 of the platform driving device 320 rotates the second platform 200 that attracts the second panel element c2 in the direction A, moves to the ends of the two panel elements cl, c2 to a position below the pressing member 610, Thereby, the two panel elements cl, c2 are made to face each other, and at the same time, predetermined end portions of the two panel elements cl, c2 are overlapped. At this time, the alignment device 500 is retracted to the top by a lifting driving device (not shown). (5) The pressing member 610 is lowered to the pressing position P1 by a lifting driving device (not shown), and the overlapping ends of the two panel elements cl and c2 are pressed by a part of the pressing surface 610a of the panel element of the pressing member 610. Hold tightly on the first platform 100. 55 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- -------- Order ------- -Line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _ B7__ V. Description of Invention (A) ⑹ After that, the platform driving device 310 is used to make the first platform 100 relative to the second platform 200 and the pressure. The pressing member 610 moves, thereby maintaining the panel element in the pressed state by the pressing member 610, and pulling out the second panel element c2 from the second platform 200 while being pressed by the pressing member 610, thereby adhering. Material N, sequentially bonds the two panel elements cl, c2 to the first platform 100. (7) After the pressing member 610 is relatively moved to the end of the two panel elements cl, C2, the pressing member 610 is raised to the retreat position P2 by using a lifting driving device (not shown). (8) In this way, the bonding of one and two panel components cl, c2 is completed, that is, the action of attracting the second platform 200 by the panel component holding device 210 is released, and the platform 200 is rotated in the B direction by the platform driving device 320, so that the platform 200 Return to the original position. In addition, after the bonding of the two panel components is completed, the first platform keeps the bonded panel components back to the initial position Q1. Secondly, the panel element to which the R panel element and the G panel element are bonded is regarded as a panel element cl, and one panel element to be bonded is regarded as a second panel element c2. Repeat the same steps, and the next B The panel components are bonded to the panel components that have been bonded. Therefore, a display panel A in which R panel elements, G panel elements, and B panel elements are laminated is obtained. Next, an example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by a display panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 3 will be described. Fig. 10 is a view showing a process example (1) to (.7) of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by a panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 3. And "the 10th figure is for simplification" Fig. 7K in which a part of the components is omitted. 56 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I Pack -------- Order --------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) 472223 A7 _B7____ 5. Description of the invention (舛) (1) At least one side of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 to be attached to the bonding surface, here, it is related to the first panel element Cl (in This is an R panel element) The opposite surface provided with one side of the aforementioned light absorbing layer BK is affixed in advance to a double-sided adhesive (also an adhesive sheet) covered with a removable protective sheet NN1. The panel element C1 is positioned on the first platform 100 such that the surface to be attached faces upward and is adsorbed on the adsorption table 101. A second panel element c2 (here, a G panel element) is placed on the first panel element cl, and then, the two panel elements cl, c2 are aligned with each other. This alignment is performed as before. That is, the panel element c2 placed on the panel element cl is sucked and held on the suction stage 424 of the panel element holding device 423 of the temporary alignment device 400 ′. In this state, the two panel elements cl are observed with the CCD camera 410 on one side. The alignment marks ml, m2 of, and c2 are moved by the X-Υ-0 driving device 420 to hold the adsorption table 424 of the second panel element c2, so that the alignment marks ml, m2 of the two panel elements cl, c2 are consistent. This alignment operation is performed according to the marker information detected by the camera 410 and according to the instruction of the control section 430 '. As soon as the alignment process is finished, the panel element c2 is placed on the panel element cl in the state of alignment. (2) The platform driving device 310 is used to move the first platform 100 of the panel elements cl, c2 which are held in such an aligned position and overlapped, to below the second platform 200 '. At this time, the second stage 200 'is arranged at the predetermined lowering position P3 so that the gap between the second stage 200' and the first stage 100 is approximately the same distance as the thickness of the two panel elements. 57 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --IIIII I ---- · I — — I 1 I 1 Order — — — — — — — I- (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page) 472223 A7 ____B7_____ V. Description of the invention ( <) (3) The first platform 100 is further moved, and at the same time, the second platform 200 'is synchronized with the first platform 100 by the second platform rotary driving unit 320', and is brought into contact with the second panel element c2 to rotate. In this manner, the second panel element c2 is sucked and held on the second stage 200 'by the panel element holding device 210'. The holding of the panel element by the second stage 200 'can be performed smoothly by contacting and rotating the panel element 200s' of the second stage 200' relative to the second panel element c2. (4) With the lifting drive device (not shown), the second platform 200 'that sucks and holds the second panel element c2 is raised to the retreat position P4, and the double-sided adhesive is attached to the first panel element cl of the first platform 100. NN removal can remove the protective sheet NN1, exposing the adhesive material N. (5) The second stage 200'2 that holds and holds the second panel element c2 is lowered to the position P3, and one end portion of the second panel element c2 is pressed against one end portion of the first panel element cl. (6) Move the first platform 100 to return to the position Q1, and synchronize with it, invert it before holding the second platform 200 'of the second panel element c2, and crimp and rotate the first platform 100 through the panel element c2. The first panel element cl is thereby used to sequentially bond the second panel element c2 to the first panel element cl from one end to the other end by the adhesive material N. (7) The second platform 320 'is released from the suction operation of the panel element holding device 210' to raise the second platform 200 '. When the bonding of the two panel components is completed, the first stage 100 maintains the holding of the bonded panel components and returns to the initial position Q1. Secondly, the panel components where the R panel component and the G panel component are bonded are regarded as 58. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------- ------ Order --------- line. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____B7_____ V. Description of the invention (4). It is the second panel element c2, repeated Perform the same steps to attach the next B panel component to the already attached panel component. Therefore, a display panel A in which R panel elements, G panel elements, and B panel elements are laminated is obtained. Next, an example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 4 will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a process example (丨) to ⑺ for manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 4. In addition, for the sake of simplicity, Fig. 11 omits the illustration of some components. (1) The first light-absorbing layer BK is provided on at least one side of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 to be bonded to the bonding surface. Here, the light-absorbing layer BK is provided on the first panel element cl (here, the R panel element). The opposite side of the surface is affixed to a surface in advance. Double-sided adhesive (also an adhesive sheet) NN covered with a removable protective sheet NN1. Position the first panel element cl and slightly position it on the first platform 100. With the surface to be attached facing upward, the panel element C1 is adsorbed on the adsorption table 101 of the platform 100 by the panel element holding device 110. The second panel element c2 (here, the G panel element) is roughly positioned and overlapped on the first panel element cl. (2) The platform driving device 310 is used to move the first platform 100 on which the first and second panel elements cl and c2 are placed to below the alignment device 400 ', that is, the panel element alignment position Q1. Here, the device 400 'is used to align the panel element c2 with the panel element cl. This alignment is the same as step (1) of Fig. 10 'and its explanation is omitted here. After the alignment of the two panel elements cl, c2 is completed, one end of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 (here, the right edge part of the panel element in the drawing is held by the holding clip 800) Overlapping in flat 59 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1 -------- Order · -------- * 5 ^ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 p ~ ____ 2Z ---- V. Description of the invention () State on the stage 100. (3) The second panel element cl, c2 will be placed by the flat drive device 310. 1 The platform 100 is moved to the panel element fitting opening position Q2. The other end portion (left side portion in the figure) of the second panel element c2 is held on the panel element supporting member 910, and the member 910 is held by the clip 920. (4) One end of the panel element cl, c2 held by the clip 800 is left to form a gap between the first and second panel elements cl, c2 by the gap forming device 900. That is, it is wound by a disc 940 The metal wire 950 is centered on the ends of the two panel elements cl and c2 held by the holding clip 800, and is rotated and lifted through the supporting member 910 to be the second surface supported by the clip 920. The end of the element c2. Moreover, the removable protective sheet NN1 is removed from the double-sided adhesive NN attached to the first panel element cl of the first platform 100, and the adhesive material N is exposed. (5) —The surface is pulled by the metal wire 950 The clip 920 prevents the second panel element c2 from being deflected and lowers it to a predetermined position. (6) Furthermore, while the metal wire 950 is released, the first platform 100 is further moved by the platform driving device 310, and One end of the two panel elements cl, c2 held by the holding clip 800 reaches below the pressure roller 600 and starts to compact the roller 600 'from above the second panel element c2. The pressure roller 600' can be deformed by the elasticity of its surface while Over temperature clamp 800. (7) With the bonding of the first and second panel elements cl'c2 by the pressure roller 600 ', the clip 920 is gradually lowered on one side and the pressure roller 600' on the other, and the clamp 800 is held from the end. The retained end side is fully adhered to the first and second panel elements cl, c2 in order. Secondly, the panel element where the R panel element and the G panel element are bonded is regarded as 60. This paper standard applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297mm) 1 —III -----! · I ------ Order --------- (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) 472223 A7 ________B7_____ 5. The description of the invention (β) is the first panel element, and the next panel element B to be bonded is regarded as the second panel element C2. Repeat the same steps repeatedly, A B-panel component is attached to an already-attached panel component. Therefore, a display panel A in which R panel elements, G panel elements, and B panel elements are laminated is obtained. Next, an example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the display panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a part (1) to (5) of a process example for manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 5, and FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the structure shown in FIG. 12 The following steps (6) and (7) are shown. In addition, for the sake of simplicity, Figures 12 and 13 omit the illustration of some components. (1) Position the first panel element cl (here, the R plate element) on the first platform 100, with the side to be bonded facing upward, and attract the panel element cl to the platform 100 by the panel element holding device 110. Adsorption table 101. The second panel element c2 (here, the G panel element) is roughly positioned and superimposed on the first panel element cl. (2) The platform driving device 310 moves the first platform 100 on which the first and second panel elements cl and c2 are placed to below the alignment device 400, that is, the panel element alignment position Q1. Here, the alignment device 400 is used to align the position of the panel element C2 and superimpose it on the panel element cl. This alignment is the same as step ⑴ in FIG. 10, and its explanation is omitted here. After the alignment of the two panel elements cl and C2 is completed, one end of the first and second panel elements C1 and c2 (the right edge portion in the drawing) will be aligned by temporarily fixing the device 100-clamp 1010. Temporarily fixed to the platform 100. (3) ~ (4) By the platform driving device 31, the panel components to be temporarily fixed 61 paper sizes ^^ Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2i_x 297 mm)- -I I--III I --- 111 1 1 --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ______ Β7 _______ 5. Description of the invention (price) and the first platform 100 —Move to the original position. Second, the panel element temporarily fixing the R panel element and the G panel element is regarded as the first panel element cl, and at the same time, the next B panel element is regarded as the second panel element C2, and the aforementioned ( Steps 1) ~ (2): After the alignment of one panel element cl, C2 is completed, the other end of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 will be aligned by using another clip 1010 of the temporary fixing device 1000. The part (the left edge part in the drawing) is temporarily fixed to the platform 100. That is, by using another clip 1010 of the temporary fixing device 1000, A B panel element is temporarily fixed on the R, G panel element that has been temporarily fixed. (5) The temporarily fixed panel element and the first platform 100 are moved to the original position by the platform driving device 310, and the temporary fixing and panel are removed. One of the components and the G panel component is clamped 1010. In this way, in the aligned state, the R, G, and B panel components are overlapped and arranged into three segments. (6) The other clamp 1 temporarily holding the temporary fixing device will be placed. 1 The first platform of the fixed R, G, and B panel components 100 is moved below the punching machine 1110 of the drilling device 1100. The punching machine 1110 is simultaneously opened on the three panel components of R, G, and B. (7) Secondly, for example, instead of step (2) in the step shown in Figure u, use the positioning hole 'except to hold one end of the R and G panel components on the platform 100'. In the steps shown, the R and G panel components are bonded 'secondarily' and the same steps are repeated, and the B panel components are further bonded to the already bonded R and G panel components to obtain the target display panel A. As explained above , From the manufacturing of the display panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Figures 2 to 5 In the display panel manufacturing example, the adjacent panel components are highly refined. 62 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this purchase) --- ----- Order --------- 472223 A7 _____B7__ V. Description of the invention (M). Laminated in the aligned position to obtain a display panel that only displays good images. Since in the manufacturing example of manufacturing each display panel by using the display panel device shown in Figs. 2 to 4, adjacent panel elements are sequentially bonded from the ends, so it is possible to degas between these panel elements and make them closely contact each other. , Laminating in a state without wrinkles, so as to obtain a display panel for good image display. In the manufacturing example of the display panel by the display panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 5, the end of the panel element can be fully bonded to the adjacent panel element, so it is possible to degas between these panel elements and make the two It is tightly attached, and is bonded under the condition of no ridges. In addition, a decompression chamber may be provided in any of the display panel manufacturing apparatuses shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, which is used to attach the adjacent panel elements so that the surrounding atmosphere of the two panel elements becomes a predetermined decompressed ambient atmosphere. . Figures 14 (A) to 14 (D) show the schematic structure of a display panel manufacturing device provided with a decompression chamber 1200 and an exhaust chamber 1300 connected thereto in each of the display panel manufacturing devices shown in Figures 2 to 5 above. . The reduced chamber 1200 has air-tightness and can surround the platforms 100, 200, 2000 ', and the like. The exhaust devices 113, 213, 213 ', 427, and the like are provided outside the decompression chamber 1200. The exhaust device 1300 here includes a rotary pump earth device, which can decompress the exhaust in the decompression chamber 1200. The decompression chamber 1200 has an air-tight door for entering and exiting the panel element, and the illustration is omitted. In the case where such a decompression chamber 1200 is used, in any of the panel manufacturing apparatuses of FIGS. 2 to 5, the pressure is reduced to a predetermined pressure inside the chamber 1200 at least when the panel components are bonded. At this time, the pressure in the decompression chamber 1200 is not limited to 63 standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) " " (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)- ------ Order --------- Line A7 V. Description of the Invention (μ) Here, 'for example, it reaches 13pa ~ 40pa (about 0.1Torr ~ 0.3Torr). [B] Method and device for manufacturing display panel related to FIGS. 15 to 20 The method and device for manufacturing display panel according to FIGS. 15 to 20 are based on the method and device for manufacturing display panel. (Manufacturing method of display panel) A manufacturing method of a display panel, which is a laminated component used to form a panel element of a display panel. The manufacture of a display panel includes the following steps: The first and second panel elements are to be mutually A step of setting an adhesive material on at least one side of the bonding; a step of aligning the first and second panel elements with each other, and arranging the surfaces to be bonded to each other; The crimping step of the first and second panel components in a pre-position to each other in a pre-position; the first and second panel components are crimped to each other in the aforementioned crimping step. This initial pressure-bonding portion gradually expands the pressure-bonding portion, and the entire pressure-bonding is performed. The following manufacturing method can be cited as a representative example of the manufacturing method of this display panel. That is, a method for manufacturing a display panel is a method of manufacturing a display panel by laminating panel elements for forming a display panel for displaying an image, including the following steps: the step of holding the first panel element on the first platform; 64 China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ ------- —Order --------- (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again for details) 472223 A7 __________B7 __ V. Description of the invention (β) The steps of keeping the second panel element on the second platform; The first and second panel elements on the first and second platforms are arranged and arranged, 俾 wait for each other The steps of facing the bonding surfaces; the steps of aligning the first and second panel components with each other; the step of providing an adhesive material on at least one side of the first and second panel components to be bonded to each other; and sandwiching the aforementioned adhesion In the state of materials, the first and second panel components held on the first and second platforms are sandwiched between the first and second platforms, and the step of crimping each other; the first and second platforms At least one of the platforms is provided with the elasticity of the panel element holding surface. Surface is a convex curved surface of a predetermined curvature of the internet. In the aforementioned crimping step, the first and second panel elements are crimped to each other by bringing the first and second platforms relatively close to each other, thereby initially crimping the two panel elements to each other with the convex surface of the elastic pad. Next, the two platforms are brought close to each other, and while the elastic pad is elastically deformed, the mutually crimped portion is gradually enlarged from the initial crimped portion to be fully crimped to each other. In any manufacturing method, the step of providing an adhesive material on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other can be exemplified by a double-sided adhesive that is previously adhered to the surface of the panel element and covered with a protective sheet. Or an adhesive sheet (this sheet may be in the form of an adhesive tape), the step of removing the protective sheet and exposing the adhesive surface, and the steps of coating the surface of the adhesive material panel element by hand or using an adhesive material or an adhesive material coating device. The setting method of the adhesive material is to be free of obstacles. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X 297 mm), i τ (please read the notes on the back first, and then copy the s> 472223 A7 _________ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (q) Italian way. The adhesive material setting step is implemented before the crimping step. As long as there is no obstacle before the crimping step, it can be implemented at any stage. The crimping step is to set the adhesive material. The panel elements are aligned with each other, and are implemented after facing each other. Also, in any manufacturing method, the first and second panel elements are aligned with each other by various methods. For example, using itself The known alignment method for substrates and panels is performed. For example, power can be exemplified as the alignment method. (1) An alignment method in which an alignment mark is set on each panel element, and the first and second panel elements are fixed. The middle panel element is at a predetermined position, and another panel element is arranged on top of it. One side of the other panel element is visually observed or viewed by a camera, and the other side is moved by hand. When using this alignment method to keep the panel components on the first and second platforms separately, for example, one panel component can be held on any platform, and the other components can be overlapped and arranged. —Panel element on this panel element '— Observe the alignment marks of the two panel elements visually or with a camera, and move the other panel element by hand to' align the alignment marks of the two panel elements'. Thereafter, Hold the other panel element on another platform. (2) — A method of alignment, setting a pre-alignment mark on each panel element 'fixing one panel element at a predetermined position among the first and second panel elements' at Another panel element is arranged on or above; while the alignment mark of the two panel elements is viewed by a camera ', the other panel is moved by the X-Υ-β driving device 66 ^ Paper Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 ~- — — — — — — —---- — 丨 i III Order · --- I ---- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 --------- -B7___ 5. Description of the Invention (0) Element The alignment marks of the components are the same. In the case of using this alignment method, the method of keeping the panel components on the first and second platforms separately is adopted, for example, a panel component can be held on any platform and arranged above the panel component On the other panel element, one side of the two panel element alignment mark is observed by a camera, and the other panel element is moved by the X-Υ-0 driving device to make the two panel element alignment marks consistent. It is used to maintain the other panel. The component platform may also include an X-Χ-0 driving device. At this time, the other panel component is held on the platform, so the position of the panel component can be aligned and driven along X-Υ-θ. When the platform for holding the other panel element does not include the X-Χ-0 driving device, the other panel element in the aligned position may be placed on the aforementioned one panel element, and the other panel placed on this The component is held on the component platform. The alignment using the X-Υ-0 driving device can be performed manually by operating the XY-Θ driving device, but the X- 控制-can also be automatically controlled by the marker information (such as its position information) detected by the camera. θ drive device. In the latter case. An image processing method can be used to align substrates, panels, and the like. Moreover, it goes without saying that the X-Υ-0 driving device is a device that can move an object in a direction X and a direction Y perpendicular thereto, while rotating about an axis perpendicular to the X-Y plane. The alignment mark may be a liquid crystal mark, an electric field light emitting mark, or the like that emits light by being powered on. In any of the foregoing display panel manufacturing methods, the first and 67th layers of the paper are crimped to each other in a state of sandwiching the aforementioned adhesive material through a crimping step. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 〇x 297 public love) — 111 丨 丨 丨 ------ 丨 IIIII order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 ΚΙ ___ Β7 _ 5. Invention Description (b <) Display panel with 2 panel elements. Hold the first and second panel components on the first and second platforms, and when bonding the two panel components, use the two platforms to clamp the two panel components to make them crimp to each other. Also, there are three or more panel components to be pasted. At this time, the bonded panel component obtained through the crimping step is regarded as the aforementioned first panel component, and at the same time, the next panel component to be laminated is regarded as the former second panel component. Each time a panel element is attached to the already attached panel element. In the case where the first and second panel elements are held on the first and second platforms, the holding of the panel element by the platform is not limited to this, but the case of holding and holding the panel element through the suction hole provided on the platform may be taken as a representative example. . In the case of a platform provided with the aforementioned elastic pad, the suction hole is provided at least in the elastic pad. The elastic pad may be exemplified by a suction hole for holding the panel element on the convex curved surface by vacuum suction, and the small hole is elastically deformed and closed by the elastic pad in the aforementioned crimping step. This elastic pad can release the part of the panel element held by the elastic pad to the other panel element in the crimping step when the two panel elements are crimped to each other, thereby smoothly bonding the two panel elements. In the aforementioned crimping step, the first and second panel components can be crimped to each other by initially crimping the two panel component portions to each other, and gradually expanding the crimping portion from the initial crimping portion to fully crimp each other. . With this crimping sequence, the positional displacement of the two panel components is suppressed, and the bonding is started. At the same time, while degassing from the two panel components, the moire is suppressed and bonded. In the crimping step, the first and second panel components are crimped to each other, for example, 68 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 'I ------ · I 丨 IIIII Order — — — — — — — — —-^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 _____ ___B7-一-" 、 Invention description (0) Initially make the two panel elements in the central part of each other The crimping is performed by gradually expanding the entire crimping portion (for example, toward the same figure or toward the two end portions of the panel element) from the initial crimping portion. Alternatively, for example, the two panel elements are initially crimped to each other at one of their ends, and the crimped portion is gradually enlarged from the initial crimped portion (for example, the end facing the opposite side). Keep at least one of the panel elements with the aforementioned elastic pad on the first and second platforms, and when the two panel elements are bonded, the first and second platforms are relatively close due to the crimping step. Initially, the two panel element parts are crimped to each other, and then, by bringing the two platforms closer, the elastic pad is elastically deformed, while gradually expanding the mutual learning part from the initial crimping part, and comprehensively crimping each other. To give a specific example of this case, the convex curved surface of the elastic pad is made into a convex curved surface with a raised central portion, such as a spherical surface, a substantially spherical surface, and a curved surface outside the semi-circular cylinder. The first and second panel elements in the crimping step The mutual crimping is performed by initially crimping the two panel elements to each other at the central portion thereof, and gradually expanding the mutual crimping portion (eg, toward the same figure or toward the two end portions of the panel element) from the initial mutual crimping portion. Alternatively, for example, the convex curved surface of the elastic pad is made into a convex surface that is high at one end and gradually decreases from the end to the other end, and the two panel elements are initially crimped to each other at one end portion thereof, and the crimped portion is initially crimped to each other. This is performed by gradually expanding the mutual crimping portion toward the other end portion. In order not to damage the panel elements and to prevent the two panel elements from being further displaced, one side is smoothly degassed from between the two panel elements, and the other is to sufficiently suppress the wrinkles of the panel elements. Recommended 69 --- 1 丨 丨 丨-— — I * -------- Order- ----- I--ί (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm> '472223 A7 _____ Β7 -------- 5. Description of the invention (β) The aforementioned elastic pad has an elastic constant of 60kgf / cm 2 ~ 200kgf / 〇n 2 When the convex body is formed as a convex surface with a spherical surface and a semi-cylindrical outer peripheral surface, the convex surface is as high as one end, rising from that part, and gradually decreasing from the end to the other end, to make a smooth surface. It can be recommended that the convex surface has a curvature radius of about 2000 mm to 5000 mm. The aforementioned crimping step can be more degassed between the two panel components, and the gas pressure around the two panel components can be set to a predetermined decompressed gas with a lower gas pressure. Pressure to implement. In this case, the decompression gas can be exemplified Pressure 13pa~ 40pa (0. 1T. on ~ 0. 3Τοπ) degree. In the case where the panel element is held on the first and second platforms and the two panel elements are bonded, the elastically deformable ring member for airtight sealing is used to surround the first and second panel elements by the crimping step, and simultaneously The ring member is sandwiched between the first and second platforms, forms an airtight chamber around the two panel elements, and exhausts from the airtight chamber to obtain the aforementioned decompressed gas pressure. (Display Panel Manufacturing Device) A manufacturing device for a display panel, which is a layered panel element used to form a display panel for displaying an image. A manufacturer of the display panel has: a first platform for holding a panel element; a second platform , Which is used to hold another panel element; and a platform driving device, which is used to make the first and second platforms oppose this panel element holding surface, relatively close to and away from each other; at least one of the first and second platforms is provided with The elastic pad of the holding surface of the panel element, meanwhile, the holding surface of the panel element is a convex curvature of a predetermined curvature 70. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------ Ill-- -i IIIII 1 Order ------- II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 _________ML__ 5. The description of the invention (Μ). The first and second platforms include a device for holding a panel element. The holding device is not limited to this, but, for example, there is a suction hole provided on the platform and connected to the exhaust device to suck the panel element. In the case of a platform having an elastic pad, the suction hole is provided at least in the elastic pad. π For example, the elastic pad may be exemplified to have a pore for holding the panel element I by vacuum suction; the pore for the suction of the convex curved surface is closed by elastic deformation of the elastic pad in the pressing step of the panel element 1; . When the two panel elements are crimped to each other in the crimping step of the elastic pad, the portion of the panel element held on the elastic mat to the crimped portion of the other panel element is released, thereby smoothly bonding the two panel elements. If it is such a display panel manufacturing device, one panel element of the panel elements to be bonded to each other can be held on the first platform and the other panel element can be held on the second platform. However, thereafter, the platform driving device is used to make the first and second platforms oppose the j-plate component holding surface on this surface, in other words, the panel components facing the two components that are to be secured to each other are relatively close to each other. Clamp and fit the two panel components. This panel component is bonded using an adhesive material. As described in the manufacturing method of the display panel, the adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the two panel elements to be bonded to each other before bonding. The manufacturing apparatus may be provided with an adhesive material coating apparatus. I Align the two panel components with each other before the two panel components are attached. This alignment can be performed as described in the aforementioned display panel manufacturing method. 71 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 _____B7_ 5. Description of the invention (called) The manufacturing device can also be equipped with the mutual alignment device of the panel components, such as to be adhered to each other The two panel elements are aligned with each other on an alignment device on the first or second platform. An example is a secondary device. ⑴An alignment device, including a camera, which observes the alignment marks formed in advance on each panel element, and an X-Υ-0 driving device, in order to make the alignment marks of the two panel elements consistent, the alignment position is maintained at the first One of the panel elements of the first and second platforms is molded and driven to drive the other panel element. ⑵An alignment device, equipped with a camera, to observe the alignment marks formed on each panel element in advance, and the X- 装置 -0 drive unit, which is formed by holding the panel element on one of the first and second platforms / one of the platforms Drive another panel element from above; and a control unit that controls the operation of the X-Υ-θ drive device according to the alignment mark information (such as its position information, etc.) from the camera, drives the other panel element, and aligns The marks are consistent, and the two panel components are aligned. This control unit may exemplify an alignment method used for image processing for aligning a substrate, a panel, or the like. The manufacturing apparatus described above performs the lamination of panel elements as follows. That is, using the convex curved surface of the elastic pad, the two panel element portions are first crimped to each other, and then, from the first crimped portion, the crimped portion is fully enlarged. In this way, the mutually crimped portion is enlarged, and the two panel elements are bonded together, and one side prevents the position of the two panel elements from shifting. And one side is degassed from between the two panel elements, so that the panel elements will not be tarnished. In addition, when there are 3 or more panel components to be bonded, 72 of the two paper panel components to be bonded to each other are used as 72 of the two panel components to be bonded to each other. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) '---------- 1' I * 1111111 ^ --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _________ V. Invention Description () One. The convex curved surface of the elastic pad provided on one of the first and second platforms may be a convex curved surface raised at the center, such as a curved surface of a spherical surface, a substantially spherical surface, or a peripheral surface of a half-sectioned cylinder. In the case of using a convex curved surface, the crimping of the two panel elements is based on the initial crimping of the first and second panel elements at their central portions, and the initial crimping portion gradually expands (such as toward the periphery or the two ends of the panel element). Crimp each other. Alternatively, for example, the convex curved surface of the elastic pad may be a convex curved surface that is high at one end and gradually decreases from the end to the other end. In this case, the mutual crimping of the two panel components is initially performed. The two panel elements are crimped to each other at one end portion, and the crimped portion is gradually enlarged from the initial crimped portion toward the other end. In order not to damage the panel components, to make the two panel components crimp to each other without further positional displacement, to smoothly take off the two-sided components, and to suppress the wrinkles of the panel components, etc., it is recommended to use an elastic constant of 60 kgf / cm 2 to 200 kgf / cm 2 The elastic pad constituted by elasticity. When the convex curved surface of the elastic pad is made into a spherical surface and a semi-circular cylindrical outer peripheral surface, if one end is a smooth curved surface with a convex surface that gradually decreases from the end to the other end, a degree of 2000 to 5000 mm is recommended. In order to more surely degas from between the two panel components when the two panel components are bonded, an exhaust device for reducing the pressure from the first and second platforms can be provided. An exhaust device can be exemplified, which is a simple device of an exhaust device, and includes an elastically deformable ring member for air-tight sealing. This ring member is approached to each other by the first and second platforms and sandwiched between the two platforms. , And the two platforms and 73 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) --------I ---- I ---- 丨 Order 111 --- ------ After (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___ B7___ V. Description of the invention (? L) The panel elements surrounding the two platforms are formed to perform the aforementioned exhaust pressure reduction. Airtight room. The [B] type method and device described above can be applied to the manufacture of various display panels, but the method and device for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. Fig. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel A shown in Fig. 1. This panel manufacturing apparatus includes a first stage 100 for holding one panel element c1, a second stage 200 for holding another panel element c2, and the first and second platforms 100, 200 holding the two panel elements facing each other. The platform driving device 300 is relatively close to the back P. In this panel manufacturing apparatus, the second platform 200 is provided with an elastic pad 220 provided with a panel element holding surface 200a, and at the same time, the panel element holding surface 220a is a convex curved surface with a predetermined curved bearing. Referring to FIGS. 16 and 17, as described later, the platform driving device 300 faces and is relatively close to each other through the first and second platforms 100 and 200. Initially, the two panel elements cl, The part c2 is crimped to each other, and then the two platforms 100 and 200 are brought close to each other, while elastically compressing and deforming the elastic pad 220, while gradually expanding the crimping part from the initial crimping part, and fully crimping each other, thereby, The panel elements cl and C2 are laminated to manufacture a display panel. The first and second platforms 100'200 include first and second suction tables 101 and 201 ', respectively, panel element holding devices 10 and 210 for holding panel elements. The first and second adsorption tables 101 and 201 are made of rigid materials. 74 The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) _ ------------ '-------- I Order --------- 1 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ___ B7____ 5. The invention description (P) is completed and it is used to keep the panel The regions cl, c2 are respectively provided with a plurality of getter 101a, 201a for absorbing panel elements at predetermined intervals. In addition to the suction holes 101a and 201a, the panel element holding devices 110 and 210 include exhaust gas 111, 211, flexible pipes 112, 212, and exhaust devices 113 and 213 of the adsorption table. The ends of the pipes 112 and 212 and the other ends of the pipes 112 and 212 are connected to the exhaust gas 111 and 211, and the exhaust chambers 111 and 211 communicate with the suction holes 101a and 201a of the adsorption tables 101 and 201, respectively. Therefore, by the operation of the exhaust devices 113 and 213, air is exhausted from the suction holes 101a and 201a through the exhaust chambers 111 and 211 and the pipes 112 and 212, respectively. As before. The second platform 200 includes an elastic pad 220 provided with a panel element holding surface 220a220. The elastic pad 220 is disposed on the side opposite to the exhaust chamber 211 provided with the second suction table 201. Here, the elastic pad 220 is composed of a continuous foamed elastic rubber foam, and has a suction hole 220b for holding the panel element C2 on the convex curved surface 220a by vacuuming. The pores 220b are closed by the elastic compression deformation of the elastic pad 220. Moreover, although it is here, the continuous foamable elastic rubber foam in the elastic pad 220 is composed, but it is also possible to provide a large number of suction holes in the solid elastomer. The panel element holding surface 220a is a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature rising from one end portion 220c toward the other end portion 220d from the end portion 22c (here, a convex curved surface having a radius of curvature of 4,000 to 5,000 legs) ' The panel element c2 can be held along this curved surface. By using such a convex curved surface, the two panel components cl, c2 are crimped to each other as follows, that is, the two panel components cl, at the first 75 paper standards, are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ------ I -----. I 1 ----- Order · 11111 — 1 * ^ * (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ______. 5. Description of the invention (i)) One end of each of them is crimped to each other, and the crimped portion is gradually enlarged from the initial crimped portion toward the other end. In the elastic pad 220, when the two panel components cl and C2 are crimped to each other in the crimping step, compression of the pad closes the pores for inhalation, thereby releasing the panel component C2 held on the elastic pad 200. On the other panel element cl, so that the two panel elements cl, c2 can be smoothly attached. And 'so that the panel element is not further damaged. The two panel elements cl, c2 are pressed against each other without causing positional displacement, and the two panel elements cl, c2 are smoothly degassed to suppress the wrinkles of the panel elements, etc. Here, the elastic pad 220 has an elastic constant of 70 kgf / cm 2 ~ 120kgf / cm 2 ~ elastomer composition. The platform driving device 300 includes a first platform driving section 310 for driving the first platform 100 and a second platform driving section 320 for driving the second platform 200, which are provided to drive the first platform 100 and the second platform 200. The first platform driving unit 310 is not limited to this, but the pinion 313 provided on the first platform 100 meshes with the rack 311a provided along the guide rail 311, and the pinion 313 is reciprocated by the motor 312 mounted on the first platform 100 By. The first stage 100 is moved along the guide rail 311 by the first stage driving section 310, and is disposed at the panel element holding position Q1 or the panel element bonding position Q2. When this movement occurs, the slider 102 provided on the first platform 100 slides along the guide rail 311. The second platform driving unit 320 is not limited to this, but is constituted by a piston cylinder device 321 and an air circuit 322 that drives the piston cylinder device 321. The piston-cylinder device 321 is a double-acting type, and a cylinder portion 321A thereof is arranged at a fixed position. The piston rod 321B is connected to the second platform 200. The air circuit 302 can compress the predetermined pressure. 76 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 male) Θ I One I 1 — 丨 — I! — II I --- II 1 II Order ·-- ------ Side (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _______B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (? +) Air is supplied to the piston cylinder device 321. The state of the figure shows that it is compressed air since The air circuit 322 is supplied to the piston rod side of the living cylinder device 321, the piston rod 321B is retracted to the inside of the cylinder barrel portion 321a, and the second platform 200 is raised. The compressed air is supplied from the cylinder head side of the piston cylinder device 321 to the piston rod. 321b is projected, and the second platform 200 is lowered. After that, once compressed air is supplied to the piston rod cover side of the piston cylinder device 321, the piston rod 321b and the second platform 200 are angled up, and the state shown in the figure is restored. Panel shown in Fig. 15 The manufacturing device includes a mutual alignment device 400 for panel components, which aligns the two panel components cl, c2 with each other before the two panel components cl, c2 are attached. The alignment device 400 includes two cameras (here, CCD cameras). ), XY-0 drive 420, control unit 430. The state of the alignment position of each panel element cl, c2 in the plan view above is the same as that in FIG. 7, and the first platform 100 and the alignment device 400 are equal to the illustration in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, on the panel elements cl, c2, outside the display area of the panel element, marks ml and m2 for pre-alignment are formed respectively, and the alignment marks are here on the two panel elements. The areas at both ends of the diagonal line form a cross-shaped pattern, but it is not limited to this. It can be any pattern that the panel elements can align with each other, and if it is outside the display area, it can be formed at any position. Also, this The alignment mark can be formed by printing or the like. When the electrode shape of the panel element is used, 'the electrode for the mark is provided outside the display area' and the voltage is applied to the mark electrode for lighting. Here, the panel elements cl and c2 are respectively Printing 77 -----— — — — — — 'i · 丨 II 丨 II l · Order ------ II 1 completed' (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) t Paper size applies _China's standard ^ NS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public ") ~ 472223 A7 __B7__ 5. Description of the invention (〆) Alignment marks ml, m2. The CCD camera 410 shown in FIG. 15 is connected to the control unit 430, and the pre-formed alignment marks ml and m2 of the reverse plate elements cl and c2 can be observed, and the mark information is sent to the control unit 430. The X-Υ-β driving device 420 includes a panel element holder 421 and an X-Y-0 driving unit 422. The panel element holding arm 421 is connected to the X-Y-θ-direction movable portion of the driving portion 422, and can hold and hold the panel element c2 by its front end portion 421A. The X-Υ-0 driving unit 422 is connected to the control unit 430, so that the panel element holding arm 421 and the panel element c2 held thereon can be adsorbed and held on the surface of the panel element cl of the first platform 100 in advance in a predetermined direction ( X direction in the figure), move in a direction perpendicular to it (y direction in the figure), while rotating about an axis perpendicular to the xy plane (6 »direction in the figure). Thereby, according to the instruction of the control unit 430, the moving panel element C2 can be held on the panel element d held on the first platform 100. As described above, the control unit 430 is connected to the CCD camera 410, and the χ-Υ-Θ drive unit 420 processes the mark information of the alignment marks ml and m2 from the camera 410 as position information, and controls X-Y_ based on the position information. 6 »When the operation of the driving part 420 is performed, the alignment marks ml and m2 of the two-sided pieces cl, c2 are consistent and aligned. In addition, the control unit 430 includes a device that uses an alignment method for image processing of an alignment position such as a substrate or a panel. In addition, the device of this panel can be provided with an air-tight chamber 600 with air-tightness as shown by the two-point chain line in FIG. 15. The air-tight air 600 can surround the first and second platforms 100 and 200 and each device. The panel manufacturing apparatus here does not include the airtight chamber 600. This airtight chamber 600 will be described later. 78 This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇χ 297 mm) '---- 1 I --- I 1' --- 11 — 1 I- * · -1τ-Ι — — — I III (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ___B7 _ — --- 5. Description of the invention (讣) Referring to Figures 16 and 17 on the next side, the first figure is produced by this device. An example of a reflective liquid crystal display panel of the type shown is described. FIG. 16 is a diagram of part of the process example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by using the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 15 in this description. FIG. 17 is a diagram for the sake of simplicity, and some of the structures are omitted in FIGS. 16 and 17. Its icon. When the liquid crystal display panel A shown in Fig. 1 is manufactured, each of the R, G, and B panel elements shown in red, green, and blue is manufactured as one panel element. First, use any one of the R, G, and B panel elements (here, the R panel element) as a panel element (hereinafter referred to as the first panel element) cl, and use the panel element (here, the panel element) attached to the panel element f. G panel element) As another panel element (hereinafter referred to as a second panel element) c2, two panel elements are bonded by steps ⑴ to ⑷ shown in FIG. 16 and steps ⑸ to ⑺ shown in FIG. 17. That is, _, ⑴ is on at least one of the first and second panel elements cl, C2 to be bonded to each other. Here, the first panel element cl, (R panel element) is provided with the aforementioned first-absorbing layer Bk. On the opposite side of the surface, a surface is pre-adhered with a double-sided adhesive NN covered with a removable protective sheet. In addition, although it is not limited to this, a double-sided adhesive is used, and it may be an adhesive sheet. In any case, the adhesive material can be applied to the panel element surface by hand, or by an adhesive material coating device. Adhesive material is an arbitrary way to prevent obstacles. In addition, the step of setting the adhesive material is carried out before the two panel elements are crimped to each other. If it is before the crimping step, it can be carried out at any stage where no obstacle occurs. Position the first panel element cl provided with this double-sided adhesive NN at 1 79 degrees, applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21 × X 297 cm) — ------------ -------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (rn platform 100; make the light absorbing layer bk face down The panel element holding device 110 is used to adsorb the panel element cl on the adsorption table 101 of the platform 100. ⑵ Place the second panel element c2 (G panel element) on the first panel element cl, and perform mutual interaction between the two panel elements cl, c2. Alignment position. This alignment is performed in the same way. That is, the panel element c2 placed on the panel element cl is held at the front end portion 421a of the temporary alignment device 400. In this state, one side is observed with a CCD camera 410. The alignment marks ml, m2 of the panel elements cl, c2, while moving the second panel element c2 by the X-Υ-0 driving device 420, so that the alignment marks ml, m2 of the two panel elements cl, c2 are the same. In the quasi-step process, the mark information detected by the camera 410 is used as bit information, and image processing is performed. Based on the position information, the X-Θ-Θ driving device 420 is automatically controlled to Once the alignment process is completed, the panel element c2 is placed on the panel element cl at an angle. The alignment of the XY-0 driving device 420 can be performed manually-the γ_0 driving device 420. It is also used to maintain the first 2 The second stage 200 of the panel c2 may include an X-Υ-0 driving device. At this time, since the panel element C2 is held on the stage 200 'so it is driven along XY-0, so that the panel element c2 is aligned to the position', It is also possible not to use the X-Υ-0 driving device, and to observe the alignment marks ml, m2 of the two panel elements cl, c2 visually or with a camera, and move the second panel element c2 by hand, so that the two panel elements cl, c2 The alignment mark ml 'm2 is the same. (3) Once the alignment of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 is completed, that is, as described above, the panel element holding arm 421 of the XY-0 driving device 420 that holds the second panel element c2 is as described above. Put down the panel element c2 and place it on the panel element cl. The paper size of this paper applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 ^ each (210 X 297 mm 1 1) ^ --- 11111 ---- * I — 111 11 — — — — — —--- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _____ B7__ V. Description of the Invention (N) However, thereafter, the first platform driving unit 310 of the platform driving device 300 is used to move the first platform 100 below the second platform 200 (the position of Q2 in FIG. 15) to make the first and second The panel elements cl, c2 of the platform keep facing each other. Next, the second platform 200 is lowered by the second square driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300, and the elastic pad 220 of the platform 200 contacts the second panel element c2, and the second component 200 is attracted and held by the vacuum of the panel component holding device 210. The panel element c2 is on the convex curved surface 220a of the elastic pad 220, and the second stage driving unit 310 is further used to raise the second stage 200 that attracts the second panel element C2 and wait. ⑷Remove the removable protective sheet NN from the double-sided adhesive NN that is affixed to the first panel element cl of the first platform 100 to expose the adhesive material N. ⑸The second platform driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300 lowers the second platform 200 so that the first and second platforms 100 and 200 hold their panel elements cl and c2 facing each other, in other words, they are held on the platforms 100 and 200. The panel elements cl, c2 face each other and are relatively close to each other. ⑹ Under the predetermined pressure applied by the second platform driving section 320 of the platform driving device 300, the convex surface 220a of the elastic pad 220 is used to initially start the two panel elements cl, c2 (the end of this example) They are crimped to each other, then, while elastically compressing and deforming the elastic pad 220 having a convex curved surface, while degassing from the initial crimping portion toward the other end, the elastic pad 220 and the rigid body 101 of the first platform 100 are sandwiched. The panel elements cl, c2 gradually expand the mutually crimped portions. In the meantime, the suction of the elastically deformed portion of the pad 220 is blocked with fine holes, and the second panel element c2 is gradually released from the pad 220 of the second platform. Thereby, the two panel elements cl, c2 are smoothly bonded. 81 --- 1 -------- i ----- 111 Order · -------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 __B7__ V. Description of the invention (This is so, in order to prevent the position of the two panel elements cl, c2 from shifting, and one side is degassed from between the two panel elements cl, c2. Avoid the corrugation and wrinkling of the panel element 'enlarge the phase crimping part' to closely fit the two panel elements cl, C2. Therefore, the R panel and the G panel element are bonded. In addition, the bonding of the two panel elements is completed, and the panel element remains The evacuation of the device 210 is stopped, the second platform 200 rises and returns to the original position, and the second platform 100 maintains the bonded panel component and returns to the original position Q1. Second, the R panel component thus obtained is bonded to the G panel component. The combined panel component is regarded as the first panel component cl, and at the same time, the next-to-be-bonded B-panel component is regarded as the second panel c2, and the foregoing steps ⑴ to ⑺ are repeated, and the next-to-B panel component is attached to the already-pasted On the panel components. Needless to say, by keeping the paste as described above The first platform 100 of the panel component is configured to return to the position Q1, and a part of step (1) can also be performed. Thus, the display panel A of the laminated R panel component, the G panel component and the B panel component is obtained. Another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel A shown in FIG. 1. The panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 18 is the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 15, and the exhaust device 500 is placed on the first stage 100 and the second stage is placed. The platform 200 'replaces the second platform 200. The other points are the same as those of the device of FIG. 15'. The same reference signs are used to indicate the components with the same structure. The components that work are shown below. The panel manufacturing device shown in FIG. 18 is different from the device of FIG. The main points of the device will be described mainly. The panel manufacturing apparatus of FIG. 18 includes a first stage 100 for holding one panel element cl and a second stage 82 L for holding another panel element c2. 1 11 1 " " 1 丨 丨 丨 _ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)----------- '装 ----— II ^ > — —— — — 11— (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7! __ _B7_ V. Description of the invention (,? °) 200 '' Used to be the first and second platform 1 〇〇, 200 'will face the panel element holding face to face relatively close to the platform driving device 300 away from. In this panel manufacturing apparatus, the second platform 200 is provided with an elastic pad provided with a panel element holding surface 200a ', and at the same time, the panel element holding surface 200a is a convex curved surface with a predetermined curved bearing. Refer to FIGS. 19 and 20, as described later As described above, the platform driving device 300 makes the first and second platforms 100 and 200 face each other and are relatively close to each other, thereby “initially, the convex panel 200a of the elastic pad 200 and the two panel elements cl and c2 are mutually connected. The crimping is followed by bringing the two platforms 100 and 200 close to each other, thereby elastically compressing and deforming the elastic pad 200 'while gradually expanding the mutually crimping portion from the initial crimping portion to fully crimping each other, thereby laminating the panel element. cl, c2, manufacturing a display panel. The second stage 200 'includes a second suction stage 201', a panel element holding device 210 'for holding the panel element. The second suction stage 20Γ is made of a material having rigidity, and a plurality of suction holes 201a 'for sucking the panel cow are provided at a predetermined interval in a region where the stage holds the panel element c2. In addition to the suction hole 201a ', the panel element holding device 210' includes an exhaust chamber 211, a flexible tube 212, and an exhaust device 213. The exhaust device 213 is connected to one end of the tube 212, and the other of the tube 212 One end is connected to the exhaust chamber 211 ', and the exhaust chamber 21Γ communicates with the suction hole 201a' of the adsorption table 20Γ. Therefore, by the operation of the exhaust device 213, the air is exhausted from the suction hole 201a 'through the exhaust chamber 211' and the pipe 212. As described above, the second stage 200 'includes the elastic pad 200' provided with the panel element holding surface 220a '. The elastic pad 220 'is arranged on the suction table 20Γ and the exhaust chamber is set. _83 __ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). -------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____B7_____ V. Description of the invention (? 丨) 211 'side side. Elastic pad 220 'This is made of the same material as the elastic pad 220 of the fifteenth manufacturing device, that is, a continuous foamed elastic rubber foam, and is used to hold the panel element C2 on the convex curved surface 200a by vacuuming Inspiratory pores 220b '. The pores 220b 'are closed by elastic compression deformation. The panel element holding surface 220a 'is a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature to be raised in the center (here, a convex curved surface having a radius of curvature ranging from 4000 mm to 5000 nun), and the panel element c2 can be held along this curved surface. As the convex curved surface 200a ', for example, a spherical surface, a non-spherical surface, and a peripheral surface of a semi-circular cylinder can be used, and here, it is a spherical surface. By using this convex curved surface, the two panel elements cl, c2 are crimped to each other at the beginning, and the two panel elements cl, c2 are crimped to each other at their central portions, and the crimped portion is enlarged from the periphery of the first crimped portion. . . This elastic pad 200 ′ is used to close the pores for inhalation under compression of the two panel elements cl and c2 during the crimping step when the two panel elements cl and c2 are pressed against each other. Followed by. Thereby, the two panel components cl, c2 can be smoothly adhered. In addition, in order to prevent the panel elements from being damaged, the two-sided elements cl, c2 are pressed against each other without being shifted in position, and are smoothly degassed from between the two panel elements cl, c2 to suppress wrinkles of the panel elements and the like. Here, the elastic pad 220 is composed of an elastic body having an elastic constant of 70 kgf / cm 2 to 120 kgf / cm 2. An exhaust device 500 is provided, and when the two panel elements cl and c2 are bonded together, the air is more reliably degassed from between the two panel elements cl and c2, and includes a ring member 510, an air inlet pipe 520, a flexible pipe 530, and a vacuum pump. 540. The ring member 510 is approached to each other by the first and second platforms 100 and 200 '. 84 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 111 — I-------- ·丨 II 丨 丨 I 1 Order — — — — — — — II (Jing first read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ____B7 _ 5. Description of the invention (β), sandwiched between the two platforms, and the two platforms The panel elements cl, c2 between the two platforms are formed together to form an elastically deformable ring member for air-tight sealing of an air-tight chamber for exhaust and pressure reduction. Here, the ring member is made of rubber, and is arranged on the suction table 101 of the first platform 100. The air suction pipe 520 is fitted into a buy-through hole provided between the first platform ring member 51 and the holding area of the panel element cl, and is connected to the other end portion of the flexible pipe 530. Thereby, the inside of the airtight chamber formed by the first and second platforms 100, 200 'and the ring member 510 can be decompressed. Also, although this panel manufacturing apparatus is the same as the manufacturing apparatus of FIG. 15, it may be provided with an airtight chamber 600 shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 15, but this airtight chamber is not provided here. Next, referring to Figs. 19 and 20, an example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by this device will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining a part of a process example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the subsequent steps of the steps shown in FIG. 19. To ⑻ of the schema. In addition, for the sake of simplicity, some of the components are not shown in FIGS. 19 and 20. When the reflective liquid crystal display panel A shown in Fig. 1 is manufactured, each of the R, G, and B panel elements for red color display, green display, and blue display is manufactured. First, use one of the R, G, and B panel elements as a panel element (hereinafter referred to as the first panel element) cl, and use the panel element (here, the G panel element) attached to this panel element as another Panel element (hereinafter referred to as the second panel element) c2, through the steps ⑴ ~ ⑷ shown in Fig. 19 and the steps shown in Fig. 20 85 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm> IIIIIIIIIII 'II i I! III ----- —---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ____B7__ 5. Description of the invention (0) Step ⑸ ~ ⑸, paste the two panel components At least one side of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 to be attached to each other, here is the first side of the first panel element cl. (R panel element) without the light absorbing layer BK side On the surface, the double-sided adhesive (also an adhesive sheet) NN covered with the release sheet NN is pre-adhered to protect the release sheet NN. The first panel element cl provided with the double-sided adhesive NN is positioned to absorb light. The layer BK faces downward, and the panel element cl is adsorbed on the adsorption table 101 of the platform 100 by the panel element holding device 11. ⑵mounting The second panel element c2 (G panel element) performs the mutual alignment position of the two panel elements cl, c2 on the first panel element cl. This alignment is the same as step ⑵ of FIG. 16 performed by the 15th device, The explanation is omitted here. (3) Once the alignment of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 is completed, the panel element holding arm 421 of the X-Υ-0 driving device 420 holding the second panel cow c2 lowers the panel element c2, It is reloaded on the panel element cl, but then the first platform driving unit 310 of the platform driving device 300 is used to move the first platform 100 to the position below the second platform 200 '(Q2' in the figure), so that the first And the panel elements cl, c2 of the second platform keep facing each other. Secondly, the second platform driving part 320 of the platform driving device 300 lowers the second platform 200 ', and contacts the second panel element c2 on the pad 220' of the platform 200 '. The second panel element c2 is attracted and held on the convex curved surface 220a 'of the elastic pad 220' by the vacuum suction by the panel element holding device 210 ', and the second panel element C2 is further attracted by the driving part 320 of the second platform. The second platform 200 'rises and stands by. 86 This paper is suitable for Chinese National Standard (0Ss) A4 ^ (210 X 297 male " ·· t ----- order --------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page ) 472223 A7 _____B7 _ V. Description of the invention (W) ⑷Remove the retaining sheet NN from the double-sided adhesive NN attached to the first panel element cl of the first platform 100 to expose the adhesive material N. ⑸The second platform driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300 lowers the second platform 20. 0 ', the panel elements cl, c2 of the first and second platforms 100, 200, face to face each other, in other words, the panel elements cl, c2 of the platform 100, 200 face to be held to face each other Right and relatively close. (1) Under the predetermined pressure exerted by the second platform driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300, the convex curved surface 220a 'of the "use of the elastic pad 220" is used to initially start the two panel elements cl and c2 (in this example, the central portion) Crimp each other. In this crimping step, where the second platform contacts the rubber ring member 510, an airtight chamber P for exhausting and decompressing is formed. At this time, the air 'of the airtight chamber P is sucked out by the vacuum pump 540 to make the airtight chamber p a predetermined pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure (herein, 20pa to 30pa). ⑺Also after starting the operation of step 接着, then lower the second platform 200 ', one side will elastically compress and deform the elastic pad 220' with a spherical surface, and degassing from the initial pressure-contact part, and the other side is the elastic pad 210 'and the first The rigid body portion 101 of the platform 100 sandwiches the two panel elements cl, c2, and gradually enlarges the mutually crimped portions. During this period, the pores for the suction of the elastic-shaped portion of the occlusion pad 220 'are gradually released from the pad 200' of the second platform. Thereby, the two panels, components cl, c2, are smoothly adhered. ⑻In this way, expand the crimping parts to clamp and fit the two panel components, while preventing the position of the two panel components cl, c2 from shifting, and degassing between the two panel components cl, c2, so that the panel components will not be damaged. For ripples or wrinkles. Thereby, the panel element and the G panel element are bonded. 87 This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) · -------- IIII 11 J-IIIIIII ^ --------- (Please read the Please fill in this page again) 472223 A7 _____ Β7_ V. Description of the invention (β) And after the bonding of the two panel components is finished, the vacuum holding by the panel component holding device 210 'is stopped, and the second platform rises back to the original position. The first platform 100 maintains the bonded panel component and returns to the original position Q1. Second, the panel component in which the R panel component and the G panel component thus obtained are bonded is the first panel component cl, and A B panel component to be bonded is regarded as a second panel component c2, and the foregoing steps 各 to ⑻ are essentially repeated, and the next B panel component is bonded to the panel component already bonded. Thus, a display panel A in which R panel elements, G panel elements and B panel elements are laminated is obtained. Moreover, although the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Figs. U5 and 18 uses air pressure driving as the platform driving method of the second platform driving section 520, hydraulic driving and other driving mechanisms may also be used. The eccentric cam mechanism and other mechanisms can be used as the second platform driving unit. Furthermore, in the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 15, in order to more surely degas from the two panel elements cl, C2 when the two panel elements cl, c2 are bonded, the row of the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 18 may be used. The air device 500 forms an airtight chamber, and exhausts and decompresses the inside of the airtight chamber. In any of the panel manufacturing devices shown in Figs. 15 and 18, the exhaust device 500 can be replaced, or an exhaust device can be provided to decompress the airtight chamber 600 (see Fig. 15) and the exhaust inside the room. The exhaust device decompresses the inside of the room. In addition, when the airtight chamber 600 is installed in the panel manufacturing device shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, although the 15th figure shows that the airtight chambers 113 and 213 and the air return 322 are not provided in the airtight chamber, the airtight chamber 600 is provided. For those who are uncomfortable in the dense room, the paper size of 88 papers is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) " '(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) I ---- Order --------- Line 472223 A7 ___ B7 __ V. Description of the invention (luxury) It is placed outside the airtight room, and when the exhaust device 500 is used, the vacuum pump 540 is also installed outside the airtight room, [c ] Method and device for manufacturing display panel related to FIGS. 21 to 24 The method and device for manufacturing display panel related to FIGS. 21 to 24 are based on the method and device for manufacturing display panel. (Manufacturing method of display panel) A manufacturing method of a display panel, which is a layered layer used to form a panel element of a display panel for displaying an image, and the manufacture of a display panel includes the following steps: a step of maintaining the first panel element on the first platform; maintaining the first. Steps of 2 panel elements on the second platform; Steps of disposing or placing the first and second panel elements on the first and second platforms facing each other; making the first and second panel elements face each other A step of quasi-position; a step of setting an adhesive material on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other; and arranging the first and second platforms to be aligned with each other by the aforementioned adhesive material, maintaining the first and second platforms, Steps for attaching the first and second panel elements to each other where the surfaces to be adhered face each other; the second platform is formed with a central suction hole that adsorbs the central region of the panel element and an outer region of the central region that adsorbs the panel element The outside suction holes' suck and hold the platform of the panel element by sucking air from these suction holes; the above-mentioned bonding step includes the following steps; the approach step, which makes the configuration to be aligned with each other, and is maintained at the first and 89 & quot Zhang Chi; Guan Jiapi (CNS) A4 secret (2K) X 297 public love) Γ Qing first read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) -------- Order -------- -line. 472223 A7 ____ V. Description of the invention (β) The second platform, the first and second panel elements facing each other are relatively close to the two platforms, thereby approaching each other to a predetermined distance; the central contact step, which is in After the approach step, set the air pressure between the second platform and the central area of the panel element held thereon to be high pressure relative to the air pressure between the first and second panel components. The pressure difference between the two causes the central region of the panel element on the second platform to contact and maintain the panel element on the first platform with the adhesive material sandwiched therebetween; and a crimping step, which is further performed after the central contact step by The two platforms are relatively close to each other, so that the two panel components are fully fitted together in the state of the adhesive material. / In this display panel manufacturing method, the step of setting an adhesive material on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other, as exemplified, can be pre-adhesion on the panel element surface, and the surface is covered with a protective sheet. A surface adhesive sheet or an adhesive sheet (this sheet may also be in the shape of a strip). The step of removing the protective sheet from exposing the adhesive material, or the step of applying the adhesive material to the panel element surface by hand operation or with an adhesive material coating device. Adhesive material is provided in any way that is barrier-free. The step of setting the adhesive material is performed before the bonding step. As long as there is no obstacle before the fitting step, it can be implemented at any stage. The bonding step is performed after the two panel components are aligned with each other ', and the bonding steps are performed after the bonding surfaces face each other. The mutual alignment of the first and second panel elements is performed by various methods. For example, using the well-known substrate and panel alignment method 90 ------------------------------- (Please read the back first Please pay attention to this page before filling in this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 ^ __ B7__ 5. The description of the invention (#). The alignment method may be exemplified as follows. (1) Set a pre-alignment mark on each panel element, keep one panel element on any platform, and arrange another panel element on this panel element, while observing the alignment marks of the two panel elements visually or with a camera, The other panel element is moved by hand to align the alignment marks of the two panel elements, and thereafter, the other panel element is held on another platform. (2) Set a pre-alignment mark on each panel element, keep one panel element on any platform, arrange another panel element on or above this panel element, observe the alignment mark of the two panel elements with a camera, and borrow The XY- (9 driving device moves the other panel component so that the alignment marks of the two panel components are consistent. In this case, the platform used to maintain the other panel component may include an X-Υ-Θ driving device. Since at this time The other panel element is held on the platform, so the panel element can be driven along X-Υ-θ to align it. The platform used to hold the other panel element does not include an x-γ-θ drive At this time, when the other panel element in the alignment position is carried on the aforementioned one panel element, the mounted panel element may be kept on the corresponding platform. Moreover, the alignment mark may be a liquid crystal mark, an electric field light emitting mark, etc. Marks that emit light by being energized. XY- < 9 The alignment of the driving device can be performed by manually operating the X-Υ-Θ driving device, but it can also automatically control the X-Υ-0 driving device based on the marker information (such as position information) detected by the camera. Come on. In the latter case, an image processing method for aligning the substrate, panel, etc. can be used. 91 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I1IIIIIIIIIJ — * IIIIII 1 ^ --------- Yin (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ---______ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (β) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) And, needless to say, the X-Χ-0 drive device can be in the direction X, perpendicular to the direction X A device that moves an object while rotating about an axis perpendicular to the XY plane. Although the holding of the panel element by the first platform is not limited to this, the case where the panel element is suction-absorbed and held by the suction hole provided on the first platform may be taken as a representative example. The second platform holds the panel components by sucking air from the central suction hole and the outer suction holes provided on the second platform, respectively, to adsorb and hold the panel components. 0 The aforementioned bonding step first implements the approach steps of the two panel components. As a result, the first and second panel elements are relatively close to the two platforms and approach each other to a predetermined distance. The second step is the central contact. In this step, the air pressure between the second platform and the central area of the second panel element held thereon is set to a high pressure relatively higher than the air pressure between the first and second panel components. There is a pressure difference between them. This pressure difference can be generated by various methods. For example, the air pressure between the two panel elements is set to a predetermined air pressure with a large air pressure and a low air pressure. At the same time, the air is cut off from the central suction hole of the second platform, and the external air is introduced into the central suction hole. The air pressure between the central regions held thereon is set to a relatively high pressure relative to the air pressure between the two panel elements. As a result, an air pressure difference occurs between the two surfaces of the center area of the panel element on the second platform. In any case, according to the air pressure difference between the two sides of the central area of the panel element, 92 sheets of paper ^ Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 ^ love) " ~ '472223 A7! ____ B7___ 5. Description of the Invention ), Bend the central area of the panel element on the second platform, contact and keep the panel element on the first platform with the adhesive material sandwiched. This central area can also be bent by the weight of the panel element itself. That is, it can be bent by the pressure difference and the weight of the portion of the panel element containing the central area. Secondly, the crimping step of fully bonding the two panel components is implemented. ‘In the bonding step, before the two panel elements are fully bonded, the central regions of the two panel elements are brought into contact with each other. Thereby, the two-panel components are not subjected to the bonding impact in one fell swoop, and the initial bonding start state can be smoothly reached, and the positional displacement of the two-panel components is suppressed. Second, the two-panel components are fully pressure-bonded. At this time, the central area has already been in contact with the second. The P-board component gradually expands and contacts the contact area from the central area to the surrounding area, thereby degassing between the two panel components, suppressing wrinkles, etc. in the state where the two panel components are in close contact. In the state, it is bonded in the state of precision alignment position. In addition, when there are three or more panel components to be bonded, the panel component to be bonded obtained through the crimping step is regarded as the first panel component, and the next panel component to be bonded is considered to be the second panel component. Substantially repeat the foregoing steps, and each time a panel element is attached to the already attached panel element. In the crimping step after the central contacting step of the second panel component of the pasting step, after the two panel components are smoothly and fully crimped, the suction and absorption by the suction holes from the outside of the second platform can be stopped. 'An external air is also introduced into the outer suction hole, and the holding of the panel element by the second platform is released. In this case, of course, it can be cut off from the 2nd level after the initial stage of the crimping step. 93-.-. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) · --- ------------------ Order --------- ^ ί (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 __B7__ V. Description of the invention (Called) The outside air suction hole is used to suck air. At the same time, the outside air is also introduced into the outside air suction hole. However, in order to more surely degas from the two panel components, the two panel components can be fully crimped and bonded to each other. At the same time, after the two panel elements are brought into full contact with each other through the adhesive material, the adsorption of the suction holes on the outer side of the second platform is stopped, and the outside air is also introduced into the outer suction holes. In the crimping step after the central contacting step, the pressure of the gas around the element can be restored to the outside pressure after the initial stage. However, in order to more surely degas from the two-panel element, the two-panel element can be degassed. After full or approximately full contact through the adhesive material, the external air pressure is restored. Of course, during the period before the end of the crimping step, the gas pressure around the two panel elements can be maintained at the aforementioned predetermined low pressure. In any case, in the aforementioned central contacting step of the two panel elements, when the air pressure between the two panel elements is set to a predetermined air pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure, the first and second panels including the first and second panel elements may be maintained. All the gas in the area of the second platform or the like is decompressed or lower than the atmospheric pressure, but in a simple method, the first and second panel elements can be surrounded by an elastically deformable ring member for hermetic sealing, At the same time, the ring member is sandwiched between the first and second platforms, and an airtight chamber is formed around the two panel elements, and the air pressure between the two panel elements is reduced by exhausting from the airtight chamber. The approach distance between the two panel elements in the approaching step of the two panel elements, and the degree of pressure difference between the two sides of the central area of the panel element (for example, the degree of decompression between the two panel elements in the step of centrally contacting the two panel elements that generates this pressure difference). And the degree of air volume (exit amount) outside the central suction hole of the second platform is also considered to maintain the size of the panel components of the non-second platform 94 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)--- ----- I ^ till — — — — This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 _____B7_ V. Description of the invention (f), flexibility, etc., can be set as the central In the contacting step, the central contact state of the two panel elements is smoothly achieved. Of course, κ is not limited to this, but it can be exemplified that the distance of approaching each other in the aforementioned approach step is about 1 leg to 2 legs, and the pressure difference between the two sides of the panel element on the second platform is lOPa ~ 30Pa (about 0.08Torr ~ 0.23Torr) degree.
復可例示前述中央接觸步驟中之面板元件間之減壓氣 壓爲20Pa〜30Pa (大致0.15Torr〜0·23Τογγ)程度，第2平 台之中央吸氣孔之外氣導入量爲第2平台上面板元件兩側 之氣壓差達到10Pa〜30Pa (大致0.08Tqit〜0.23Torr)程度 之量。 (顯示面板製造裝置） 一種顯示面板之製造裝置，其係積層用來顯示影像之 顯示面孔之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，具備： 第1平台，其用來保持一面板元件； 第2平台，其用來保持另一面板元件； 平台驅動裝置，其用來使第1與第2平台之面板元件 保持面相面對而相對接近背離；以及 平台間排氣裝置，其自第1與第2平台間排氣減壓； 第2平台係具有吸附面板元件中央區域之中央吸氣孔 及吸附面板元件前述中央區域外側之區域之外側吸氣孔， 藉由自此等吸氣孔吸氣，吸附保持面板元件之平台，中央 吸氣孔用排氣裝置連接於該中央吸氣孔，外側吸氣孔用排 氣裝置連接於外側吸氣孔，於中央吸氣孔用及外側吸氣孔 用各排氣裝置含有將外氣導入吸氣孔之裝置。 95 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ----B7__ 五、發明說明（Μ) 若是此種顯示面板製造裝置，待互相貼合之面板元件 之一即保持於第1平台，另一面板元件則保持於第2平台 〇 第1及第2平台含有用來保持面元件之裝置。第1平 台之此種保持裝置固然不限於此，惟可譬如設於平台’連 接於排氣裝置，用來吸附面板元件之吸氣孔爲例。 第2平台對面板元件之保持藉由自設於第2平台之前 述中央吸氣孔和外側吸氣孔，以與其連接之排氣裝置分別 吸氣，吸附保持面板元件。 並且，保持第1、第2面板元件於第1、第2平台，平 台驅動裝置使第1與第2平台之面板元件保持面相面對， 換言之，使保持於此等平台之面板元件之待互相貼合面相 面對，相對接近，含二面板元件接近至隔預定距離。 最遲於此時藉平台間排氣裝置，開始將第1與第2平 台間區域（因此爲二面板元件間區域）排氣減壓至預定氣 壓。復切斷連接於第2平台之中央吸氣孔之排氣裝置之排 氣，同時，藉該排氣裝置中之外氣導入裝置，將外氣導入 該中央吸氣孔，使第2平台分保持於其上之面板元件中央 區域間之氣壓成爲較二面板元件間氣壓高之高壓。因此， 於第2平台上面板元件中央區域之兩面間產生壓力差，根 據該氣壓差，在夾有黏著材料狀態下，使第2平台上面板 元件之中央區域與保持於第1平台之面板元件接觸。 此後，藉由使二平台進一步相對接近，在夾有黏著材 料狀態下.，使二面板元件互相全面壓接貼合。 96 --------I------------ 訂---------I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS〉A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 __— __B7_ 五、發明說明（料） 面板元件貼合如上述使用黏著材料來進行。如顯示面 板製造方法所說明，該黏著材料於貼合之前，設在二面板 元件之待互相貼合面之至少一面上。此裝置亦可具備黏著 材料之塗覆裝置。 又，在二面板元件貼合之前，使二面板元件互相對準 位置。此對準可如同前述顯示面板製造方法所述進行。 又，此處之顯示面板製造裝置可具備面板元件之互相 對準位置裝置，例如使待互相貼合之二面板元件互相對準 於第1或第2平台上之裝置。其可例示如次裝置。 (1) 一種對準裝置，包括攝影機，其觀察預先形成於各 面板元件之對準標記，以及Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置，其在保持於 桌1及第2平台中一平台上之一面板兀件上或上方移動另 一面板元件，俾二面板元件之對準標記一致，對準。 (2) —種對準裝置，具備攝影機，其觀察預先形成於各 面板元件之對準標記，Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置，其在保持於第1 及第2平台中一平台之一面板元件上或上方移動另一面板 元件；以及控制部，其根據來自前述攝影機之對準標記資 訊（例如其位置資訊等），控制Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置之動作以 移動該另一面板元件，俾二面板元件之對準標記一致，對 準。此種控制部可例示利用供基板、面板等對準之影像處 理之對準法者。 前述平台間排氣裝置雖係將包含保持面板元件之第1 及第2平台等區域之全部氣體減壓成低於大氣壓力之低壓 ，惟’就簡易裝置而言，可例示包含氣密密封用之可彈性 97 本&張尺度適用^中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） '：— --------------------訂---------線' < (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7___ 五、發明說明) 變形之環構件之排氣裝置，此環構件藉由第1與第2平台 相對接近，夾在二平台間，與該二平台一起圍繞二平台間 之面板元件，形成用來進行前述排氣減壓之氣密室。 若係此種顯示面板製造裝置，二面板元件之貼合即在 全面貼合二面板元件之前，使二面板元件之中央區域互相 接觸。藉此，使二面板元件不致於受到一舉強行貼合撞擊 ，可在最初穩定達到貼合開始狀態’抑制二面板元件之位 移。 其次全面壓接貼合二面板元件。此時，業已貼合之中 央區域之二面板元件自該中央區域朝周圍逐漸擴大接觸區 域而貼合，藉此，自二面板元件間脫氣，在二面板元件密 接狀態下，抑制皴紋狀態下，高精度對準位置狀態下貼合 0 且，待貼合面板元件爲3個以上時，可將業已貼合之 面板元件視爲前述第1面板元件，同時將次一待貼合面板 元件視爲前述第2面板元件，實質反覆進行前述各步驟， 藉此，每次將一面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元件上。 二面板元件之中央區域接觸後二面板元件接著進行之 壓接貼合可在全面平穩壓接貼合二面板元件後，切斷連接 於第2平台之外側吸氣孔之排氣裝置之排氣，同時，藉該 氣裝置中之外氣導入裝置，將外氣導入該外側吸氣孔，全 面解除第2平台對面板元件之保持。於此情形，固然可在 二面板元件之中央區域接觸後不久，停止第2平台之外側 吸氣孔之吸附，同時亦將外氣導入該外側吸氣孔，惟爲了 98 --------------------訂---------線 1 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS〉A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . _ 472223 A7 _B7___ 五、發明說明（幼） 更確實自二面板元件間脫氣，亦可在二面板元件互相全面 壓接貼合，同時二面板元件經由黏著材料全面或大致全面 接觸後，停止第2平台之外側吸氣孔之吸附，同時亦將外 氣導入該外側吸氣孔。 又，固然可在二面板元件之中央區域接觸後不久，停 止平台間排氣裝置之減壓操作，使二面板元件間之氣壓恢 復外氣壓力，惟爲了更確實自二面板元件間脫氣，亦可在 二面板元件經由黏著材料全面或大致全面接觸後，恢復外 氣壓力。當然，在二面板元件貼合結束前之期間內，亦可 維持二面板元件周圍之氣體壓於預定低壓。 前述二p板元件於中央區域接觸前，互相接近時之二 面板元件互相接近距離以及前述面板元件中央區域兩面間 之氣壓差程度，例如供產生此氣壓差之二面板元件中央接 觸步驟中二面板元件間減壓之程度以及導入第2平台之中 央吸氣孔之外氣量（逸出量）程度與前面就顯示面板製造 方法所說明者相同。 顯示面板製造裝置亦可具備： 暫時停止控制裝置，其在藉由以前述平台驅動裝置使 第1及第2平台將其面板元件保持面相面對而相對接近， 使二平台，換言之使保持於其上之二面板元件互相接近至 隔預定距離時，控制平台驅動裝置之動作，俾暫時停止該 二平台之互相接近； 氣壓差檢測用感測器，其檢測保持在藉前述暫時停止 控制裝置一度停止互相接近之第1及第2平台中第2平台 99 L _ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ' —---— — — — —---· I I 丨 — 丨 I 1 訂 I 丨 I I I 丨 — -I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7___ 五、發明說明（1 ) 之面板元件中央區域兩面間之氣壓差；以及 暫時停止解除控制裝置，其在前述氣壓差橫測用感測 器所檢測氣壓差達到預定氣壓差時，控制平台驅動裝置動 作，俾再度使第1與第2平台互相接近。 該氣壓檢測用感測器所檢測出保持於第2平台之面板 元件中央區域兩面間之氣壓差係第2平台與保持於其上之 面板元件中央區域間之氣壓與第1和第2平台間氣壓（因 此係保持於其上之二面板元件間區域之氣壓）之差。 待氣壓檢測用感測器檢測之預定氣壓差係第2平台上 之面板元件中央區域據以經由黏著材料和保持於第1平台 之面板元件接觸之氣壓差。換言之，藉由檢測出此預定氣 壓差，可檢測出，第2平台上之面板元件之中央區域經由 黏著材料與保持於第1平台之面板元件接觸。 氣壓差檢測用感測器除直接檢測氣壓差者之外，亦可 例如爲在第1與第2平台間氣壓（因此係保持於其上之二 面板元件間區域之氣壓）預定情形下，檢測形成預定氣壓 差之第2平台與保持於其上面板元件中央區域間之氣壓之 感測器，或藉由計測外氣開始將外氣導入第2平台中央吸 氣孔之後的時間，檢測形成預定氣壓差之第2平台與保持 於其上之面板元件中央區域間之氣壓之感測器。 以上所說明[C]型方法及裝置固然可適用於各種顯示面 板之製造，惟，以下參照第21至24圖，就液晶顯示面板 製造方法及製造裝置具體例加以說明。 第21圖係用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板A之製 100 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -----------------11--—訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ^__B7__ 五、發明說明（0 ) 造裝置例之槪略構造圖3 此面板製造裝置具備用來保一面板元件cl之第1平台 100、用來保持另一平台C2之第2平台200、用來使第1與 第2卒台100、200將其面板元件保持面相面對而相對接近 背離之平台驅動裝置300以及自第1與第2平台100、200 間排氣減壓之平台間排氣裝置500。 第2平台200係具有吸附面板元件c2之中央區域之中 央吸氣孔.201a以及吸附面板元件c2之中央區域外側之區 域之外側吸氣孔201b，藉由自此等吸氣孔201a、201b吸氣 ，吸附保持面板元件c2之平台。 中央吸氣孔用排氣裝置600連接於中央吸氣孔201a， 外側吸氣孔用排氣裝置700連接於外側吸氣孔201，於中 央吸氣孔用及外側吸氣孔用各排氣裝置600、700中含有將 外氣導入吸氣孔201a、201b之外氣導入裝置，其一例子係 啓閉電磁閥640、740。 平台驅動裝置300包含爲驅動第1平台100、第2平 台200而設之驅動第1平台1〇〇之第1平台驅動部310，以 及驅動第2平台之第2平台驅動部320。 第1平台驅動部310固然不限於此，惟係使設於第1 平台之小齒輪313與沿導軌311設置之齒條311a嚙合，藉 裝載於第1平台100之馬達100往復旋轉此小齒輪313者 。第1平台100藉第1平台驅動部310沿導軌311移動， 配置於面板元件保持位置Q1或面板元件貼合位置Q2。在 發生上此移動時’設於第1平台100之滑件102沿導軌311 101 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） .It can be exemplified that the decompression pressure between the panel elements in the aforementioned central contact step is about 20Pa ~ 30Pa (approximately 0.15Torr ~ 0 · 23Τογγ), and the amount of air introduced outside the central suction hole of the second platform is the upper panel of the second platform The pressure difference between the two sides of the device is about 10Pa ~ 30Pa (about 0.08Tqit ~ 0.23Torr). (Display Panel Manufacturing Device) A manufacturing device for a display panel, which is a layered panel element for displaying the display face of an image, and a display panel manufacturer includes: a first platform for holding a panel element; a second platform, It is used to hold another panel element; a platform driving device is used to make the panel element holding surfaces of the first and second platforms face each other and relatively close away; and an inter-platform exhaust device is provided from the first and second platforms. The second platform is provided with a central suction hole in the central area of the suction panel element and a suction hole outside the area outside the aforementioned central area of the suction panel element. For the platform of the panel element, the central suction hole exhaust device is connected to the central suction hole, the outer suction hole exhaust device is connected to the outer suction hole, and the central suction hole and the outer suction hole are arranged in rows. The air device includes a device for introducing outside air into the suction hole. 95 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 ---- B7__ V. Description of the invention (Μ) For this type of display panel manufacturing device, the panel components to be attached to each other One is held on the first platform, and the other panel element is held on the second platform. The first and second platforms contain devices for holding the surface components. Although the holding device of the first platform is not limited to this, it may be provided on a platform 'and connected to an exhaust device, for example, to suction holes for panel components. The second platform holds the panel element through the central suction hole and the outer suction hole provided on the second platform, and the exhaust device connected to the second suction hole sucks and holds the panel element. Moreover, the first and second panel elements are held on the first and second platforms, and the platform driving device faces the panel element holding faces of the first and second platforms, in other words, the panel elements held on these platforms are to be mutually The bonding surfaces face each other and are relatively close to each other. By this time, the inter-platform exhaust device is used to start decompressing the exhaust between the first and second inter-platform areas (hence the area between the two panel elements) to a predetermined air pressure. The exhaust of the exhaust device connected to the central suction hole of the second platform is repeatedly cut off, and at the same time, the external air is introduced into the central suction hole by the external air introduction device of the exhaust device, so that the second platform is divided. The air pressure between the central regions of the panel elements held thereon becomes higher than the air pressure between the two panel elements. Therefore, a pressure difference is generated between the two surfaces of the center area of the panel element on the second platform, and according to the pressure difference, the center area of the panel element on the second platform and the panel element held on the first platform are sandwiched with the adhesive material. contact. Thereafter, by bringing the two platforms closer to each other, the two panel components are fully pressure-bonded and bonded to each other with the adhesive material sandwiched therebetween. 96 -------- I ------------ Order --------- I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS> A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 __— __B7_ V. Description of the invention (material) Panel components are bonded as described above using an adhesive material. As explained in the display panel manufacturing method, the adhesive material Prior to lamination, it is provided on at least one side of the two panel components to be bonded to each other. This device may also be provided with a coating device for an adhesive material. In addition, the two panel components are aligned with each other before the two panel components are bonded. Position. This alignment can be performed as described in the above-mentioned display panel manufacturing method. In addition, the display panel manufacturing apparatus herein may be provided with a mutual alignment position device of panel elements, for example, two panel elements to be bonded to each other are aligned with each other. The device on the first or second platform. It can be exemplified as a secondary device. (1) An alignment device including a camera, which observes the alignment marks formed in advance on each panel element, and the X-Z-0 drive device, It is maintained on one of the platforms 1 and 2 Move another panel element on or above the panel element, and the alignment marks of the two panel elements are consistent and aligned. (2) An alignment device with a camera that observes the alignment marks formed on each panel element in advance, An X-Υ-0 drive unit that moves the other panel element on or above one of the panel elements of one of the first and second platforms; and a control unit that, based on the alignment mark information from the aforementioned camera (for example, Position information, etc.), to control the operation of the X-Υ-0 drive device to move the other panel element, and the alignment marks of the two panel elements are consistent and aligned. Such a control section can exemplify the use of a substrate, a panel, etc. Alignment method for accurate image processing. Although the aforementioned inter-platform exhaust device decompresses all the gas in the areas including the first and second platforms holding the panel elements to a low pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure, it is simply a device In terms of example, it can be exemplified to include elasticity 97 sheets for air-tight seals & the Zhang scale is applicable ^ Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ':------------ --------- Order --------- line '< (Please Read the precautions on the back and fill in this page) 472223 A7 ___B7___ V. Description of the invention) Exhaust device of deformed ring member, this ring member is relatively close to the first and second platforms, sandwiched between the two platforms, and the two The platform surrounds the panel elements between the two platforms together to form an airtight chamber for performing the aforementioned exhaust pressure reduction. In the case of such a display panel manufacturing device, the bonding of the two panel elements is to make the central regions of the two panel elements contact each other before fully bonding the two panel elements. Thereby, the two-panel element is not protected from being hit by a forceful bonding, and the displacement of the two-panel element can be restrained from reaching the bonding start state steadily at the beginning. Secondly, the two panel components are fully crimped. At this time, the two panel elements of the already attached central region gradually expand and contact the contact region from the central region to the periphery to adhere, thereby degassing between the two panel elements, and suppressing the squeegee state in the state where the two panel elements are in close contact. Under the high-precision alignment position, when the number of panel components to be bonded is 3 or more, the panel components that have been bonded can be regarded as the aforementioned first panel component, and the next panel component to be bonded is also considered. It is regarded as the aforementioned second panel element, and the foregoing steps are substantially repeated, whereby one panel element is attached to the already attached panel element at a time. After the central area of the two-panel element contacts, the subsequent crimping and bonding of the two-panel element can cut off the exhaust of the exhaust device connected to the suction hole on the outer side of the second platform after the two-panel element is fully and smoothly crimped and bonded. At the same time, the outside air is introduced into the outside suction hole by the outside air introduction device in the air device, and the holding of the panel element by the second platform is completely released. In this case, of course, it is possible to stop the adsorption of the suction holes on the outer side of the second platform shortly after contacting the central area of the two panel elements, and also introduce outside air into the outer suction holes, but for 98 ------ -------------- Order --------- Line 1 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS> A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm). _ 472223 A7 _B7___ 5. Description of the invention (young) It is more reliable to degas from the two-panel components, and the two-panel components can be fully pressure-bonded to each other, and the two-panel components are passed through the adhesive After full or approximately full contact, stop the suction of the outside suction holes on the second platform, and also introduce outside air into the outside suction holes. Also, it is possible to stop the inter-platform discharge shortly after contacting the central area of the two panel elements. The depressurization operation of the air device restores the air pressure between the two panel components, but in order to more accurately degas from the two panel components, the external pressure can also be restored after the two panel components are fully or roughly fully contacted through the adhesive material. Force. Of course, the two panel components are bonded together. During the pre-bundling period, the gas pressure around the two panel elements can also be maintained at a predetermined low pressure. Before the two p-plate elements are in contact with each other in the central area, the two panel elements are close to each other and the distance between the two sides of the central area of the aforementioned panel element. The degree of pressure difference, for example, the degree of decompression between the two panel elements in the step of central contact of the two panel elements generating this pressure difference, and the degree of air volume (escape amount) outside the central suction hole of the second platform introduced to the front panel The manufacturing method is the same as that explained. The display panel manufacturing device may also include: a temporary stop control device that is relatively close to the first and second platforms to hold their panel elements facing each other by the platform driving device, so that The platform, in other words, when the two panel elements held on it approach each other to a predetermined distance, control the operation of the platform driving device, and temporarily stop the two platforms from approaching each other; the sensor for pressure difference detection, its detection is maintained by borrowing The second platform 99 L of the first and second platforms where the temporary suspension control device stopped approaching each other for a time Standards apply to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) '------------II 丨-丨 I 1 Order I 丨 III 丨--I (Please read the back first (Please note this page before filling in this page) 472223 A7 ____B7___ V. Description of the invention (1) The air pressure difference between the two sides of the central area of the panel element; and temporarily stop releasing the control device, which detects the air pressure in the air pressure difference measurement sensor When the difference reaches a predetermined pressure difference, the platform driving device is controlled to move the first and second platforms closer to each other again. The pressure difference between the two sides of the center area of the panel element detected by the pressure detecting sensor is detected. It is the difference between the air pressure between the center area of the second platform and the panel element held thereon and the air pressure between the first and second platform (and therefore the air pressure between the area between the two panel components held above it). The predetermined air pressure difference to be detected by the air pressure detecting sensor is the air pressure difference through which the central area of the panel element on the second platform contacts with the panel element held on the first platform via the adhesive material. In other words, by detecting the predetermined air pressure difference, it can be detected that the center region of the panel element on the second stage is in contact with the panel element held on the first stage via the adhesive material. In addition to directly detecting the difference in air pressure, the sensor for detecting the air pressure difference can also detect, for example, under a predetermined situation the air pressure between the first and second platforms (therefore, the air pressure in the area between the two panel elements maintained above). A sensor that detects the air pressure between the second platform forming a predetermined air pressure difference and the center area of the upper panel element, or by measuring the time after the outside air starts to introduce the outside air into the central suction hole of the second platform, the formation of the predetermined time is detected. A sensor for the air pressure between the second platform of the air pressure difference and the center area of the panel element held thereon. The [C] method and device described above can be applied to the manufacture of various display panels, but specific examples of the liquid crystal display panel manufacturing method and manufacturing device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. Figure 21 is a system used to manufacture the liquid crystal display panel A shown in Figure 100. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ ----- 11 --- Order --------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 472223 A7 ^ __ B7__ V. Description of the invention (0) Strategy for making device examples Structure FIG. 3 This panel manufacturing apparatus includes a first platform 100 for holding a panel element cl, a second platform 200 for holding another platform C2, and a panel for the first and second platforms 100 and 200 to hold the panel. The component holding surfaces face each other and are relatively close to the deviated platform driving device 300 and the inter-platform exhaust device 500 which exhausts and decompresses the air between the first and second platforms 100 and 200. The second platform 200 has a central suction hole 201a in the central area of the suction panel element c2 and a suction hole 201b outside the area outside the central area of the suction panel element c2, and sucks from these suction holes 201a and 201b. The platform adsorbs and holds the panel element c2. The central suction hole exhaust device 600 is connected to the central suction hole 201a, the outer suction hole exhaust device 700 is connected to the outer suction hole 201, and the central suction hole and the outer suction hole are used for each exhaust device. 600 and 700 include outside air introduction means for introducing outside air into the suction holes 201a and 201b. One example is opening and closing solenoid valves 640 and 740. The platform driving device 300 includes a first platform driving section 310 for driving the first platform 100 and a second platform driving section 320 for driving the first platform 100, and a second platform driving section 320 for driving the second platform. Although the first platform driving unit 310 is not limited to this, the pinion 313 provided on the first platform meshes with the rack 311a provided along the guide rail 311, and the pinion 313 is reciprocated by the motor 100 mounted on the first platform 100 By. The first stage 100 is moved along the guide rail 311 by the first stage driving unit 310 and is arranged at the panel element holding position Q1 or the panel element bonding position Q2. When this movement occurs, the slider 102 set on the first platform 100 along the guide rail 311 101 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm).
Ill — I — III I — IV I I--- I I ^ I--I I I ---*5^· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 __- . _ B7_____ 五、發明說明（Μ ) 滑動。 第2平台驅動部320固然不限於此，惟由活塞汽缸裝 置321和將其驅動之空迴路322構成。活塞汽缸裝置321 係複動型’其缸筒部321a配置於固定位置，活塞桿321b 與第2平台200連結。空氣迴路322可將預定壓力之壓縮 空氣供至活塞汽缸裝置321。 圖示之狀態顯示壓縮空氣自空氣迴路322供至活塞汽 缸裝置321之活塞桿側，活塞桿321b後退至缸筒部321a 內，第2平台200上昇之狀態。 壓縮空氣一自活塞汽缸裝置321之汽缸頭側供給，活 塞桿321b即;突出，第2平台200下降。又，壓縮空氣一供 至活塞汽缸裝置321之活塞桿蓋側，活塞桿321b及第2平 台200即上昇，恢復圖示之狀態。 氣壓迴路322係可暫時停止活塞桿321b於企望突出量 之迴路。 第2平台200包含第2吸附台201，以及固定於其上 面，連結於活塞桿之連結部202。 第22圖顯示自上方俯視吸附保持面板元件C2 (圖式 中鏈線）狀態下之第2平台200之狀態。且，圖示省略第 2平台驅動部320等。 如第22圖所示，第2吸附台201於吸附面板元件c2 之中央區域之區域以及吸附面板元件c2中央區域之外側區 域之區域，分別隔預定間距，設有複數個前述中央吸氣孔 201a及外側吸氣孔201b。 102 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） · ----------------------訂---------線 ' < (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ________B7_____ 五、發明說明（/。0 ) 連結部202自平面觀摩呈十字形，自其中心部202a向 四方延伸，中部分彎曲至下方，各前端部連接於設有吸附 台201之中央吸氣孔201a之區域與設有外側吸氣孔201b 之區域之間。又，中心部202a連結於第2平台驅動部320 之活塞桿321b。 中央吸氣孔用排氣裝置600如前述連接於中央吸氣孔 201a，其除前述啓閉電磁閥640外，含有排氣部610、撓性 管620、中央吸氣孔用排氣室630、壓力感測器（氣壓感測 器）650。 管620之一端部連於排部610，另一端部連接於排氣 室630，排氣室630與吸附台201之中央吸氣孔201a連通 。又，於管620之中途設置啓閉閥640。藉此，在閥640關 閉狀態下，藉排氣部610自中央吸氣孔201a吸引之空氣通 過排氣室630、管620排出，可藉吸附台201吸附保持面板 元件c2之中央區域。 又，在排氣部610停止，同時閥開啓狀態下，可將外 氣導入吸氣孔201a。又，壓力感測器650連接於排氣室 630，可檢測排氣室630內之空氣壓力。 外側吸氣孔用排氣裝置700如前述，連接於外側吸氣 孔201b，除前述啓閉閥740外，包含排氣部710、撓性管 720、外側吸氣孔用排空氣730。 管720之一端部連接於排氣部710，另一端部連接於 排氣室730，排氣室730與吸附台201之外側吸氣孔201b 連通。復於管720之途中設置啓開閥740。藉此，在閥740 103 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ^^1 n n 1 n n n i J * In In n n n 訂---------線 丨 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______B7_ 五、發明說明（ρ丨） 關閉狀態下，藉排氣部710，自外側吸氣孔201b吸引之通 過排氣室730、管720排出’可藉吸附台201吸附保持面板 元件c2之外側區域。 復可在排氣部710停止同時閥740開啓狀態下，自開 740通過管720，將外氣導入吸氣孔201b。 如第21圖所示，第1平台100包含第1吸附台101、 用來保持面板元件之面板元件保持裝置110。 第1吸附台101於保持面板元件cl之區域，隔預定間 距，設有複數個用來吸附面板元件之吸氣孔101a。 面板元件保持裝置110除此吸氣孔101a外，包含排氣 室111、撓性管112、排氣裝置113。管112之一端部連接 於排氣裝置113，另一端部連接於排氣室111，排氣室ill 與吸附台101之吸附孔101a連通。藉此，藉排氣裝置113 自吸氣孔101。抽吸之空氣通過排氣室111、管112排出， 可藉吸附合101吸附保持面板元件cl。 平台間排氣裝置500包含環構件510、空氣吸入用管 520、撓性管530、真空泵540。 環構件510係藉由第1與第2平台100、200互相接近 ，夾在二平台間，與該二平台一起圍繞二平台間之面板元 件cl、c2，形成用來排氣減壓之氣密室之氣密密封用之可 彈性變形環構件。此環構件510於此係橡膠製構件，設於 第1平台100之吸附台101。 空氣吸入用管520與設在第1平台100之環構件510 和面板元件61保持區域間之貫通孔嵌合，連接於撓性管 104 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------^裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______B7______ 五、發明說明（Τ^) 530之一端部。管530之另一端部連接於真空泵540。藉此 ，可將第1、第2平台100、200和環構件510所形成之氣 密室內部排氣減壓達定氣壓，於此爲20Pa (大致0.15T〇rr )程度。 又，爲了在下降途中之既定位置暫時停止第2平台 200，面臨第2平台之昇降路線設置檢測該第2平台之平台 檢測用感測器1000。 前述氣壓迴路322、排氣部610及710、電磁啓閉閥 640、740根據控制部CONT之指示動作。又，配置或將壓 力感測650檢測出之排氣室630之氣壓資料，即第2平台 之中央吸氣5；L 201a之氣壓資訊輸入控制部CONT，同時， 亦將平台檢測用感測器100所檢測出之第2平台200之檢 測資訊輸入控制部CONT。 此面板控制裝置具備在二面板元件cl ' c2貼合前使二 面板元件cl、c2互相對準位置之面板元件之互相對準裝置 400。 此對準裝置400具備二台攝影機410 (於此爲CCD攝 影機）、Χ-Υ-Θ驅動裝置420、控制部430。 自上方俯視各面板元件cl、c2互相對準位置於第1平 台100上之狀態與第7圖相同。且，此處之第1平台1〇〇、 對準裝置400等於第7圖中省略其圖示。 如第7圖所示，於各面板元件cl、C2，在面板元件之 顯示區域外分別形成用來預先對準位置之標記ml、m2。 且，於此固於十字形圖形或於面板元件之對角線兩端區域 105 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . 1 --------— I— I * I I I 1 I-- I----— II ί (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______B7___;_ 五、發明說明（/。）） ，惟不限於此，可爲各面板元件能互相對準位置之任意圖 形，又，若在顯示區域外，即可形成於任一位置。又’此 對準標記可藉由印刷等形成，於面板元件之電極形成之際 ，設置標記用電極於顯示區域外，藉由對該標記用電極施 加電壓點燈。於此，對準標記ml ' m2分別印刷於面板元 件cl、c2上。 第21圖所示CCD攝影機410連接於控制部430，可觀 察各面板元件cl、c2之預先形成之對準標記ml、m2，將 此標記資訊送至控制部430。 Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置420包含面板元件保持臂421 Χ-Υ-0 驅動裝置42·2。面板元件保持臂421連接於驅動部422之 Χ-Υ-0方向可動部，可藉其前端部421Α吸附保持面板元件 c2。Χ-Υ- 0驅動裝置連接於控制部430，可使面板元件保持 臂421及保持於其上之面板元件c2順著面板元件cl之表 面，沿既定方向（圖式中X方向）、與其垂直之方向（圖 式中Y方向）移動，同時繞垂直於X-Y平面之軸（圖式中 4方向）轉動。藉此，可根據控制部430之指示，在保持 於第1平台100之面板元件cl上移動面板元件c2。 如前述，控制部430連接於CCD攝影機410、Χ-Υ-0 驅動裝置420，以來自攝影機410之對準標記ml、m2之標 記資訊爲位置資訊加以處理，根據此位置資訊，控制X-Y-0驅動裝置420之動作，俾二面板元件cl、c2之對準標記 ml、m2—致而對準位置。且，控制部430包含利用供基板 、面板等對準位置之影像處理之對準法之裝置。 106 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ’ I ----- I I I---i — —— — — — ^ ·11111111 I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ----— ___B7_ _ 五、發明說明 又’此面板製造裝置固然具備第21圖中二點鏈線所示 ’有可藉圖示省略之排氣裝置排氣減壓之氣密性之氣密室 800，氣密室800圍繞第1、第2平台1〇〇、200等，惟此處 之面板製造裝置並不具備氣密室8〇〇。此氣密室80〇容後 說明。 其次’一面參照第23及24圖，一面就藉此裝置製造 第1圖所示類型之反射型液晶顯示面板之一例子加以說明 〇 第23圖係用來說明第21圖所示面板製造裝置之一液 晶顯示面板製程例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式，第24圖係用 來說明第％圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至(8)之圖式。且， 爲求簡化，第23及24圖省略一部分搆件之圖示。 於製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板A時，分別就進行紅 色顯示、綠色顯示、藍色顯示之R、G、B面板元件各製造 一面板元件。首先，使用R、G、B面板元件中任一個（於 此爲R面板元件）作爲一面板元件（下稱第1面板元件） cl，使用貼合於此面板元件之面板元件（於此爲G面板元 件）爲另一面板元件（下稱第2面板元件）c2，藉由第23 圖所示步驟⑴〜⑷及第24圖所示步驟(5)〜⑻將二面板元 件貼合。 亦即， (1)於第1與第2面板元件cl、c2之待互相貼合面中至 少一面，於此係於第1面板元件cl (R面板元件）設有前 述光吸收層BK之一面之反對面上，預先黏貼一表面尙以 107 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ， ---------------------訂---------線' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 五、發明說明（〆） .可撕除保護片NN1覆蓋之雙面黏膠NN。且，此處固然使 用雙面黏膠，惟，不限於此。亦可爲一表面告以可撕除保 護片貼覆之黏著片。無論如何，可藉由手操作將黏著材料 塗覆於面板元件面，或者可設置黏著材料塗覆裝置，藉該 塗覆裝置塗覆。黏著材料之設置方式可爲不發生障礙之任 意方式。又，設置此黏著材料之步驟在貼合步驟前實施。 若在貼合步驟前，另要不發生障礙，即可於任一階段實施 〇 將設有此雙面黏膠NN之第1面板元件cl定位於第丄 平台100上，使光吸收層BK朝下，藉面板元件保持裝置 110吸附保持面板元件cl於平台100之吸附台101上。 (2)載置第2面板件c2 ( G面板元件）於第1面板元件 cl上，進行二面板元件cl、c2之互相對準位置。 此對準如次進行。亦即，保持載置於面板元件cl上之 面板元件c2在暫時對準位置裝置400之前端部421a，於此 狀態下，一面以CCD攝影機410觀察二面板元件cl、c2 之對準標記ml、m2，一面藉X-Y- 0驅動裝置420移動第2 面板元件c2，使二面板元件cl、c2之對準標記ml、m2 — 致。此對準動作藉由以攝影機410檢測之標記資訊作爲位 置資訊，予以影像處理，根據此位置資訊，自動控制X-Y-0驅動裝置420來進行。對準處理一結束，即再度將面板 元件c2載於面板元件cl上。 藉X-Y- 0驅動裝置420所作之對準亦可手動操作χ_γ_ 0驅動裝置420來進行。又，用來保持第2面板元件C2之 108 ^請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} ^ i ---— I— ^ - - - - ----I . 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ____ B7__ 五、發明說明（^) .第2平台200亦可包含Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置。此時，可在保持 面板元件c2於此平台200之後，沿X-Y- 0驅動裝置面板元 件c25對準位置。復可不使用χ-γ_0驅動裝置，一面目視 觀察或以攝影機觀察二面板元件cl、C2之對準標記ml、 m2 ’ 一面藉由手操作移動第2面板元件，使二面板元件cl 、c2之對準標記ml、m2—致。 ⑶第1及第2面板元件d、C2之對準一結束，即自保产 持第2面板元件C2之Χ-Υ- Θ驅動裝置420之面板元件保持 臂421於下面板元件C2，載置於面板元件cl上，惟，此後 根據控制部CONT之指示，藉平台驅動裝置300之第1平 台驅動部310，將第1平台1〇〇移動至第2平台200下方（ 第21圖中Q2之位置），使第1與第2面板元件cl、c2保 持面相面對。 其次，藉平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320下 降第2平台200，於平台200與第2面板元件C2接觸處， 藉中央吸氣孔用排氣裝置600及外側吸氣孔用排氣裝置 700 ’分別自該於第2平台200之中央吸氣孔2〇la及外側 吸氣孔201b吸氣，藉此，吸附保持第2面板元件c2於吸 附台201 ’進一步藉第2平台驅動部320使吸附第2面板元 件c2之第2平台200上昇，待機。 (4) 自貼在第1平台1〇〇之第1面板元件cl上之雙面黏 膠NN除去可撕除保護片，露出黏著材料n。 (5) 其次，根據控制部CONT之指示，再度藉平台驅動 裝置300之第2平台驅動部320，降下第2平台200。 109 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------' 哀--------訂.--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _______B7 _ 五、發明說明（/| ) (6) 藉由以此第2平台驅動部320將第2平台200降下 ’使第1與第2平台100、200將其面板元件cl、c2保持 面相面對，換言之，使保持於此等平台100、200之面板元 件cl、C2之待互相貼合面相對面相對接近。並且，在第2 平台200爲平台檢測用感測器1〇〇〇檢測出，同時與橡膠製 環構件510接觸，二面板元件cl、C2接近達預定距離（圖 式中cl)，於此，隔2 mm時，根據控制部CONT之指示， 暫時停止藉驅動部320降下第2平台200。 由於此時氣密室D藉第1、第2平台100、200及環構 件510形成，故藉平台間排氣裝置500，自該氣密室D，將 第1與第2平台100、200間區域（因此係二面板元件cl、 c2間區域）排氣減壓，迄達到預定氣壓（於此爲2〇Pa)。 (7) 復且，切斷連接於第2平台200之中央吸氣孔201a 之排氣裝置600之排氣，根據控制部CONT之指示，開啓 排氣裝置600中之電磁啓閉閥640，將外氣導入中央吸氣 孔201a。從而使第2平台200與保持於其上之面板元件c2 中央區域間之氣壓成爲較二面板元件cl、C2間氣壓高之高 壓。藉此，於第2平台200上面板元件c2中央區域之兩面 間產生預定氣壓差，根據該氣壓差（於此，根據該氣壓差 和面板元件c2包括中央區域之部分之本身重量），在夾有 黏材料N狀態下，使第2平台200上面板元件C2之中央區 域與保持第1平台100之面板元件d接觸。此時，第2平 台200上面板元件C2中央區域之兩面間之氣壓差於此情形 下爲20Pa〜30Pa (大致l5Torr〜0.23Torr)程度。此氣壓差 110 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------ 装--------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ------____ 五、發明說明（,4) .可藉由壓力感測器650檢測排氣室620內部氣壓達到預定 氣壓（形成預定氣壓差之氣壓），間接獲知。 (8)壓力感測器650 —檢測出預定氣壓，控制部c〇NT 即再度藉第2平台驅動部320降下第2平台200，進一步使 二平台100、200相對接近，藉此，在夾有黏著材料n狀態 下，使二面板元件cl、c2互相全面壓接貼合。 且，藉此第2平台驅動部320降下第2平台200之時 刻可如前述，爲壓力感測器650檢測出預定氣壓之時刻， 其可在外氣開始導入第2平台200之中央吸氣孔201a經過 預定時間（例如5秒後）。復可藉由使用電子式或光學式 感測器檢測第2平台200上面板兀件c2之中央域與保持於 第1平台100之面板元件cl之接觸，決定第2平台200之 降下時刻。 根據此顯示面板製造裝置，於二面板元件cl、C2貼合 時，在二面板元件cl、c2全面貼合之前，二面板元件ci、 c2之中央區域互相接觸。藉此，使二面板元件ci、C2不致 於受到一舉強行貼合衝擊，可平穩達到最初貼合開始狀態 ，抑制二面板元件cl、c2之位置偏移。 其次全面壓接貼合二面板元件cl、c2。此時，中央 區域業已接觸之二面板元件cl、c2自該中央區域朝周圍逐 漸大接觸區域，相貼，藉此，自二面板元件cl、c2間脫氣 ，在二面板元件cl、c2密接狀態下，抑制皺紋等狀態下， 並在高精度對準位置狀態下貼合。從而，及面板元件與G 面板元件貼合。此時，可使中央排氣室630內部成爲大氣 111 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公Ϊ7 '— ------------ 裝-- ----I I 訂- ΙΙΙΙΙ1 — · · (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7_____ 五、發明說明（,1 ) 壓。 又，在藉由二面板元件cl、c2互相全面壓接貼合’使 二面板元件cl、c2經由黏著材料N全面或大致全面接觸後 ，根據控制部CONT之指示，切斷連接於第2平台200之 外側吸氣孔201b之排氣裝置700之排氣’同時’開啓排氣 裝置700中之閥740。將外氣導入外側吸氣孔201b，全面 解除第2平台200對面板元件之保持，停止二面板元件cl 、c2藉第2平台驅動部320壓接。且，可在二面板元件cl 、(:2之中央區域接觸後不久，停止第2平台200之外側吸 氣孔201b之吸附，同時，亦將外氣導入外側吸氣孔201b。 復在二面板元件Cl、C2經由黏著材料N全面或大致 全面接觸後，停止平台間排氣裝置500之減壓操作’使二 面板元件Cl、C2周圍氣壓恢復外氣壓。藉此’可更確實 自二面板元件Cl、C2間脫氣。且，可在二面板元件C1、 C2之中央區域接觸後不久，恢復外氣壓。當然，於二面板 元件Cl、C2貼合結束前之期間內，亦可維持二面板元件 Cl、C2周圍氣體壓力於預定低壓。 其次，將如此獲得之R面板元件與G面板元件貼合之 面板元件視爲第1面板元件C1，同時將次一待貼合B面板 元件視爲第2面板元件C2，實質反覆進行前述各步驟(1)至 (8)，將次一 B面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元件。從而 獲得積層R面板元件、G面板元件及B面板元件之顯示面 板A 0 於此，固然使用包含環構件510、空氣吸入用管520、 112 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 I--I---1III1 衷.-----I — ·1ιιι1 — — · 丨 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _ B7 __ 五、發明說明（u。） .撓性管530、真空泵540之平台間排氣裝置500，將第1、 第2平台100、200及環構件510所形成之氣密室D內部排 氣減壓，惟亦可藉該排氣裝置將該室內排氣減壓，將包含 保持面板元件Cl、C2之第1及第2平台100、200等之區 域之全部氣體減壓成低於大氣壓力之低壓。且於第21圖所 示面板製造裝置中，在設有氣密室800情形下，固然圖式 顯示排氣部610、710、排氣裝置113、空氣迴路322、電磁 閥640、740及真空泵540等在氣密室800內，惟，實際上 ，此等元件設於氣密室800外側。 (D)有關第25至29之顯示之顯示面板之製造方法及裝 置 就有關第25至29圖所說明之顯示面板製造方法及裝 置係根據如次顯示面板製造方法及裝置者。 (顯示面板製造方法） 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影 像之顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，包括以下步 聚： 保持第1面板元件於第1平台之步驟； 保持第2面板元件於第2平台之步驟； 將未硬化黏著材料配置在保持於第1平台之第1面板 元件及保持於第2平台之第2面板元件中至少一面板元件 之步驟； 移動保持第1面板元件之第1平台及保持第2面板元 件之第2平台中至少一方，使二面板元件相面對，同時重 113 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ---- I 1 I I 1 I ---^-------- 訂------— — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 --—_____B7 _. 五、發明說明（、、ι) .疊該二面板元件之預定端部之步驟； 保持步驟’其保持該重疊之第1及第2面板元件端部 於重疊狀態； 暫時貼合步驟，其自保持於端部重疊狀態之第1及第 2面板元件雨側，且自該保持之端部依序施加夾持力，藉 此’以前述黏著材料依序全面暫時貼合該二面板元件； 對準步驟，其使暫時貼合之第1與第2面板元件互相 對準位置；以及 正式貼合步驟，其在該對準後，使第1與第2面板元 件間之黏著材料硬化，正式將二面板元件貼合。 於此方法中，在前述二面板元件之預定端部重疊步驟 中’二面板元件不必在夾有黏著材料狀態下互相接觸。尙 可留有若干間隙。 由於此顯示面板之製造方法於第1與第2面板元件之 暫時貼合步驟中，自保持於端部重疊狀態之第1與第2面 板元件兩側，並自該保持之端部側依序施加夾持力，藉此 依序全面暫時貼合二面板元件，故一面自二面板元件間脫 氣’一面暫時貼合二面板元件，從而，二面板元件密接， 同時，抑制皺紋發生等。 復於在二面板元件間之黏著材料尙未硬化期間內，換 言之，在處於二面板元件尙相對隔開之狀態時，實施前述 二面板元件之對準步驟，此後，使二面板元件之黏著材料 硬化，正式貼合二面板元件，故最後相鄰面板元件在高精 度對準位置狀態下貼合。 114 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------裝--------訂---------線* (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 I------- B7__ 五、發明說明（vv) 於待積層之面板元件爲三個以上時，就第3個以後之 各面板元件，將前述正式貼合步驟所得貼合之面板元件視 爲前述第1面板元件。將次一待貼合面板元件視爲前述第 2面板元件，實質反覆進行前述各步驟，藉此，可能每— 次一面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元件上。 在保持第1及第2面板元件於第1及第2平台情形下 ’該平台對面板元件之保持固然不限於此，惟可舉經由設 於平台之吸氣孔吸引保持面板元件之情形作爲代表例。 於黏著材料配置步驟中配置之黏著材料固然係未硬化 之黏著材料，惟可舉在加壓下顯示有流動性者作爲此黏著 材料代表例。且，此處所謂在加壓下顯示有流動性之黏著 材料固然顯示其在配置後不久本身具有若干流動性，惟亦 包含此後在加壓下顯示有流動性者。於配置前述黏著材料 之步驟中，可在保持於第1平台之第1面板元件之預定端 部配置未硬化之黏著材料，於前述暫時貼合步驟中，自保 持於端部重疊狀態之第1與第2面板元件兩側，並自該保 持之端部側依序施加夾持力，藉此，一面壓緊該黏著材料 於第1與第2面板元件間，一面依序全面暫時貼合二面板 元件。一旦如此壓緊擴大黏著材料，外氣即進入二面板元 件間。當然，只要不妨礙二面板元件之貼合，黏著材料即 可配置成僅壓緊擴大面元件之端部，部分或全面塗覆於第 1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面之至少一面等。 又，保持第2面板元件於第2平台之步驟爲求易於實 施稍後步驟之將第1與第2面板元件之重疊預定端部維持 115 装-------—訂---------線- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公t ) 472223 A7 _ _B7________ 五、發明說明) '於該重疊狀態之步驟’可使二面板元件之預定端部重疊而 保持於該重疊狀態時之第2面板元件端部成露出第2平台 狀態保持於該第2平台。 無論如何，二面板元件之暫時貼合可藉由使用例如壓 緊二面板元件於第1平台之壓緊構件’一面維持該壓緊構 件壓緊二面板元件狀態，一面使該壓緊構件相對於第1平 台移動來進行。 於此情形下，該壓緊構件可例如倂用將重疊之二面板 元件端部壓緊保持於第1平台之裝置。當然，用以實施保 持步驟之端部保持裝置可設置成有別於該壓緊裝置。 無論如何，此壓緊構件係具有由預定曲率之凸曲面構 成之面板元件壓緊兩者，於前述暫時貼合步驟中，可使該 面板元件壓緊面相對於面板元件轉動。藉此，可平穩定施 暫時貼合步驟。 具有凸曲面構成之面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件代表例 固然有截面圓形之壓輥，惟亦可利用具有側視呈扇形之面 板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件等。 在採用截面圓形之壓輥情形下，爲了使面板元件不致 於因該壓輥壓緊而發生皺紋，亦可使用中央部直徑較二端 部直徑小之所謂倒冠型壓輥。 於以上說明之顯示面板之製造方法中使用壓緊構件之 方法可例示如次方法。亦即， 一種顯示面板之製造方法，於保持前述重疊之第1與 第2面板元件端部於重疊狀態之步驟中，藉由以壓緊構件 116 一 _______ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公髮） I----------- 裝---------訂^---------線 * (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____ B7 - 1 *1 …… -…… ------------------- 丨丨 — 五、發明說明（、、今） 壓緊保持該重疊端部於第1平台，予以保持， 於前述暫時貼合步驟中，一面將藉該壓緊構件壓緊面 板元件之第1平台維持於以該壓緊構件壓緊面板元件狀態 ’一面使該壓緊構件與第2平台相對移動，自第2平台於 出第2面板元件，於第1平台上依序暫時貼合二面板元件 〇 於此情形下，亦採用具有由預定曲率之凸曲面構成之_ 面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件作爲該壓緊構件，其可例示， 於前述保持步驟中，藉由以該壓緊構之面板元件壓緊面之 一部分將前述重疊之第1與第2面板元件之端部壓緊於第 1平台’予以保持，於前述暫寺貼合步驟中，在夾有第1 及第2面板元件狀態下，使該壓緊構件之面板元件壓緊面 相對於第1平台轉動，一面自第2平台拉出第2面板元件 ’ 一面藉前述黏著材料，於第1平台上依序暫時貼合二面 板元件之情形。 在不妨礙之範圍內固然可採用種種於暫時貼合第1與 第2面板兀件後藉由光照側、加熱等硬化之黏著材料作爲 前述黏著材料’惟可舉市場上容易購得，對面板元件與不 良影響之光硬化型黏著材料，譬如紫外光礙化型黏著材料 爲例。 在使用光硬化型黏著材料情形下，於前述正式貼合步 驟中，照射該黏著材料硬化之光於黏著材料。 無論如何’爲了自貼合之相鄰面板元件間充份脫氣， 可至少於預定減壓氣體中實施前述暫時貼合步驟。 117 H張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4^(21〇 X 297公爱）--- -------- - - - - --------^^.11— I ----*5^ · (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ----_B7 ______ 五、發明說明（、、< ) 以各種方法進行第1與第2面板元件正式貼合前之對 準步驟中二面板元件之互相對準位置。例如使用本身業已 周知之基板、面板之對準方法來進行。 對準方法可例示如次方法。 (1) 一種對準方法，於各面板元件上設置預先對準標， 一面目視觀察或以攝影機觀察二面板元件之對準標記，一 面藉由手操作移動第2面板元件於第1面板元件上，使二 面板元件之對準標記一致。 (2) —種對準方法，設置預先對準標記於各面板元件上 ’一面以攝影機觀察二面板元件之對準標記，一面藉X-Y-<9驅動裝置移動第2面板元件於第1面板元件上，使二面 板元件之對準標記一致。 X-Υ-θ驅動裝置之對準固然可手動操作χ-γ-0驅動置 來進行，惟亦可藉由根據攝影機檢測之標記資（例如其位 置資訊等），控制Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置之動作來進行，俾二面 板元件對準位置。於後者情形下，可利用供基板'面板等 對準位置之影像處理法。 且，毋庸贅言，Χ-Υ-0驅動置係可使物體沿方向X以 及與其垂直之方向Y移動，並繞垂直於X-Y平面之軸轉動 之裝置。 前述對準標記可爲液晶標記、電場發光標記等藉由通 電發光之標記。 (顯示面板製造裝置） 一種顯示面板之製造裝置，其係重疊用來顯示影像之 118 ------------装--------訂---------線- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） 472223 A7 ____B7___ 五、發明說明（、\b) 顯示面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，具備： 第1平台，其用來保持第1面板元件； 第2平台，其用來保持第2面板元件； 黏著材料配置裝置，其將未硬化黏著材料配置於保持 在第1平台之第1面板元件； 第1驅動裝置，其使保持於第1及第2平台之第1與 第2面板元件相面對，同時相對移動第1及第2平台’俾 該二面板元件之預定端部重疊； 壓緊構件，其將該重疊之第1與第2面板元件之端部 壓緊保持於第1平台； 第2驅動裝置，其一面使藉前述壓緊構件壓緊二面板 元件之第1平台維持於該壓緊構件壓緊面板元件狀態，且 一面自第2平台拉出第2面板元件，使壓緊構件與第2平 台相對移動，俾在壓緊構件壓緊下，藉前述黏著材料，依 序暫時貼合二面板元件； 對準裝置，其使暫時貼合之第1與第2面板元件互相 對準位置；以及 正式貼合裝置，其在藉該對準裝置使二面板元件對準 位置後，使第1與第2面板元件間之黏著材料硬化，正貼 合二面板元件。 第1及第2平台包含用來保持面板元件之裝置。此保 持裝置固然不限於此，惟可舉包含譬如設於平台，連接於 排氣裝置之用來吸附面板元件之吸氣孔爲例。 根據此製造裝置，保持第1面板元件於第1平台，保 119 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） n I -- I n i-1 I— ·:1 1— I - -. In 1 -ΪI - -i- I I— II 一--^· n K n n n n 1 3 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ^___ B7___ 五、發明說明（、、' ) .持第2面板元件於第2平台。惟，此後使用黏著材料配置 裝置，按預定量’將未硬化之黏著材料配置於保持在第1 平台之第1面板元件上。 此後，藉第1驅動裝置，使第1與第2平台相對移動 ，使二面板元件相面對，重疊二面板元件之預定端部。 藉壓緊構件將此重疊端部壓緊保持。 此後’藉由以第2驅動裝置使第1平台、第2平台與 壓緊構件相對移動’一面維持該壓緊構件對面板元件壓緊 狀態，且一面自第2平台拉出第2面板元件，在壓緊構件 壓緊下，藉前述黏著材料，於第1平台上依序暫時貼合二 面板元件。 在黏著材料配置裝置部分供給黏著材料於第1面板元 件之預定端部等時，藉壓緊構件將該黏著材料壓延於二面 板元件間。 前述第1驅動裝置與第2驅動裝置可配置成一部分共 用。又，亦可一方爲另一方之一部分。 二面板元件之如此暫時貼合一結束，即藉位對準裝置 使二面板元件對準位置，其次，藉正貼合裝置使二面板元 件間之黏著材料硬化，正貼合。 可採用例如具有由預定曲率之凸曲面構成之面板元件 壓緊面之壓緊構件作爲前述壓緊構件。並且，可藉該壓緊 面之一部分’將二面板元件之重疊端部壓緊保持於第1平 台。此時，前述第2驅動裝置可採用在夾有第1與第2面 板元件狀態下，使該壓緊構件之面板元件壓緊面相對於第 120 本...氏張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I I - 1 1 n n n n · n n n n n 訂---------線| (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7__ 五、發明說明（4 ) .1平台驅動，而自第2平台拉出第2面板元件，一面藉前 述黏著材料，於第1平台上依序暫時貼合二面板元件之驅 動裝置。 具有由凸曲面構成之面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件代表 例固然係截面圓形之壓輥，惟亦可利用具有側視呈扇形之 面板元件壓緊面之壓緊構件等。 在採用截面圓形之壓輥情形下，爲了使面板元件不致 於因該壓輥壓緊而發生皺紋，可使用中央部直徑較二端部 直徑小之所謂倒冠型壓輥。 且，爲了自二面板元件間充份脫氣，可設置減壓室其 用來至少於第1與第2面板元件之暫時貼合中’使該二面 板元件之周圍氣體成預定減壓氣體。 在待貼合面板元件爲3個以上時，可使用前述最後貼 合所得貼.合之面板元件作爲待互相貼合之二面板元件中的 —'個。 可譬如例示如次裝置作爲前述對準裝置。 (1)一種對準裝置，包括攝影機，其觀察預先形成於各 面板元件之對準標記；以及X-Υ-θ驅動置，其於第1面板 元件上移動第2面板元件，俾二面板元件之對準標記一致 ，對準位置。 ⑵一種對準裝置，包括攝影機，其觀察形成於各面板 元件之對準標記；x-γ-θ驅動裝置’其於第1平台上移動 第1面板元件，俾二面板元件之對準標記一致，對準；以 及控制部。其根據來自前述攝影機之對準標記資訊（例如 121 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------ - - ----裝--- I i i 1 訂- - - - -----, (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____ B7___ 五、發明說明（Μ ) .其位置資訊，控制X-Y-6»驅動裝置之動作，俾移動第2面 板元件，使二面板元件之對準標記一致，對準。此控制部 可例示利用供基板、面板等對準之影像處理之對準方法者 〇 就正式貼合裝置而言，可採用能按照所使用黏著材料 將二面板元件間之黏著材料硬化之裝置。例如，在使用光 硬化型黏接材料時，可使用照射硬化該黏著材料之光之燈 〇 以上說明之〔D〕型方法及裝置固然可適用於各種顯 示面板之製造，惟，以下參照第25至29圖就液晶顯示面 板之製造方法及製造裝置之具體例加以說明。 第25圖係用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板A之製 造裝置例之槪略構造圖。 此面板製造裝置具備： 第1平台100，其用來保持第1面板元件C1 ; 第2平台200，其用來保持第2面板元件C2 ; 黏著材料配置裝置500,其將在未硬化加壓力下顯示 具有流動性之黏著材料N配置於保持在第1平台100之第 1面板元件C1 ; 第1驅動裝置320，其使保持於第1及第2平台100、 200之第1與第2面板元件（：卜C2相對向，同時，相對移 動第1與第2平台1〇〇、200，俾二面板元件Cl、C2之預 定端部重疊； 壓緊保持裝置600，其將該重疊之第1及第2面板元 122 --------- --- -衷-------—訂-- - ------I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 I-—-----_B7___ 五、發明說明（〆） 件Cl ' C2之端部壓緊、保持於第1平台1〇〇 ; 第2驅動裝置31〇，其一面使藉壓緊構件61〇壓緊二 面板牛Cl、C2之第1平台1〇〇維持以壓緊構件610壓緊面 板元件之狀態，並一面自第2平台200拉出第2面板C2， 使壓緊構件610與第2平台200相對移動，俾在藉壓緊構 件610將二面板元件c卜C2壓緊於第1平台100上之狀態 下’藉黏著材料N依序貼合； 對準裝置400，其使暫時貼合之第1與第2面板元件 C卜C2彼此間對準；以及 正式貼合裝置700，在以對準裝置400使二面板元件 Cl、C2對準後，將第1與第2面板元件Cl、C2間之黏著 材料N硬化，正式貼合二面板Cl、C2。 第2驅動裝置310兼作第1驅動裝置320之一部分。 第1及第2平台100、200分別包含第1和第2吸附台 101、201，以及用來保持面板元件之面板元件保持裝置110 、210 〇 第1及第2吸附台101、201於保持面板元件Cl、C2 之區域分別隔預定間距設有複數個用來吸附面板元件於保 持面板元件Cl、C2之區域之吸氣孔10/a、20/a。 面板元件保持裝置110、210除此吸孔101a、201a之 外，包含吸附台之排氣室m、211、撓性管112、212、排 氣室113、213，分別地，排氣裝置113、213連接於管112 、212之一端部，管112、212之另一端部連接於排氣室 111、211，排氣室111、211分別與吸附台1〇1、201之吸氣 123 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） C靖先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 发 —訂---------線— 472223 A7 I---—_ B7 _ 五、發明說明（) 孔101a ' 20ia連通。因此，藉由排氣裝置113 ' 2ι3之運轉 ，空氣分別自吸氣孔l〇la、201a通過排氣室iu、211、管 112、212 排氣。 第2驅動裝置310固然不限於此，惟係設於第丨平台 100之小齒輪313與沿導軌311設置之齒條3lla嚙合，藉 裝載於第1平台1〇〇之馬達往復旋轉此小齒輪313之裝置 。第1平台1〇〇藉第2驅動裝置310沿導軌311移動，配 置於面板元件對準位置Q1、黏著材料配置位置q2、面板 牛暫時貼合開始位置或面板元件正式貼合位置θ4。於此移 動發生時，設於第1平台1〇〇之滑件102沿導軌311滑動 〇 第1驅動裝置320固然係包含前述第2驅動裝置310 作爲其一都分之裝置，惟進一步包括第2平台支持臂321 和將驅動之旋轉驅動部322。亦即，包含第2平台驅動部 〇 第2平台支持臂321之一端部支持於旋轉驅動部322 之軸322a，另一端與第2平台200連結。旋轉驅動部322 配置於固定位置，可沿既定方向（圖式中A方向）或與該 既定方向相反之方向（圖式中B方向）於預定時刻旋轉軸 322a。因此’藉由旋轉驅動部322之驅動造成之軸322a之 旋轉，支持臂321及第2平台200於預定時刻沿A方向或 B方向旋轉。 壓緊保持裝置100配置於固定位置，除前面說明之壓 緊構件610外，包含昇降驅動部620。昇降驅動部620具有 124 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝---1 1 — II 訂.！------線， 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） 472223 ’ A7 _____B7 _ 五、發明說明（/) 可轉動支持壓緊構件610之昇降方向（圖式中Z方向）可 動部621，該可動部621可於預定時刻昇降。因1，此壓 緊構件610配置於藉昇降驅動部620，於預定時刻，將位 於面板元件暫時貼合開始位置Q3之第1及第2面板元件 Cl、C2壓緊於第1平台1〇〇之壓緊位置P1，或自位置1向 上退避之退避位置P2。 於此.，壓緊構件610係截面圓形之壓輥’具有面板元 件壓緊周面610a。壓緊構件610如前述，可轉動支持於昇 降驅動部620之可動部621。且，壓緊構件610於此處固然 係截面圓形之壓輥，惟亦可利用具有側視呈扇形之面板元 件壓緊面之壓緊面之壓緊構件等。又，爲了使面板元件不 致於因面板元件被壓緊而於面板元件發生皺紋，可使用中 央部直徑較二端部直徑小之所謂倒冠型壓輥。 黏著材料配置裝置500配置於黏著材料配置位置Q2 上方，包含黏著材料供給部510及昇降驅動部520。 黏著材料供給部510收容前述未硬化之黏著材料（於 此係顯示在加壓下有流動性之光硬化型黏著材料）N ’於 前端部具有黏著材料供給口 510 ° 昇降驅動部520配置於固定位置，具有連接於黏著材 料供給部510之昇降方向（圖式中Z方向）可動部521， 可於預定時刻時昇降方向可動部521昇降。因此，黏著材 料供給部510藉昇降驅動部520配置在預定時刻，將黏著 材料N供至第1面板元件C1之黏著材料供給位置P3或自 位置P3退避於上方之退避位置。 125 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） ---- -- - - - --- 衰· —------^ - - - - -----* (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ' ---—-___B7 _____ 五、發明說明（A ) 根據此黏著材料配置裝置500，藉昇降驅動部52〇將 黏著材料供給部51〇配置»定時麵給黏著材料位置P3 ’自黏著材料供給口 51Ga放出預定量之黏著材料，藉此， 可配置黏著材料於位在黏著材料配置位置Q2之面板元件 C1之預定端部。 對準裝置400具備二台攝影機（於此爲CCD攝影機） ，X-Y-0驅動裝置420、控制部43〇及昇降驅動裝置44〇。 自上方俯視各面板元件Cl、C2互相對準位置之狀態 與第1圖相同。且於第7圖中省略此處之第丄平台1〇〇、 對準裝400等。 如第7圖所示，於各面板元件ci、C2，分別在面板元 件之顯示區域外形成預先對準位置之標記 ml、m2。且， 於此固然對準標記形成十字形圖形面板元件之對角線兩端 區域’惟不限於此，只要各面板元件能互相對準位置，可 爲任意圖形’復且，若在顯示區域外，可形成於任何位置 。亦可藉由印刷等形成此對準標記，可於形成面板元件之 電極之際，在顯示區域外置標記用電極，藉由對該標記用 電極施加電壓點燈。於此情形下，分別在面板元件cn、C2 上印刷對準標記ml、m2。 第25圖所示CCD攝影機410連接於控制部430，可觀 察各面板元件Cl、C2之預先形成之對準標記ml、m2，將 此標記資訊送至控制部430。 X-Y-6>驅動裝置420包含面板元件保持臂421及X-Y-0驅動部422。面板元件保持臂421連接於驅動部422之 126 ---I ---— — — — — — 衣--I 丨 I 丨 I 1 訂丨 — I 1 ----—^^丨 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ___B7_____ 五、發明說明（A) Χ-Υ-β方向可動部422，可藉其前端部421a實質上不舉起 惟吸附保持位於面板元件對準位置Q1之面板元件C2°X-Y-0驅動部422連接於控制部430，可使面板元件保持臂 421及保持於其上之面板元件C2順著預先吸附保持於第1 平台100之面板元件C1之表面，沿既定方向（圖式中X 方向）、與其垂直之方向（圖式中Y方向）移動，同時繞 垂直於X — Y平面之軸（圖式中Θ方向）轉動。藉此，可 根據控制部430之指示，在保持於第1平台1〇〇之面板元 件C1上移動面板元件C2。 如前述，控制部430連接於CCD攝影機410、Χ-Υ-0 驅動裝置420，以來自攝影機410之對準標記ml、m2之標 記資訊作爲位置資訊，加以處理，根據此位置資訊，控制 Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置420之動作，俾移動面板元件C2，使二面 板元件Cl、C2之對準標記nU、m2 —致。且，控制部430 包含利用供基板、面板等對準位置之影像處理之對準法之 裝置。 昇降驅動裝置440配設於X-Y- 0驅動裝置420上方， 可於預定時刻，沿既定方向（Z方向）移動驅動裝置420。 因此，藉由以昇降驅動裝置440將X-Υ-θ驅動裝置420移 動至下方，可藉驅動部422之前端部421a與位於面板元件 對準位置Q1之面板元件C2接觸。 正式貼合裝置700配置於面板元件正式貼合位置0 4 上方，包含照射使黏著材料N硬化之光線L之燈710。燈 710可照射光線於位在位置β 4之二面板元件Cl、C2間之 127 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------裝--------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 —______B7___ 五、發明說明（、〆） 光硬化型黏i材料N。藉此可使光硬化型黏著材料N硬化 〇 其次，一面參照第26、27及28圖’就藉此裝置製造 第1圖所示類型之反射型液晶顯示面板之一製造例加以說 明。 第26圖係用來明第25圖所示面板製造裝置製造液晶 顯示面板之一製程例之一部分（1)至(4)之圖式，第27圖係 用來說明第26圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至(8)之圖式。第一 28圖係用來說明第26圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至(8)之圖 式。第28圖係用來說明第27圖所示步驟之後續步驟(9)至 (11)之圖式。且，第26-27及28圖爲求簡化，省略一部分 構件之圖示。 於製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板9時，分別就進行紅 1 Ή: i ... - 色顯示、綠色顧示、藍色顯示之R、G、B面板元件各製造 一面板元件。' 首先’使用R、G、B面板元件中任一個（於此爲r面 板元件作爲第1面板元件，使用貼合於此面板元件之面板 元件（於此爲G面板元件）作爲第2面板元件C2，藉由第 26圖所示步驟⑴〜(4)、第27圖所示步驟(5)〜⑻以及第28 圖所示步驟(9)〜（11)，將二面板元件貼合。亦即，Ill — I — III I — IV I I --- II ^ I--III --- * 5 ^ · (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 __-. _ B7_____ V. Description of the invention (M) slide. The second platform driving unit 320 is not limited to this, but is constituted by a piston cylinder device 321 and an air circuit 322 that drives the piston cylinder device 321. The piston-cylinder device 321 is a double-acting type. The cylinder portion 321a is arranged at a fixed position, and the piston rod 321b is connected to the second stage 200. The air circuit 322 supplies compressed air of a predetermined pressure to the piston-cylinder device 321. The state shown in the figure shows a state in which compressed air is supplied from the air circuit 322 to the piston rod side of the piston-cylinder device 321, the piston rod 321b is retracted into the cylinder barrel portion 321a, and the second platform 200 is raised. As soon as the compressed air is supplied from the cylinder head side of the piston cylinder device 321, the piston rod 321b protrudes, and the second platform 200 descends. When compressed air is supplied to the piston rod cover side of the piston-cylinder device 321, the piston rod 321b and the second platform 200 are raised, and the state shown in the figure is restored. The pneumatic circuit 322 is a circuit capable of temporarily stopping the piston rod 321b from the desired protrusion amount. The second stage 200 includes a second suction stage 201 and a connecting portion 202 fixed to the second suction stage 201 and connected to the piston rod. Fig. 22 shows the state of the second stage 200 in a state where the panel element C2 (chain line in the drawing) is held in a plan view from above. The second stage driving unit 320 and the like are omitted in the illustration. As shown in FIG. 22, the second suction stage 201 is provided with a plurality of the aforementioned central suction holes 201a at predetermined intervals in the area of the central area of the suction panel element c2 and the area outside the central area of the suction panel element c2. And outer suction hole 201b. 102 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) · ---------------------- Order ------ --- line ' < (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ________B7_____ V. Description of the invention (/.0) The connecting part 202 is cross-shaped when viewed from the plane, extending from its central part 202a to the four directions, and the middle part is bent to Below, each front end portion is connected between a region provided with a central suction hole 201a of the suction table 201 and a region provided with an outer suction hole 201b. The central portion 202 a is connected to a piston rod 321 b of the second platform driving portion 320. The central suction hole exhaust device 600 is connected to the central suction hole 201a as described above, and in addition to the aforementioned on-off solenoid valve 640, it includes an exhaust portion 610, a flexible tube 620, a central suction hole exhaust chamber 630, Pressure sensor (barometric pressure sensor) 650. One end of the tube 620 is connected to the row portion 610, and the other end is connected to the exhaust chamber 630. The exhaust chamber 630 is in communication with the central suction hole 201a of the adsorption table 201. An on-off valve 640 is provided in the middle of the pipe 620. Thereby, in the closed state of the valve 640, the air sucked from the central suction hole 201a by the exhaust portion 610 is discharged through the exhaust chamber 630 and the pipe 620, and the central area of the panel element c2 can be held by the suction stage 201. When the exhaust portion 610 is stopped and the valve is opened, the outside air can be introduced into the suction hole 201a. The pressure sensor 650 is connected to the exhaust chamber 630, and can detect the air pressure in the exhaust chamber 630. The exhaust device 700 for the outside suction hole is connected to the outside suction hole 201b as described above, and includes the exhaust portion 710, the flexible tube 720, and the exhaust air 730 for the outside suction hole in addition to the on-off valve 740. One end portion of the tube 720 is connected to the exhaust portion 710, and the other end portion is connected to the exhaust portion 730. The exhaust portion 730 communicates with the suction hole 201b on the outer side of the suction stand 201. On the way to the tube 720, an open valve 740 is provided. Therefore, the paper size of valve 740 103 applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ^^ 1 nn 1 nnni J * In In nnn Order --------- line 丨 ( (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ______B7_ 5. Description of the Invention (ρ 丨) In the closed state, the exhaust section 710 is used to attract the air from the outside suction hole 201b and exhaust through the exhaust chamber 730 and tube 720. 'The region outside the panel element c2 can be sucked and held by the suction stage 201. In the state where the exhaust portion 710 is stopped and the valve 740 is opened, the self-opening 740 passes the pipe 720 to introduce the outside air into the suction hole 201b. As shown in FIG. 21, the first stage 100 includes a first suction stage 101 and a panel element holding device 110 for holding a panel element. The first suction stage 101 is provided with a plurality of suction holes 101a for sucking the panel element at a predetermined interval in a region where the panel element cl is held. The panel element holding device 110 includes an exhaust chamber 111, a flexible pipe 112, and an exhaust device 113 in addition to the suction hole 101a. One end of the pipe 112 is connected to the exhaust device 113 and the other end is connected to the exhaust chamber 111. The exhaust chamber ill is in communication with the adsorption hole 101a of the adsorption table 101. Thereby, the exhaust device 113 is taken out from the suction hole 101. The sucked air is exhausted through the exhaust chamber 111 and the pipe 112, and the panel element cl can be adsorbed and held by the adsorption joint 101. The inter-platform exhaust device 500 includes a ring member 510, an air suction pipe 520, a flexible pipe 530, and a vacuum pump 540. The ring member 510 is approached to each other by the first and second platforms 100 and 200, sandwiched between the two platforms, and surrounds the panel elements cl, c2 between the two platforms with the two platforms to form an air-tight chamber for exhaust and pressure reduction. Elastically deformable ring member for hermetic sealing. The ring member 510 is a rubber member, and is provided on the suction table 101 of the first platform 100. The air suction pipe 520 is fitted into a through hole provided between the ring member 510 and the panel member 61 holding area of the first platform 100, and is connected to the flexible pipe 104. The paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- ^ install -------- order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling in this (Page) 472223 A7 ______B7______ V. One end of the invention description (T ^) 530. The other end of the tube 530 is connected to a vacuum pump 540. Thereby, the exhaust gas inside the airtight chamber formed by the first and second platforms 100 and 200 and the ring member 510 can be decompressed to a fixed pressure, and here is about 20 Pa (approximately 0.15 Torr). In addition, in order to temporarily stop the second platform 200 at a predetermined position during the descent, a platform detection sensor 1000 for detecting the second platform is installed on the lifting platform of the second platform. The aforementioned pneumatic circuit 322, exhaust portions 610 and 710, and electromagnetic on-off valves 640 and 740 operate in accordance with instructions from the control unit CONT. In addition, the pressure data of the exhaust chamber 630 detected by the pressure sensor 650, that is, the central suction 5 of the second platform; the pressure information of L 201a is input to the control unit CONT, and a sensor for platform detection is also input. The detection information of the second platform 200 detected by 100 is input to the control unit CONT. This panel control device is provided with a mutual alignment device 400 for panel elements that aligns the two panel elements cl, c2 with each other before the two panel elements cl 'c2 are attached. This alignment device 400 includes two cameras 410 (here, a CCD camera), an X-Υ-Θ drive device 420, and a control unit 430. The state where the panel elements cl and c2 are aligned with each other on the first stage 100 as viewed from above is the same as that in FIG. 7. In addition, the first platform 100 and the alignment device 400 here are equal to those in FIG. 7 and their illustrations are omitted. As shown in Fig. 7, on each panel element cl, C2, marks ml and m2 are formed outside the display area of the panel element for pre-alignment, respectively. And, here fixed to the cross-shaped graphic or to the diagonal end area of the panel element 105 paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). 1 -------- — I— I * III 1 I-- I ----— II ί (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ______ B7 ___; _ 5. Description of the invention (/.)), But not limited to this , Can be any pattern where the panel elements can be aligned with each other, and if it is outside the display area, it can be formed at any position. This alignment mark can be formed by printing or the like. When the electrode of the panel element is formed, a mark electrode is provided outside the display area, and a voltage is applied to the mark electrode for lighting. Here, the alignment marks ml'm2 are printed on the panel elements cl, c2, respectively. The CCD camera 410 shown in FIG. 21 is connected to the control unit 430, and the pre-formed alignment marks ml, m2 of each panel element cl, c2 can be observed, and the information of this mark is sent to the control unit 430. The X-Υ-0 driving device 420 includes a panel element holding arm 421 and the X-Υ-0 driving device 42 · 2. The panel element holding arm 421 is connected to the X-Υ-0 direction movable portion of the driving portion 422, and can hold and hold the panel element c2 by its front end portion 421A. The XX-Υ-0 driving device is connected to the control unit 430, so that the panel element holding arm 421 and the panel element c2 held thereon can run along the surface of the panel element cl in a predetermined direction (X direction in the drawing) and perpendicular thereto. Move in the direction (Y direction in the figure), while rotating about an axis perpendicular to the XY plane (4 direction in the figure). Thereby, the panel element c2 can be moved on the panel element cl held on the first stage 100 according to an instruction from the control unit 430. As described above, the control unit 430 is connected to the CCD camera 410 and the X-Υ-0 driving device 420, and processes the mark information of the alignment marks ml and m2 from the camera 410 as position information. The operation of the driving device 420 causes the alignment marks ml, m2 of the two panel elements cl, c2 to be aligned and aligned. In addition, the control unit 430 includes a device that uses an alignment method for image processing of alignment positions such as a substrate and a panel. 106 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 'I ----- II I --- i — —— — — — ^ · 11111111 I (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again) 472223 A7 -------- ___B7_ _ 5. The description of the invention and 'this panel manufacturing device has the two-point chain line shown in Figure 21'. There is an exhaust device which can be omitted by illustration. The reduced-pressure air-tight air-tight chamber 800 surrounds the first and second platforms 100 and 200, but the panel manufacturing apparatus here does not have the air-tight chamber 800. This airtight chamber will be explained after 80 capacity. Secondly, while referring to FIGS. 23 and 24, an example of manufacturing a reflective liquid crystal display panel of the type shown in FIG. 1 with this device will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining the panel manufacturing device shown in FIG. 21. A diagram of part (1) to (4) of a manufacturing process example of a liquid crystal display panel, and FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining steps (5) to (8) subsequent to the steps shown in FIG. In addition, for the sake of simplicity, some of the components are not shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. When the liquid crystal display panel A shown in Fig. 1 is manufactured, one panel element is manufactured for each of the R, G, and B panel elements for red display, green display, and blue display. First, use any one of the R, G, and B panel elements (here, the R panel element) as a panel element (hereinafter referred to as the first panel element) cl, and use a panel element (here, G) attached to the panel element. The panel element) is another panel element (hereinafter referred to as a second panel element) c2, and the two panel elements are bonded together through steps ⑴ to ⑷ shown in FIG. 23 and steps (5) to ⑻ shown in FIG. 24. That is, (1) at least one of the surfaces to be bonded to each other of the first and second panel elements cl, c2, and here is one side of the first panel element cl (R panel element) provided with the aforementioned light absorption layer BK On the opposite side, a surface is pre-adhered. The paper size of 107 papers applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). ------------------ --- Order --------- Line '(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 V. Description of the invention (〆). The double-sided adhesive NN covered by the protective sheet NN1 can be removed . Also, although double-sided adhesive is used here, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to apply an adhesive sheet with a removable protective sheet to the surface. In any case, the adhesive material can be applied to the panel element surface by a manual operation, or an adhesive material coating device can be provided by which the coating device can be applied. The setting method of the adhesive material may be any method in which no obstacle occurs. The step of providing the adhesive material is performed before the bonding step. If there is no obstacle before the bonding step, it can be implemented at any stage. Position the first panel element cl provided with the double-sided adhesive NN on the third platform 100 so that the light absorbing layer BK faces Next, the panel element cl is adsorbed and held on the adsorption table 101 of the platform 100 by the panel element holding device 110. (2) The second panel element c2 (G panel element) is placed on the first panel element cl, and the two panel elements cl, c2 are aligned with each other. This alignment is performed as before. That is, the front end 421a of the panel element c2 placed on the panel element cl is temporarily aligned with the front end of the position device 400. In this state, the alignment marks ml, c of the two panel elements cl, c2 are observed with the CCD camera 410. m2, while moving the second panel element c2 by the XY-0 driving device 420, so that the alignment marks ml, m2 of the two panel elements cl, c2 are the same. This alignment operation is performed by using the marker information detected by the camera 410 as position information for image processing, and automatically controlling the X-Y-0 driving device 420 based on the position information. As soon as the alignment process is completed, the panel element c2 is again loaded on the panel element cl. The alignment performed by the X-Y-0 driving device 420 can also be performed manually by operating the χ_γ_0 driving device 420. Also, it is used to hold the second panel element C2 108. ^ Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page} ^ i ---— I— ^-------- I. This paper size is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 ____ B7__ 5. Description of the invention (^). The second platform 200 may also include an X-Χ-0 drive. At this time, after holding the panel element c2 on the platform 200, the device panel element c25 can be aligned along the X-Y-0 drive unit. It is not necessary to use the χ-γ_0 drive device, while visually observing or using a camera to observe the alignment marks ml, m2 of the two panel elements cl, C2, while moving the second panel element by hand, so that the two panel elements cl, c2 are aligned The quasi marks ml, m2 are consistent. (3) Once the alignment of the first and second panel elements d and C2 is completed, the panel element holding arm 421 of the X-Υ-Θ driving device 420 of the second panel element C2 will be held on the lower panel element C2. On the panel element cl, however, according to the instruction of the control unit CONT, the first platform driving unit 310 of the platform driving device 300 is used to move the first platform 100 below the second platform 200 (Q2 in FIG. 21). Position) so that the first and second panel elements cl, c2 are held facing each other. Next, the second platform driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300 is used to lower the second platform 200, and where the platform 200 is in contact with the second panel element C2, the exhaust device 600 for the central suction hole and the exhaust gas for the outer suction hole are exhausted. The device 700 ′ sucks air from the central suction hole 201a and the outside suction hole 201b of the second platform 200, respectively, thereby sucking and holding the second panel element c2 on the suction stage 201 ', and further borrows the second platform driving section. 320 raises the second stage 200 that sucks the second panel element c2 and waits. (4) Remove the removable protective sheet from the double-sided adhesive NN attached to the first panel element cl of the first platform 100 and expose the adhesive material n. (5) Next, according to the instruction of the control unit CONT, the second platform driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300 is again used to lower the second platform 200. 109 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ 'Ai -------- Order .------ --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 472223 A7 _______B7 _ V. Description of the invention (/ |) (6) By this, the second platform driving unit 320 lowers the second platform 200 to make the second platform 200 1 and the second platforms 100, 200 face the holding surfaces of their panel elements cl, c2, in other words, the opposing surfaces of the panel elements cl, C2 held on these platforms 100, 200 are relatively close to each other. In addition, the second platform 200 is detected by the platform detection sensor 1000, and is in contact with the rubber ring member 510, and the two panel elements cl and C2 approach a predetermined distance (cl in the figure). Here, At intervals of 2 mm, the lowering of the second platform 200 by the driving unit 320 is temporarily stopped according to the instruction of the control unit CONT. Since the airtight chamber D is formed by the first and second platforms 100 and 200 and the ring member 510 at this time, the inter-platform exhaust device 500 is used to extract the area between the first and second platforms 100 and 200 from the airtight chamber D ( Therefore, the exhaust gas is decompressed in the area between the two panel elements cl and c2, and has reached a predetermined pressure (here, 20 Pa). (7) In addition, cut off the exhaust of the exhaust device 600 connected to the central suction hole 201a of the second platform 200, and open the electromagnetic on-off valve 640 in the exhaust device 600 according to the instruction of the control unit CONT. Outside air is introduced into the central suction hole 201a. As a result, the air pressure between the second stage 200 and the center region of the panel element c2 held thereon becomes higher than the air pressure between the two panel elements cl, C2. Thereby, a predetermined air pressure difference is generated between the two sides of the central area of the panel element c2 on the second platform 200, and according to the air pressure difference (herein, according to the air pressure difference and the weight of the panel element c2 including the central area), In the state of the adhesive material N, the central region of the panel element C2 on the second stage 200 is brought into contact with the panel element d holding the first stage 100. At this time, the pressure difference between the two surfaces of the central area of the panel element C2 on the second stage 200 is about 20 Pa to 30 Pa (approximately 15 Torr to 0.23 Torr) in this case. This pressure difference is 110. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). ------------ Loading -------- Order ----- ---- Line · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ------____ V. Description of the invention (, 4). The exhaust chamber 620 can be detected by the pressure sensor 650 The internal air pressure reaches a predetermined air pressure (the air pressure forming a predetermined air pressure difference) and is indirectly known. (8) Pressure sensor 650 — When the predetermined air pressure is detected, the control unit cONT again lowers the second platform 200 by the second platform driving unit 320 to further bring the two platforms 100 and 200 closer to each other. In the state of the adhesive material n, the two panel elements cl and c2 are fully pressed and bonded to each other. In addition, as described above, the time when the second platform driving unit 320 lowers the second platform 200 can be the time when the pressure sensor 650 detects a predetermined air pressure, which can be introduced into the central suction hole 201a of the second platform 200 when the outside air starts to be introduced. A predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds). It is possible to determine the lowering time of the second platform 200 by detecting the contact between the central area of the panel element c2 on the second platform 200 and the panel element cl held on the first platform 100 using an electronic or optical sensor. According to this display panel manufacturing apparatus, when the two panel elements cl, C2 are bonded, before the two panel elements cl, c2 are fully bonded, the central regions of the two panel elements ci, c2 are in contact with each other. Thereby, the two panel elements ci and C2 are not subjected to a forcible bonding impact, and the initial bonding start state can be smoothly achieved, and the positional shift of the two panel elements cl and c2 can be suppressed. Secondly, the two panel components cl, c2 are fully crimped and bonded. At this time, the two panel elements cl, c2 that have been in contact with the central area gradually become larger contact areas from the central area toward the periphery, and are adhered to each other, thereby degassing from the two panel components cl, c2 and closely contacting the two panel components cl, c2. In the state, the state of wrinkle suppression is suppressed, and the bonding is performed in the state of high-precision alignment. Thereby, the panel element and the G panel element are bonded together. At this time, the inside of the central exhaust chamber 630 can be made into the atmosphere 111. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 cm 7 '------------- equipment-- --- II Order-ΙΙΙΙΙΙ1 — · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ____B7_____ V. Description of the invention (, 1) Press and press the two panel elements cl and c2 to fully press each other After “contact bonding”, the two panel elements cl, c2 are fully or substantially fully contacted through the adhesive material N, and according to the instruction of the control unit CONT, the exhaust device 700 connected to the suction hole 201b on the outer side of the second platform 200 is cut off. The air “simultaneously” opens the valve 740 in the exhaust device 700. The outside air is introduced into the outer suction hole 201b, and the holding of the panel element by the second platform 200 is completely released, and the two panel elements cl and c2 are stopped by the second platform driving unit 320. It can be crimped. And, shortly after the central area of the two panel elements cl and (: 2 are in contact, the suction of the outside suction hole 201b on the outside of the second platform 200 can be stopped, and the outside air can also be introduced into the outside suction hole 201b. After the two panel elements Cl, C2 are fully or substantially fully contacted via the adhesive material N Stop the decompression operation of the inter-platform exhaust device 500 to restore the air pressure around the two-panel elements Cl and C2. By doing so, the air can be more reliably degassed between the two-panel elements Cl and C2. Furthermore, the two-panel element C1 Shortly after contacting the central area of C2 and C2, the external air pressure is restored. Of course, during the period before the bonding of the two panel elements Cl, C2, the gas pressure around the two panel elements Cl, C2 can also be maintained at a predetermined low pressure. Second, it will be The obtained panel element where the R panel element and the G panel element are bonded is regarded as the first panel element C1, and the next-to-be-bonded B panel element is regarded as the second panel element C2, and the foregoing steps (1) to (8) Laminating the next B panel element to the already attached panel element, so as to obtain a display panel A 0 with a laminated R panel element, a G panel element, and a B panel element. Here, of course, the ring panel 510 and air are used. Inhalation tubes 520, 112 This paper is sized according to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I--I --- 1III1. ----- I — · 1ιιι1 — — · 丨 (Please Read the notes on the back before filling out this page ) 472223 A7 _ B7 __ V. Description of the invention (u.). The air-exhaust device 500 between the platforms of the flexible tube 530 and the vacuum pump 540, the airtight chamber D formed by the first and second platforms 100 and 200 and the ring member 510 The internal exhaust is decompressed, but the indoor exhaust can also be decompressed by the exhaust device, and the entire gas in the area including the first and second platforms 100, 200 that hold the panel elements Cl and C2 can be reduced to a low level. Low pressure at atmospheric pressure. In the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 21, when the air-tight chamber 800 is provided, the exhaust sections 610, 710, the exhaust device 113, the air circuit 322, the solenoid valves 640, 740, and the vacuum pump 540 are shown graphically. Within the airtight chamber 800, these elements are, in fact, provided outside the airtight chamber 800. (D) Manufacturing method and device for display panels related to displays 25 to 29 The manufacturing method and device for display panels described with reference to Figures 25 to 29 are based on the manufacturing method and device for display panels as described above. (Manufacturing method of display panel) A manufacturing method of a display panel, which is a method of forming a panel element for forming a display panel for displaying an image, and manufacturing a display panel includes the following steps: The step of holding the first panel element on the first platform; The step of holding the second panel element on the second platform; the step of disposing the unhardened adhesive material on at least one of the first panel element held on the first platform and the second panel element held on the second platform; moving and holding At least one of the first platform of the first panel component and the second platform holding the second panel component, so that the two panel components face each other, and weigh 113 at the same time. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). %) ---- I 1 II 1 I --- ^ -------- Order -------- — (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 --- _____B7 _. V. Description of the invention (,, ι). The step of stacking the predetermined ends of the two panel elements; the maintaining step 'which keeps the ends of the overlapping first and second panel elements in an overlapping state; the temporary bonding step , Which keeps itself in the first state of overlapping ends The second panel element is on the rain side, and a clamping force is sequentially applied from the holding end, thereby 'the two panel elements are temporarily and fully adhered in sequence with the aforementioned adhesive material; an alignment step that causes the temporarily adhered first 1 and the second panel element are aligned with each other; and a formal bonding step, after the alignment, hardens the adhesive material between the first and second panel elements to formally bond the two panel elements. In this method, in the aforementioned step of overlapping the predetermined end portions of the two panel elements, the two panel elements need not be in contact with each other with the adhesive material sandwiched therebetween.尙 Leave some gaps. Since the manufacturing method of this display panel is in the temporary bonding step of the first and second panel elements, it is held on both sides of the first and second panel elements in the state where the ends overlap, and in order from the side of the held ends The clamping force is applied to temporarily and fully adhere the two panel elements in sequence, so the two panel elements are temporarily attached while degassing from between the two panel elements, thereby closely adhering the two panel elements and suppressing the occurrence of wrinkles. During the period when the adhesive material 尙 between the two panel elements is not hardened, in other words, when the two panel elements 尙 are relatively spaced apart, the aforementioned alignment step of the two panel elements is performed, and thereafter, the adhesive material of the two panel elements is made. Hardened and formally bonded the two panel components, so finally the adjacent panel components are bonded under high precision alignment position. 114 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ installation -------- order -------- -Line * (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 I ------- B7__ V. Description of the Invention (vv) When there are more than three panel components to be laminated, the third one For each of the subsequent panel elements, the bonded panel element obtained in the formal bonding step is regarded as the first panel element. The next-to-be-laminated panel element is regarded as the aforementioned second panel element, and the foregoing steps are substantially repeated, whereby the panel element may be attached to the already-attached panel element every time. In the case of holding the first and second panel elements on the first and second platforms, the holding of the panel element by the platform is not limited to this, but the case of holding and holding the panel element through the suction hole provided on the platform may be taken as a representative example. The adhesive material disposed in the adhesive material disposing step is of course an unhardened adhesive material, but a person who shows fluidity under pressure can be taken as a representative example of this adhesive material. In addition, the so-called adhesive material exhibiting fluidity under pressure, although it shows that it has some fluidity shortly after deployment, but also includes those who exhibit fluidity under pressure thereafter. In the step of disposing the aforementioned adhesive material, an unhardened adhesive material may be disposed at a predetermined end portion of the first panel element held on the first platform, and in the aforementioned temporary bonding step, it is self-retained in the first state where the end portions overlap. A clamping force is sequentially applied to both sides of the second panel element and from the side of the holding end, thereby pressing the adhesive material between the first and second panel elements, and temporarily temporarily bonding the two sides in order. Panel component. Once the adhesive material is compressed in this way, outside air enters between the two panel components. Of course, as long as it does not hinder the bonding of the two panel elements, the adhesive material can be configured to press only the end of the enlarged surface element and partially or fully coated on at least one side of the first and second panel elements to be bonded to each other. Wait. In addition, the step of holding the second panel element on the second platform is to facilitate the implementation of later steps. The overlapping end of the first and second panel elements is maintained at 115 units. ----- Line- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297g t) 472223 A7 _ _B7________ V. Description of the invention) ' In the step of the overlapped state, the predetermined end portions of the two panel elements can be overlapped and the second panel element ends can be maintained on the second platform while being exposed to the second platform state while being maintained in the overlapped state. In any case, the temporary bonding of the two panel elements can be performed by, for example, pressing the two panel elements on the first platform with a pressing member 'while maintaining the pressing member's state of pressing the two panel elements while making the pressing member with respect to The first platform moves. In this case, the pressing member can be, for example, a device that presses and holds the ends of the two overlapping panel elements on the first stage. Of course, the end holding means for performing the holding step may be provided differently from the pressing means. In any case, the pressing member has both pressing of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature. In the foregoing temporary bonding step, the pressing surface of the panel element can be rotated relative to the panel element. Thereby, the temporary bonding step can be performed stably. Representative example of a pressing member having a pressing surface of a panel element having a convex curved surface. Although a pressing roller having a circular cross-section is used, a pressing member having a pressing surface of a panel element having a side view in a fan shape can also be used. In the case of using a pressure roller having a circular cross section, in order to prevent the panel element from being wrinkled due to the pressure of the pressure roller, a so-called inverted crown pressure roller having a smaller central diameter than a diameter at both ends may be used. The method of using the pressing member in the manufacturing method of the display panel described above can be exemplified as follows. That is, a method for manufacturing a display panel, in the step of maintaining the overlapped ends of the first and second panel elements in the aforementioned state, by pressing the member 116 a_______ This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS ) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) I ----------- installed --------- order ^ --------- line * (please read the back first Please note this page before filling in this page) 472223 A7 ____ B7-1 * 1 ……-…… ------------------- 丨 丨 — 5. Description of the invention (,, (Now) press and hold the overlapped end on the first platform and hold it, and in the foregoing temporary bonding step, the first platform that presses the panel element by the pressing member is maintained to press the panel by the pressing member The “component state” side causes the pressing member to move relative to the second platform, and the second panel component is released from the second platform, and the two panel components are temporarily bonded in order on the first platform. In this case, it is also adopted The pressing member of the pressing surface of the panel element composed of a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature is used as the pressing member, which can be exemplified in the aforementioned holding step by using the pressing structure of the panel A part of the component pressing surface presses the ends of the overlapped first and second panel components against the first platform and holds them. In the foregoing temporary bonding step, the first and second panel components are sandwiched. Next, the pressing surface of the panel element of the pressing member is rotated relative to the first platform, and the second panel element is pulled out from the second platform while the second panel element is temporarily bonded to the first platform in order by the aforementioned adhesive material. Situation. Of course, it is possible to use a variety of adhesive materials that are hardened by the light side and heating after temporarily bonding the first and second panel elements as the aforementioned adhesive materials. However, it is easy to buy on the market. Components and adversely affected light-curable adhesive materials, such as UV-blocking adhesive materials, are examples. In the case of using a light-hardening type adhesive material, in the aforementioned formal bonding step, the light hardened by the adhesive material is irradiated onto the adhesive material. In any case, in order to fully degas from the adjacent adjacent panel elements to be bonded, the aforementioned temporary bonding step may be performed at least in a predetermined decompression gas. 117 H scales are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 ^ (21〇X 297 public love) ----------------------- ^^. 11— I ---- * 5 ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ----_ B7 ______ V. Description of the invention (,, <) The alignment positions of the two panel elements in the alignment step before the first and second panel elements are formally attached are performed by various methods. For example, it is performed using a substrate and panel alignment method known per se. The alignment method may be exemplified as follows. (1) An alignment method in which a pre-alignment mark is set on each panel element, while the alignment marks of the two panel elements are observed visually or by a camera, and the second panel element is moved on the first panel element by hand operation , Make the alignment marks of the two panel components consistent. (2) —A kind of alignment method, set a pre-alignment mark on each panel element ’While observing the alignment mark of the two panel elements with a camera, use X-Y- < 9 The driving device moves the second panel element on the first panel element so that the alignment marks of the two panel elements are aligned. The alignment of the X-Υ-θ driving device can be performed manually by using the χ-γ-0 driving device, but the X-Υ-0 driving can also be controlled by the marker data (such as its position information) detected by the camera. The operation of the device is performed, and the two panel elements are aligned. In the latter case, an image processing method for aligning positions such as a substrate 'panel can be used. Moreover, it goes without saying that the X-Υ-0 driving device is a device that can move an object in a direction X and a direction Y perpendicular thereto and rotate around an axis perpendicular to the X-Y plane. The alignment mark may be a liquid crystal mark, an electric field light emitting mark, or the like that emits light by electricity. (Display panel manufacturing device) A manufacturing device for a display panel, which is used to display 118 superimposed to display images. --- Line- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 472223 A7 ____B7___ 5. Description of the invention (, \ b) Display A panel element of a panel, for a display panel manufacturer, includes: a first platform for holding the first panel element; a second platform for holding the second panel element; an adhesive material disposing device for disposing the unhardened adhesive material A first panel element held on the first platform; a first driving device that makes the first and second panel elements held on the first and second platforms face each other, and relatively moves the first and second platforms at the same time; The predetermined end portions of the two panel elements overlap; a pressing member that presses and holds the ends of the overlapped first and second panel elements on the first platform; and a second driving device that uses one side of the pressing member The first platform for pressing the two panel elements is maintained in a state where the pressing member presses the panel element, and a The second panel element is pulled out from the second platform to move the pressing member relative to the second platform, and under the pressing of the pressing member, the two panel elements are temporarily bonded sequentially by the aforementioned adhesive material; the alignment device, which The first and second panel elements that are temporarily bonded are aligned with each other; and a formal bonding device that uses the alignment device to align the two panel elements and then adheres between the first and second panel elements. The material is hardened and fits the two panel components. The first and second platforms include a device for holding a panel element. This holding device is not limited to this, but may include, for example, a suction hole provided on a platform and connected to an exhaust device for sucking panel components. According to this manufacturing device, the first panel element is kept on the first platform, and the paper size is guaranteed to be 119. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) n I-I n i-1 I— ·: 1 1— I--. In 1 -ΪI--i- II— II I-^ · n K nnnn 1 3 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ^ ___ B7___ 5. Description of the invention ( ,, '). Hold the second panel element on the second platform. However, thereafter, an adhesive material disposing device is used to dispose the non-hardened adhesive material by a predetermined amount 'on the first panel element held on the first platform. After that, the first and second platforms are relatively moved by the first driving device, so that the two panel elements face each other, and the predetermined end portions of the two panel elements are overlapped. This overlapped end is pressed and held by a pressing member. Thereafter, 'the first platform, the second platform, and the pressing member are relatively moved by the second driving device' while maintaining the pressing state of the pressing member against the panel element, and pulling the second panel element from the second platform, Under the pressing of the pressing member, the two panel elements are temporarily laminated on the first platform in order by the aforementioned adhesive material. When the adhesive material arrangement device supplies the adhesive material to a predetermined end portion of the first panel element, etc., the adhesive material is rolled between the two panel elements by a pressing member. The first driving device and the second driving device may be disposed in common. In addition, one party may be a part of the other party. The two panel components are temporarily bonded in such a way that the two panel components are aligned with each other by the alignment device. Secondly, the positive bonding device is used to harden the adhesive material between the two panel components and are being bonded together. As the aforementioned pressing member, for example, a pressing member having a pressing surface of a panel element composed of a convex curved surface having a predetermined curvature can be used. Furthermore, the overlapped end portion of the two panel elements can be pressed and held on the first stage by a portion of the pressing surface '. At this time, the aforementioned second driving device may adopt the state in which the first and second panel elements are sandwiched, so that the pressing surface of the panel element of the pressing member with respect to the 120th ... ) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) II-1 1 nnnn · nnnnn order --------- line | (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____B7__ V. Description of the invention ( 4) .1 platform is driven, and the second panel element is pulled out from the second platform, and the driving device of the two panel elements is temporarily attached to the first platform in order by the aforementioned adhesive material. A representative example of a pressing member having a pressing face of a panel element constituted by a convex curved surface is a pressure roller having a circular cross section, but a pressing member having a pressing face of a panel element having a side view in a fan shape can also be used. In the case of using a pressure roller having a circular cross-section, in order to prevent the panel element from being wrinkled due to the pressure of the pressure roller, a so-called inverted crown pressure roller having a smaller diameter at the central portion than at the two end portions may be used. In addition, in order to fully degas from the two panel elements, a decompression chamber may be provided which is used to make the surrounding gas of the two panel elements into a predetermined decompressed gas at least during the temporary bonding of the first and second panel elements. When there are more than three panel components to be bonded, the aforementioned pasted bonding component can be used as one of the two panel components to be bonded to each other. As the aforementioned alignment device, a secondary device can be exemplified. (1) An alignment device, including a camera, which observes an alignment mark formed in advance on each panel element; and an X-θ-θ drive, which moves a second panel element on a first panel element, and a second panel element The alignment marks are consistent and aligned. (1) An alignment device including a camera, which observes the alignment marks formed on each panel element; an x-γ-θ driving device, which moves the first panel element on the first stage, and (2) the alignment marks of the two panel elements are the same , Alignment; and control. It is based on the alignment mark information from the aforementioned camera (for example, 121 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)) ------------ install --- I ii 1 Order---------, (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____ B7___ V. Description of the invention (Μ). Its position information controls the operation of the XY-6 »drive device俾 Move the second panel element so that the alignment marks of the two panel elements are consistent and aligned. This control unit can exemplify an alignment method that uses image processing for alignment of substrates, panels, etc. As far as the formal bonding device is concerned You can use a device that can harden the adhesive material between the two panel elements according to the adhesive material used. For example, when using a light-curable adhesive material, you can use a lamp that irradiates the light that hardens the adhesive material. Although the method and device can be applied to the manufacture of various display panels, specific examples of the method and device for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel will be described below with reference to Figs. 25 to 29. Fig. 25 is used to produce Fig. 1 LCD panel A shown A schematic structural diagram of an example of a manufacturing apparatus. This panel manufacturing apparatus includes: a first platform 100 for holding a first panel element C1; a second platform 200 for holding a second panel element C2; an adhesive material disposing device 500 It is arranged on the first panel element C1 held on the first platform 100; the first driving device 320 is configured to hold the adhesive material N that exhibits fluidity under the unhardened pressure; The first and second panel elements of 200 (: Bu C2 are opposite to each other, and at the same time, the first and second platforms 100, 200 are moved relative to each other, and the predetermined end portions of the second panel elements Cl, C2 overlap; , Which overlaps the first and second panel elements 122 --------- ----Sincerity --------Order-------- I (please first Read the notes on the reverse side and fill out this page) This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 I -—-----_ B7___ V. Description of the invention (〆) Piece Cl ' The end of C2 is pressed and held on the first platform 100; the second driving device 31o, on one side, the second panel cow Cl, C2 is pressed by the pressing member 61o on one side. While holding the panel element with the pressing member 610, the second panel C2 is pulled out from the second platform 200, so that the pressing member 610 and the second platform 200 are relatively moved, and the second panel is pushed by the pressing member 610. The components c and C2 are sequentially pressed by the adhesive material N in a state of being pressed on the first platform 100; an alignment device 400 that aligns the temporarily attached first and second panel components C and C2 with each other And the formal bonding device 700, after aligning the two panel elements Cl, C2 with the alignment device 400, hardening the adhesive material N between the first and second panel elements Cl, C2, and formally bonding the two panels Cl, C2. The second driving device 310 also serves as a part of the first driving device 320. The first and second platforms 100 and 200 include first and second suction stages 101 and 201, and panel element holding devices 110 and 210 for holding panel elements. The first and second suction stages 101 and 201 hold the panel. A plurality of suction holes 10 / a and 20 / a are provided in the regions of the elements Cl and C2 at predetermined intervals to attract the panel elements to the regions holding the panel elements Cl and C2. In addition to the suction holes 101a and 201a, the panel element holding devices 110 and 210 include exhaust chambers m and 211, flexible pipes 112 and 212, and exhaust chambers 113 and 213 of the adsorption table. 213 is connected to one end of the tubes 112 and 212, and the other ends of the tubes 112 and 212 are connected to the exhaust chambers 111 and 211. The exhaust chambers 111 and 211 are respectively connected to the suction of the suction table 101 and 201. Applicable Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) C Jing first read the precautions on the back before filling out this page} Send-Order --------- Line-472223 A7 I ---- _ B7 _ 5. Description of the invention () The holes 101a '20ia are connected. Therefore, by the operation of the exhaust device 113′2ι3, air is exhausted from the suction holes 101a, 201a through the exhaust chambers iu, 211, and the pipes 112, 212, respectively. The second driving device 310 is not limited to this, but the pinion 313 provided on the first platform 100 meshes with the rack 31a provided along the guide rail 311, and the pinion 313 is reciprocated by the motor mounted on the first platform 100. Of the device. The first platform 100 is moved along the guide rail 311 by the second driving device 310, and is arranged at the panel element alignment position Q1, the adhesive material arrangement position q2, and the panel cowl temporary bonding start position or the panel element formal bonding position θ4. When this movement occurs, the slider 102 provided on the first platform 100 slides along the guide rail 311. Of course, the first driving device 320 includes the aforementioned second driving device 310 as one of its components, but further includes the second The platform supports the arm 321 and the rotation driving part 322 to be driven. That is, it includes the second platform driving section 〇 One end of the second platform supporting arm 321 is supported by the shaft 322 a of the rotation driving section 322, and the other end is connected to the second platform 200. The rotation driving unit 322 is disposed at a fixed position, and can rotate the shaft 322a at a predetermined time in a predetermined direction (direction A in the drawing) or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (direction B in the drawing). Therefore, by the rotation of the shaft 322a caused by the driving of the rotation driving portion 322, the support arm 321 and the second platform 200 rotate in the A direction or the B direction at a predetermined timing. The hold-down device 100 is disposed at a fixed position and includes a lifting drive unit 620 in addition to the hold-down member 610 described above. The lifting drive unit 620 has 124 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Installation --- 1 1 — II Order.! ------ line, this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) 472223 'A7 _____B7 _ V. Description of the invention (/) The lifting direction of the supporting and pressing member 610 can be rotated ( Z direction in the figure) a movable portion 621, which can be raised and lowered at a predetermined time. Because of this, the pressing member 610 is arranged on the raising and lowering driving unit 620 and presses the first and second panel elements Cl and C2 located at the panel element temporary bonding start position Q3 to the first platform 100 at a predetermined time. The pressing position P1, or the retreating position P2 for retreating upward from the position 1. Here, the pressing member 610 is a pressing roller ' having a circular cross section and has a panel element pressing peripheral surface 610a. As described above, the pressing member 610 is rotatably supported by the movable portion 621 of the lifting driving portion 620. In addition, although the pressing member 610 is a pressing roller having a circular cross-section here, a pressing member having a pressing surface of a pressing surface of a panel element having a side view in a fan shape can also be used. In addition, in order to prevent the panel element from being wrinkled due to the panel element being pressed, a so-called inverted crown type roller having a smaller central diameter than a diameter of both end portions may be used. The adhesive material disposing device 500 is disposed above the adhesive material disposing position Q2, and includes an adhesive material supplying portion 510 and an elevating driving portion 520. The adhesive material supply unit 510 accommodates the aforementioned non-hardened adhesive material (here, a light-curable adhesive material showing fluidity under pressure) N 'has an adhesive material supply port 510 at the front end, and the elevation driving unit 520 is arranged to be fixed The position includes a movable portion 521 in the raising and lowering direction (Z direction in the drawing) connected to the adhesive material supply portion 510, and the movable portion 521 can move in the raising and lowering direction at a predetermined time. Therefore, the adhesive material supply unit 510 is arranged at a predetermined timing by the elevating drive unit 520, and supplies the adhesive material N to the adhesive material supply position P3 of the first panel element C1 or retracts from the upper position to the retracted position P3. 125 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) -----------Decay · ------- ^-------- -* (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 '------___ B7 _____ V. Description of the invention (A) According to this adhesive material configuration device 500, the adhesive material is supplied by the lifting drive unit 52. Part 51. Configuration »Timing surface to the adhesive material position P3 'The self-adhesive material supply port 51Ga releases a predetermined amount of adhesive material, whereby the adhesive material can be disposed at a predetermined end portion of the panel element C1 located at the adhesive material placement position Q2. The alignment device 400 includes two cameras (here, a CCD camera), an X-Y-0 drive device 420, a control unit 43 °, and a lifting drive device 44 °. The state where the panel elements C1 and C2 are aligned with each other when viewed from above is the same as in the first figure. In FIG. 7, the first platform 100, the alignment device 400, and the like are omitted here. As shown in FIG. 7, in each of the panel elements ci and C2, marks ml and m2 of pre-aligned positions are formed outside the display area of the panel element, respectively. Moreover, although the alignment marks form the two regions of the diagonal ends of the cross-shaped graphic panel element here, it is not limited to this, as long as the panel elements can be aligned with each other, any graphic can be used. Can be formed in any position. This alignment mark can also be formed by printing or the like. When forming the electrodes of the panel element, a mark electrode can be placed outside the display area and a voltage can be applied to the mark electrode for lighting. In this case, alignment marks ml and m2 are printed on the panel elements cn and C2, respectively. The CCD camera 410 shown in FIG. 25 is connected to the control unit 430, and the pre-formed alignment marks ml, m2 of each panel element Cl, C2 can be observed, and the information of this mark is sent to the control unit 430. The X-Y-6 > drive device 420 includes a panel element holding arm 421 and an X-Y-0 drive unit 422. The panel element holding arm 421 is connected to the driving part 422 of 126 --- I -----------clothing --I 丨 I 丨 I 1 order 丨-I 1 ------ ^^ 丨 (please first Read the notes on the reverse side and fill in this page.) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 ___B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (A) X-Χ-β direction movable part 422, can The front-end portion 421a does not substantially lift but only holds and holds the panel element C2 ° XY-0 driving portion 422 located at the panel element alignment position Q1 connected to the control portion 430, so that the panel element holding arm 421 and The panel element C2 follows the surface of the panel element C1 that is previously held and held on the first platform 100, and moves in a predetermined direction (X direction in the drawing), a direction perpendicular thereto (Y direction in the drawing), and around a direction perpendicular to X — The axis of the Y-plane (direction Θ in the figure) rotates. Thereby, the panel element C2 can be moved on the panel element C1 held on the first platform 100 according to the instruction of the control unit 430. As described above, the control section 430 is connected to the CCD camera 410 and the X-Υ-0 driving device 420, and uses the mark information of the alignment marks ml and m2 from the camera 410 as position information for processing, and controls the X- based on the position information. The operation of the Υ-0 driving device 420 moves the panel element C2 so that the alignment marks nU, m2 of the two panel elements C1 and C2 are the same. In addition, the control unit 430 includes a device that uses an alignment method for image processing of alignment positions such as a substrate and a panel. The lifting driving device 440 is disposed above the X-Y-0 driving device 420 and can move the driving device 420 in a predetermined direction (Z direction) at a predetermined time. Therefore, by moving the X-Υ-θ driving device 420 downward with the lifting driving device 440, the front end portion 421a of the driving portion 422 can be brought into contact with the panel element C2 located at the panel element alignment position Q1. The formal bonding device 700 is disposed above the panel component formal bonding position 0 4 and includes a lamp 710 that irradiates the light L that hardens the adhesive material N. The lamp 710 can irradiate light at position 127 between the panel elements Cl and C2 at position β4. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------- --- install -------- order --------- line · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 —______ B7___ V. Description of the invention (, 〆) Light Hardened sticky material N. Thereby, the light-curable adhesive material N can be hardened. 〇 Next, referring to FIGS. 26, 27, and 28, a manufacturing example of a reflective liquid crystal display panel of the type shown in FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a part (1) to (4) of a process example for manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 25, and FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the steps shown in FIG. 26 The drawings of the following steps (5) to (8). The first 28 diagrams are diagrams for explaining subsequent steps (5) to (8) of the steps shown in FIG. Fig. 28 is a diagram for explaining steps (9) to (11) subsequent to the step shown in Fig. 27. In addition, in Figs. 26-27 and 28, for simplicity, illustration of some components is omitted. When the liquid crystal display panel 9 shown in Fig. 1 is manufactured, red 1 Ή: i ...-each of R, G, and B panel elements of color display, green display, and blue display are manufactured as one panel element. 'First' use any of the R, G, and B panel elements (here, the r panel element is used as the first panel element, and the panel element attached to this panel element (here, the G panel element) is used as the second panel element C2, the two panel elements are bonded by steps ⑴ to (4) shown in FIG. 26, steps (5) to ⑻ shown in FIG. 27, and steps (9) to (11) shown in FIG. 28. which is,
(1)將第1面板元件Cl ( R面板元件）定位於第1平台 100上，俾其待貼合面，亦即設有前述光吸收層BK —面之 反對面朝上，藉面板元件保持裝置110將面板元件C1吸附 於平台100之吸附台101。同樣地，將第2面板元件C2 (G 128 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ---1----------裝----- - -- 訂---------J (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _____J7___ 五、發明說明（4) .面板元件）定位於第2平台200上，俾其待貼合面朝上， 復且，第2面板元件端部成自第2平台露出狀態，藉面板 元件保持裝置210吸附面板元件C2於平台200之吸附台 2(H。 ' (2) 藉第2驅動裝置310，將吸附第1面板元件C1之第 1平台100移動至面板元件C1之預定端部到達黏著材料配 置裝置500下方之位置，亦即黏著材料配置位置Q2，藉黏 著材料配置裝置500之昇降驅動部520將黏著材料供給部 510降至面板元件C1上方，亦即黏著材料供給位置p3。並 且，塗覆光硬化型黏著材料N於面板元件ci之預定端部 ，互面板元件C1之寬度方向，或線狀配置黏著材料N。 (3) 藉由以昇降驅動部520上昇黏著材料供給部51〇, 使供給部510:启位置P3退避至退避位置p4，藉第2驅動 裝置310將吸附第1面板元件C1之第1平台1⑻移動至面 板兀件C1之預定端部到達壓緊構件6丨〇下方之位置，亦即 面板元件暫時貼合位置。 (4) 藉由以第1驅動裝置320之驅動部322沿A方向旋 轉吸附第2面板元件C2之第2平台200，將其移動至二面 板7C件Cl、C2之預定端部到達壓緊構件61〇下方之位置 ’使一面板兀件Cl、C2相面對，同時，重疊二面板元件 C1、C2之預定端部。 (5) 藉壓緊保持裝置600之昇降驅動部62〇將壓緊構件 610下降至壓緊位置P1，以壓緊構件61〇之面板元件壓緊 610a之一部分將二面板元件Cl、C2之重疊端部壓緊保持 129 1 尺度適^中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210>< 297公^7~~ ------- ------------ 装----I---訂---------線* (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 I______—_B7_ _ 五、發明說明) 於第1平台。 (6) 此後，藉由以第2驅動裝置310使第1平台1〇〇相 對於第二平台200及壓緊構件610移動，亦即，在夾有第丄 及第2面板元件Cl、C2狀態下，使壓緊構件610之壓緊面 6l〇a相對於第.1平台1〇〇從動轉動，一面維持以壓緊構件 610壓緊面板元件狀態，且一面自第2平台200拉出第2面 板元件C2 ’在壓緊構件610壓緊下，藉黏著材料N，於第 1平台700上，依序暫時貼合二面板元件C1、C2。此時， 黏著材料N藉壓緊構件610壓延於二面板元件Cl、C2。此 時’黏著材料N藉壓緊構件610壓延於二面板元件C卜C2 間。若如此壓延黏著材料N，外氣即難以進入二面板元件 Cl、C2間。從而平穩實施暫時貼合步驟。 (7) 在壓緊構件610相對移動至二面板元件Cl、C2之 終端後，藉昇降驅動部620使壓緊構件610上昇至退避位 置P2 〇 (8) 如此，二面板元件Cl、C2之暫時貼合一結束，面 板元件保持裝置210對第1平台200之吸附動作即解除， 藉第1驅動裝置320使平台200沿B方向旋轉，使平台 200返回原來位置，同時，藉第2驅動裝置310，使吸附暫 時貼合之第1及第2面板元件cn、C2之第1平台100移動 至對準裝置400下方，亦即對準位置Q1。 (9) 藉昇降驅動裝置440下Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置420，進行 二面板元件Cl、C2之互相對準位置。 此對準如次進行。亦即，藉由Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置420下 130 {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁> « f i I flu n n 訂---------線丨 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 _______ ___B7_ 五、發明說明（、/ ) _降，實質上未舉起，惟保持面板元件C1上之面板元件C2 於對準裝置400之前端部421a，於此狀態，一面以CCD攝 影機410觀察二面板元件Cl、C2之對準標記ml、m2，一 面藉X-Y- 0驅動裝置420移動第2面板元件C2於第1面 板元件C1上，使二面板元件Cl、C2之對準標記ml、m2 一致。此對準動作藉由以攝影機410檢測出之標記資訊作 爲位置資訊，予以影像處理，根據此位置資訊，自動控制 X-Y- 0驅動裝置420來進行。 (10) 對準處理結束後，解除Χ·Υ-β驅動裝置420之面 板元件保持臂421對面板元件C2之保持，使X-Υ-θ驅動 裝置420上昇。 (11) 其次，藉第2驅動裝置310，將吸附對準位置之第 1及第2面板元，件Cl、C2之第1平台100移動至正式貼合 裝置700下方，亦即面板元件正式貼合位置Q4，自正式貼 合裝置700之燈710照射光線L於二面板元件Cl、C2間之 黏著材料Ν，使黏著材料Ν硬化，正式貼合。從而將R面 板元件與G面板元件貼合。 並且，二面板元件之貼合一結束，即停止正式貼合裝 置700之光照射，第1平台100維持於貼合面板元件之保 持，返回最初位置Q1。 於第25所示藉面板製裝置製造顯不面板之方法之第1 與第2面板元件Cl、C2暫時貼合步驟中，自保持端部重 疊狀態之第1與第2面板元件Cl、C2兩側，並自該保持 之端部側，依序施加夾持力，藉此，依序全面暫時貼合二 131 $張尺度適用ϋ國家標準(CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公"" ------------装----ill — 訂---------. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 --------Β7__ 五 '發明說明（ 面板兀件Cl、C2，故一_面自二面板兀件Cl、C2間脫氣， —面暫時貼合二面板牛Cl、C2，從而，二面板元件C1、 C2密接，同時，亦抑制皺紋等發生。 復由於在二面板元件Cl、C2間之黏著材料N尙未硬 化期間內，換言之，在二面板元件Cl、C2尙處於相對隔 開狀態時，實施前述二面板元件Cl、C2之對準步驟，此 後，使二面板元件Cl、C2間之黏著材料N硬化，正式貼 合二面板元件Cl、C2，故在高精度對準位置狀態下，最後 貼合相鄰面板元件。 其次將如此正式貼合R面板元件與G面板元件之面 板元件視爲第1面板元件C1，同時，將次一待貼合B面板 元件視爲第2面板元件C2)，實質反覆進行前述各步驟(1) 至(11)，將次一 B面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元件。 從而獲得積層R面板元件、G面板元件及B面板元件之顯 示面板Λ〇 且，爲了自二面板元件Cl ' C2間充份脫氣，可設有 減壓室，其用來至少於第1與第2面板元件Cl、C2暫時 貼合中，使二面板元件Cl、C2周圍之氣體成爲預定減壓 氣體。 第29圖顯示於前述第25圖所示顯示面板製造裝置設 置減壓室800以及與其連接之排氣裝置900之顯示面板製 造裝置之槪略構造。 減壓室800具氣密性，可圍繞第1、第2平台1〇〇、 200等。且，前述排氣裝置113、213等設於減壓室800之 132 ---—-------- I--------訂---------線 — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 B7 ---- *--------- 玉、發明說明（ .外側。於此，排氣裝置900含有回轉泵，可將減壓室800 內部排氣減壓。減壓室800具有供面板元件出入，圖示省 略之氣密門。 在採用此種減壓室800情形下，於此，最晚在第26圖 所示黏著材料塗覆步驟⑵後，正式貼合步驟（11)之前，將 減壓室800內部減降成預定壓力。此時減壓室800內之壓 力固然不限於此，惟例如爲13Pa〜40Pa (大致1 Torr〜0.3 Torr)程度。 (E)與第30至35圖有關之顯示面板之製造方法及裝置 就有關第30至35圖所說明之顯示面板製造方法及裝 置係根據如次顯示面板製造方法及裝置之1或2以上者。 〇 (顯示面板製造方法） 一種顯示面板製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示影像 之顯不面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，包括以下步驟 設黏著材料於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面之 至少一面之步驟； 使第1與第2面板元件互相對準位置，配置成待互相 貼合面相面對之步驟； 第1壓接步驟，其在夾有前述黏著材料狀態下，根據 預定第1條件’使互相對準位置之第1與第2面板元件互 相壓接；以及 第2壓接步驟’其在第1壓接步驟後，根據異於第丄 133 ---—— — — —---'裝 * I 1 I I I — I -----I I I I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ___B7_____ 五、發明說明（d) .條件之預定第2條件，使第1與第2面板元件互相壓接。 可舉如次製造方法作爲此顯示面板製造方法之代表例 。亦即， 一種顯示面板之製造方法，其係積層用來形成顯示面 板之面板元件，.製造顯示面板者，包括以下步驟： 保持第1面板元件於第1平台之步驟； 保持第2面板元件於第2平台之步驟； 配置保持於第1及第2平台之第1與第2面板牛，使 待互相貼合面相面對之步驟； 使第1與第2面板元件互相對準位置之步驟； 設置黏著材料於第1與第2面板元件之待互相貼合面 之至少一面之步驟； 第1壓接步驟，其在夾有前述黏著材料狀態下，並根 據預定之第1條件，將互相對準位置，保持於第1及第2 平台之第1與第2面板元件夾在第1與第2平台間，互相 壓接；以及 第2壓接步驟，其於第1壓接驟後，在夾有前述黏著 材料狀態下，根據異於第1條件之預定第2條件，將第1 及2面板元件夾在第1與第2平台間，互相壓接。 無論是哪一種製造方法，就黏著材料設在第1及第2 面板元件之待互相貼合之至少一面之尙以保獲片貼覆之雙 面黏膠或黏著片（片可爲膠帶狀)除去該保護片，露出黏著 材料之歩驟，藉由手操作成藉黏著材料塗覆裝置塗覆黏著 材料於面板元件面之步驟。黏著材料之設置方式爲不會造 134 本'紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 ------------ 衣--------訂---------線丨 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 (--——_ B7___ 五、發明說明（ 成妨礙之任意方式。 黏著材料設置步驟在第1壓接步驟前實施。若在第1 壓接步驟前，即可在不造成妨礙之任一階段實施。 第1壓接步驟在設置黏著材料，二面板元件互相對準 ’相對向，俾待互相貼合面相面對之後實施。 又，無論是哪一種製造方法，藉由各種方法進行第1 與第2面板元件之互相對準位置。例如使用本身業已周知 之基板、面板之對準方法來進行。 對準.方法可揭示如次方法作爲例子。 (1) 一種對準方法，在設置預先對準標記於各面板元件 ，將第1及第2面板元件中一面板元件固定於既定位置中 ，重疊配置另一面板元件於其上，一面目視觀察或以攝影 機觀察二面板元件之對準標記，一面藉由手操作移動另一 面板元件，使二面板元件之對準標記一致。 於採用此對準方法情形下，採用分別保持面板元件於 前述第1及第2平台之方法時，可例如保持一面板元件於 任一平台.，重疊配置另一面板元件於此面板元件上，一面 目視觀察或以攝影機觀察二面板元件之對準標記，藉由手 操作移動該另一面板元件，使二面板元件之對準標記一致 ，此後，保持該另一面板元件於另一平台上。 (2) —種對準方法，在設置預先對準標記於各面板元件 ，將第1及第2面板元件中一面板元件固定於既定位置中 ，將另一面板元件配置於其上或上方，一面以攝影機觀察 二面板元件之對準標記，一面藉X-Υ-θ驅動裝置移動該另 135 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（(：^)Α4規格（210 χ 297公^" ^ ' ------------^ -------—訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7______ 五、發明說明（〉 .一面板元件’使二面板元件之對準標記一致。 在採用此對準方法情形下，採用分別保持面板元件於 前述第1及第2平台之方法時，可例如保持一面板元件於 任一平台上，配置另一面板元件於此面板元件上，一面藉 攝影機觀察二面板元件之準標記，一面藉Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置 移動該另一面板元件，使二面板元件之對準標記一致。 用來保持該另一面板元件之平台可包含Χ-Υ-Θ驅動裝 置。此時，可在保持該另一面板元件於此平台之後，沿X-Y-0驅動，俾對準該面板元件之位置。於用來保持該另一 面板元件之平台不包含Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置時，可在對準之另 一面板元件載置於前述一面板元件上之後，保持此載置之 面板元件在與其對應之平台上。 且，對準標記亦可爲液晶標記、電場發光標記等藉由 通電發光之標記。 Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置之對準固然可手動操作Χ-Υ-0驅動裝 置來進行，惟亦可藉由根據攝影機檢測出之標記資訊(例如 其位置資訊等）’自動控制Χ-Υ-Θ驅動裝置來進行。於後 者情形下，可利用供基板、面板等對準位置之影像處理法 0 且，毋庸贅言，Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置係可沿方向X以及與 其垂直之方向Y移動物體，同時使具繞垂直於X-Y平面之 軸轉動之裝置。 於前述任一種顯示面板製造法中，在第1壓接步驟， 根據預定第1條件，於夾有前述黏著材料狀態下，將第1 136 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公爱1 " I-- ------ - -- 裝·--- I I — I 訂 I I I I 1 I I - * (請先閱讀背面之>1意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ^__B7______ 五、發明說明（0^) .與第2面板元件互相壓接。 其次，藉由第2壓接步驟，根據預定之第2條件，獲 得第1與第2面板元件互相壓接、積層之顯示面板。 保持第1及第2面板元件於第1及第2平台而貼合二 面板元件時，以此二平台夾住二面板元件，將其互相壓接 〇 且，待貼合面板元件爲3個以上時，將藉由前述第2 壓接步驟所得貼合之面板元件視爲前述第1面板元件，同 時，將次一待貼合面板元件視爲前述第2面板元件，實質 反覆進行前述各步驟，藉此，將每一次一面板元件貼合於 業已貼之面板元件上。 前述第1壓接步驟之第1條件、第2壓接步驟之第2 條件係二面板元件互相壓接時之加壓力、貼合速度、二面 板元件周圍之氣體壓力'二面板元件周圍之溫度或面板元 件之加熱溫度、照射於面板元件之光之波長等中的一個或 二個以上。 在全體比較此等條件情形下，第1壓接步驟之第1條 件異於第2步驟之第2條件。 第丨條件、第2條件可按照所利用黏著材料之種類、 所要求面板元件貼合狀態(例如抑制空氣存在於相鄰面板元 件間之狀態)等設定。 根據對面板元件貼合狀態影響大之條件之觀點，可舉 如次情形作爲代表例。亦即， 於前述第1壓接步驟之第1條件中含有二面板元件互 137 i張尺度適用巾國國i標準（CNS)A4規格咖χ 297公楚） -- ------------藏--------訂---------線I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7_____ 五、發明說明（〆） 祖壓接時之加壓條件，採用預定第1加壓力作爲該加Μ力 ，實施第1壓接步驟，於前述第2壓接步驟之第2條件中 含有二面板元件互相壓接時之加壓條件，採用大於前述第 1加壓力之第2加壓力(代表者係一定之第2加壓力)作爲該 加壓力，實施第2壓接步驟之情形。 若採用此種第1加壓力，較其大之第2加壓力，即可 一面防止二面板元件之互相偏移，一面最後對準，高精度 貼合二面板元件。 可例示以二面板元件按預定部分地(可僅爲接近極限點 、線之區域）、大致全面或全體重疊所需最小加壓力或可於 其若干之加壓力作爲第1壓接步驟之第1加壓力，以二面 板元件最後全面正式貼合所需更大的一定加壓力作爲第二 壓接步驟之第2加壓力之情形。於此情形下，最後可牢固 貼合二面板元件。 第1加壓力可逐漸增加。第2加壓可按預定時間增加 〇 又，第1條件、第2條件亦可舉如次例子。亦即，其 爲前述第1壓接步驟之第1條件含有二面板元件周圍氣壓 條件’採用預定第1氣體壓力作該氣體壓力，實施第1壓 接步驟，前述第2壓接步驟第2條件含有二面板元件周圍 氣體壓力條件，採用預定之第2氣體壓力作爲該氣體壓力 ，實施第2壓接步驟之情形。 於此情形下，可例示13Pa(大致爲O.lTorr〜0.3T〇rr)程 度之壓力作爲前述第1氣體壓力及第2氣體壓力中至少一 138 ^、紙張賴家標ijT(〇^S)A4祕（210 X 297~¥釐) ^--------訂---------線| (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7____ 五、發明說明) 氣體壓力。 如此，藉由將第1氣體壓力及第2氣體壓力中至少一 氣體壓力設定爲低於大氣壓力之低氣壓，可自二面板元件 間脫氣，從而將二面板元件密接。又，在存在有空氣情形 下，亦可抑制面板元件發生皺紋。 於第1壓接步驟中擬使二面板元件全面或大致全面互 相接觸時，可在低於大氣壓力之低壓之第1氣體壓力下實 施第1壓接步驟，第2壓接步驟之第2氣體力爲大氣壓力 。當然，亦可設定第2氣體壓力爲低於大氣壓力之低壓， 於此情形下，第2氣體壓力亦可爲與第1氣體壓力相等之 氣壓。 又，於第1壓接步驟中擬僅在二面板元件之部分區域 互相接觸時，可於大氣壓力之氣體壓力下實施第1壓接步 驟，在低於大氣壓力之低壓之第2氣體壓力下實施第2壓 接步驟。當然，第1壓接步驟亦可在低於大氣壓力之第1 氣體壓力下實施。此時，第1 '第2氣體壓力可相等。 此第1、第2氣體壓力固然有關係，惟在保持面板元 件於第1及第2平台，將二面板元件貼合情形下，於第1 壓接步驟和第2壓接步驟之至少一步驟中，可藉由以氣密 密封用之可彈性變形環構件圍繞第1及第2面板元件，同 時，將該環構件夾在第1與第2平台間，於該面板元件周 圍形成氣密室，藉由自該氣密室排氣，獲得設定氣體壓力 〇 又，爲了自二面板元件間脫氣，將二面板元件貼合， 139 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I n I— H : i H HI n I 1 n n. . n n n l n If-^OJ1 n n i n m - - I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7____ 五、發明說明（⑺） .前述第1壓接步驟中第1與第2面板元件之互相壓接藉由 最初使該二面板元件部分（點狀或線狀等）互相接觸，自該 最初互相接觸部分逐漸擴大互相壓接部分來進行。 進一步舉出具體例，前述第1壓接步驟之第1與第2 面板元件之互相壓接例如藉由最初使二面板元件於其中央 部互相接觸，自該最初互相接觸部分逐漸(例如朝周圍或朝 面板元件二端部)擴大互相壓接部分來進行。或者，可例如 最初使二面板元件以其任一端部互相接觸，自該最初互相 壓接部分(例如朝向反對側之端部)逐漸擴大互相壓接部分 來進行。 在第1壓接步驟中二面板元件如此壓接情形下，可於 前述第2壓接步驟中，將第1與第2面板元件全面互相壓 接。 保持面板元件於第1及第2平台，將二面板元件貼合 時，爲了自二面板元件間脫氣，將二面板元件貼合，於第 1及第2平台中至少一方係具備設有面板元件保持面之彈 性墊，同時該面板元件保持面爲預定曲率之凸曲面之平台 ，第1壓接步驟中第1與第1面板元件之互相壓接可藉由 使第1與第2平台相對接近，藉由最初以彈性墊之凸曲面 使該二面板元件部分互相接髑，接著使二平台相接近，一 面使前述彈性墊彈性變形，一面自該最初互相接觸部分逐 漸擴大互相壓接部分來進行。 茲進一步列舉具體例，將前述彈性墊之凸曲面作爲中 央部高起之凸曲面，例如球面、大致球面、半截圓筒之外 140 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ---- ----II —--^*111 — 11— 訂- --------, (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7____ 五、發明說明（β) 周面狀曲面，第1壓接步驟中第1與第2面板元件之互相 壓接可藉由最初使二面板元件以其中央部成點狀或線狀互 相接觸’自該最初互相接觸部分逐漸(例如朝周圍或朝面板 元件二端部)擴大互相壓接部分來進行。 或者，可例如將前述彈性墊之凸曲面作成一端部高， 自該端部朝另一端部逐漸降低之凸曲面，藉由使二面板元 件以其一端部或線狀等互相接觸，自該最初互相接觸部分 朝另一端部逐漸擴大互相壓接部分來進行^ 於第1壓接步驟中二面板元件如此壓接情形下，亦可 於第2壓接步驟中，藉由彈性墊之彈性變形，使第1與第 2面板元件全面互相壓接。 爲了不致於傷到面板元件，復進一步使二面板元件不 致於位置偏移而互相壓接，自二面板元件平穩脫氣，亦無 礙於旨在正式貼合之互相壓接，可推薦彈性墊由彈性常數 爲60kgf/cm2〜200kgf/cm2之彈性體構成，又，將凸曲面作 成球面、半截圓有之外周面狀曲面，如一端部高，自該端 部朝另一端漸降低之凸曲面平滑之曲面時，可推薦此凸曲 面之曲率半徑爲2000mm〜5000mm程度。 無論如何，採用如此逐漸擴大互相壓接部分之第1壓 接步驟時，前述第1氣體壓力、第2氣體力可不必爲低於 大氣壓力之低壓。惟可按照黏著材料之種類、要求之貼合 狀態，使第1氣體壓力和第2氣體壓力中至少一方成爲低 於大氣壓力之低壓。 且，固然可於第1壓接步驟階段使二面板元件全面互 141 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 χ 2町公釐） ------------ 裝--------訂--------線丨 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ---B7 -------- 五、發明說明（\^) 相壓接，惟如前述，未必於第1壓接步驟階段使二面板元 件全面互相壓接。 無論如何，在保持第1及第2面板元件於第1及第2 平台情形下，該平台對面板元件之保持固然不限於此，惟 可舉經由設於平台之吸氣孔吸引保持面板元件之情形作爲 代表例。此吸氣孔至少設於具備前述彈性墊之平台之該彈 性墊。 就此彈性墊而言，可揭示具有用來藉由抽真空保持面 板元件於前述凸曲面之吸氣用細孔，該細孔藉由該彈性墊 於前述壓接步驟中之彈性變形閉塞者爲例子。此彈性墊可 在壓接步驟中二面板元件互相壓接時，解除保持於彈性勢 之面板元件對另一面板元件壓接之部分，從而可平穩貼合 二面板元件。 無論如何，前述第1壓接步驟可爲藉前述黏著材料暫 時貼合第1與第2面板元件之步驟，前述2壓接步驟可爲 藉前述黏著材料牢固地正式貼合第1與第2面板元件之步 驟。 於此僧形下，第1壓接步驟可爲在夾有前述黏著材料 狀態下使互相對準位置之第1與第2面板元件互相壓接， 暫時貼合二面板元件之第1壓接步驟，第2步驟可爲在該 第1壓接步驟之後，互相壓接，正式貼合第1與第2面板 元件之第2壓接步驟。 且，第2壓接步驟中前述第2條件可包含例如使用光 硬化性黏著材料作爲黏著材料時，將使之硬化之光照射於 142 --------------装---—----訂---------線丨 (請先閱讚背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ____B7 _^_ 五、發明說明（〆） •該黏著材料之條件，在使用熱硬比性黏著材料作爲黏著材 料時’可包含將該黏著材料加熱至預定溫度之條件。 (顯示面板製造裝置） 一種顯示面板製造裝置，其積層用來顯示影像之顯示 面板之面板元件，製造顯示面板者，具備： 第1平台，其用來保持一面板元件； 第2平台，其用來保持另一面板元件；以及 平台驅動裝置，其用來使第1與第2平台將其面板元 件保持面相面對而相對接近； 第1及第2平台中至少一方具備設有面板元件保持面 之彈性墊，同時，該面板元件保持面爲預定曲率之凸曲面 t 前述平台驅動裝置在第1與第2平台相對接近時，使 保持於第1平台之面板元件與保持於第2平台之面板元件 在第1加壓力下互相壓接。進一步在大於該第1加壓力之 第2—定加壓力下壓接。 第1及第2平台包含用來保持面板元件之裝置。此保 持裝置固然不限於此，惟可舉譬如設平台，連接於排氣裝 置，用來吸附面板元件之吸氣孔爲例。此吸氣孔至少設於 具備彈性墊之平台之該彈性墊上。 就此彈性墊而言，可揭示具有用來藉由抽真空保持面 板元件於前述凸曲面之吸氣用細孔，該細孔藉由該彈性墊 之彈性變形，閉塞之例子。此彈性墊可在壓接步驟中二面 板元件互相壓接時，解除保持於彈性墊之面板元件對另一 143 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 ------------ 裝·-------訂---------線* (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7______ 五、發明說明（) 面板元件之壓接，從而可平穩貼合面板元件。 根據此顯示面板製造裝置，待互相貼合之面板元件之 一保持於第1平台，另一面板元件保持於第2平台。 惟，此後藉平台驅動裝置使第1與第2平台將其面板 元件保持面相面對，換言之，使保持於此等平台之面板元 件之待互相貼合面相對向，相對接近，以二平台夾住二面 板元件，將其貼合。 此面板元件之貼合使用黏著材料來進行，如顯示面板 製造方法所說明，該黏著材料於貼合之前設在二面板元件 之待互相貼合面之至少一面。本發明裝置可具備黏著材料 之塗覆裝置7。 又，在二面板元件貼合之前，使二面板元件互相對準 位置。此對準可如同前述顯示面板製造方法所說明進行。 本發明裝置可具備面板元件之互相對準裝置，例如使 待互相貼合之二面板元件互相對準位置於第1或第2平台 上之裝置。可揭示如次裝置作爲例子。 ⑴一種對準裝置，包括攝影機，其觀察預先形成於各 面板元件之對準標記，以及Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置，其在保持於 第1及第2平台任一平台之一面板元件上或其上方移動另 一面板元件，俾二面板元件之對準標記一致，對準位置； ⑵一種對準裝置，具備攝影機，其觀察預先形成於各 面板元件之對準標記；Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置，其在保持於第1 及第2平台中任一平台之一面板元件上或其上方，移動另 一面板元件；以及控制部，其根據來自前述攝影機之對準 144 --------------------訂---------線· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210x29?公釐） 472223 A7 ____B7__ 五、發明說明（、π) 標記資訊(例如其位置資訊）。控制χ-γ-θ裝置之動作，俾 二面板元件之對準標記一致，對準位置。就此控制部而言 ，可揭示利用供基板、面板等對準位置之影像處理之對準 法者爲例子。 二面板元件之貼合如次進行。亦即，利用前述彈性墊 之凸曲面，最初使二面板元成點狀、線狀等部分互相接觸 ，其之，自該最初互相接觸部分逐漸擴大互相壓接部分。 如此，爲了一面防止二面板元件之位置偏移，並且，一面 自二面板元件間脫氣，復且爲了使面板元件不致於發生皺 紋，擴大互相壓接部分，進行二面板元件之部分(可爲僅接 近極限點或線之區域），大致全面或全面暫時貼合。在藉平 台驅動裝置，使第二平台相對接近時，在該驅動裝置之第 1加壓力下進行此壓接。此第1加壓力可逐漸增加，進一 步接著施加大於第1加壓力之一定之第2加壓力，使二面 板元件全面互相壓接，牢固地正式貼合二面板元件。第2 加壓力可於預定時間施加。因此，可獲得顯示面板。 且，待貼合面板元件爲3個以上時，可使用前述最後 貼合所得之貼合面板元件作爲待互相貼合之二面板元件之 一面板元件。 就設於第1及第2平台中至少一平台之前述彈性墊之 凸曲面而言，可揭示中央部高之凸曲面，例如球面、大致 球面、半截圓筒之外周面狀曲面爲例子。在採用此種凸曲 面情形下，第1加壓力下二面板元件之互相壓接可在最初 使用二面板元件以其中央部或點狀或線狀等互相接觸，自 145 --------------------訂---------線. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 ____B7 五、發明說明（\々） 該最初互相接觸部分逐漸(例如朝周圍或朝面板元件：端郃 )擴大互相壓接部分。 或者，可例如將前述彈性墊之凸曲面作成；邰A， 自該端部朝另一端逐漸降低之凸曲面。於此彳Λ P |、，吊i 加壓力下二面板元件之互相壓接於最初侦.liil板〃:(t以其 一端部成線狀等互相接觸，自該最初//:丨11 }《觸郃分朝另一 端部逐漸擴大互相壓接部分。 一定之第2加壓力下二面板元忭接藉由彈性 墊之彈性變形，使二面板元件全面互相服抟。 爲了使面板元件不致於受到損偽，ivIL進一步使二面 板元件不致於位置偏移而互相壓接，Π :卯板元件間平穩 脫氣，亦不妨礙旨在正式貼之互相)明接，ιιί推薦彈性墊由 彈性常數爲60kgf/cm 2〜200 kgf/cm 仰:丨彳:體構成者。在將 彈性墊之凸曲面作成球面' 半截圓简外调时狀曲面，如一 端部高’自該端部朝另一端部逐漸降低之凸曲面平滑之曲 面時’可推薦此凸曲面之曲率半徑爲2000麵〜5000腿程度 〇 且，固然於第1壓接步驟階段使二面板元件全面壓接 ，惟，未必於第1壓接步驟之階段使二面板元件全面互相 壓接。 可設置自第1與第2平台間排氣減壓之排氣裝置，其 在二面板兀件貼合時，更確實自二面板元件間脫氣。 就此排氣裝置之簡便者而言，可揭示含有氣密密封用 之可彈性變形之環構件之排氣裝置爲例子，此環構件藉由 146 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） · (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝·-------訂·---------線 472223 A7 ______B7___ 五、發明說明 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 第1與第2平台互相接近，夾在二平台間，與該二平台一 起圍繞二平台間之面板元件，形成用來進行前述排氣減壓 之氣密室。 以上說明之[E]型方法及裝固然可適用於各種顯示兩面 板之製造，惟以下參照第30至35圖就液晶顯示面板之製 造方法及製造裝置之具體例加以說明。 第30圖係用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板之製造裝 置例之槪略構造圖。 此面板製造裝置具備用來保持一面板元件cl之第1平 台100，用來保持另一面板元件c2之第2平台200，用來使 第1與第2 f台100 ' 200將其面板元件保面相面對，相對 接近背離之平台驅動裝置300。 於此面板製造裝置中第2平台200具備有面板元件保 持面22〇a之彈隹墊，同時，面板元件保持面220a爲預定 曲率之凸曲面，參照第31、32圖。如後文所述，平台驅動 裝置300在第1與第2平台100、200相面對並且相對接近 時’使保持於第1平台100之面板元件cl與保持於第2平 台200之面板元件C2在第1加壓力下互相壓接，進—步在 大於該第1加壓力之第2 —定加壓力下壓接，藉此，積層 面板元件cl、c2，製造顯示面板。 第1及第2平台100、200分別包含用來保持第1及第 2吸附台101、102、面板元件之面板元件保持裝置11〇、 210。 第1及第2吸附台1〇ΐ、2〇ι分別由具有剛性之材料構 147 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公釐）--------- 472223 A7 ___B7___________ 五、發明說明（\“） 成，分別於保持面板元件cl、c2之區域，隔預定間距，設 有複數個用來吸附面板元件之吸氣孔l〇la、201a。 面板元件保持裝置110、210除此吸氣孔l〇la、201a 外，包含吸附台之排氣室111、211、撓性管112、212、排 氣裝置113、213，分別而排氣裝置112、213連接於管112 、212之一端部，管112、212之另一端部連接於排氣室 111、 211，排氣室111、211分別與吸附台101、201之吸氣 孔101a、201a連通。因此，藉由排氣裝置113、313之運動 ，空氣分別來自吸氣孔101a、201a通過排氣111、211、管 112、 212 排出。 如前述;，第2平台200具備設有面板元件保面220a之 彈性墊220。彈性墊220配置在設有第2吸附台201之排氣 室211 —側之反對側。 於此，彈性墊220由連續發泡性之彈性橡膠發泡體構 成，具有用來藉由抽真空保持面板元件c2於凸曲面220a 之吸氣用細孔220b。此細孔220b藉由彈性墊220之彈性壓 縮變形閉塞。且，於此，彈性墊220固然由連續發泡性之 彈性橡膠發泡體構成，惟亦可爲穿設多數吸氣孔於實心弾 性體者。 面板元件保持面220a係中央高起之預定曲率之凸曲面 (於此係曲率半徑爲4000腦〜5000 mm程度之凸曲面）。可沿 其曲面保持面板元件c2。可將用例如球面、大致球面、半 截圓筒之外周面狀曲面作爲凸曲面220a，於此，其爲球面 。藉由將用上凸曲面，第1加壓力下二面板元件cl、c2之 148 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210x 297公釐） . -----------------------訂---------線- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7_____ 五、發明說明（、〇> ) 互相壓接在最初使二面板元件cl、c2以其中央部互相接觸 ，自該最初互相接觸部分逐漸朝周圍擴大互相壓接部分。 此彈性墊220於壓接步驟中二面板元件cl /C2互相壓 接時。藉由該墊之壓縮，閉塞吸氣用細孔，藉此，解除保 持於彈性墊220之面板元件c2對另一面板元件cl壓接之 部分，從而可平穩貼合面板元件cl、c2。 且，爲了不致於傷到面板元件，復且進一步使二面板 元件不致於位置偏移而互相壓接，自面板元件cl、c2間平 穩脫氣，.亦無擬於旨在正式貼合之互相壓接，於此，彈性 墊220由彈性常數爲70kgf cm 2〜20kgf cm 2之彈性體構成 〇 j 平台驅動裝置300包含爲驅動第1平台100、第2平 台200而設置，驅動第1平台1〇〇之第1平台驅動部310， 以及驅動第2平台200之第2平台驅動部320。 第1平台驅動部310固然不限於此，惟係設於第1平 台100之小齒輪313與沿導軌311而設之齒條311a嚙合， 藉裝載於第1平台100之馬達312往復從旋轉此小齒輪313 者。第1平台100藉第1平台驅動部310沿導軌311移動 ，配置於面板元件保持位置Q1或面板元件貼合位置Q2。 於此移動時，設於第1平台100之滑件102沿導軌311滑 動。 第2平台驅動部320固然不限於此，惟由活塞汽缸裝 置321和將其驅動之空氣迴路322構成。活塞汽缸裝置321 係複動型，此缸筒部321a配置於固定位置，活塞桿321b 149 本度適用中國國家 (CNSW規格_(21〇 X 297公爱） "~ ~ I --------— II · I I I----^ -------I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7____._ 五、發明說明（、〇/)) 與第2平台200連結。空氣迴路322包含壓縮空氣源322a 、四通雙位彈簧偏置型電磁閥322b、三通雙位彈簧偏置型 電磁閥322c、壓力調整閥322d、322e、止逆閥322f、322g :止逆閥和節流閥之並列迴路構成之活塞控制器322h及啓 閉電磁閥322i。 分別地，壓力調整閥322d將壓力P1之壓縮空氣，壓 力調整閥322e將壓力P2 (>P1)之壓縮空氣供至活塞汽缸裝 置 321。 圖示之狀態顯示全部電磁閥之電磁線圏斷開，活塞桿 321後退入缸筒部321a內部，第2平台200上昇。 於此狀葬下，四通閥322b之電磁線圏導通，啓閉閥 3221-導通而關閉，供自壓縮空氣源322a之壓縮空氣即按四 通閥322b—三通閥322c—壓力調整閥322d，流至活塞氣缸 裝置321之缸頭側，在壓力P1下，以活塞控制器322h控 制之速度，活塞桿321b突出，第2平台200藉由壓力P1 之第1壓力之驅動下降。 又，於此，三通閥322c之電磁線圈一導通，壓縮空氣 即通過壓力調整閥322e供給，在壓力P2 (>P1)下，活塞桿 321b及第2平台200向下，藉由壓力P2 (>P1)第2壓力驅 動予以驅動。 進一步在此狀態之後，全部電磁閥之電磁線圈一斷開 ，閥322i即開啓，活塞桿321b及第2平台200上昇，恢復 圖示狀態。 第30圖所示面板製造裝置具備在二面板元件cl、c2 150 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公爱） · --------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______ B7 _ 五、發明說明（\^) 貼合之前使二面板元件cl、c2互相對準位置之面板元件之 互相對準裝置400。 對準裝置400具備2台攝影機410(於此爲CCD攝影機 )、X-Y-0驅動裝置420、控制部430。 自上方俯視各面板元件cl、C2互相對準位置之狀態與 第7圖相词。且，此處之第1平台100、對準裝置400等於 第7圖中省略圖示。 如第7圖所示，於各面板元件cl、c2，在面板元件之 顯示區域外，分別形成預先對準位置之標記ml、m2，且 ，對準標記固然於此形成十字形圖形於面板元件之對角線 端區域，惟歹限於此，可爲各面板元件能互相對準位置之 任一圖形，復且，若在顯示區域外，可形成於任一位置。 又，此對準標記可藉由印刷等形成，於面板元件之電極形 成之際，設置標記用電極於顯示區域外，藉由對該標記用 電極施壓電壓點燈。於此，對準標記ml、m2分別印刷於 面板元件cl、c2。 第30圖所示CCD攝影機410連接於控制部430，可觀 察各面板元件cl、c2之預先形成準標記ml、m2，將此標 記資訊送至控制部430。 X-Y- 0驅動裝置420包含面板元件保持臂421及X-Y-β驅動部422。面板元件保持臂421連接於驅動部Χ-Υ-0 方向可動部，可藉其前端部421a吸附保持面板元件c2。X-Y-0驅動部422連接於控制部430，可使面板元件保持臂 421及保持於其上之面板元件c2順著預先吸附保持於第1 151 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ----------訂--I------, (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ----一 —___B7_— _________ 五、發明說明（ 平台100之面板元件cl表面，沿既定方向（圖式中X方向） ’而其垂直之方向(圖式中y方向)移動，同時繞垂直於' χ-γ 平面之軸（圖式中Q方向)移動。藉此，可根據控制部430 之指示，在保持於第1平台100之面板元件C1上移動面板 元件c2 〇 如前述，控制部430連接於CCD攝影機410、Χ-Υ-Θ 驅動裝420，以來自攝影機410之對準標記ml、m2之標記 資訊作爲位置資訊加以處理，根據此位置資訊，控制X-Y-Θ驅動裝置420之動作，俾二面板元件cl、c2之對準標記 ml、m2 —致而對準位置。且，控制部430包利用基板、面 板等對準位置之影像處理之對準方法。 '! 復於比面板製造裝置設置排氣裝置500，其爲了確實 自二面板元件cl、c2間脫氣，在二面板元件cl、c2貼合 後，自第1與第2平台100、200間減壓。 排氣裝500包含環構件510、空氣吸入用管500、撓性 管530、真空泵540。 環構件510係空氣密封用之可彈性變形環構件，且藉 由第1與第2平台100、200之互相接近，夾在二平台之間 ，與該示平台一起圍繞二平台間之面板元件cl、c2。形成 用來排氣減壓之氣密室。於此，此環構件510係橡膠製， 設在第1平台100之吸附台101。 空氣吸入用管520與設在第1平台1〇〇之環構件510 與面板元件cl保持區域間之貫通孔嵌合，連接在撓性管 530之一端部。管530之另一端部連接於真空泵540。藉此 152 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------------訂--I ------. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___B7_ 五、發明說明（β) ，可將第1、第2平台100、200及環構件510形成之氣密 室內部排氣減壓。 又，此面板製造裝固然可具備第30圖中二點鏈線所示 ，具有氣密性之氣密室600，氣密室600圍繞第1、第2平 台100、200及各裝置，惟此處之面板製造裝置不具備氣密 室 600。 此氣密室600容後說明。 其次，一面參照第31及32圖，一面就藉此裝置製造 第1圖所示類型之反射型液晶顯示面板之一例子加以說明 〇 第31 _係用來說明第30圖所示面板製造裝置製造液 晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分⑴至⑷之圖式，第32圖係 用來說明第31圖所示步驟之後續步驟⑸至⑻圖式。且，第 31及32圖爲了簡化，省略一部分構件之圖不。 製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板A時，分別就進行紅色 顯示、綠色顯示、藍色顯示之R、G、B面板元件各製造一 面板元件。 首先，使用R、G、B面板元件中任一個(於此爲R面 板元件，作爲一面板元件(下稱第1面板元件)cl，使用貼於 此面板元件之面板元件(於此爲G面板元件)作爲另一面板 元件(下稱第2面板元件)c2，藉由第31圖所示步驟⑴〜⑷ 及第32圖所示步驟⑸〜⑻，將二面板元件貼合口亦即， ⑴於第1與第2面板元件cl、c2之待互相貼合面之至 少一面。於此係在第1面板元件cl(R面板元件)設有前述 153 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . ------------- --------訂---------- 2清先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 472223 A7 ______B7_____ 五、發明說明（、s\) 光吸收層BK之一面之反對面，預先黏著一表面尙以可撕 保護片NN1點覆之雙面黏膠NN。且，於此固然使用雙面 黏膠，惟不限於此。亦可爲一表面尙以可撕除保護片貼覆 之黏著片。無論如何，可藉由手操作塗覆黏著材料於面板 元件面上，或著黏著材料塗覆裝置塗覆。黏著材料之設置 方式可爲不妨礙之任意方式。又，設置此黏著材料之步驟 於第1壓接步驟前實施，若在第1壓接步驟前，即可在不 妨礙之任一階段實施。 將設有此雙面黏膠NN之第1面板元件cl定位於第1 平台100上，使光吸收層BK朝下，藉面板元件保持裝110 吸附面板元f cl於平台100之吸附台101。 ⑵載置第2面板元件c2(G面板元件)於第1面板元件 cl上，進行二面板元件cl、C2之互相對準位置。 此對準如次進行。亦即，將載置於面板元件cl上之面 板元件c2保持於暫時對準裝置400之前端部421a，於此狀 態下，一面以CCD攝影機410觀察二面板元件cl、C2之 對準標記ml、m2，一面藉X-Y- 0驅動裝置420移動第2 面板元件c2，使二面板元件cl、c2之對準標記ml、m2 — 致。此對準動作藉由攝影機410偵測出之標記資訊作爲位 置資訊予以影像處理，根據此位置資訊，自動控制Χ-Υ-0 驅動裝置420來進行。對準處理一結束，即角度面板元件 c2載置於面板元件cl上。 Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置420之對準可手動操作Χ-Υ-0驅動裝 置420來進行。又，用來保持第2面板元件c2之第2平台 154 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規袼（210 X 297公釐） . ------------' — — — III— ^ -- ------« (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___ B7____ 五、發明說明（、〆） 200亦可包含Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置。此時，可在保持面板元件 c2於此平台200之後，沿Χ-Υ- Θ驅動使面板元件2對準位 置。又’亦可不使拥X-Υ-θ驅動裝置，一面目視覯察或以 攝影觀察二面板元件cl、C2之對準標ml、m2，一面藉由 手操作移動第2面板元件C2，使二面板元件cl、c2對準標 記 ml、m2 —致。 ⑶第.1與第2面板元件cl、C2之對準一結束，即如前 述’自保持第2面板元件C2之Χ-Υ-0驅動裝置420之面板 元件保持臂421放下面板元件C2，載置於面板元件cl上， 惟，此後藉平台驅動裝置300之第1平台驅動部310，將第 1平台100释動至第2平台200之下方(第30圖中Q2之位 置)使第1與第2平台之面板元件cl、C2保持面相面對。 其次，藉平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320降 下第2平台200，於平台200之彈性墊220接觸第2面板元 件c2處藉由面板元件保持裝置210之抽真空，將第2面板 元件c2吸引保持彈性墊220之凸曲面220a。進一步藉第2 平台驅動部320，使吸附第2面板元件c2之第2平台200 上昇，待機。 (4) 自貼在第1平台1〇〇之第1面板元件ci上之雙面黏 膠除去可撕除保護片NN，露出黏著材料。 (5) 藉由平台驅動器300之第2平台驅動部320所施加 壓力P1之第1壓力驅動，降下第2平台，使第1與第2平 台100、200將其面板元件cl、C2保持面相面對，換言之 ，使保持於此等平台1〇〇、200之面板元件cl、c2之待互 155 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------------訂--------- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7_ _ 五、發明說明（Λ-]) 相貼合面相對而相對接近。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) (6) 在平台驅動器300之第2平台驅動部320所施加預 定加壓力下，利用彈性墊220之凸曲面220a，最初，使二 面板元件cl、c2開始部分（於本例係其中央部）互相接觸 。此時，第2平台200與橡膠製環構件510接觸，形成用 來進行排氣減壓之氣密室。形成氣密室D不久，開始真空 泵540之運轉，藉真空泵540吸出此氣密室D之空氣，使 氣密室D成爲低於大氣壓力之預定壓力（於此爲20Pa〜 30Pa)。 亦在步驟(6)開始後，接著降下第2平台200，一面互 具有凸曲面客彈性墊220彈性壓縮變形，一面自二元件間 脫氣，自前述最初互相接觸部分擴大二面板元件cl、c2互 相壓接部分。如此，爲了一面防止二面板元件cl、c2之位 置偏移，且一面自二面板件cl、c2間脫氣，復爲了使皺紋 等不致於發生於面板元件，擴大互相壓接部分，固定二面 板元件cl、c2，進行二面板元件cl、c2之部分或大致全面 之暫時貼合。固然可於此階段使二面板元件cl、c2全面互 相壓接，惟，於此階段二面板元件cl、c2未必全面互相壓 接。 (7) 及⑻ 於步驟(6)後，係舊維持氣密室D內之壓力於低壓，藉 由第2平台驅動部320所施壓力P2(>P1)之第2壓力驅動， 進一步擠壓第2平台200，施加大於第1加壓力P1之一定 之第2加壓力P2 ’使二面板元件cl、c2全面互相壓接，以 156 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） _ 472223 A7 _B7__ 五、發明說明（Λίν ) 二平台100、200夾住，正式貼合二面板元件cl、C2。於此 ，第2加壓力於預定時間施加。一定之第2加壓力下二面 板元件cl、c2之互相壓接藉由彈性墊220之凸曲面220a 之彈性壓縮變形，使二面板元件cl、c2全面互相壓接。因 此，R面板元件與G面板元件牢固貼合。 並且，二面板元件之貼合-結束，真空泵540之運轉 及面板元件保持裝置210之抽真空即停止，第2平台200 上昇回復至最初位置，第1平台100仍保持貼合之面板元 件，返至最初位置Q1。 若採用此種第1加壓力，較其大之第2加壓力，即可 一面防止二面板元件cl、c2之位置偏移，一面開始貼合， Ί 最後二面板元件高精度互相對準位置，牢固貼合二面板元 件 cl 、 c2 。 其次，將如此獲得之R面板元件與G面板元件貼合之 面板元件視爲第1面板元件cl，同時將次一待貼合B面板 元件視爲第2面板元件c2，反覆進行前述各步驟（1)至(8)， 將次一 B面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元件。且由於保 持貼合之面板元件之第1平台100返回配置於位置Q1，故 可執行步驟(1)之一部分。因此，獲得R面板元件、G面板 元件及B面板元件積層之顯示面板A。 第33圖顯示用來製造第1圖所示液晶顯示面板A之 另一製造裝置例。 第33圖所示面板製造裝置於第30圖所示面板製造裝 置中除去第1平台100之排氣裝置500，設置第2平台200’ 157 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · I I I I II—^OJ·111111 I I _ 472223 A7 !-----B7 _ 五、發明說明（¥) 以替代第2平台200。其他點與第30圖之裝置相同，以相 同參考符號標示具有相同構造、作用之構件。 以下以異於第30圖裝置之要點爲中心，就第33圖所 示面板製造裝置加以說明。 第33圖之面板製造裝置具備用來保持一面板元件cl 之第1平台100、用來保持另一面板元件C2之第2平台 200’、用來使第1與第2平台1〇〇、200,將其面板元件保面 相面對而相對接近背離之平台驅動裝置3〇〇。 於此面板製造裝置中，第2平台200’具備設有面板元 件保持面220a’之彈性墊220’，同時，面板元件保持面 220a’爲預定,曲率之凸曲面，參照第34、35圖，如文所述 ’平台驅動裝置300於第1與第2平台1〇〇、200,相面對並 且相對接近時，使保持於第1平台1〇〇之面板元件cl與保 持於第2平台200’之面板元件C2在第1壓力下互相壓接， 進一步在大於該第1加壓力之第2 —定加壓力下壓接，藉 此，積層面板元件，製造顯示面板。 第2平台200’包含第2吸附台20Γ、用來保持面板元 件之面板元件保持裝置210’。 第2吸附台20Γ由具有剛性之材料構成，於保持面板 元件c2之區域，隔預定間距，設有複數個用來吸附面板元 件之吸氣孔201a’。 面板元件保持裝置210’除了此吸氣孔201a’外，包含排 氣室211、撓性管212、排氣裝置213，分別地排氣裝置 213連接於管212之一端部，管212之另一端部連接於排氣 158 --------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 472223 A7 _______B7______ 五、發明說明（、β) 室21Γ ’排氣室21Γ與吸附台20Γ之吸氣乙201a，連通。因 此，藉由排氣裝置213之運轉，空氣自吸氣孔201a’通過排 氣室211’、管212排氣。 如前述，第2平台200’具備設有面板元件保持面220a’ 彈性墊220’。彈性墊220’配置在第2吸附台20Γ設有排氣 室211’一側之反對側。 於此，彈性墊220’由與第30圖之製造裝置之彈性墊 220相同之材料，亦即由連接氣泡性之彈性橡膠發泡體構 成，具有用來藉由抽真空保持面板元件c2於凸曲面220a’ 之吸氣用細孔220b’。此細孔220b’藉由彈性壓縮變形閉塞 〇 ·/ 面板元件保持面220a’係一端部220c’高，自該端部 220c朝另一端部220d’逐漸降低之預定曲率之凸面（於此 係曲率半徑4000腿〜5000 mm程度之凸曲面），可沿此曲面 保持面板元件c2。藉由採用此種凸曲面，第1加壓力下二 面板元件cl、c2之互相壓接在最初使二面板元件cl、c2 以其一端部互相接觸，自該最初相接觸部分朝另一端部逐 漸擴大互相壓接部分。 此彈性墊200’在壓接步驟中二面板元件cl、c2互相壓 接時，藉由該墊之壓縮，閉塞吸氣用細孔，藉此，可解除 保持於彈性墊220’之面板元件c2對另一面板元件cl壓接 之部分，從而可平穩貼合二面板元件cl、c2。 且，爲了使面板元件不致於受到損傷，復且進一步使 二面板元件cl、c2不致於位置偏移而互相壓接。自二面板 159 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） · --------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ______B7_____ 五、發明說明（4) 元件cl、C2間平穩脫氣，無礙於旨在正式貼合之互相壓接 ，於此，彈性墊220’由彈性常數爲70kg f/cm2〜120kg f/cm2 之彈性體構成。 又，此面板製造裝置包含具有氣密性之氣密室600、 將該室內部排氣減壓之圖示省略之排氣裝置。氣密室600 圍繞第1、第2平台100、200’及各裝置。且，第33圖固 然顯示氣壓迴路322、排氣裝置113、213等在氣密室600 內，惟，實際上，配置在此種氣密室內不適當而設置在氣 密室外。 其次，一面參照第34及35圖，一面就藉此裝置製造 液晶顯示面板之一例子加以說明。 第34圖係用來說明第33圖所示面板製造裝置製造液 晶顯示面板之一製程例之一部分(1)至(4)之圖式，第35圖 係用來說明第34圖所示步驟之後續步驟(5)至(7)之圖式。 且，第34及35圖爲求簡化，省略一部分構件之圖示。 於製造第1圖所示反射型液晶顯示面板A時，分別就 進行紅色顯示、綠色顯示、藍色顯示之R、G、B面板元件 各製造一個面板元件。 首先，使用R、G、B面板元件中任一個（於此爲R面 板元件）作爲一面板元件（下稱第1面板元件），使用貼 合於此面板元件之面板元件（於此爲G面板元件）作爲另 一面板元件（下稱第2面板元件），藉由第34圖所示步驟 (1)〜⑷及第35圖所示步驟(5)〜(7)，將二面板元件貼合。 亦即， 160 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . ---I--------褒--------訂---------. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _______B7____ 五、發明說明（β) (1) 在第1與第2面板元件cl、c2之待互相貼合面之至 少一面，於此係在第1面板元件cl (R面板元件）未設有 光吸收層BK側之一面，預先黏著尙以可撕除保護片NN1 貼覆之雙面黏膠（亦可爲黏著片）NN。 將設有此雙面黏膠NN之第1面板元件cl定位於第1 平台100上，使光吸收層BK在下，藉面板元件保持裝置 110吸附面板元件cl於平台100之吸附台101。 (2) 載置第2面板元件c2 ( G面板元件）於第1面板元 件cl上，進行二面板元件cl、c2之互相對準位置。此對 準與第30圖之裝置之第31圖之步驟(2)相同，於此省略其 說明。 ； (3) 第1與2第面板元件cl、c2之對準一結束，即自保 持第2面板元件c2之X-Y-(9驅動器420之面板元件保持臂 421放下面板元件c2，再載置於面板元件cl上，惟，此後 藉平台驅動裝置300之第1平台驅動部310將第1平台1〇〇 移動至第2平台200’下方（第33圖中Q2’之位置，使第1 與第2平台之面板元件cl、c2保持面相面對。 其次，藉平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320降 下第2平台200’，於平台200’之墊220’與第2面板元件c2 接觸處，藉由面板元件保持裝置210’之真空吸引，將第2 面板元件.c2吸引保持於彈性墊220’之凸曲面220a’上，進 一步藉第2平台驅動部320係吸附第2面板元件c2之第2 平台200’上昇，待機。 (4) 自貼在第1平台100之第1面板元件cl上之雙面黏 161 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I --------------- --- - ·1 --------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ___ B7___ 五、發明說明（1^) 膠NN除去可撕除保護片NN1，露出黏著材料。 (5) 藉由平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320所施 壓力P1之第1壓力驅動降下第2平台，使第1與第2平台 100、200’將其面板元件cl、c2保持面相面對，換言之，使 保持於此等平台100、200’之面板元件cl、c2之待互相貼 合面相面對而相對接近。 此時，開始排氣裝置對氣密室600內部排氣減壓之運 轉，使氣密室600成爲低於大氣壓力之預定壓力（於此爲 20Pa〜30Pa)。且，此處氣密室600內部之減壓若在步驟 (6)之前，即可在不妨礙之任一階段進行。 (6) 在平台驅動裝置300之第2平台驅動部320所施預 定加壓力P1下，利用彈性墊220’之凸曲面220a’，在最初 ，使二面板元件Cl、c2 —部分（於本例係其端部）開始互 相接觸，接著，一面互具有凸曲面之彈性墊220’之橡膠部 分彈性壓縮變形，一面脫氣，自該最初互相接觸部分朝另 一端部逐漸擴大互相壓接部分。如上，爲了一面防止二面 板元件cl、c2之一位置偏移，並自二面板元件cl、c2間 脫氣’復爲了使面板元件不致於發生皴紋等，擴大互相壓 接部分，固定二面板元件cl、c2，進行二面板元件cl、c2 之部分或全面暫時貼合。 〇)仍舊維持氣壓室600內部之壓力於低壓，藉由第2 平台驅動部320所施壓力P2(>P1)之第2壓力驅動進一步擠 壓第2平台200’，施加大於第1加壓力P1之一定之第2加 壓力’使二面板元件cl、c2全面互相壓接，以二平台100 162 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS〉A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------------訂---------線' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____B7_ 五、發明說明（，b。） 、200’夾住，正式貼合二面板元件cl、C2。因此，R面板 元件與G面板元件牢固貼合。 若採用此種第1加壓力P1、較其大之第2加壓力，即 可一面防止二面板元件cl、c2之互相位置偏移，最後，高 精度互相對準，牢固貼合二面板元件。 並且，二面板元件之貼合一結束，將氣密室600內部 排氣減壓之排氣裝置之運轉及面板元件保持裝置210’之真 空吸引即停止，第2平台200’上昇回復至最初位置，第1 平台100乃舊保持貼合之面板元件而返至最初位置Q1。 其次，將如此獲得之R面板元件和G面板元件貼合之 面板元件視爲第1面板元件cl，同時將次一待貼合B面板 ·/ 元件視爲第2面板元件c2，反覆進行前述各步驟(1)至(7)， 將次一 B面板元件貼合於業已貼合之面板元件上。因此， 獲得R面板元件、G面板元件及B面板元件積層之顯示面 板A。 且，第30及33圖所示面板製造裝置固然就第2平台 驅動部320之平台驅動採用空氣壓力驅動’惟亦可採用油 壓驅動及其他機構。復可採用例如偏心凸輪機構及其他機 構作爲第2平台驅動部。 又，於第30圖所示面板製造裝置中，可替代排氣裝置 ，或者可連此裝置在內倂設前述具有氣密性之氣密室600 及將該室內部排氣減壓之排氣裝置’藉此’自第1與第2 平台100、200間排氣減壓。於第30圖所示面板製造裝置 中亦設有氣密室600情形下，圖式固然顯示，排氣裝置 163 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） · --------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 __ B7_____ 五、發明說明（W) 113、213、空氣迴路322及真空泵540等在氣密室6〇〇內 ，惟’實際上，其設在氣密室600外側。 [F]與第36至44圖有關之黏著片貼合方法及板貼合方 法 根據此處說明之黏著片貼合方法及板貼合方法，可防 止氣泡摻入，進行黏著片對板之貼合，板等藉黏著片貼合 。以下，參照第36至44圖，就此情形之貼合之第1及第 2實施形態加以說明。 (第1實施形態） 以下實施形態固然說明液晶顯示元件中經由黏著片貼 合液晶單元p偏光板之具體例，惟可適用於使用黏著片貼 合二板之所有情形。 第36圖係範示利用第1施形態之板賠合方法，安裝偏 光板於液晶單元之液晶顯示元件剖面之圖式。液晶顯示元 件10具有以透明材料（例如玻璃）形成之下側基板、相同 透明材料製戊上側基板14以及夾持於此下側基板12與上 側基板14間之液晶16。 且’固然未圖示，惟，適當電極配置於下側基板12與 上側基板14之相對向面上。下側基板12與上側基板14之 黏著藉沿二者周緣部連續配置之黏著材料達成，此黏著材 料18復作爲密封構件，將液晶16封入液晶顯示元件10內 。於液晶16中包含一定大小（例如外徑爲5# m (微米） 之球狀分隔件20。藉此分隔件20將下側基板12與上側基 板14之間隔保持於一定値，以下說液晶單元之全體構造。 164 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ， --11---------· ---I 丨 — 丨---- - ----. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _B7_____ 五、發明說明（ 1 Ό ^ / _%成多數個微細貫通孔之黏著片24將偏光板26黏 著固定於上側基板Η上。如第37圖所示，黏著片24通常 於使用前狀態下’在其二面具有分隔件27、28，貫通孔22 一般係例如藉準分子雷射、衝孔機等’在附有分隔件27、 28狀態下’開設於黏著片24之圖形孔。 爲了使孔22不明顯，此孔22之直徑在50/im以下較 佳者爲30μ m，又，如後文說明，爲了經由貫通孔22充份 消除氣泡’爲了防止孔22常常堵塞，至少爲5^m以上之 大小。 進一步，貫通孔22之數目密度以10個/cm2以上較佳 。若此數目f度在10個/cm2以下，即無法經由貫通孔22 充分消除氣泡。粘著片24之厚度，以5ym〜100程度 較佳，若在5μηι以下，顯然會發生異物摻入情形，若在 100//m以上容易引起經常性堵塞。 第38圖顯示用來將黏著片24貼附於液晶單元21之貼 附裝置之剖視圖。此貼附裝置29具有用來配置液晶單元 21之台30，以及配置於工作台30上方，並且具有平行於 台30表面之旋轉軸之加壓輥32。此台30可沿圖式之箭頭 34方向滑動。 爲了藉由負壓吸附固定液晶單元21，台30於配置液 晶單元21之表面上具有複數吸附孔36，此等吸附孔36全 部與台30內部連通，進一步經由電磁閥38連接於真空泵 40 0 黏著片24之一邊（圖式左側端部）配置成藉可移動保 165 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I I I 1----II - — — — — I--» — — 1 — - I I I . (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ____ B7__ 五、發明說明（β) 構件42舉起並保持，結果，如後文所述，在黏著片％萨 加壓輥32加壓於液晶單元21側正前方之位置χ，黏著^ 24與液晶單元21或預定角度。 此角度可爲〇〜18〇°範圍之任意値。爲了使黏著片24 不致於鬆弛，保持構件42適度拉伸黏著片之上述一邊。 其次，說明貼附黏著片24 (進—步貼附偏練26)於 液晶單元21之方法。首先，於第37圖中剝除設於黏著片 24，而之分隔件27。其次，如第38圖所示，在藉由開啓 電磁閥38及附固定液晶單元21於台30上狀態下。使黏著 片24之黏著面在下’將黏著片24之另一邊（圖式中左側 端部）重疊软液晶單兀21之另一邊。接著，在舉起黏著片 24 (以及分隔件38)之上述一邊，彎曲黏著片24狀態下 ，使台30沿箭頭34方向滑動。此時，加壓輥32沿圖式之 箭頭44方向旋轉’ 一面使黏著片24對液晶單元21加壓， 一面重疊黏著片24全體於液晶單元21上。且，取代台3〇 相對於輥32移動’可固定台30之位置使加壓輥32 —面沿 箭34相反方向移動，一面轉動，或者，使台30與輥32二 者沿相反方向移動。 而在如習知者未設置貫通孔22於黏著片24情形下， 如第39圖所不’於貼附黏著片24於液晶單元21之際，大 多會因黏著片24之部分彎曲等而在黏著片24與液晶單元 21之界面摻入氣泡46。相對地，於此例，即使泡摻入黏著 片24與液晶單元21之界面，亦可藉由以加壓輥32推舉黏 著片24而使氣泡自貫通孔22逸出（且，即使未加壓，亦 166 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ------------- 線 472223 A7 ________SI___ ___ 五、發明說明（州） 可在黏著片與液晶單元21重疊時，至少自貫通孔22逸出 若干氣泡）。進一步，可藉由加大壓力，壓潰細孔22 ’使 其不顯著。較佳地，孔22之體積藉由輥32所施壓力減少 50%以上。由於孔22之體積減少率若小於50%，即會在 孔22之原來直徑在30# m以上以及較大情形下’使加壓 後之孔22無法充份小而可目視辨認，故不佳。 在貼合黏著片24於液晶單元21之後，自黏著片24除 去分隔件28，接著，藉由與例如將黏著片24貼合於液晶 單元21上相同之方法（於此情形下，偏光板26係薄膜基 板）.，一面藉輥加壓，一面貼合偏光板26 (第36圖）於 黏著片24与。 第40圖顯示本實施形弋2變形例。具體而言，於僅貼 附分隔件於一面（未圖示）之黏著片24上開設細孔’將圓 柱形芯48捲成圓筒狀，使其黏著面在外側（在貼附黏著片 24於液晶面板21狀態下，分隔件位在黏著片24上面。） 並且，藉由此輥流轉於液晶單元21上，貼合黏著片24於 液晶單元21。 由於分隔件使貼附於一面，故此構造具有廢棄物少之 效果。復由於黏著片24本身成圓筒狀，故無需於貼合中另 外準備輥。進一步由於如上述實施形態，在貼合前不久之 位置（第38之位置X)之前’液晶單元21與黏著片24未 接觸’故無需藉保持構件42 (第38圖，保持黏著片24之 一端）。 以下列舉第1實施形態之具體實施例及其比較例。 167 1^尺度適用中國國家標準(0NS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱) '""" -- I I I 1— I ------- ---I 1 I I I » I I I--11_ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 _ B7___ 五、發明說明（/) (實施例） 準備顯示區域（於第36圖中係藉黏著材料18封入液 晶16之區域）爲200mmX 300mm之液晶單元以及具有與液 晶單元相同外形之雙面膠（積水化學工業（股份）公司製 )。此膠帶係以38/zm與25//m之PET製分隔件夾持厚度 25/zm之丙烯系黏著劑兩面者。使用準分子雷射於膠帶全 面，開設直徑（L1)爲30/zm，間隔（L2)爲300//m之 格子狀細孔（參照第37圖）。 其次，在剝除膠帶一方之分隔件後，配置黏著層於真 空吸附在台上之液晶單之上，使其在下，將膠帶之一邊（ 第38圖之有側端部）固定於液晶單元。接著’一面以均等 拉力拉伸膠帶之另一邊（第38圖之左側端部）’使膠帶彎 曲，自固定之一邊將輥轉動，貼合黏著片於液晶單元。將 輥壓緊黏著片前不久之位置（第38圖之位置X)之黏著片 與液晶單元所成角度保持於20°。使輥之壓力約爲2.0Χ 1〇4 N/m2。最後，在除去黏著片上側之分隔件後，一面以 輥加壓，一面貼合薄膜狀偏光板。 進行此種貼合結果，於液晶單元與黏著片之間無氣泡 殘存。又，如此製作之液晶顯示元件看不到孔目，具有良 好顯示性能。 〔實施例2〕 取代準分子雷射，使用衝孔機於與實施例相同之雙面 膠上’開設直徑（L1)爲50//m、間隔（L2)爲300/im 之格子狀細孔（參照第37圖）。如同實施例1 ’將黏著片 168 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） . ------1----- 1 I 丨 1 I 1 1 訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 B7 — --- · ..... 丨___ 丨· - ...... _ 五、發明說明（舢） 貼合於液晶單元。 此後，爲了壓潰孔而使其不明顯’一面施加約1.0X 1〇5 N/m2之壓力。一面以輥對黏著片全面加壓。進一步如 同實施例1，剝除黏著片上側之分隔件’貼合偏光板。 由於孔壓潰變小’故如此製作之液晶顯示元件無法目 視辨認孔，具有良好顯示性能。 (比較例1) 固然大致如同實施例之製作液晶顯示元件，惟進行輥 對黏著片之加壓。如此製作之液晶顯示元件可目視辨認出 孔，顯示性能不佳。 (第2實施形態） 第2實施形態之板貼合方法係沿勢著片24素面整槽以 弩β麗星孔，使氣泡自此..擅違出者。具體而言，如第41(a) 圖所示，沿既定方向，自黏著片24之一邊（圖式上側之端 部）至另一邊（圖式下側之端部），設置多數槽50。槽50 之形狀不限於第41(a)圖，如後文所述，可爲任何形狀， 蔓其爲沿槽使氣泡逸出势f片24外煙之搆造即可’例如， 可如第41(b)圖所示，形成格子狀。又，槽50之截面無需 如第41(a)、41(b)圖所示爲三角形，亦可爲長方形等。在例 如槽50之截面形狀爲三角形情形下，爲了使槽50不顯著 ，使槽50之寬度L3及深度L4 (第41⑻圖）分別在50# m 以下，較佳者爲30# m，復且，如後文所述，爲了使槽50 充份消除氣泡，至少爲5 # m以上之大小。 爲了形成槽50於黏著片24上，可在剝除至少單側之 169 度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ~ 一 -------- - - - · I I I I 1 I I 訂---------· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 ^__B7_____ 五、發明說明（々Ί) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 分隔件27 (第37圖）之黏著片24上轉動外周面設有例如 第42圖所示企望形狀之突起部52之輥54 (在如第41(b)圖 所示），形成格子狀情形下，沿互相正交方向將輥轉動2 次）。且，根據分隔件27之材質，亦可在貼附分隔件27 之黏著片24上形槽20。 第43圖顯示暫時全面黏附黏著片24於液晶單元21之 裝置之剖視圖。此貼附裝置56具有用來吸附固定液晶單元 21之下部平台58，以及平行於下部平台58，配置在下部 平台58上方，用來吸附固定黏著片24 (及分隔件28)之 上部平台60。上部平台60配置成可沿之箭頭方向（沿垂 直於下部平台58之上面之方向）移動。下部平台58如同 第38圖之台30，具有多數吸附孔62，此等吸附孔62經由 電磁閥（未圖示）連接於真空泵（未圖示）。根據此構造 ，上部平台60可藉由電磁閥之啓閉吸附、釋放黏著片24 〇 其次，主要使用第44圖說明貼附黏著片24 (進一步 貼附偏光板26)於液晶單元21之方法。首先’剝除第37 圖中設於黏著片24單面之分隔件27，藉由第42圖所方法 ，於黏著片24上形成多數槽50 (第44圖之步驟(A))。此 等槽50沿第44圖之步驟(A)之紙面表裡方向’設在黏著片 24之一邊至另一邊。並且，使用貼附裝置56 (第43圖） ，使形成槽50之面在下，吸附黏著片24於上部平台60 ’ 此後，降下上部平台60，將黏著片24暫貼附於吸附固定 在下部平台58之液晶單元21上（第44圖之步驟(B))。 170 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐〉 ， 472223 A7 B7 五、發明說明（ 接著’在使黏著片24自上部平台60分離後，自黏著片24 除去分隔件28 (第44圖之步驟(c))。其次，亦於剝除分 隔件28之黏著片24表面上形成多數槽（第44圖之步驟 (D))。此等槽66亦沿第44圖之步驟(D)之紙面表裡方向， 5曼在黏著片24之一邊至另一邊。進一步將偏光板26貼附 於黏著片24上（第44圖之步驟(E))。最後，藉由自偏光 板26上方，例如平行於槽形成方向轉動加堅輥68，使氣 準^自兰翌里成於黏著片24上面及下面之槽50、66逸出。 、、—.............. ...... 此時輥68所施壓力大小最好爲壓潰槽50、66，可使黏著 片24與液晶單元21、偏光板26密接之程度（第44圖之步 驟(F))。槽;50、56之體積以藉由輥68之壓力減少50%以 上較佳。由於槽50 ' 66之體積減少率若小於50%，即會 在槽50、.66之底部寬度在30/im以上且較大情形下，使加 壓後之槽50、66無法充份小而可目視辨認，因此不佳。 藉由如此設置槽於黏著片24兩面，不僅可於貼附黏著 ·… ，.··-' 片24於液晶單元21之步驟，亦可於貼附偏光板26、相位 差板、觸摸式面板或保護片等於黏著片24上之步驟中，進 行無氣泡之貼合。 且在僅設置槽50於單面情形下，可在貼合偏光板26 之前藉輥施加壓力。 以下列舉第2實施形態之具體實施例。 (實施例3) 如同實施例1，剝除雙面膠之一面之分隔件，沿互相 垂直方向，使第42圖所示附有突起之輥於台上滾轉二次， 171 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規袼（21〇 X 297公髮） --------------------訂--------^線- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 ^___B7_____ 五、發明說明（Μ) 形成格子狀之槽。格子狀之槽作成寬度（L3)爲l〇Vm， 深度（L4)爲5/zm，格子間隔（L5)爲300//m (參照第 41(c)圖）。如同實施例1，使附有槽之面在下，將膠帶暫 時貼附於液晶單元上。於此狀態下，剝除黏著片上側之分 隔件，亦使用附有突起之輥於此上側之黏著片面，成格子 狀，形成與下側黏著片面之槽相同尺寸之槽。此後，如同 實施例1，將偏光板一次貼附於黏著片上。最後，一面施 加約100 X 105 N/m2之壓力，一面藉由慢慢轉動輥於偏光 板上，壓潰黏著片之槽，使黏著片與液晶單元以及偏光板 密接。 如此製/乍之液η%顯示元件沒有氣泡，亦無法目視見到 槽，具有良好顯示性能。 以上固然對本發明詳加說明和圖示，惟，顯然其僅爲 述而例舉，不得視爲限制’本發明精神及範疇僅由後附申 請專利範圍予以界定。 元件符號說明 10 液晶顯示元件 12 下側基板 14 上側基板 16 液晶 18 黏著材料 20 分隔件 21 液晶單元 172 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 x 297公釐） --------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 472223 A7 B7 五、發明說明（、Ί°) 22 貫通孔 24 黏著片 26 偏光板 27，28 分隔件 29，56 貼附裝置 30 台 32 加壓輕 36 吸附孔 38 電磁閥 40 真空泵 42 , 保持構件 50，66 槽 58 下部平台 60 上部平台 62，64 吸附孔 68 輥 100 第1平台 101 第1吸附台 101a ， 201a ，424a 吸氣孔 111 ， 211 ， 211， ， 425 ， 排氣室 112 ， 212 ， 212, ， 426 ， 撓性管 530 ， 620 ， 720 113 ， 213 ， 213, ， 427 排氣裝置 200 第2平台 173 --------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 五、發明說明（…) 200a’ 面板元件保持面 201 第2吸附台 201a ， 201b ， 201a’ 吸氣孔 220 ， 220’ 彈性墊 220a ， 220a’ 凸曲面 220b， ， 220b， 吸氣用細孔 300 平台驅動裝置 310 第1平台驅動部 310， 平台支持軸 311 導軌 311a . ./ 齒條 313 小齒輪 210, ， 320 第2平台驅動部 320’ 旋轉驅動部 321 ， 421 第2平台支持臂 321 活塞汽缸裝置 322 空氣迴路 321a 缸筒部 321b 活塞桿 322 旋轉驅動部 322a 軸 400 ， 400’ ， 500 對準裝置 410 ， 510 攝影機 430 ， 430, ， 530 控制部 174 ---------------------訂---------線， (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 _B7 五、發明說明（〇V) 420 X-Y- 0驅動裝置 422 Χ-Υ-0驅動部 423 面板元件保持裝置 424 吸附台 500 平台間排氣裝置 510 環構件 520 空氣吸入用管 540 真空泵 600 中央吸氣孔用排氣裝置 600， 壓輥 600a，； 面板元件壓緊周面 610 壓緊構件 630 中央吸氣孔用排氣室 640 ， 740 啓閉電磁閥 650 壓力感測器 700 保持夾 710 排氣部 730 外側吸氣孔用排氣室 740 啓閉閥 800 保持夾 900 間隙形成裝置 910 面板元件支持構件 920 夾 930 金屬線導引滑車 175 ----------------- 1 I I 訂·-------- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 472223 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（响） 940 絞盤 950 金屬線 1000 暫時固定裝置 1100 鑽孔裝置 1110 衝孔機 1200 減壓室 1300 排氣裝置 176 --------------------訂---------I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐）(1) Position the first panel element Cl (R panel element) on the first platform 100, the surface to be bonded, that is, the light-absorbing layer BK is provided with the opposite side facing upward, and held by the panel element The device 110 adsorbs the panel element C1 on the adsorption table 101 of the platform 100. Similarly, the second panel element C2 (G 128 paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)) --- 1 ---------- installation ---- ---Order --------- J (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 _____J7___ V. Description of the invention (4). Panel element) Positioned on the second platform 200,俾 The surface to be attached faces upward, and the end of the second panel element is exposed from the second platform. The panel element holding device 210 is used to adsorb the panel element C2 on the adsorption table 2 (H. '(2) of the platform 200. By the second driving device 310, the first platform 100 that adsorbs the first panel element C1 is moved to a predetermined end of the panel element C1 to a position below the adhesive material disposing device 500, that is, the adhesive material disposing position Q2, which is configured by the adhesive material. The lifting driving part 520 of the device 500 lowers the adhesive material supply part 510 to the top of the panel element C1, that is, the adhesive material supply position p3. Furthermore, a light-curable adhesive material N is applied to a predetermined end of the panel element ci, and the mutual panel element The adhesive material N is arranged in the width direction of C1 or in a line shape. (3) The adhesive is raised by the lifting driving part 520 With the material supply unit 51, the supply unit 510: the open position P3 is retracted to the retracted position p4, and the first platform 1⑻ that attracts the first panel element C1 is moved to the predetermined end of the panel element C1 by the second driving device 310. The position below the pressing member 6 〇, that is, the temporary bonding position of the panel element. (4) The second platform 200 of the second panel element C2 is adsorbed by rotating the driving portion 322 of the first driving device 320 in the direction A, Move it to the predetermined end portions of the two panel 7C pieces Cl, C2 to reach the position below the pressing member 61 °, so that one panel element Cl, C2 faces, and at the same time, overlap the predetermined end portions of the two panel elements C1, C2. (5) The pressing member 610 is lowered to the pressing position P1 by the lifting driving unit 62 of the pressing holding device 600, and a part of the panel member 610 of the pressing member 61 is pressed to press the two panel members Cl, C2. The overlapping ends are tightly held to 129 1 scales ^ China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 > < 297 male ^ 7 ~~ ------- ------------ equipment ---- I --- order --------- line * (please (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 I ______—_ B7_ _ 5. Description of the invention) on the first platform. (6) Thereafter, the first platform 100 is moved relative to the second platform 200 and the pressing member 610 by the second driving device 310, that is, in a state where the third and second panel elements Cl and C2 are sandwiched. Next, the pressing surface 6l〇a of the pressing member 610 is relative to the first. 1Platform 100 is driven to rotate, while maintaining the state of pressing the panel element with the pressing member 610, and pulling out the second panel element C2 from the second platform 200 while being pressed by the pressing member 610, the adhesive material N On the first platform 700, the two panel elements C1 and C2 are temporarily bonded in order. At this time, the adhesive material N is rolled onto the two panel elements Cl and C2 by the pressing member 610. At this time, the 'adhesive material N' is rolled between the two panel elements C2 and C2 by the pressing member 610. If the adhesive material N is rolled in this way, it is difficult for outside air to enter between the two panel elements Cl and C2. Thus, the temporary bonding step is smoothly performed. (7) After the pressing member 610 is relatively moved to the end of the two panel elements Cl, C2, the pressing member 610 is raised to the retreat position P2 by the lifting driving part 620. (8) In this way, the two panel elements Cl, C2 As soon as the bonding is completed, the suction action of the panel element holding device 210 on the first platform 200 is cancelled. The first driving device 320 is used to rotate the platform 200 in the B direction to return the platform 200 to the original position. At the same time, the second driving device 310 is used. The first platform 100 that attracts the first and second panel elements cn and C2 that are temporarily attached to each other is moved below the alignment device 400, that is, the alignment position Q1. (9) The X-Υ-0 driving device 420 under the lifting driving device 440 is used to perform the alignment position of the two panel elements Cl and C2. This alignment is performed as before. That is, by using X-Υ-0 drive device 420 under 130 {Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page> «fi I flu nn Order --------- line 丨 This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 _______ ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (, /) _ lowered, but not lifted, but keep the panel element C2 on the panel element C1 to the alignment device The front end portion 421a of 400. In this state, while looking at the alignment marks ml and m2 of the two panel elements Cl and C2 with the CCD camera 410, the second panel element C2 is moved to the first panel element C1 by the XY-0 driving device 420 The alignment marks ml and m2 of the two panel elements Cl and C2 are aligned. This alignment operation is performed by using the marker information detected by the camera 410 as position information and image processing. Based on the position information, the X-Y-0 driving device 420 is automatically controlled to perform. (10) After the alignment process is completed, the panel element holding arm 421 of the X · Υ-β drive 420 is released from holding the panel element C2, and the X-Υ-θ drive 420 is raised. (11) Secondly, the second driving device 310 is used to move the first and second panel elements, components C1 and C2 of the suction and alignment position to the first platform 100 below the formal bonding device 700, that is, the panel components are formally attached. At the bonding position Q4, the lamp 710 of the formal bonding device 700 irradiates the adhesive material N between the two panel elements Cl and C2 with the light L, so that the adhesive material N is hardened and formally bonded. Thereby, the R panel element and the G panel element are bonded together. In addition, when the bonding of the two panel components is completed, the light irradiation of the formal bonding device 700 is stopped, and the first stage 100 is maintained at the bonding of the panel components and returns to the initial position Q1. In the temporary bonding step of the first and second panel elements Cl, C2 of the method for manufacturing a display panel by using a panel device shown in No. 25, the first and second panel elements Cl, C2 are kept in a state where the ends overlap. Side, and from the side of the end to be held, in order to apply a clamping force, thereby sequentially and temporarily fit two 131 $ Zhang scales applicable ϋ National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 male " " ------------ install ---- ill — order ---------. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 -------- B7__ Five 'invention description (Panel elements Cl, C2, so one side is separated from the two panel elements Cl, C2 At the same time, the two surfaces of the two panel elements Cl and C2 are temporarily adhered, so that the two panel elements C1 and C2 are in close contact, and at the same time, the occurrence of wrinkles and the like is suppressed. This is due to the fact that the adhesive material N between the two panel elements Cl and C2 is not hardened. In other words, when the two panel elements Cl and C2 are in a relatively separated state, the aforementioned alignment steps of the two panel elements Cl and C2 are performed, and thereafter, the adhesive material N between the two panel elements Cl and C2 is hardened and formally pasted. The two panel elements Cl and C2 are combined, so in the state of high-precision alignment, the adjacent panel elements are finally bonded. Secondly, the panel element that is formally bonded to the R panel element and the G panel element is regarded as the first panel element C1, At the same time, the next panel component B to be bonded is regarded as the second panel component C2), and the foregoing steps (1) to (11) are substantially repeated, and the next panel component B is bonded to the panel component already bonded. In order to obtain a laminated display panel Λ of R panel elements, G panel elements, and B panel elements, and in order to fully degas from the two panel elements Cl ′ C2, a decompression chamber may be provided, which is used at least as much as the first and During the temporary bonding of the second panel elements Cl and C2, the gas around the two panel elements Cl and C2 is set to a predetermined decompressed gas. Fig. 29 shows a schematic structure of a display panel manufacturing apparatus in which the display panel manufacturing apparatus shown in Fig. 25 is provided with a decompression chamber 800 and an exhaust apparatus 900 connected thereto. The decompression chamber 800 is airtight and can surround the first and second platforms 100, 200, and the like. In addition, the aforementioned exhaust devices 113, 213 and the like are provided in the 132 of the decompression chamber 800. — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 B7 ---- * --------- Jade, invention description (. Outside. Here, the exhaust device 900 includes a rotary pump and can decompress the exhaust in the decompression chamber 800. The decompression chamber 800 is provided with an airtight door for the panel element to enter and exit, and is omitted in the figure. In the case of using such a decompression chamber 800, the pressure reduction chamber 800 is reduced to a predetermined pressure at the latest after the adhesive material coating step ⑵ shown in FIG. 26 and before the formal bonding step (11). . The pressure in the decompression chamber 800 at this time is not limited to this, but it is, for example, 13Pa ~ 40Pa (approximately 1 Torr ~ 0. 3 Torr) degree. (E) Method and device for manufacturing display panel related to FIGS. 30 to 35 The method and device for manufacturing display panel related to FIGS. 30 to 35 are based on 1 or 2 of the method and device for manufacturing display panel . 〇 (Display panel manufacturing method) A method for manufacturing a display panel, which is a layered panel element used to form a display panel for a display image. The manufacture of a display panel includes the following steps: placing an adhesive material on the first and second panel elements. A step of attaching at least one side of the surfaces to each other; a step of aligning the first and second panel elements with each other and arranging them to face each other; a first crimping step in a state of sandwiching the aforementioned adhesive material , According to the predetermined first condition 'make the first and second panel elements in mutually aligned positions crimp to each other; and the second crimping step', which is different from the first 丄 133 after the first crimping step ----- — — — —--- 'packing * I 1 III — I ----- IIIII (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) (Mm) 472223 A7 ___B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (d). The predetermined second condition is a condition in which the first and second panel elements are pressure-bonded to each other. The following manufacturing method can be cited as a representative example of this display panel manufacturing method. That is, a manufacturing method of a display panel, which is a laminated layer used to form a panel element of a display panel, The manufacture of a display panel includes the following steps: the steps of maintaining the first panel element on the first platform; the steps of maintaining the second panel element on the second platform; the configuration of the first and second panels maintained on the first and second platforms A step of facing the surfaces to be bonded to each other; a step of aligning the first and second panel components with each other; a step of setting an adhesive material on at least one side of the first and second panel components to be bonded to each other; In the first crimping step, the first and second panel elements of the first and second platforms are sandwiched between the first and second panel elements while being held in the first and second platforms in a state in which the aforementioned adhesive material is sandwiched and according to a predetermined first condition. And crimping with the second platform; and a second crimping step, after the first crimping step, in a state of sandwiching the aforementioned adhesive material, according to a predetermined second condition different from the first condition, the first The two panel elements are sandwiched between the first and second platforms and are crimped to each other. Regardless of the manufacturing method, the adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the first and second panel components to be attached to each other to secure the double-sided adhesive or adhesive sheet (the sheet may be in the form of a tape). The step of removing the protective sheet and exposing the adhesive material is performed by hand to apply the adhesive material to the panel element surface by the adhesive material coating device. Adhesive material is set in such a way that it will not make 134 copies of the paper size applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ------------ clothing ------- -Order --------- Line 丨 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 (--——_ B7___) V. Description of the invention (Any way to hinder. Adhesive material setting steps It is implemented before the first crimping step. If it is performed before the first crimping step, it can be carried out at any stage without causing obstacles. The first crimping step is provided with an adhesive material, and the two panel components are aligned with each other, facing each other.实施 Implemented after the mutually-adhering surfaces face each other. Regardless of the manufacturing method, the first and second panel elements are aligned with each other by various methods. For example, the substrate and panel alignment, which are well-known by themselves, are used. Method to proceed. The method can reveal the following method as an example. (1) An alignment method, in which a pre-alignment mark is set on each panel element, one panel element of the first and second panel elements is fixed in a predetermined position, and the other panel element is superposed on the panel element, and is visually observed on one side Or observe the alignment mark of the two panel elements with a camera, and move the other panel element by hand to make the alignment marks of the two panel elements consistent. In the case of adopting this alignment method, when the method of separately holding the panel element on the aforementioned first and second platforms is adopted, for example, a panel element can be held on any platform. , Overlay another panel element on this panel element, observe the alignment marks of the two panel elements visually or with a camera, and move the other panel element by hand to make the alignment marks of the two panel elements consistent. , Keep the other panel element on another platform. (2) An alignment method, in which a pre-alignment mark is set on each panel element, one panel element of the first and second panel elements is fixed in a predetermined position, and the other panel element is arranged on or above, While observing the alignment marks of the two panel elements with a camera, move the other 135 by the X-Υ-θ drive device. ^ The paper size applies the Chinese national standard ((: ^) Α4 size (210 χ 297 public ^ " ^ '- ----------- ^ -------- Order --------- Line · (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___B7______ V. Invention description (>. One panel element 'aligns the alignment marks of the two panel elements. In the case of using this alignment method, when the method of holding the panel element on the first and second platforms separately is adopted, for example, one panel element can be held on any platform, and another panel element can be arranged on the panel element, one side Observe the quasi-marks of the two panel elements by the camera, and move the other panel element by the X-Υ-0 driving device to make the alignment marks of the two panel elements consistent. The platform used to hold the other panel element may include an X-Υ-Θ drive. At this time, after holding the other panel element on the platform, drive along X-Y-0 to align the position of the panel element. When the platform for holding the other panel element does not include the X-Χ-0 driving device, after the aligned another panel element is placed on the aforementioned one panel element, the mounted panel element Corresponding platform. In addition, the alignment mark may be a mark that emits light by being energized, such as a liquid crystal mark or an electric field light emitting mark. The alignment of the X-Υ-0 driving device can be performed manually by operating the X-Υ-0 driving device, but it can also be controlled automatically by '-based on the marker information (such as its position information, etc.) detected by the camera. Θ drives the device. In the latter case, an image processing method for the alignment position of the substrate, panel, etc. can be used. Moreover, it goes without saying that the X-Υ-0 driving device can move the object in the direction X and the direction Y perpendicular to it, and meanwhile A device that rotates perpendicular to the axis of the XY plane. In any of the foregoing display panel manufacturing methods, in the first crimping step, according to a predetermined first condition, in a state in which the aforementioned adhesive material is sandwiched, the 1 136th paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 Public Love 1 " I-- --------Equipment · --- II-I Order IIII 1 II-* (Please read the > 1 notice on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ^ __ B7______ 5. Description of the invention (0 ^). It is crimped to the second panel element. Next, in the second crimping step, a display panel in which the first and second panel elements are crimped and laminated with each other is obtained according to a predetermined second condition. When holding the first and second panel components on the first and second platforms and bonding the two panel components, sandwich the two panel components with the two platforms and crimp them to each other. Also, there are three or more panel components to be bonded. At this time, the bonded panel element obtained by the second crimping step is regarded as the first panel element, and the next panel element to be bonded is regarded as the second panel element, and the foregoing steps are substantially repeated. Thereby, one panel element is attached to the already pasted panel element each time. The first condition of the aforementioned first crimping step and the second condition of the second crimping step are the pressure applied when the two panel components are crimped to each other, the bonding speed, and the gas pressure around the two panel components. The temperature around the two panel components Or one or two or more of the heating temperature of the panel element and the wavelength of the light irradiated to the panel element. When comparing these conditions as a whole, the first condition of the first crimping step is different from the second condition of the second step. The first condition and the second condition can be set according to the type of the adhesive material to be used, the required bonding state of the panel elements (such as a state in which air is suppressed from being present between adjacent panel elements), and the like. From the viewpoint of conditions that have a large influence on the bonding state of panel components, the following cases can be taken as a representative example. That is, in the first condition of the aforementioned first crimping step, the two panel elements each have 137 i sheets, and the applicable national standard (CNS) A4 specification (297 x 297) is-------- ----- Hidden -------- Order --------- Line I (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _B7_____ V. Description of the invention (〆) Zu The pressure condition during crimping is to use a predetermined first pressure as the M force, and implement the first crimping step. The second condition of the aforementioned second crimping step includes the pressure when the two panel elements are crimped to each other. As a condition, a second pressing force greater than the aforementioned first pressing force (a representative is a certain second pressing force) is used as the pressing force, and the second crimping step is performed. If such a first pressure is applied, a second pressure that is larger than the second pressure can prevent the two panel elements from being offset from each other, and finally align the two panel elements, so that the two panel elements can be bonded with high accuracy. It can be exemplified that the minimum pressing force required for the two panel elements to be partially or partially overlapped (may only be close to the limit point or the line), approximately fully or entirely overlapped, or a number of the pressing forces may be used as the first of the first crimping step. In the case of the pressing force, a larger certain pressing force required for the last full and formal bonding of the two panel components is used as the second pressing force in the second pressing step. In this case, the two panel components can be firmly attached at the end. The first pressure can be gradually increased. The second pressurization may be increased at a predetermined time. The first condition and the second condition may also be mentioned as examples. That is, it is the first condition of the aforementioned first crimping step, which includes the atmospheric pressure conditions around the two panel elements. The predetermined first gas pressure is used as the gas pressure, the first crimping step is performed, and the second condition of the aforementioned second crimping step is implemented. In the case where the pressure condition of the gas surrounding the two-panel element is included, a predetermined second gas pressure is used as the gas pressure, and the second crimping step is performed. In this case, 13Pa (approximately O. lTorr ~ 0. 3T〇rr) pressure as at least one of the aforementioned first gas pressure and second gas pressure 138 ^, paper Lai Jiabiao ijT (〇 ^ S) A4 secret (210 X 297 ~ ¥ centimeter) ^ ------- -Order --------- line | (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___B7____ 5. Description of the invention) Gas pressure. In this way, by setting at least one of the first gas pressure and the second gas pressure to a lower pressure than the atmospheric pressure, it is possible to degas from between the two panel elements, thereby closely bonding the two panel elements. Also, in the presence of air, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wrinkles in the panel element. In the first crimping step, when the two panel components are to be fully or substantially fully contacted with each other, the first crimping step and the second gas in the second crimping step can be performed at a first gas pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure. Force is atmospheric pressure. Of course, the second gas pressure may be set to a low pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure. In this case, the second gas pressure may be an air pressure equal to the first gas pressure. In addition, in the first crimping step, when only a part of the two panel elements are to be in contact with each other, the first crimping step can be performed under the atmospheric pressure of the gas pressure, and the second gas pressure is lower than the atmospheric pressure. Perform the second crimping step. Of course, the first crimping step may be performed at a first gas pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure. At this time, the 1 'to 2 gas pressures may be equal. Although the first and second gas pressures are related, when the panel components are held on the first and second platforms and the two panel components are bonded, at least one of the first crimping step and the second crimping step In the present invention, an elastically deformable ring member for airtight sealing can be used to surround the first and second panel elements, and at the same time, the ring member is sandwiched between the first and second platforms to form an airtight chamber around the panel element. By exhausting from the airtight chamber, a set gas pressure is obtained. In addition, in order to degas from the two panel components, the two panel components are bonded together. 139 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 cm) (Centimeter) I n I— H: i H HI n I 1 n n. . n n n l n If- ^ OJ1 n n i n m--I I (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _B7____ V. Description of the invention (⑺). In the aforementioned first crimping step, the first and second panel elements are mutually crimped by initially bringing the two panel element portions (dot or line-shaped, etc.) into contact with each other, and the mutually crimped portions are gradually enlarged from the first mutually contacting portion. Come on. To further give a specific example, the first and second panel elements in the first crimping step are mutually pressure-bonded, for example, by initially bringing the two panel elements into contact with each other at their central portions, the initial contact portions gradually (for example, toward the periphery). Or, it can be carried out by enlarging the mutual crimping portion toward the two end portions of the panel element. Alternatively, it may be performed, for example, by initially bringing the two panel elements into contact with each other at either end, and gradually expanding the mutually crimped portion from the initial crimped portion (e.g., the end facing the opposite side). In the case where the two panel elements are thus crimped in the first crimping step, the first and second panel elements can be fully crimped to each other in the aforementioned second crimping step. Hold the panel components on the first and second platforms, and when bonding the two panel components, in order to degas from the two panel components, the two panel components are bonded. At least one of the first and second platforms is provided with a panel. The elastic pad of the component holding surface, and at the same time, the panel component holding surface is a platform with a convex curved surface of a predetermined curvature. In the first crimping step, the first and the first panel components can be crimped to each other by making the first and second platforms opposite to each other. To approach, the two panel element parts are initially connected to each other by the convex curved surface of the elastic pad, and then the two platforms are brought close to each other, while the elastic pad is elastically deformed, and the pressure-contacted portion is gradually enlarged from the initial contact portion. get on. Further specific examples are given, using the convex surface of the elastic pad as the convex surface raised at the central portion, such as spherical surface, approximately spherical surface, and half of a cylindrical cylinder. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---- ---- II —-- ^ * 111 — 11— Order---------, (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___B7____ 5 2. Description of the invention (β) Peripheral curved surface. In the first crimping step, the first and second panel components are crimped to each other, and the two panel components can be brought into contact with each other at a point or line at the center of the panel. This initial contacting portion is gradually expanded (for example, toward the periphery or toward the two end portions of the panel element) by expanding the mutual crimping portion. Alternatively, for example, the convex curved surface of the elastic pad may be made into a convex surface that is high at one end and gradually lowered from the end to the other end, and the two panel elements may be brought into contact with each other at one end or a line shape, etc. The mutually contacting portion gradually expands the mutual crimping portion toward the other end to perform the ^ In the case where the two panel components are crimped in the first crimping step, it can also be deformed by the elasticity of the elastic pad in the second crimping step. The first and second panel elements are fully crimped to each other. In order not to damage the panel components, the two panel components are further crimped to each other without being displaced, and the two panel components are smoothly degassed, which does not prevent the crimping of the two components for formal bonding. An elastic pad can be recommended. It is composed of an elastic body with an elastic constant of 60kgf / cm2 ~ 200kgf / cm2, and a convex curved surface with a spherical surface and a semi-circular surface with an outer peripheral surface. If one end is high, the convex curved surface gradually decreases from the end to the other For smooth curved surfaces, it is recommended that the convex surface has a radius of curvature of about 2000mm to 5000mm. In any case, when the first crimping step in which the mutual crimping portion is gradually expanded in this way is adopted, the aforementioned first gas pressure and second gas force need not be lower than the atmospheric pressure. However, at least one of the first gas pressure and the second gas pressure may be lower than the atmospheric pressure according to the type of the adhesive material and the required bonding state. And, of course, it is possible to make the two panel components fully interact with each other at the stage of the first crimping step. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 2 mm) ----------- -Install -------- Order -------- Line 丨 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 --- B7 -------- V. Description of the invention (\ ^) phase crimping, but as mentioned above, the two panel components may not be fully crimped to each other in the first crimping step. In any case, in the case where the first and second panel elements are held on the first and second platforms, the holding of the panel elements by the platform is not limited to this, but the holding of the panel elements through the suction holes provided in the platform may be used. Situation as a representative example. The suction hole is provided at least on the elastic pad of the platform provided with the aforementioned elastic pad. As far as this elastic pad is concerned, it can be revealed that there are pores for suction for holding the panel element on the convex curved surface by vacuuming, and the pores are closed by the elastic deformation of the elastic pad in the aforementioned crimping step as an example. . This elastic pad can release the part of the panel element that is held at the elastic potential against the other panel element when the two panel elements are crimped to each other in the crimping step, so that the two panel elements can be smoothly adhered. In any case, the aforementioned first crimping step may be a step of temporarily bonding the first and second panel components by the aforementioned adhesive material, and the aforementioned two crimping step may be the formal and firm bonding of the first and second panels by the aforementioned adhesive material Component steps. In this monk shape, the first crimping step may be crimping the first and second panel elements at mutually aligned positions while sandwiching the aforementioned adhesive material, and temporarily bonding the first crimping step of the two panel elements. The second step may be a second crimping step in which the first and second panel elements are formally bonded to each other after the first crimping step. In addition, the second condition in the second crimping step may include, for example, when using a photo-curable adhesive material as the adhesive material, irradiating the hardened light to 142 -------------- equipment --------- Order --------- Line 丨 (Please read the notes on the back of the praise first and then fill out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 (Mm) 472223 A7 ____B7 _ ^ _ 5. Description of the invention (〆) • The conditions of the adhesive material, when using a thermo-hard specific adhesive material as the adhesive material, may include the condition of heating the adhesive material to a predetermined temperature. (Display Panel Manufacturing Device) A display panel manufacturing device that stacks panel elements of a display panel used to display an image, and those who manufacture the display panel include: a first platform for holding a panel element; a second platform for To hold another panel element; and a platform driving device for making the first and second platforms face each other and relatively close to each other; at least one of the first and second platforms is provided with a panel element holding surface At the same time, the holding surface of the panel element is a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature. T When the aforementioned platform driving device is relatively close to the first and second platforms, the panel element held on the first platform and the panel held on the second platform The components are crimped to each other under the first pressure. It is further crimped at a second-constant pressure greater than the first pressure. The first and second platforms include a device for holding a panel element. This holding device is not limited to this, but for example, a platform is provided, which is connected to the exhaust device and used to suck the suction hole of the panel component as an example. The suction hole is at least provided on the elastic pad of the platform provided with the elastic pad. As for this elastic pad, an example of having a suction hole for holding the panel element on the convex curved surface by vacuuming can be disclosed, and the hole is closed by the elastic deformation of the elastic pad. This elastic pad can release the panel components held on the elastic pad to another 143 when the two panel components are crimped to each other in the crimping step. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm>)- ---------- Install · ------- Order --------- Line * (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___B7______ V. Invention Explanation () The panel components are crimped so that the panel components can be smoothly bonded. According to this display panel manufacturing device, one of the panel components to be bonded to each other is maintained on the first platform, and the other panel component is maintained on the second platform. Then, the platform driving device is used to make the first and second platforms face each other to hold the panel elements. In other words, the surfaces of the panel elements held on these platforms are to face each other and be relatively close to each other. The two panel components are bonded together. The bonding of this panel component is performed using an adhesive material. As described in the manufacturing method of the display panel, the adhesive material is provided on at least one side of the two panel components to be bonded to each other before bonding. The device of the present invention may be provided with an adhesive material Coating device 7. Before the two panel elements are bonded, the two panel elements are aligned with each other. This alignment can be performed as described in the manufacturing method of the display panel described above. The device of the present invention may include a mutual alignment device for panel elements. For example, a device that aligns the two panel elements to be bonded to each other on the first or second platform. Such a device can be disclosed as an example. ⑴ An alignment device including a camera whose observation is formed in advance on each panel Component alignment mark, and X-Χ-0 drive device, which moves another panel component on or above one of the panel components held on one of the first and second platforms, and alignment mark of the second panel component Consistent, aligned position; ⑵ An alignment device with a camera to observe the alignment marks formed on each panel element in advance; χ-Υ-0 drive device, which is held on any of the first and second platforms On or above one of the panel elements, moving the other panel element; and a control unit, which is based on the alignment from the aforementioned camera 144 -------------------- Order- -------- Line · (Please read first Please fill in this page before filling in this page.) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x29? Mm) 472223 A7 ____B7__ 5. Description of the invention (, π) Marking information (such as its location information). Control χ- The operation of the γ-θ device is consistent with the alignment marks of the two panel elements and the alignment position. As far as this control section is concerned, an alignment method using image processing for the alignment position of the substrate, panel, etc. can be revealed as an example. The bonding of the panel components is performed in the same way. That is, using the convex curved surface of the aforementioned elastic pad, the two panel elements are initially brought into contact with each other in a point shape, a line shape, etc., and from the initial contact portions, the pressure contact is gradually enlarged and mutually pressed. section. In this way, in order to prevent the positional displacement of the two panel elements while degassing between the two panel elements, and in order to prevent the panel elements from wrinkling, the pressure-bonding portion is enlarged to make the two panel elements (may be Only close to the limit point or line), and generally fit or temporarily fit. When the second platform is relatively close by the platform driving device, the crimping is performed under the first pressure of the driving device. This first pressing force can be gradually increased, and then a certain second pressing force greater than the first pressing force is further applied, so that the two panel components are fully crimped to each other, and the two panel components are firmly and formally bonded. The second pressure can be applied at a predetermined time. Therefore, a display panel can be obtained. In addition, when there are three or more panel components to be bonded, the above-mentioned bonded panel component may be used as one of the two panel components to be bonded to each other. As for the convex curved surface of the elastic pad provided on at least one of the first and second platforms, a convex curved surface having a high central portion, such as a spherical surface, a substantially spherical surface, and a peripheral surface of a semi-circular cylinder, as examples, can be revealed. In the case of using such a convex curved surface, the two panel components under pressure under the first pressure can be used to contact each other at the center or dot or line of the two panel components in the first application. Since 145 ------ -------------- Order --------- line. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 ____B7 V. Description of the invention (\ 々) The initial contact with each other gradually ( For example, toward the periphery or toward the panel element: end 郃), the mutual crimping portion is enlarged. Alternatively, for example, the convex curved surface of the elastic pad may be made; 邰 A, a convex curved surface that gradually decreases from the end to the other end. Here 彳 Λ P | ,, the two panel components are crimped to each other under the initial pressure under the pressure of the crane i. liil board 〃: (t with its one end in a line or other contact with each other, since the beginning //: 丨 11} "contact points gradually expand each other's crimping part toward the other end. The second panel under a certain second pressure The element joint makes the two panel components fully support each other by the elastic deformation of the elastic pad. In order to prevent the panel elements from being damaged, ivIL further makes the two panel elements not crimp to each other and is crimped to each other. The components are smoothly degassed without interfering with each other, which is intended to be formally attached to each other. It is recommended that the elastic pad be composed of an elastic constant of 60 kgf / cm 2 to 200 kgf / cm. When the convex surface of the elastic pad is made into a spherical surface, such as a semi-circular curved surface, such as a curved surface, such as when the height of one end is 'smooth from a convex surface that gradually decreases from the end to the other end', the radius of curvature of the convex surface is recommended. 2,000 to 5000 legs. Although the two panel components are fully crimped in the first crimping step, the two panel components are not necessarily crimped to each other in the first crimping step. An exhaust device for exhausting and decompressing from the first and second platforms can be provided. When the two panel elements are attached, it is more reliable to degas from the two panel elements. For the simplicity of this exhaust device, an exhaust device containing an elastically deformable ring member for hermetic sealing can be revealed as an example. This ring member applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification through 146 paper standards ( 210 X 297 public love) · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Assemble · --------- Order · --------- line 472223 A7 ______B7___ 5. Description of the invention (please Read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) The first and second platforms are close to each other, sandwiched between the two platforms, and surround the panel elements between the two platforms with the two platforms to form the gas used for the aforementioned exhaust and pressure reduction Back room. The [E] method and mounting described above can be applied to the manufacture of various display panels, but specific examples of the manufacturing method and manufacturing apparatus of the liquid crystal display panel will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel shown in FIG. 1. FIG. This panel manufacturing apparatus is provided with a first stage 100 for holding one panel element cl, a second stage 200 for holding another panel element c2, and the first and second f stage 100'200 for securing the panel elements. Face to face, relatively close to the deviating platform driving device 300. In this panel manufacturing apparatus, the second stage 200 is provided with an elastic pad of the panel element holding surface 22a, and the panel element holding surface 220a is a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature, referring to FIGS. 31 and 32. As described later, when the first and second platforms 100 and 200 face each other and are relatively close to each other, the platform driving device 300 causes the panel element cl held on the first platform 100 and the panel element C2 held on the second platform 200. They are crimped to each other under a first applied pressure, and further crimped under a second applied pressure that is larger than the first applied pressure, thereby laminating panel elements cl and c2 to manufacture a display panel. The first and second platforms 100 and 200 include panel element holding devices 11 and 210 for holding the first and second adsorption tables 101 and 102 and the panel elements, respectively. The 1st and 2nd adsorption tables 10ΐ and 2〇ι are made of rigid materials, respectively. 147 The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21 × X 297 mm) -------- -472223 A7 ___B7___________ 5. Description of the invention (\ "), in the area where the panel elements cl, c2 are held, at predetermined intervals, a plurality of suction holes 10a, 201a for adsorbing the panel elements are provided. Panel elements In addition to the suction holes 101a and 201a, the holding devices 110 and 210 include the exhaust chambers 111 and 211, the flexible pipes 112 and 212, and the exhaust devices 113 and 213 of the adsorption table, and the exhaust devices 112 and 213, respectively. It is connected to one end of the tubes 112 and 212, and the other end of the tubes 112 and 212 is connected to the exhaust chambers 111 and 211. The exhaust chambers 111 and 211 communicate with the suction holes 101a and 201a of the adsorption tables 101 and 201, respectively. With the movement of the exhaust devices 113 and 313, air is exhausted from the suction holes 101a and 201a through the exhaust 111, 211, and the pipes 112 and 212. As mentioned above, the second platform 200 is provided with a panel element protection surface 220a. Elastic pad 220. The elastic pad 220 is disposed on the opposite side of the exhaust chamber 211 provided with the second adsorption table 201 Here, the elastic pad 220 is composed of a continuous foamable elastic rubber foam, and has a suction hole 220b for holding the panel element c2 on the convex curved surface 220a by vacuuming. This hole 220b is formed by The elastic compression and deformation of the elastic pad 220 is closed. Here, the elastic pad 220 is composed of a continuous foamable elastic rubber foam, but it can also be a solid body with a large number of air holes. The surface 220a is a convex curved surface with a predetermined curvature rising from the center (here, a convex curved surface having a curvature radius of about 4000 brain to 5000 mm). The panel element c2 can be held along the curved surface. For example, a spherical surface, a substantially spherical surface, and a semi-circular circle can be used. The outer peripheral surface of the tube is a convex curved surface 220a, here, it is a spherical surface. By using an upward convex curved surface, the two panel elements cl, c2 of 148 under the first pressure are applied. This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4. Specifications (210x 297 mm). ----------------------- Order --------- Line- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ___B7_____ V. Description of the invention (, 〇 >) The two panel elements cl, c2 are initially brought into contact with each other at their central portions, and the mutually crimped portions are gradually enlarged toward the periphery from the initial contact portions. This elastic pad 220 is used when the two panel elements cl / C2 are crimped to each other in the crimping step. By compressing the pad, the pores for inhalation are closed, thereby releasing the portion of the panel element c2 held on the elastic pad 220 from the pressure contact with another panel element cl, so that the panel elements cl and c2 can be smoothly adhered. And, in order not to hurt the panel components, and further to make the two panel components not crimped to each other so as to be crimped to each other, the panel components cl and c2 are smoothly degassed. Nor is it intended to be crimped to each other for formal bonding. Here, the elastic pad 220 is composed of an elastic body having an elastic constant of 70 kgf cm 2 to 20 kgf cm 2. The platform driving device 300 includes a drive unit for driving the first platform 100, Two platforms 200 are provided to drive the first platform driving unit 310 of the first platform 100 and the second platform driving unit 320 to drive the second platform 200. The first platform driving unit 310 is not limited to this, but the pinion 313 provided on the first platform 100 meshes with the rack 311a provided along the guide rail 311, and the motor 312 mounted on the first platform 100 rotates the small gear back and forth. Gear 313. The first platform 100 is moved along the guide rail 311 by the first platform driving unit 310 and is arranged at the panel element holding position Q1 or the panel element bonding position Q2. During this movement, the slider 102 provided on the first platform 100 slides along the guide rail 311. The second platform driving unit 320 is not limited to this, but is constituted by a piston cylinder device 321 and an air circuit 322 driving the same. The piston-cylinder device 321 is a double-acting type. The cylinder portion 321a is arranged at a fixed position, and the piston rod 321b 149 is suitable for the Chinese country (CNSW specification_ (21〇X 297 公 爱) " ~ ~ I ----- ----- II · II I ---- ^ ------- II (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____B7____. _ V. Description of the invention (, 〇 /)) Linked with the second platform 200. The air circuit 322 includes a compressed air source 322a, a four-way two-position spring-biased solenoid valve 322b, a three-way two-position spring-biased solenoid valve 322c, a pressure regulating valve 322d, 322e, a check valve 322f, and 322g: a check valve A piston controller 322h and an on-off solenoid valve 322i constituted by a parallel circuit of a throttle valve. The pressure adjusting valve 322d supplies the compressed air at the pressure P1 and the pressure adjusting valve 322e supplies the compressed air at the pressure P2 (> P1) to the piston cylinder device 321, respectively. The state shown in the figure shows that the solenoids 圏 of all the solenoid valves are disconnected, the piston rod 321 is retracted into the cylinder barrel portion 321a, and the second stage 200 is raised. In this state, the electromagnetic line of the four-way valve 322b is turned on, and the on-off valve 3221 is turned on and closed. Flow to the cylinder head side of the piston cylinder device 321, under pressure P1, at a speed controlled by the piston controller 322h, the piston rod 321b protrudes, and the second platform 200 is driven down by the first pressure of the pressure P1. Here, as soon as the electromagnetic coil of the three-way valve 322c is turned on, compressed air is supplied through the pressure regulating valve 322e. Under the pressure P2 (> P1), the piston rod 321b and the second platform 200 are downward, and the pressure P2 (> P1) A second pressure drive is performed. Further after this state, as soon as the solenoid coils of all the solenoid valves are turned off, the valve 322i is opened, the piston rod 321b and the second platform 200 are raised, and the state shown in the figure is restored. The panel manufacturing device shown in Figure 30 is equipped with two panel elements cl, c2 150. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public love). ------------ -------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ______ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (\ ^) Use two before bonding The mutual alignment device 400 of the panel elements where the panel elements cl, c2 are aligned with each other. The alignment device 400 includes two cameras 410 (here, CCD cameras), an X-Y-0 drive device 420, and a control unit 430. The state in which the panel elements cl and C2 are aligned with each other when viewed from above is similar to that in FIG. 7. The first stage 100 and the alignment device 400 are equal to those shown in FIG. 7 and are not shown. As shown in FIG. 7, in each panel element cl, c2, outside of the display area of the panel element, marks ml and m2 of pre-aligned positions are formed, and the alignment marks form a cross-shaped pattern on the panel element. The diagonal end region, but not limited to this, can be any pattern where the panel elements can be aligned with each other, and, if it is outside the display region, it can be formed at any position. This alignment mark can be formed by printing or the like. When the electrodes of the panel element are formed, a mark electrode is provided outside the display area, and the voltage is applied to the mark electrode for lighting. Here, the alignment marks ml and m2 are printed on the panel elements cl and c2, respectively. The CCD camera 410 shown in FIG. 30 is connected to the control unit 430, and the pre-formed marks ml and m2 of each panel element cl, c2 can be observed, and this mark information is sent to the control unit 430. The X-Y-0 driving device 420 includes a panel element holding arm 421 and an X-Y-β driving section 422. The panel element holding arm 421 is connected to the driving portion X-Υ-0 direction movable portion, and can hold and hold the panel element c2 by its front end portion 421a. The XY-0 driving unit 422 is connected to the control unit 430, so that the panel element holding arm 421 and the panel element c2 held thereon can be adsorbed and held on the 1st 151 in advance. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 mm) ---------- Order--I ------, (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ---- 一 ——___ B7_— _________ V. Description of the Invention (The surface of the panel element cl of the platform 100 is moved in a predetermined direction (X direction in the drawing) and its vertical direction (the y direction in the drawing), and at the same time around the axis perpendicular to the χ-γ plane (Q direction in the figure). According to the instruction of the control unit 430, the panel element c2 can be moved on the panel element C1 held on the first platform 100. As described above, the control unit 430 is connected to the CCD camera 410, X -Υ-Θ drive device 420 processes the mark information of the alignment marks ml, m2 from the camera 410 as position information, and controls the operation of the XY-Θ drive device 420 based on the position information, and the two panel elements cl, c2 The alignment marks ml and m2 are aligned and aligned. The control unit 430 uses a substrate Alignment method for image processing of alignment positions of panels and the like. '! Fuyu is equipped with a venting device 500 for panel manufacturing equipment. In order to surely degas from the two panel elements cl and c2, the two panel elements cl and c2 are bonded together. Thereafter, the pressure is reduced from between the first and second platforms 100 and 200. The exhaust device 500 includes a ring member 510, an air suction pipe 500, a flexible pipe 530, and a vacuum pump 540. The ring member 510 is elastically deformable for air sealing. The ring member is close to each other by the first and second platforms 100 and 200, sandwiched between the two platforms, and surrounds the panel elements cl, c2 between the two platforms together with the shown platform. It is used to exhaust and reduce pressure. Airtight chamber. Here, the ring member 510 is made of rubber and is provided on the suction table 101 of the first platform 100. The air suction pipe 520 and the ring member 510 provided on the first platform 100 and the holding area of the panel element cl. The through hole is fitted and connected to one end of the flexible tube 530. The other end of the tube 530 is connected to the vacuum pump 540. With this, 152 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)- ------------------- Order --I ------. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 472223 A7 ___B7_ 5. Description of the invention (β): It can decompress and exhaust the airtight interior of the first and second platforms 100 and 200 and the ring member 510. In addition, this panel manufacturing equipment can be provided with an air-tight air-tight chamber 600 as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 30. The air-tight chamber 600 surrounds the first and second platforms 100 and 200 and each device. The panel manufacturing apparatus does not include the airtight chamber 600. This airtight chamber 600 will be described later. Next, while referring to FIGS. 31 and 32, an example of manufacturing a reflective liquid crystal display panel of the type shown in FIG. 1 with this device will be described. 31__ is used to explain the manufacturing of the panel manufacturing device shown in FIG. 30. A part of a manufacturing process example of a liquid crystal display panel is shown in FIG. 32 to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the subsequent steps from FIG. 31 to FIG. In addition, for the sake of simplification, FIGS. 31 and 32 are omitted in some of the components. When the liquid crystal display panel A shown in FIG. 1 is manufactured, each of the R, G, and B panel elements that performs red display, green display, and blue display is manufactured as one panel element. First, use any one of R, G, and B panel elements (here, R panel elements, as a panel element (hereinafter referred to as the first panel element) cl, and use a panel element (here, G panel) attached to this panel element. Element) as another panel element (hereinafter referred to as the second panel element) c2, by the steps 元件 ~ 贴 shown in FIG. 31 and the steps ⑸ ~ ⑻ shown in FIG. 32, the two-panel element bonding mouth, that is, ⑴ On at least one side of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 to be bonded to each other. Here, the aforementioned 153 paper sheet is provided on the first panel element cl (R panel element). The paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4. Specifications (210 X 297 mm). ------------- -------- Order ---------- 2 Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page} 472223 A7 ______B7_____ V. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The opposite surface of one side of the (, s \) light absorbing layer BK is pre-adhered to a double-sided adhesive NN with a surface covered with a tearable protective sheet NN1. Moreover, although double-sided adhesive is used here, it is not limited to this. It can also be an adhesive sheet with a surface covered with a removable protective sheet. In any case, the adhesive material can be applied to the panel element surface by hand, or the adhesive material coating device can be applied. The setting method of the adhesive material may be any method without hindrance. The step of providing this adhesive material is performed before the first crimping step. If it is performed before the first crimping step, it can be performed at any stage without hindrance. The first panel element cl provided with the double-sided adhesive NN is positioned on the first stage 100 with the light absorbing layer BK facing downward, and the panel element holding cl 110 is used to adsorb the panel element f cl on the adsorption table 101 of the platform 100. (2) The second panel element c2 (G panel element) is placed on the first panel element cl, and the two panel elements cl, C2 are aligned with each other. This alignment is performed as before. That is, the panel element c2 placed on the panel element cl is held at the front end portion 421a of the temporary alignment device 400, and in this state, the alignment marks ml, c of the two panel elements cl, C2 are observed with the CCD camera 410 on one side. m2, while moving the second panel element c2 by the XY-0 driving device 420, so that the alignment marks ml, m2 of the two panel elements cl, c2 are the same. This alignment operation is image-processed by using the marker information detected by the camera 410 as position information, and based on the position information, the X-Z-0 drive device 420 is automatically controlled to perform. Once the alignment process is completed, the angle panel element c2 is placed on the panel element cl. The alignment of the X-Z-0 driving device 420 can be performed manually by operating the X-Z-0 driving device 420. In addition, the second platform used to hold the second panel element c2 154 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulation (210 X 297 mm). ------------ '— — — III — ^------- «(Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ___ B7____ 5. Description of the invention ( , 〆) 200 may also include X-Υ-0 drive. At this time, after holding the panel element c2 on the platform 200, the panel element 2 can be aligned in position by driving along X-Υ-Θ. It is also possible not to support the X- 不 -θ drive device, while visually inspecting or observing the alignment marks ml, m2 of the two panel elements cl, C2, while moving the second panel element C2 by hand, so that The panel elements cl, c2 are aligned with the marks ml, m2. ⑶ Article. Once the alignment between 1 and the second panel element cl, C2 is completed, that is, as described above, the panel element holding arm 421 of the X-Υ-0 driving device 420 that holds the second panel element C2 lowers the panel element C2 and is placed on the panel On the component cl, however, the first platform driving unit 310 of the platform driving device 300 is then used to release the first platform 100 below the second platform 200 (position Q2 in FIG. 30) to make the first and second platforms The panel elements cl and C2 face each other. Next, the second platform driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300 is used to lower the second platform 200, and the elastic pad 220 of the platform 200 contacts the second panel element c2, and the second panel element is evacuated by the panel element holding device 210. c2 attracts and holds the convex curved surface 220a of the elastic pad 220. Further, the second stage driving unit 320 is used to raise the second stage 200 to which the second panel element c2 is adsorbed and wait. (4) The removable protective sheet NN is removed from the double-sided adhesive on the first panel element ci attached to the first platform 100, and the adhesive material is exposed. (5) Driven by the first pressure of the pressure P1 applied by the second platform driving section 320 of the platform driver 300, the second platform is lowered so that the first and second platforms 100 and 200 hold the panel elements cl and C2 facing each other. Yes, in other words, the panel components cl, c2 held on these platforms 100, 200 are to be exchanged with each other 155 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------ -------------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____B7_ _ V. Description of the invention (Λ-]) The abutting surfaces are relatively close to each other. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) (6) Under the predetermined pressure applied by the second platform driving section 320 of the platform driver 300, the convex surface 220a of the elastic pad 220 is used to initially make the two panel components cl , The first part of c2 (the central part in this example) touches each other. At this time, the second stage 200 comes into contact with the rubber ring member 510 to form an airtight chamber for exhausting and decompressing. Shortly after the airtight chamber D is formed, the operation of the vacuum pump 540 is started, and the air of the airtight chamber D is sucked out by the vacuum pump 540, so that the airtight chamber D becomes a predetermined pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure (herein, 20Pa to 30Pa). Also after the start of step (6), the second platform 200 is then lowered, while the elastic pads 220 having convex curved surfaces on each side are elastically compressed and deformed, while degassing from the two components, and expanding the two panel components cl, c2 from the aforementioned first contact portions Crimp each other. In this way, in order to prevent the positional displacement of the two panel elements cl and c2 and to degas from the two panel parts cl and c2, in order to prevent wrinkles and the like from occurring on the panel element, expand the pressure-bonding part and fix the two panels. The elements cl and c2 are temporarily bonded to a part or substantially the whole of the two panel elements cl and c2. Although the two panel components cl, c2 can be fully crimped to each other at this stage, the two panel components cl, c2 are not necessarily crimped to each other at this stage. (7) and ⑻ After step (6), the pressure in the airtight chamber D is maintained at a low pressure, and it is driven by the second pressure of the pressure P2 (> P1) applied by the second platform driving section 320 to further squeeze The second platform 200 applies a certain second pressure P2 'which is greater than the first pressure P1' to fully crimp the two panel components cl, c2 to each other, and the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) _ 472223 A7 _B7__ 5. Description of the invention (Λίν) The two platforms 100 and 200 are clamped, and the two panel components cl and C2 are formally attached. Here, the second pressing force is applied at a predetermined time. Under a certain second pressure, the two panel members cl, c2 are crimped to each other, and the two panel members cl, c2 are fully crimped to each other by the elastic compression deformation of the convex curved surface 220a of the elastic pad 220. Therefore, the R panel element and the G panel element are firmly attached. In addition, the bonding of the two panel components ends, the operation of the vacuum pump 540 and the vacuum of the panel component holding device 210 are stopped, the second platform 200 rises back to the original position, and the first platform 100 still holds the bonded panel components. Go to the initial position Q1. If this first pressure is used, the second pressure is greater than the second pressure, which can prevent the position of the two panel elements cl and c2 from shifting and start to be bonded. Ί The last two panel elements are aligned with each other with high accuracy. Firmly fit the two panel elements cl, c2. Secondly, the panel element bonded with the R panel element and the G panel element thus obtained is regarded as the first panel element cl, and the next B panel element to be bonded is regarded as the second panel element c2, and the foregoing steps are repeated ( 1) to (8), attach the next B panel component to the already attached panel component. And since the first platform 100 holding the attached panel element is returned to the position Q1, a part of step (1) can be performed. Thus, a display panel A in which R panel elements, G panel elements, and B panel elements are laminated is obtained. Fig. 33 shows another example of a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the liquid crystal display panel A shown in Fig. 1. The panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 33 is provided with the second platform 200 ′ 157 in addition to the exhaust device 500 of the first platform 100 in the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 30. This paper is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) · I I I I II— ^ OJ · 111111 I I _ 472223 A7! ----- B7 _ 5. Description of the invention (¥) to replace the second platform 200. Other points are the same as those of the device in Fig. 30, and components with the same structure and function are marked with the same reference symbols. The following is a description of the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 33, focusing on points different from the apparatus shown in FIG. 30. The panel manufacturing apparatus of FIG. 33 includes a first stage 100 for holding one panel element cl, a second stage 200 'for holding another panel element C2, and first and second stages 100, 200. Keep the panel components facing each other and relatively close to the deviating platform driving device 300. In this panel manufacturing apparatus, the second stage 200 'is provided with an elastic pad 220' provided with a panel element holding surface 220a ', and at the same time, the panel element holding surface 220a' is a predetermined convex surface with a curvature, referring to Figs. 34 and 35, As described above, when the platform driving device 300 faces and is relatively close to the first and second platforms 100 and 200, the panel element cl held on the first platform 100 and the second platform 200 are held. The panel elements C2 are crimped to each other under a first pressure, and further crimped under a second constant pressure that is greater than the first pressure, thereby laminating the panel elements to manufacture a display panel. The second stage 200 'includes a second suction stage 20' and a panel element holding device 210 'for holding the panel element. The second suction stage 20Γ is made of a rigid material, and a plurality of suction holes 201a 'for sucking the panel element are provided at a predetermined interval in a region where the panel element c2 is held. In addition to the suction hole 201a ', the panel element holding device 210' includes an exhaust chamber 211, a flexible tube 212, and an exhaust device 213. The exhaust device 213 is connected to one end of the tube 212 and the other end of the tube 212, respectively. Department connected to the exhaust 158 -------------------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 _______B7______ 5. Description of the invention (, β) The chamber 21Γ 'exhaust chamber 21Γ is connected to the suction table 201a of the adsorption table 20Γ. Therefore, By the operation of the exhaust device 213, air is exhausted from the suction hole 201a 'through the exhaust chamber 211' and the tube 212. As described above, the second platform 200 'is provided with the elastic element 220' provided with the panel element holding surface 220a '. The elastic pad 220 'is disposed on the opposite side of the side where the exhaust chamber 211' is provided on the second adsorption table 20 '. Here, the elastic pad 220' is made of the same material as the elastic pad 220 of the manufacturing apparatus of FIG. It is composed of a foamed elastic rubber foam, and is used for holding the panel element c2 on the convex curved surface 220a 'by vacuuming. Hole 220b '. This fine hole 220b' is closed by elastic compression deformation. The panel element holding surface 220a 'is a convex surface with a predetermined curvature that gradually decreases from the end portion 220c to the other end portion 220d' ( This is a convex curved surface with a radius of curvature of 4000 legs to 5000 mm), and the panel component c2 can be held along this curved surface. By using this convex curved surface, the two panel components cl, c2 are first crimped to each other under the first pressure. The two panel elements cl, c2 are brought into contact with each other at one end, and the mutually crimped portion is gradually enlarged from the initial contact portion toward the other end. The elastic pad 200 'is crimped to each other in the crimping step. At this time, by compressing the pad, the pores for inhalation are closed, whereby the portion where the panel element c2 held on the elastic pad 220 'is pressed against another panel element cl can be smoothly adhered to the two panel elements. cl, c2. In addition, in order to prevent the panel elements from being damaged, the two panel elements cl, c2 are further pressed against each other without being shifted in position. Since the second panel 159, the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 applies. Grid (210 X 297 mm) · -------------------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling (This page) 472223 A7 ______B7_____ V. Description of the invention (4) Smooth degassing between the components cl and C2, which does not prevent mutual pressure bonding for formal bonding. Here, the elastic pad 220 'has an elastic constant of 70kg f / cm2. ~ 120kg f / cm2 elastomer composition. In addition, this panel manufacturing apparatus includes an airtight chamber 600 having airtightness, and an exhausting device that omits illustration of decompressing the exhaust inside the chamber. The airtight chamber 600 surrounds the first and second platforms 100 and 200 'and each device. In addition, although FIG. 33 shows that the air pressure circuit 322, the exhaust devices 113, 213, and the like are located in the airtight chamber 600, in reality, it is inappropriate to arrange in such an airtight chamber and install it outside the airtight chamber. Next, referring to Figs. 34 and 35, an example of manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by this device will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining a part (1) to (4) of a process example for manufacturing a liquid crystal display panel by the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIG. 33, and FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining steps shown in FIG. 34 Diagrams of subsequent steps (5) to (7). In addition, for the sake of simplicity, the illustration of some components is omitted in FIGS. 34 and 35. When manufacturing the reflective liquid crystal display panel A shown in Fig. 1, each of the R, G, and B panel elements for red display, green display, and blue display is manufactured. First, use any one of the R, G, and B panel elements (here, the R panel element) as a panel element (hereinafter referred to as the first panel element), and use the panel element (here, the G panel) attached to the panel element. Element) as another panel element (hereinafter referred to as the second panel element), the two panel elements are bonded together through steps (1) to ⑷ shown in FIG. 34 and steps (5) to (7) shown in FIG. 35. . That is, 160 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm). --- I -------- 褒 -------- Order ---------. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _______B7____ 5. Description of the invention (β) (1) At least one side of the first and second panel components cl, c2 to be attached to each other, here The first panel element cl (R panel element) is not provided with one surface on the BK side of the light absorbing layer, and is double-sidedly adhered with a removable protective sheet NN1 (or an adhesive sheet) NN in advance. The first panel element cl provided with the double-sided adhesive NN is positioned on the first platform 100 with the light absorbing layer BK underneath, and the panel element cl is adsorbed on the adsorption table 101 of the platform 100 by the panel element holding device 110. (2) The second panel element c2 (G panel element) is placed on the first panel element cl, and the two panel elements cl, c2 are aligned with each other. This alignment is the same as step (2) of FIG. 31 of the device of FIG. 30, and its explanation is omitted here. (3) Once the alignment of the first and second panel elements cl, c2 is completed, the panel element holding arm 421 of the XY- (9 driver 420 holding the second panel element c2) lowers the panel element c2, and then loads it On the panel element cl, however, the first platform driving unit 310 of the platform driving device 300 is used to move the first platform 100 below the second platform 200 '(the position Q2' in FIG. 33, so that the first and the first The panel elements cl and c2 of the two platforms keep facing each other. Secondly, the second platform driving part 320 of the platform driving device 300 lowers the second platform 200 ', and the pad 220' of the platform 200 'contacts the second panel element c2. The second panel element is attracted by the vacuum of the panel element holding device 210 '. c2 is attracted and held on the convex curved surface 220a 'of the elastic pad 220', and the second platform driving portion 320 is further used to attract the second platform 200 'of the second panel element c2 to rise and wait. (4) Double-sided adhesive 161 self-adhesive on the first panel element cl of the first platform 100 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) I -------- ------- ----· 1 --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 472223 A7 ___ B7___ V. Description of the invention (1 ^) Glue NN removal The protective sheet NN1 can be removed to expose the adhesive material. (5) The second platform is driven to be lowered by the first pressure of the pressure P1 applied by the second platform driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300, so that the first and second platforms 100 and 200 'hold the panel elements cl and c2 in phase relation. Face, in other words, make the panel elements cl, c2 held on these platforms 100, 200 'to face each other and be relatively close to each other. At this time, the decompression operation of the exhaust device for exhausting the inside of the airtight chamber 600 is started, so that the airtight chamber 600 becomes a predetermined pressure lower than the atmospheric pressure (herein, 20 Pa to 30 Pa). In addition, if the pressure reduction inside the airtight chamber 600 is performed before step (6), it can be performed at any stage without hindrance. (6) Under the predetermined pressure P1 applied by the second platform driving unit 320 of the platform driving device 300, the convex surface 220a 'of the elastic pad 220' is used to initially make the two panel elements Cl, c2-part (in this example) (Ends), the rubber parts of the elastic pads 220 'having convex curved surfaces are elastically compressed and deformed while degassing, and the mutually crimped parts are gradually enlarged from the initial contact parts toward the other ends. As described above, in order to prevent one of the two panel elements cl, c2 from being displaced, and to degas from the two panel elements cl, c2, in order to prevent the panel elements from being embossed, etc., the pressure-bonding portion is enlarged to fix the two panels. The components cl and c2 are temporarily or partially bonded to the two panel components cl and c2. 〇) The pressure inside the air pressure chamber 600 is maintained at a low pressure, and the second platform 200 'is driven by the second pressure driven by the pressure P2 (> P1) applied by the second platform driving unit 320, and the second platform 200' is pressed more than the first pressure A certain second pressure of P1 'makes the two panel components cl, c2 fully crimped to each other, and the two platforms 100 162 This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS> A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----- --------------- Order --------- line '(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ____B7_ V. Description of the invention (, b .), 200 'clamped, formally attached the two panel elements cl, C2. Therefore, the R panel element and the G panel element are firmly attached. If this first pressure P1 is used, the second pressure is larger than the second pressure, That is, one side of the two panel elements cl, c2 can be prevented from being shifted from one another, and finally, the two panel elements can be aligned with each other with high accuracy, and the two panel elements can be firmly attached. The operation of the pressure exhaust device and the vacuum suction of the panel element holding device 210 'are stopped, and the second platform 200' rises back to the original Position, the first platform 100 is the original panel component that has been bonded and returns to the original position Q1. Second, the panel component with the R panel component and the G panel component thus obtained is considered as the first panel component cl, and the second A panel B to be bonded is regarded as the second panel component c2, and the steps (1) to (7) described above are repeated, and the next panel B component is bonded to the panel component that has already been bonded. Therefore, obtain R panel element, G panel element, and B panel element are laminated display panel A. Moreover, the panel manufacturing apparatus shown in FIGS. 30 and 33 uses air pressure to drive the platform of the second platform driving unit 320, but oil can also be used. Pressure driving and other mechanisms. For example, an eccentric cam mechanism and other mechanisms can be used as the second platform driving unit. In the panel manufacturing device shown in FIG. 30, an exhaust device can be replaced or an internal device can be connected to the device. The air-tight chamber 600 having the airtightness and an exhaust device for decompressing the exhaust gas inside the room are provided to 'exhaust' the exhaust pressure from the first and second platforms 100 and 200. The panel shown in FIG. 30 Airtight chamber 60 is also provided in the manufacturing device In the case of 0, the figure shows that the exhaust device 163 paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) · ----------------- --- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 __ B7_____ V. Description of the invention (W) 113, 213, air circuit 322 and vacuum pump 540, etc. Inside the closed room 600, but 'actually, it is located outside the airtight room 600. [F] Adhesive sheet bonding method and board bonding method related to Figures 36 to 44 According to the adhesive sheet bonding method and board bonding method described here, the incorporation of air bubbles can be prevented, and the adhesive sheet to board can be stuck. Lamination, board, etc. are bonded by adhesive sheet. Hereinafter, the first and second embodiments of the lamination in this case will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 44. (First Embodiment) Although the following embodiments describe specific examples of bonding a liquid crystal cell p polarizing plate via an adhesive sheet in a liquid crystal display element, the present invention is applicable to all cases where an adhesive sheet is used to bond two plates. Fig. 36 is a diagram illustrating a cross-section of a liquid crystal display element in which a polarizing plate is mounted on a liquid crystal cell by using the panel compensating method of the first embodiment. The liquid crystal display element 10 includes a lower substrate formed of a transparent material (such as glass), an upper substrate 14 made of the same transparent material, and a liquid crystal 16 sandwiched between the lower substrate 12 and the upper substrate 14. Although '' is not shown, appropriate electrodes are arranged on the opposite surfaces of the lower substrate 12 and the upper substrate 14. The adhesion of the lower substrate 12 and the upper substrate 14 is achieved by an adhesive material continuously arranged along the periphery of the two substrates. This adhesive material 18 serves as a sealing member, and the liquid crystal 16 is enclosed in the liquid crystal display element 10. The liquid crystal 16 includes a spherical spacer 20 of a certain size (for example, an outer diameter of 5 # m (micrometers). By this, the spacer 20 keeps the distance between the lower substrate 12 and the upper substrate 14 to a certain level. The liquid crystal cell will be described below. The overall structure of the paper. 164 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm), --11 --------- · --- I 丨-丨 ----- ----. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _B7_____ V. Description of the invention (1 Ό ^ / _% Adhesive sheet 24 with a plurality of fine through holes adheres and fixes the polarizing plate 26 to the upper substrate Η. Such as As shown in FIG. 37, the adhesive sheet 24 usually has separators 27, 28 on its two sides before use, and the through-hole 22 is generally attached to the separator 27 by, for example, an excimer laser, a punch, etc. In the 28 state, the pattern hole opened on the adhesive sheet 24. In order to make the hole 22 inconspicuous, the diameter of the hole 22 is preferably 50 μm or less, preferably 30 μm, and, as described later, in order to pass through the hole 22 In order to prevent the bubbles 22 from being clogged frequently, the size should be at least 5 ^ m or more. Further, the number density of the through holes 22 is preferably 10 pieces / cm2 or more. If the number f is below 10 pieces / cm2, That is, the air bubbles cannot be sufficiently eliminated through the through hole 22. The thickness of the adhesive sheet 24 is preferably about 5 μm to 100 μm. If it is less than 5 μm, it is obvious that foreign matter is mixed in. If it is more than 100 // m, it is likely to cause frequent blockage. Figure 38 shows the adhesive used to attach the adhesive sheet 24 to the liquid. Sectional view of the attachment device of the unit 21. This attachment device 29 has a table 30 for arranging the liquid crystal cell 21, and a pressure roller 32 disposed above the table 30 and having a rotation axis parallel to the surface of the table 30. This The stage 30 can slide in the direction of the arrow 34 in the figure. In order to fix the liquid crystal cell 21 by negative pressure, the stage 30 has a plurality of adsorption holes 36 on the surface on which the liquid crystal cell 21 is arranged, and all of these adsorption holes 36 communicate with the inside of the stage 30 It is further connected to the vacuum pump 40 0 through the solenoid valve 38 0. One side of the adhesive sheet 24 (the left end of the figure) is configured to move 165. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) III 1 ---- II-— — — — I-- »— — 1 —-III. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 472223 A7 ____ B7__ V. Description of the invention (β) The member 42 is lifted and held. As a result, as described later, the pressure is applied on the adhesive sheet% SA pressure roller 32. At a position χ directly in front of the liquid crystal cell 21 side, ^ 24 is adhered to the liquid crystal cell 21 or a predetermined angle. This angle can be any angle in the range of 0 to 18 °. In order to prevent the adhesive sheet 24 from being loosened, the holding member 42 moderately stretches the one side of the adhesive sheet. Next, a description will be given of a method of attaching the adhesive sheet 24 (advance attaching step 26) to the liquid crystal cell 21. First, in FIG. 37, the spacer 27 provided on the adhesive sheet 24 is peeled off. Next, as shown in Fig. 38, the solenoid valve 38 and the liquid crystal cell 21 are fixed on the stage 30 by opening the solenoid valve 38. With the adhesive surface of the adhesive sheet 24 below, the other side (the left end in the figure) of the adhesive sheet 24 is overlapped with the other side of the soft liquid crystal cell 21. Next, the table 30 is slid in the direction of the arrow 34 while the adhesive sheet 24 is bent while the above-mentioned side of the adhesive sheet 24 (and the separator 38) is lifted. At this time, the pressure roller 32 is rotated in the direction of the arrow 44 in the figure while the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 24 presses the liquid crystal cell 21, and the entire pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 24 is superposed on the liquid crystal cell 21. Moreover, instead of moving the table 30 relative to the roller 32 ', the position of the table 30 can be fixed so that the pressure roller 32 can be moved in the opposite direction of the arrow 34 while rotating, or both the table 30 and the roller 32 can be moved in opposite directions. In the case where the through-hole 22 is not provided in the adhesive sheet 24 as shown in FIG. 39, when the adhesive sheet 24 is attached to the liquid crystal cell 21 as shown in FIG. 39, most of the adhesive sheet 24 is bent due to the bending of the adhesive sheet 24. Air bubbles 46 are introduced into the interface between the adhesive sheet 24 and the liquid crystal cell 21. In contrast, in this example, even if the bubble is incorporated into the interface between the adhesive sheet 24 and the liquid crystal cell 21, the bubble can escape from the through hole 22 by pushing the adhesive sheet 24 with the pressure roller 32 (and even if it is not pressurized) , Also 166 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ------------- Line 472223 A7 ________SI___ ___ V. Description of the invention (state) When the adhesive sheet overlaps the liquid crystal cell 21, at least some bubbles can escape from the through hole 22). Further, by increasing the pressure, the pores 22 'can be crushed so as to be inconspicuous. Preferably, the volume of the hole 22 is reduced by more than 50% by the pressure applied by the roller 32. If the volume reduction rate of the hole 22 is less than 50%, the original diameter of the hole 22 is more than 30 # m and the larger case will make the hole 22 after pressurization impossible to be sufficiently small and can be visually recognized, so it is not good. . After the adhesive sheet 24 is attached to the liquid crystal cell 21, the separator 28 is removed from the adhesive sheet 24, and then, by the same method as, for example, attaching the adhesive sheet 24 to the liquid crystal cell 21 (in this case, the polarizing plate 26 Thin film substrate). While pressing by a roller, the polarizing plate 26 (Fig. 36) is attached to the adhesive sheet 24 and. Fig. 40 shows a modification of the second embodiment. Specifically, a small hole is opened in the adhesive sheet 24 to which only the separator is attached on one side (not shown), and the cylindrical core 48 is rolled into a cylindrical shape with the adhesive surface on the outside (the adhesive sheet 24 is attached). In the state of the liquid crystal panel 21, the separator is located on the adhesive sheet 24.) Furthermore, the roller is transferred to the liquid crystal cell 21, and the adhesive sheet 24 is adhered to the liquid crystal cell 21. Since the separator is attached to one side, this structure has the effect of reducing waste. Since the adhesive sheet 24 itself is cylindrical, there is no need to prepare a separate roller during bonding. Furthermore, since the liquid crystal cell 21 is not in contact with the adhesive sheet 24 immediately before the position (the 38th position X) as described in the above embodiment, there is no need to hold the one end of the adhesive sheet 24 by the holding member 42 (FIG. 38). ). Specific examples and comparative examples of the first embodiment are listed below. 167 1 ^ scale applies Chinese National Standard (0NS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) '" " "-III 1— I ------- --- I 1 III »II I- -11_ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 _ B7___ V. Description of the invention (/) (Example) Prepare the display area (the area enclosed by the liquid crystal 16 by the adhesive material 18 in Figure 36) A 200mm × 300mm liquid crystal cell and a double-sided tape (made by Sekisui Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) having the same shape as the liquid crystal cell. This tape is made of 38 / zm and 25 // m PET separators to hold both sides of an acrylic adhesive with a thickness of 25 / zm. Using an excimer laser over the entire surface of the tape, grid-shaped pores with a diameter (L1) of 30 / zm and a space (L2) of 300 // m were opened (see Figure 37). Secondly, after peeling off the separator on one side of the tape, an adhesive layer is arranged on the liquid crystal sheet which is vacuum-adsorbed on the stage so that it is below, and one side of the tape (the side end portion in Fig. 38) is fixed to the liquid crystal cell. Next, "the other side (the left end portion in Fig. 38) is stretched with equal tension on one side" to bend the tape, and the roller is rotated while self-fixing, and the adhesive sheet is attached to the liquid crystal cell. The angle between the adhesive sheet and the liquid crystal cell at a position (position X in Fig. 38) immediately before the roller was pressed against the adhesive sheet was maintained at an angle of 20 °. Make the roller pressure about 2. 0X 104 N / m2. Finally, after removing the separator on the upper side of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, the film-shaped polarizing plate was bonded while pressing with a roller. As a result of such bonding, no air bubbles remained between the liquid crystal cell and the adhesive sheet. In addition, the liquid crystal display element fabricated in this way had no perforations and had good display performance. [Example 2] Instead of an excimer laser, use a punching machine to open a grid-like fine hole with a diameter (L1) of 50 // m and an interval (L2) of 300 / im on the same double-sided tape as in the example. (Refer to Figure 37). As in Example 1, the paper size of the adhesive sheet 168 applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). ------ 1 ----- 1 I 丨 1 I 1 1 Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 B7 — --- · · . . . . . 丨 ___ 丨 ·-. . . . . . _ 5. Description of the invention (舢) It is attached to the liquid crystal cell. Thereafter, in order to crush the hole and make it inconspicuous ’, apply about 1. 0X 1 05 N / m2 pressure. Full pressure is applied to the adhesive sheet by rollers on one side. Further, as in Example 1, the separator 'on the upper side of the adhesive sheet was peeled off and the polarizing plate was bonded. Since the hole crushing becomes smaller, the thus-produced liquid crystal display element cannot visually recognize the holes and has good display performance. (Comparative Example 1) Although the liquid crystal display element was produced almost as in the example, the roller was pressed against the adhesive sheet. The thus-produced liquid crystal display element could visually recognize holes, and the display performance was poor. (Second embodiment) The second embodiment of the method of plate bonding is the entire groove along the potential of the 24 plain surface with a crossbow β star hole, so that bubbles from then on. . Violators. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), a plurality of grooves 50 are provided from one side (the end portion on the upper side of the drawing) to the other side (the end portion on the lower side of the drawing) in a predetermined direction. The shape of the groove 50 is not limited to FIG. 41 (a), and may be of any shape as described later. The shape of the groove 50 may be a structure that allows bubbles to escape along the groove. 41 (b) shows a grid pattern. The cross section of the groove 50 does not need to be triangular as shown in Figs. 41 (a) and 41 (b), and may be rectangular or the like. For example, in the case where the cross-sectional shape of the groove 50 is triangular, in order to make the groove 50 inconspicuous, the width L3 and the depth L4 (FIG. 41) of the groove 50 are each 50 # m or less, preferably 30 # m, and As described later, in order to fully eliminate the bubbles in the groove 50, the size is at least 5 #m or more. In order to form the groove 50 on the adhesive sheet 24, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) can be applied at least 169 degrees on one side of the strip ~ 1 -----------· IIII 1 II Order --------- · (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) A7 ^ __ B7_____ V. Description of the invention (々Ί) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page ) A roller 54 (shown in FIG. 41 (b)) provided with a protruding portion 52 having a desired shape as shown in FIG. 42 is rotated on the outer peripheral surface of the adhesive sheet 24 of the partition 27 (FIG. 37) to form a grid shape. In this case, rotate the rollers twice in the direction orthogonal to each other). In addition, according to the material of the spacer 27, a groove 20 may be formed on the adhesive sheet 24 to which the spacer 27 is attached. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of a device for temporarily and fully adhering the adhesive sheet 24 to the liquid crystal cell 21. This attachment device 56 has a lower platform 58 for sucking and fixing the liquid crystal cell 21, and an upper platform 60 parallel to the lower platform 58 and arranged above the lower platform 58 for sucking and fixing the adhesive sheet 24 (and the partition 28). The upper platform 60 is configured to be movable in the direction of the arrow (in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the lower platform 58). The lower platform 58 is similar to the platform 30 in FIG. 38 and has a plurality of suction holes 62. These suction holes 62 are connected to a vacuum pump (not shown) via a solenoid valve (not shown). According to this structure, the upper platform 60 can attract and release the adhesive sheet 24 by opening and closing the solenoid valve. Second, the method of attaching the adhesive sheet 24 (and further the polarizing plate 26) to the liquid crystal cell 21 will be described mainly using FIG. 44. First, the separator 27 provided on one side of the adhesive sheet 24 in FIG. 37 is peeled off, and a plurality of grooves 50 are formed on the adhesive sheet 24 by the method shown in FIG. 42 (step (A) in FIG. 44). These grooves 50 are provided on one side to the other side of the adhesive sheet 24 in the surface surface front-surface direction 'of the step (A) of Fig. 44. Furthermore, using the attachment device 56 (Fig. 43), the surface forming the groove 50 is lowered, and the adhesive sheet 24 is adsorbed on the upper platform 60 '. Thereafter, the upper platform 60 is lowered, and the adhesive sheet 24 is temporarily attached and fixed to the lower platform. 58 of the liquid crystal cell 21 (step (B) in FIG. 44). 170 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm>), 472223 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Next 'After separating the adhesive sheet 24 from the upper platform 60, remove the separator from the adhesive sheet 24' 28 (step (c) in FIG. 44). Secondly, a plurality of grooves are also formed on the surface of the adhesive sheet 24 of the peeling member 28 (step (D) in FIG. 44). These grooves 66 are also along FIG. 44. In the direction of the surface of the paper in step (D), 5 mm is on one side to the other side of the adhesive sheet 24. The polarizing plate 26 is further attached to the adhesive sheet 24 (step (E) in FIG. 44). Finally, by From above the polarizing plate 26, for example, the reinforcing roller 68 is rotated parallel to the groove forming direction, so that the gas ^ is formed from the grooves 50 and 66 above and below the adhesive sheet 24. ,, .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At this time, the pressure applied by the roller 68 is preferably the crushing grooves 50 and 66, so that the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 24 is in close contact with the liquid crystal cell 21 and the polarizing plate 26 (step (F) in Fig. 44). The volume of the grooves 50 and 56 is preferably 50% or more reduced by the pressure of the roller 68. If the volume reduction rate of the tank 50 '66 is less than 50%, it will be in the tank 50 ,. In the case where the bottom width of 66 is larger than 30 / im and is larger, the grooves 50 and 66 after pressing cannot be sufficiently small and can be visually recognized, which is not good. By setting the grooves on both sides of the adhesive sheet 24 in this way, it is not only possible to attach the adhesive ... ·-'The step of applying the sheet 24 to the liquid crystal cell 21 may also be performed without attaching bubbles in the step of attaching the polarizing plate 26, the retardation plate, the touch panel, or the protective sheet to the adhesive sheet 24. When only the groove 50 is provided on one side, pressure can be applied by a roller before the polarizing plate 26 is attached. Specific examples of the second embodiment are listed below. (Example 3) As in Example 1, peel off the separator on one side of the double-sided tape, and make the roller with the protrusion shown in Figure 42 roll twice on the table in the direction perpendicular to each other. China National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulations (21 × X 297) -------------------- Order -------- ^ line- ( (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 ^ ___ B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (M) Form a grid-like groove. The grid-like grooves were prepared with a width (L3) of 10 Vm, a depth (L4) of 5 / zm, and a grid interval (L5) of 300 // m (see FIG. 41 (c)). As in Example 1, with the grooved surface down, an adhesive tape was temporarily attached to the liquid crystal cell. In this state, the separator on the upper side of the adhesive sheet is peeled off, and the adhesive sheet surface on the upper side using a roller with protrusions is also formed into a grid shape to form a groove having the same size as the groove of the lower adhesive sheet surface. Thereafter, as in Example 1, the polarizing plate was attached to the adhesive sheet at a time. Finally, while applying a pressure of about 100 X 105 N / m2, by slowly rotating the roller on the polarizing plate, the groove of the adhesive sheet was crushed, so that the adhesive sheet was in close contact with the liquid crystal cell and the polarizing plate. The η% liquid display element produced in this way has no air bubbles and can not see the grooves visually, and has good display performance. Of course, the present invention has been described and illustrated in detail, but it is obvious that it is only for illustration and should not be regarded as limiting. The spirit and scope of the present invention are only defined by the scope of the attached patent. Description of component symbols 10 Liquid crystal display element 12 Lower substrate 14 Upper substrate 16 Liquid crystal 18 Adhesive material 20 Separator 21 Liquid crystal cell 172 The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm) --- ----------------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 472223 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (, Ί °) 22 Through hole 24 Adhesive sheet 26 Polarizer 27, 28 Separator 29, 56 Attachment device 30 units 32 Pressurized light 36 Suction hole 38 Solenoid valve 40 Vacuum pump 42, Holding member 50, 66 Slot 58 Lower platform 60 Upper Platforms 62, 64 Suction holes 68 Roller 100 First platform 101 First suction stage 101a, 201a, 424a Suction holes 111, 211, 211, 425, Exhaust chamber 112, 212, 212, 426, flexible tube 530 , 620, 720, 113, 213, 213, 427, Exhaust device 200, 2nd platform 173 -------------------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) (Mm) 472223 A7 V. Description of the invention (...) 200a 'panel element holding surface 201 2nd suction table 201a, 201b, 201a' suction hole 220, 220 'elastic pad 220a, 220a' convex curved surface 220b, 220b, suction Pneumatic fine hole 300 Platform driving device 310 First platform driving unit 310, platform supporting shaft 311 guide rail 311a. . / Rack 313 pinion 210, 320, 2nd platform driving section 320 'rotation driving section 321, 421 2nd platform supporting arm 321 piston cylinder device 322 air circuit 321a cylinder barrel section 321b piston rod 322 rotation driving section 322a shaft 400, 400 ', 500 alignment device 410, 510 Camera 430, 430, 530 Control unit 174 --------------------- Order -------- -Line, (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (〇V) 420 XY- 0 Drive device 422 X-Υ-0 drive unit 423 Panel element holding device 424 Adsorption stage 500 Inter-platform exhaust device 510 Ring member 520 Air suction tube 540 Vacuum pump 600 Central suction hole exhaust device 600, pressure roller 600a ,; Panel element pressing peripheral surface 610 Pressing member 630 Exhaust chamber 640, 740 for central suction hole Open / close solenoid valve 650 Pressure sensor 700 Holder 710 Exhaust part 730 Exhaust chamber 740 for outside suction hole Open and close Valve 800 holding clip 900 gap forming device 910 Panel element support member 920 Clip 930 Wire guide pulley 175 ----------------- 1 II Order -------- (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again for this matter) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 472223 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (ring) 940 Winch 950 Metal wire 1000 Temporary fixing device 1100 Drilling device 1110 Punching machine 1200 Decompression chamber 1300 Exhaust device 176 -------------------- Order --------- I (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page for more details) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)